Wiring Manual | 2008 Automation and Power Distribution

L1 L2 L3

CB

L1 L2 L3 H1 H4

M

T1 T2 T3

M

SmartWire
6 6

SmartWire

-Q1

1.13 1.14

H1

1 H3

H2

4

H4

-Q11

A1 A2

X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC

IN OUT

X1

X2

All brand and product names are trade marks or registered trademarks of the owner concerned

Updated edition 2008, publication date 02/08 © 2008 by Moeller GmbH, Bonn Editor: Heidrun Riege Translator: globaldocs GmbH All the circuits are designed according to our best expertise and have been carefully tested. They serve as practical examples. Moeller GmbH refuses to accept liability for any errors. All rights reserved, including those of the translation. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form (printed, photocopy, microfilm or any other process) or processed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronic systems without the written permission of Moeller GmbH, Bonn, Germany. Subject to alterations without notice. Printed on bleached cellulose, 100 % free from chlorine and acid.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual
chapter The Moeller Wiring Manual Switching, control, visualisation Electronic motor starters and drives Control circuit devices Rotary switches Contactors and relays Motor-protective circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers All about Motors Export to the world market and to North America Standards, formulae, tables Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

0

0-1

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual

0
What's new in this edition? Moeller – Competence and Experience from a Single Source The Moeller Support Portal Online Training Center Electronic Catalogue Moeller Field Service Moeller Darwin technology Moeller power distribution equipment

Page 0-3 0-4 0-5 0-6 0-8 0-9 0-11 0-14

0-2

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual What's new in this edition?
Export to the world market and to North America The way to a safe machine

0

easySafety – Fulfills the highest safety demands. The safety of people and machines must be taken into account for the total lifecycle of a machine/system. For personnel protection safety components such as position switches, light curtains, two-hand control switches or emergency-stop pushbuttons come into use. The safety information is monitored and evaluated by the new easySafety control relay which complies to the highest safety requirements. a section "The way to the safe machine", page 1-10 The target markets of machine and system builders are international. Moeller knows these markets and is a competent partner worldwide in all issues relating to the export of switchgear and power distribution systems. The export of products to North America (USA and Canada) and the special requirements involved are taking on increasing importance. We have streamlined and expanded the existing content for you and collated it in a separate new chapter 9. The remaining content from the previous chapter 9 is now provided in chapter 10. Always up-to-date We make every effort to adapt and update every new edition of the Wiring Manual according to the ever increasing requirements of the markets. The many example circuits in particular are continually being updated by our specialists to the best of their knowledge and carefully tested. They are provided solely as examples from practice. Moeller GmbH does not accept any liability for any errors.

0-3

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller – Competence and Experience from a Single Source

0

www.moeller.net – The Moeller Home Page Moeller offers you a range of products and services that can be optimally combined with one another. Visit our site on the Internet. There you will find everything about Moeller, such as: • Up-to-date information about Moeller products • The addresses of the Moeller sales offices and representatives worldwide • Information about the Moeller Company Group • Publications in the press, specialist press • References • Exhibition dates and events • Technical support in the Moeller Support Portal

www.moeller.net/en/support/ – The Moeller Support Portal You can receive technical support for all Moeller products just by a mouse click. And tips and tricks, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), updates, software modules, PDF downloads, demo programs and much more. You can also subscribe to the Moeller Newsletters.

0-4

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual The Moeller Support Portal
Uncomplicated and quick way of finding the information you need: • PDF Downloads – Catalogues – Manuals and installation instructions – Product information, such as brochures, selection aids, technical essays, declarations of conformity and of course – The Moeller Wiring Manual • Software Downloads – Demo versions – Updates – Software and application modules • Selection aids – Motor starters a section "Selection aids", page 8-3 – Frequency inverters a section "Selection aids", page 2-28 You can also find a link to the Moeller Field Service via the Support Portal (a section "Moeller Field Service", page 0-9). You can send your queries directly to the Technical Support/pre-sales service by e-mail. Simply select the e-mail form that meets your requirements to the -Moeller experts.

0

0-5

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Online Training Center

0

http://trainingscenter.moeller.net

Moeller has now fully developed a web-based information and training platform for its well-known and successful easy control relay as well as the easyHMI multi-function display. This presents fully programmed and documented applications from a wide range of sectors. Comprehensive information on all aspects of the easy and easyHMI is also provided with additional links to more in-depth topics. Tips and tricks are presented in the FAQ area and you can share your experience with over 1,600 easy users in the easy forum (www.easy-forum.net). A full text search facility offers support in finding the information you are looking for.

The online training center is divided into the 6 areas “Products”, “Basics”, “Functions”, “Applications”, “References” and “Software”. The Products area provides: • An overview of the device series and accessories, • mounting instructions, operating manuals and product information for download as PDF files. The Basics area gives you the chance to learn about programming and networking devices at entry level. Special descriptions are provided depending on whether you wish to work with easySoft or with easySoft-CoDeSys.

0-6

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Online Training Center
The Programming section of the Basics area also explains how to use the programming system by means of example projects. The "Networking" section provides examples on networking the devices. The Functions area provides 54 preprogrammed functions with: • a complete function description, • example program that you can load directly onto your easy or test beforehand with easySoft, and if necessary adapt it to your required application, • small Flash animations that illustrate how to create the function in easySoft, • sorted according to device class easy500/700/800 and easyHMI. The Applications area shows typical applications with easy such as temperature controls in greenhouses or stairway lighting controls as well as examples of graphic display applications with easyHMI. These applications are: • “ready to use”: simply load the completed programs onto your easy and put them into operation, • tested and fully documented.

0

The References area shows you that Moeller products are used in a wide range of areas and are in use worldwide. To obtain a short overview of their versatility look at some of the applications for the easy family on the page presented in PDF format. The Software area provides information and downloads for: • the easySoft operating and programming software, • the OPC server, supplied free-of-charge with easySoft • the Labeleditor for the customised labelling of the easyHMI, • Fieldbus interfaces with the necessary device master data, • CAD files for electrical engineering design.

0-7

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Electronic Catalogue

0

The efficient way to detailed product information From detailed product information right up to the enquiry for your products by email or fax from your Moeller product supplier. All this and more you can find in the Electronic Catalogue.

Create a comprehensive data sheet for a product and save it as a PDF document or print it out. In product groups that contain a large number of products, special selection tools are provided in the ranges so that you can identify specifically a few products on the basis of the product features you require. A number of links to additional product information and all aspects of it enable you to ensure optimum use of the product: • Application examples and project design notes, • approvals • installation instructions, • manuals, • software, etc. Choose “Your” Electronic Catalogue on the Internet http://int.catalog.moeller.net/en. The Electronic Catalogue on the Internet is updated regularly.

This gives you fast access to new innovations as well as extensive information on the current Moeller ranges. • • • • Industrial switchgear, Drives, Automation systems, drives, Power distribution systems.

0-8

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller Field Service
Our services for your success. • • • • Helpline Onsite Service Repairs Online Service Further information is available from our website. The Field Service therefore offers appropriate services for circuit-breakers, distribution boards (xEnergy, MODAN, ID2000, other distribution boards etc.). We support you in the inspection and maintenance of the circuit-breakers and low-voltage distribution boards supplied by Moeller, determine the condition of your systems and carry out the necessary work. If required, thermography or network analysis are also carried out with this work. Mounting and commissioning support Contact us if you require fast and competent support in installing and commissioning tasks. Conversions and expansions Whether with controllers, circuit-breakers or other components, we can bring your machines and plants up to the latest state-of-the-art. Thermography Thermography gives us an efficient way of analysing your electrical systems and controls during operation. Network analysis Network analysis provides clear information about the specific state of your networks without the need for lengthy and expensive troubleshooting.

0

Moeller Helpline Break-Down Service You will receive competent and quick telephone assistance in the event of unscheduled machine stops and plant down-times, system faults and device break-downs around the clock. Consulting Service During business hours, you will receive support for commissioning, application queries right through to fault analysis, which can also be carried out by remote diagnosis. Specialists are available in the areas of automation, drives, low-voltage power distribution or switchgear. Moeller Onsite Service Troubleshooting onsite Qualified technicians and specialists can visit you in order to rectify faults quickly and reliably. Inspection and maintenance DIN VDE 0105 part 100 (clause 5.3) requires the recurrent testing of electrical equipment in order to ensure their proper condition. German work safety law A3 stipulates that repeat inspections on fixed electrical systems and equipment must be carried out at least every 4 years by electrical specialists.

0-9

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller Field Service

0

Bus monitoring If required we can inspect the communication networks of your systems with the latest technical equipment. Moeller Repairs Direct exchange In the event of a fault, the direct exchange service for selective Moeller products considerably reduces the downtime of your production plant. Repairs The repair of Moeller products in our Service Center is an inexpensive alternative for fault rectification. Moeller Online Service Online troubleshooting We can provide special assistance if you wish to analyse and rectify faults on products. You can carry out interactive troubleshooting via the Internet with direct access to the Field Service database. FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions There are some questions about our products that our customers very often ask. You can benefit from the answers. You can read frequently asked questions with the corresponding answers on all aspects of automation. Downloads You're at the right place here if you require updates, software, documentation and declarations of conformity. Visit the Moeller Download Center to obtain all the information you require.

Contact • Faults hotline For field service contact your Moeller agent www.moeller.net/address or the Moeller Field Service directly Tel.: +49 (0) 180 522 3822 (de, en) (round the clock) • Consulting service Tel.: +49 (0) 228 602 3640 (Mo. - Fr. 08:00 - 16:00 CET) • Email fieldservice@moeller.net • Internet www.moeller.net/fieldservice

0-10

switching.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller Darwin technology Darwin. contactors. Switching devices are merging together with automation equipment and the conventional control wiring. operating and monitoring. such as between I/O modules and switching devices. Darwin has established a bridge between the automation world and the world of switchgear. is being replaced by a new. Drives. 0 Controlling Protecting HMI Switching Drives The conventional switch cabinet is changing fundamentally. This project covers the entire Moeller product world for the switch cabinet in single evolutionary steps: • • • • • Control. simple connection technology. The technological quantum spring. 0-11 .

This use of remote I/O and fieldbus technology significantly reduces wiring complexity. has remained the same. only the spaces between the control panels is bridged by fieldbus lines. Today sensors and actuators are wired to a remote preprocessing point and from there to the central PLC through a fieldbus. The result was a high wiring complexity. 0-12 . The number of hardwired inputs and outputs however. The control system is distributed over several small control panels located in various positions on the machine.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller Darwin technology 0 Evolution of the control panel Before Today In the past each sensor and actuator was hardwired to an input and output of the main PLC. large control panels and a high potential for wiring errors.

The inputs and outputs are placed exactly where they are required – immediately next to the switching devices. for example. All devices connected with SmartWire Darwin operate as local or remote inputs/outputs of easyControl. Further information a section "Connect.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller Darwin technology Today with SmartWire Tomorrow with SmartWired 0 The current SmartWire technology lets you. connect motor starters directly to the PLC. 0-13 . page 1-43. This intelligent wiring aid reduces both hard wiring and the number of central and remote I/Os as well as removing the potential for wiring errors. SmartWire Darwin will completely replace the control wiring between PLC and switchgear. The system is fully self-configuring. page 5-8 and a section "SmartWire Gateway". don't wire".

The system range xEnergy integrates switching and protective devices. cost-effective system. • the modular enclosure system. time-saving installation. Being optimized for housing Moeller switchgear. Moeller’s xEnergy products are optimized for safe and reliable power distribution. 0-14 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment 0 Low-voltage switchgear systems for infrastructure System range xEnergy xEnergy is a modular system range of power distribution boards designed specifically for infrastructures up to 4000 A. mounting and enclosure systems and control panel components into a coherent. It consists of: • Switching and protective devices. • the control panel complete with planning and calculation tools. the control panel components allow a flexible.

Available from Form 1 to Form 4. • Enclosure protection IP31 or IP55 • Main busbars at the rear up to 4000 A • Main busbars at the top up to 3200 A • All components fitted as TTA • Mains system types TN-C. TN-C-S. outgoers or bus-couplers with circuit-breakers NZM4 or IZM up to 4000 A • Fixed mounted or withdrawable • 3 or 4 pole circuit-breakers • Cable or busbar trunking connection from top or bottom 0-15 . xEnergy is a modular system consisting of matched function units that have been type-tested to IEC 60439. TN-S.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment Type-testing of the complete switchgear–enclosure–control panel assemblies to IEC EN 60439 ensures a high safety level. Product features • Clear segregation into functional areas up to Form 4b • Enclosures for combination. TT. UNE) and all relevant switchgear combinations to the respective protection type up to 4000 A have been type-tested. NF.and separate mounting. the system can be designed to conform to any applicable installation standard (DIN VDE. CEI. IT 0 Products XPower Panels • Incomers/feeders.

plug-in units. vertically fitted • 3 pole • Cable connection from top or bottom 0-16 . fixed mounted.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment 0 XFixed Panels • Outgoers with circuit-breakers PKZ or NZM up to 630 A • Fixed mounted or withdrawable • 3 or 4 pole circuit-breakers • Cable connection from top or bottom XFixed Panels • Outgoers with fuse combination units SASIL up to 630 A. vertically or horizontally fitted • Outgoers with fuse-strip units SL up to 630 A.

g. 4 pole and TP + N 0 0-17 . frequency inverters. power factor correction • Automation engineering • Control technology adapter systems xStart • Incoming busbar 3.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment XGeneral Panels • Mounting systems for rail-mounted service installation devices • Customized fixed mounted units on mounting plates up to 630 A. soft starters. e.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment 0 Sheet steel wall-mounting enclosure CS With mounting plate 45 enclosure sizes are available for selection from 250 × 200 × 150 to 1200 × 1200 × 250 mm. The stable CS enclosure series made from solid sheet steel is used in applications wherever effective protection against the direct contact of live parts is required. CS enclosures can be mounted as wall enclosures. 0-18 . The classification of impact resistance code IK10 to EN 62262 also protects the inside of the cabinet from mechanical damage. The high IP55 degree of protection allows installed equipment to be protected from most harmful ambient conditions. A continuous sponge polyurethane seal provides the necessary seal tightness. The surrounding rain channel profile offers protection against the ingress of liquid such as water or oil as well as dirt when the door is opened.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment Their powder coated surface provides an abrasion and corrosion resistant protection. for mounting command and signalling devices. 0 0-19 . Inside hinges that are covered can thus be undone simply and the door stop exchanged from right to left or vice versa. meters and cable glands. • cutouts in doors and side panels. e.g. touch panels. Moeller can also provide customised solutions on request. This includes for example: • other RAL colour tones. The enclosure door can be removed easily for other mechanical measures. • other dimensions.

The connection terminal consists of a combination of several very stable terminal blocks. auxiliary conductor terminals or conversion kits also enable the creation of your own terminal variants. Accessories such as the transparent plastic cover. A very wide range is available as standard with 6 sizes and terminal cross-sections from 16 to 3 x 240 mm² (160 to 1000 A).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment 0 Terminal K Copper conductors can be inserted easily and quickly into the box terminals from above without bending. Each terminal pair is moulded in a plastic Duroplast shell. 3-pole. The Moeller terminals are designed for copper strips or busbars as well as copper conductors. Each of the 6 sizes is available from stock as a 1-pole. 0-20 . 4-pole or 5-pole terminal combination. It is used for connecting two or more conductors.

the modular CI insulated distribution system up to 630 A always offers the right solution in harsh ambient conditions. Enclosed distribution boards are type-tested assemblies (TTA) in accordance with VDE 0660 part 500 or Type Tested Assemblies (TTA) to IEC 60 439. • pressure relief by means of liftable covers with spring-loaded locking bolts. • Transparent neutral cover allows unrestricted view. • Floor-standing distribution boards with base covers for routing. wall-mounted or free-standing distribution board of any size. • "Total insulation" provides maximum personnel protection and operational safety. The modular system makes it easy to adapt to a wide range of conditions. fastening or covering large cable cross sections. totally insulated 0 The assembly of the CI system demonstrates its flexibility. humidity and water jets. 0-21 . Whether as an individual enclosure.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment CI insulated distribution boards. • IP65 protection ensures protection from dust.

controlling.b. The larger air and creepage distances required in compliance with the UL 508A in America have been considered in the construction of the busbar components. UL certified solution for switching.c.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 The Moeller Wiring Manual Moeller power distribution equipment 0 SASY60i busbar system for the world market The SASY60i modular busbar system from Moeller is designed for effective energy distribution in the control panel. Components approved for IEC such as h. the SASY 60i provides a universal. Thanks to the innovative mounting technology feeder and outgoing circuit-breakers can be mounted quickly and compactly. 0-22 . Together with the appropriate switching and protective devices. SASY60i is safe and reliable. protecting and distributing energy. When used in North America. the busbar system is designed for worldwide use. As SASY60i requires few system components the new Moeller busbar system also reduces the stock-keeping and ordering required. In conjunction with the latest generation of Moeller motor protective circuit-breakers and other circuit-breakers. fuse switch-disconnectors or D busbar mounting fuses can also suitable for perfectly matched fitting. the insulated bottom plate must be mounted under the system.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 0 0-23 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 0 0-24 .

PS4 Modular PLC. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. XC100/XC200 HMI systems Networking Engineering PS4 Engineering EM4 and LE4 Engineering XC100. XC200 1-2 1-6 1-10 1-12 1-20 1-50 1-67 1-68 1-70 1-72 1-73 1-75 1-78 1-79 1 1-1 . visualisation Page Timing relays EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays The way to the safe machine System overview E Engineering E Programming E Overview of automation products Compact PLC.

two speeds. both timing relays automatically recognize that a potentiometer is fitted. pulse initiating) • Function 81 (pulse generating) Function 82 (pulse shaping) ON. Upon connection. only the timed contact 15–18 carries out the functions described below. visualisation Timing relays Electronic timing relays are used in contactor control systems which require short reset times. 50/60 Hz • Version W (DILET… and ETR4) AC devices: AC 346 to 440 V. 50/60 Hz The functions of each of the timing relays are as follows: • DILET11. pulse initiating) Function 43 (flashing. The ETR4-70 has a special feature. 50/60 Hz • ETR2… (as row mounting device to DIN 43880) Universal device: DC 24 to 48 V AC 24 to 240 V. Times between 0. Equipped with two changeover contacts which can be converted to two timing contacts 15-18 and 2528 (A2-X1 bridged) or one timing contact 15-18 and a non-delayed contact 21-24 (A2-X1 not bridged).ETR2-11 Function 11 (ondelayed) • ETR2-12 Function 12 (off-delayed) • ETR2-21 Function 21 (fleeting contact on energisation) • ETR2-42 Function 42 (flashing. high switching frequency. 1 1-2 . OFF • Multifunction relays ETR2-69 Function 11 (on-delayed) Function 12 (off-delayed) Function 21 (fleeting contact on energisation) Function 22 (fleeting contact on deenergisation) Function 42 (flashing.05 s and 100 h can be easily selected and set.and off-delayed) Function 21(fleeting contact on energisation) Function 22 (fleeting contact on deenergisation) Function 42 (flashing. ETR4-11. high repetition accuracy.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. pulse initiating) • ETR2-44 Function 44 (flashing. The switching capacity of electronic timing relays corresponds to the utilisation categories AC -15 and DC -13. and a long component lifespan. control. ETR 4-69/70 Function 11 (on-delayed) Function 12 (off-delayed) Function 16 (on. If the link A2–X1 is removed. In terms of the actuating voltages there are with timing relays the following differences : • Version A (DILET… and ETR4) Universal devices: DC 24 to 240 V AC 24 to 240 V. can be set to either pulse initiating or pause initiating) • Multifunction relays DILET70. pause initiating) Function 82 (pulse shaping) • Star-delta timing relays ETR4-51 Function 51 (on-delayed) With both DILET70 and ETR4-70 an external potentiometer can be connected.

After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and A2. 15–18) of defined duration is therefore produced from a two-wire control process (voltage on A25/A28) by this function. 1-3 . If terminals Y70 and Y1 in the DILET2 are linked with a floating NO contact or. a potential is applied to B1. the changeover contact of the output relay remains in the original position 15–16 (25–26). the changeover contact goes back to its original position 1–1 (15–25) after the same time t. A fleeting pulse (terminals 1–2. control. the changeover contact changes to position 15-18 (15-28) immediately. Function 21 Fleeting contact on energization A1-A2 t 15-18 (25-28) t After the control voltage has been applied to terminals A1 and A2. If terminals Y1 and Y2 in the DILET70 are linked by a floating contact. If connection Y1-Y1 is now interrupted or B2 is separated from the potential. Function 12 Off-delayed A1-A2 Y1-Y2 B1 15-18 (25-28) The control voltage Us is applied directly to terminals A1 and A2. After the set delay time the changeover contact of the output relay goes to position 15-18 (2528). visualisation Timing relays Function 11 On-delayed A1-A2 15-18 t t t Function 16 On.and Off-delayed A1-A2 Y1-Y2 B1 15-18 (25-28) 1 The control voltage Us is applied to terminals A1 and A2 through an actuating contact. the changeover contact returns to its original position 1-1 (15-25) once the set time has elapsed. the changeover contact of the output relay goes to position 15–18 (25–28) and remains actuated for the set fleeting contact time. If the connection between terminals Y1–Y1 is now interrupted or B2 is isolated from voltage. in the case of the ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69. or in the case of of the ETR4-69/70 a potential is applied to B1. the changeover contact goes to the position 15-18 (25-28) after a set time t.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

pulse initiating A1-A2 15-18 (25-28) t t t t After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and A2. The subsequent pause duration corresponds to the flashing time. visualisation Timing relays Function 82 Pulse forming (16-25) after 26 s.5 s 15-18 (25-28) t The control voltage Us is applied directly to A1 and A2. Function 42 Flashing.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. irrespective of whether the input pulse via Y1–Y2 or B1 is shorter or longer than the set time. A1-A2 Y1-Y2 B1 15-18 (25-28) 1 t Function 22 Fleeting contact on de-energization A1-A2 Y1-Y2 B1 15-18 (25-28) After the control voltage has been applied to A1 and A2. the changeover contact remains actuated until the set time has elapsed. the output relay likewise changes back to its rest position after the set time. The actuating voltage is applied to terminals A1 and A2 via an actuating contact. instead. contact 1518 (25-28) closes for the duration of the set time. a potential is applied to B1. control. Y1–Y2 remain closed or B1 is separated from the potential for a longer period. the changeover contact of the output relay remains in the rest position 15–16 (25–26). This function is therefore a fleeting pulse with a time delay. After the set delay time has elapsed the changeover contact of the output relay goes to position 15-18 (2528) and returns to its original position 0.5-15 1-4 . or in the case of the ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69. If terminals Y1 and Y2 on DILET70 that are shorted at any time beforehand (DILET-70: floating) and then reopened (or for ETR4-69/70 or ETR2-69 contact B1 is floating). If Y1–Y2 is now opened again or B1 is isolated from voltage. If. If terminals Y70 and Y1 in the DILET2 are linked through a floating contact. An output pulse of precisely defined duration is thus produced in the pulse-forming function. the changeover contact changes to the position 15–18 (25–28) immediately. the changeover contact of the output relay changes to position 15–18 (25–28) and remains actuated for as long as the set flashing time. Function 81 Pulse generating with fixed pulse A1-A2 t 0.

The times t1 and t2 can be set to different times. visualisation Timing relays Function 43 Flashing.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. after this time. the instantaneous contact switches to position 17-18. control. The Off function allows the output relay to be de-energized so that it no longer reacts to the functional sequence. By bridging the contacts A1 and Y1 the relay can be switched to pause begin. The On function energizes the output relay. the timing contact 17-28 closes after a changeover time tu of 50 ms. AWA2527-1485 • ETR2…: AWA2527-2372 Main catalogue for industrial switchgear. for commissioning. for example. This function is dependent on the supply voltage being applied to the terminals A1/A2. Further information sources Installation instructions • DILET…: AWA2527-1587 • ETR4…: AWA2527-1493. Function 44 Flashing. Section 4 “Timing relays” 1-5 . two speeds A1-A2 A1-B1 15-18 If the control voltage Us is applied to A1 and A2. goes to position 15-18 (the cycle begins with a pause phase). The LED indicates the operational status. pause initiated A1-A2 15-18 Function 51 Star-delta On-delayed A1-A2 17-18 17-28 1 t t t t t LED t tu After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and A2 the changeover contact of the output relay stays in position 15-16 for the set flashing time and. The On-Off function allows the operation of a control system to be tested and is an aid. After the set time the instantaneous contact opens. On-Off Function A1-A2 OFF ON OFF 15-18 (25-28) LED t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 Rel LED A1-B1 15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 Rel LED After the voltage Us has been applied to A1 and A2 the changeover contact of the output relay goes to position 15-18 (pulse begin).

An ON. each with three measuring ranges (30/100/1000 mA. phase imbalance monitoring relay EMR4-A • increased safety by motor current principle. That means protection against destruction or damage of single system parts. There are two versions.5/5/15 A). visualisation EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays General For the various applications measurement amd monitoring relays are necessary. With the new EMR4 range Moeller covers a large number of requirements: • general use. In the On-delay position short voltage breaks can be bridged.05 and 30 s short current peaks can be bridged. Here the minimum low voltage and also the maximum overvoltage can be easily set to the required voltage within a defined range. 1-6 . phase monitoring relay EMR4-W • safe recognition of phase failure. The two auxiliary changeover contacts allow a direct feedback. Selected bridging of short current peaks By using the selected time delay of between 0. pumps and drill machines can be monitored. The off-delay position allows a failure storage for the set time. level relay EMR4-N • increased operational safety. current monitor EMR4-I • space saving monitoring of the rotary field phase sequence relay EMR4-F • protection against destruction or damage of single system parts. control. EMR4-W phase monitoring relay 1 The current monitoring relay EMR4-I is suitable for monitoring AC as well as DC current.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 1. That is due to the selectable under or over limit.or Off delay can be set. With the definable low and high current limits. The multi-voltage coil allows universal use of the relay. insulation monitoring relay EMR4-R Current monitoring relay EMR4-I The phase monitoring relay EMR4-W monitors the voltage height as well as the field rotation to provide protection against destruction or damage of single system parts.

The level monitoring relay EMR4-N is used mostly as dry running protection for pumps or for level regulation of liquids. 1-7 . The EMR4-F500-2 covers the total voltage range from 200 to 500 V AC. A third sensor is used for earth potential. It can be switched from level regulation to dry running protection. With a correctly rotating field the changeover contact switches the control voltage of the motor switching device. visualisation EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays The delay time can be set between 0. The 22. Because the phase failure is determined through the phase shift.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. After drop-out the device reactivates when a the voltage exceeds a 5 % hysteresis.5 mm wide device EMR4-N100 is suitable for conductive liquids. The relay protects motors with a rated voltage of Un = 380 V. control. The safety is increased as in both cases the motor current principle is used. 50 Hz. It operates with sensors that measure conductivity. Phase sequence relay EMR4-F Phase imbalance relay EMR4-A 1 The 22. Level monitoring relay EMR4-N The phase sequence relay with a width of only 22. saws. The narrow mounting width saves space in the control panel. A sensor is required for the maximum and also a sensor for the minimum level. it can also be reliably detected to prevent motor overload in the event of a high motor feedback. The relay activates with the correct rotation and voltage.4 mm wide EMR-4-A phase imbalance relay provides protection against phase to protect motors against destruction. This protects the motor from damage.5 mm monitors the rotating field of portable motors for which the rotation direction is important (such as pumps.1 and 10 s. drilling machines).

phase failure. Multifunctional EMR4-AW(N) threephase monitors 1 EN 60204 “Safety of machines” provides increased operational safety by monitoring the control voltage circuit for earth-fault using an insulation monitor. This is the main application for the EMR4-R.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.1 and 10 s moving liquids can also be monitored. The multifunctional three-phase monitors provide space saving monitoring of rotating fields. The device has a selectable fault memory so that the fault must be acknowledged after its removal. Due to an integrated rise and fall delay of between 0. 1-8 . They feature a range of phase parameter measuring functions for phase sequence. phase imbalance as well as undervoltage and overvoltage. control. There are similar requirements in medical applications. the threshold value for phase imbalance can be set between 2 and 15 %. The DC device has a multi-voltage source and can therefore also be used for AC. which cover the total control voltage range. The level monitoring relay EMR4-N500 has a higher sensitivity and is suitable for less conductive liquids. The threshold values for undervoltage and overvoltage are fixed or adjustable. visualisation EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays An earth-fault is signalled via a changeover contact so that a fault can be cleared without expensive down time. Depending on device type. EMR4-R insulation monitoring relay AC or DC control voltage Devices for AC and for DC are available. A Test button allows the device to be checked for correct operation at any time.

EMR4-W… AWA2431-2271 Main catalogue Industrial Switchgear. Section 4 “monitoring relays”. visualisation EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays The different options and setting values are explained in the applicable installation instructions.. Further information sources Installation instructions • Phase imbalance monitoring relay EMR4A400-1 AWA2431-1867 • Insulation monitoring relay EMR4-RAC-1-A AWA2431-1866 • Insulation monitoring relay EMR4-RDC-1-A AWA2431-1865 • Level monitoring relay EMR4-N100-1-B AWA2431-1864 • Phase sequence relay EMR4-F500-2 AWA2431-1863 • Phase monitoring relay EMR4-W… AWA2431-1863 • Current monitoring relay EMR4-I… AWA2431-1862 • Measuring/monitoring relays: 3-phase monitors EMR4-A….. EMR4AWN…. EMR4-AW…. The function “with neutral conductor monitoring” is a new feature of the EMR4-AWN. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. models. 1 1-9 .

Further information on the previous and the new international safety standards as well as circuit examples for a wide range of applications are provided in the latest version of the Moeller Safety Applications Technical Guide TB0200009. general principles for design” provide the design engineer with detailed assistance in the identification of hazards and the resulting risks to be assessed.net/Safety.Basic concepts. Moeller offers the right components with safety technology in accordance with the most stringent requirements stipulated in the safety standards EN 954-1. The appropriate safety functions are used according to the application field and the necessary hazard protection. The safety manual helps you by means of practical safety circuit examples and the associated calculations to determine safety performance in accordance with EN ISO 138491 and EN IEC 62061. For reducing risks by means of SRP/CS.moeller. Further technical information on the individual safety products is provided at www. 1-10 . EN ISO 13849-1 and EN IEC 62061/61508. Safety-related control systems comprise the entire safety function consisting of the input level (sensor).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. the logic (safety signal processing) and the output level (actuator). visualisation The way to the safe machine 1 The international standard EN ISO 12100-1 “Safety of machinery . The parts of machine control systems that handle safety tasks are defined as the “safetyrelated parts of control systems” (SRP/CS). control. This therefore lays down the technical measures for the reduction of hazards.

Safe switching. Logic Reliable shutdown Reliable disconnection with DILM contactors and CMD contactor monitoring relay. 1 Input Safe monitoring and processing Safe monitoring and processing with ESR safety relays and easySafety control relay. disconnection and control with T rotary switches and P switch-disconnectors. visualisation The way to the safe machine Fast and secure detection Detecting hazards quickly with RMQ-Titan and FAK emergency-stop buttons. control. Motion safety under control with LS-Titan® position switches.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Output 1-11 .

visualisation System overview E eRelay 1 2 1 3 2 4 4 5 5 6 6 ES C L DE ALT ES C OK 9 8 7 10 11 12 13 14 POW POWER BUS COM-ERR ERR MS NS ADR 9 8 1-12 . control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

expandable 6) Basic unit easy800. visualisation System overview E 1) Detachable display MFD-80… and MFD(AC)-CP4-500 2) Ethernet-Gateway EASY209-SE 3) Detachable display MFD-80… and MFD(AC)-CP4-800 4) Basic device easy500 5) Basic device easy700. easy800 11) Expansion unit for networking PROFIBUSDP EASY204-DP 12) Expansion unit for networking AS-Interface EASY205-ASI 13) Expansion unit for networking CANopen EASY221-CO 14) Expansion unit for networking DeviceNet EASY222-DN 1 1-13 . expandable. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. networkable via easyNet 7) EASY202-RE output expansion 8) easy410 I/O expansion 9) easy6… I/O expansion 10) Coupling unit EASY200-EASY for remote expansion of easy700.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. visualisation System overview E eHMI 1 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 8 9 10 11 12 POW 7 6 BUS POWER COM-ERR ERR MS ADR NS 1-14 . control.

visualisation System overview E 1) Ethernet gateway EASY209-SE 2) I/O module with or without temperature measuring for MFD-Titan 3) Power supply unit/CPU MFD(-AC)-CP8… 4) Display/operating unit MFD-80… 5) EASY202-RE output expansion 6) easy410 I/O expansion 7) easy6… I/O expansion 8) Coupling unit EASY200-EASY for remote expansion of MFD(-AC)-CP8… 9) Expansion unit for networking PROFIBUSDP EASY204-DP 10) Expansion unit for networking AS-Interface EASY205-ASI 11) Expansion unit for networking CANopen EASY221-CO 12) Expansion unit for networking DeviceNet EASY222-DN 1 1-15 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. control.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. visualisation System overview E eControl 1 1 1 2 2 3 ES C 3 5 6 7 8 L DE ALT POW BUS POWER COM-ERR ES C OK ERR MS ADR NS 4 11 10 9 12 4 10 11 1-16 . control.

visualisation System overview E 1) CANopen connection for MFD-80… and MFD-CP4-CO 2) Detachable display MFD-80… and MFD(AC)-CP4-800 3) Basic device EC4P-200 4) CANopen I/O expansion EC4E… 5) Expansion unit for networking PROFIBUSDP EASY204-DP 6) Expansion unit for networking AS-Interface EASY205-ASI 7) Expansion unit for networking CANopen EASY221-CO 8) Expansion unit for networking DeviceNet EASY222-DN 9) EASY202-RE output expansion 10) easy410 I/O expansion 11) easy6… I/O expansion 12) Coupling unit EASY200-EASY for remote expansion of EC4P-200 1 1-17 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. control.

The series and parallel linking of contacts and coils takes place in up to 256 current paths. numbers and timing relays. • retentive actual values of markers. easy700 offers more inputs and outputs. is expandable and can be connected to a standard bus system. With its degree of protection MFD80.with IP65 can also be used in harsh environments. – frequency counters. • current impulse relay. 1-18 . • automatic summertime changeover. • arithmetic modules. – fast counter. • counters – forwards and backwards. visualisation System overview E Functions e e500 and e700 MFD(-AC)-CP8… and e800 1 easy500 and easy700 have the same functions. The main functions are: • Multi-function timing relay. MFD…CP8… and easy800 have the same functions. • value scaling. The units have three contacts and a coil in series. MDF-80 and easy800 can be custom-labelled.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. • analog value comparator. – operational time counter. control. • week and year time switch. The display of 32 operating and report texts is via an internal or external display. easy500 and easy700 can be custom-labelled. The units have four contacts and a coil in series. The series and parallel linking of contacts and coils takes place in up to 128 current paths. In addition to the functions offered by easy700 the easy800 and the MFD-Titan feature: • PID controller... The display of 16 operating and report texts is via an internal or external display. • and much more. In addition for expansion and connection to standard bus systems eight easy800 or MFD-Titan units can be networked via easyNet.

The plug & play functionality allows you to connect the MFD-80. The easyControl EC4P-200 can be used for implementing both small and mediumsized automation solutions. is mounted using 22. display to the easyRelay. power supply and communication module. The EC4P-200 is programmed with easySoftCoDeSys (ECP-SOFT) based on IEC 61131-3. easySafety or easyControl via MFD-CP4. visualisation System overview E eControl: EC4P-200 “Detachable” display – text display for eRelay. has an integrated 5 m connection cable which can be shortened as required. The easyControl EC4P-200 comes with a powerful CPU and an internal 256 KByte program memory. easySafety and easyControl.. With Ethernet on board.5 mm fixing holes. offers genuine plug & play capabilities. The MFDCP4. The MFD-CP4. The inputs and outputs are wired on the easyRelay. This has the advantage that no software or drivers are required for connection. additional requirements such as OPC server and network programming are provided for. The display can be labelled to individual requirements.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. eSafety and eControl with IP65 protection 1 easy500 easy700 easy800 ES4P-200 EC4P-200 easyControl is the obvious successor to the easyRelay.. The IP65 display is backlit and offers a easy to read display. The easyControl can be combined with the standard easyRelaysystem as well as with virtually all automation devices via the integrated CANopen interface. 1-19 .. control.. The MFD-80..

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.1 > 1A +.1 L N N +. control.V 0 0 Basic devices EASY512-AB-… EASY719-AB-… EASY512-AC-… EASY719-AC-… EASY819-AC-… 24 V AC 24 V AC 115/230 V AC 115/230 V AC 115/230 V AC Basic devices EASY512-DA-… EASY719-DA-… EASY512-DC-… EASY7…-DC-… EASY819-DC-… EASY82...-DC-… ES4P-… EC4P-200 12 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC MFD-AC-CP8-… Expansion devices EASY618-AC… 115/230 V AC 115/230 V AC MFD-CP8-… Expansion devices EASY410-DC… EASY618-DC… EASY620-DC… 1-20 . visualisation Engineering E Power supply connection for AC devices for DC devices + – 1 L N > 1A L.

g.1 N 100 nF /275 V h 1 1N4007 100 nF /275 V h 1 kO 1 N a a b c d b c d e f Note g h e f g h Input signal via relay contact e. I8 already has addition switching. DILER Input signal via pushbutton RMQ Titan Input signal via position switch e. LS-Titan Conductor length 40 to 100 m for input without additional switching (e. possible conductor length 100 m) Increased input current Limiting the input current Increasing the input current with EASY256HCI EASY256-HCI ballast device • Due to the input circuitry the drop-out time of the input is increased.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.g.g. • Length of input conductor without additional circuit F 40 m. 1-21 . visualisation Engineering E Digital input connection of the AC devices L. control. easy700 I7. with additional circuit F 100 m.

twowire proximity switches should not be used.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.g. DILER Input signal via pushbutton RMQ Titan Input signal via position switch e.g. LS-Titan Proximity switch. • Because of the high residual currents. 1-22 . control.1 – p p a a b c d e b c d Note e Input signal via relay contact e. visualisation Engineering E Digital input connection of the DC devices 1 +. four-wire • Consider the voltage drop across the used conductor length. three-wire Proximity switch.

ground the shield at both ends using a large contact area.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. • Use shielded twisted pair cables to prevent interference with the analog signals. The following applies: I7 = IA01 I8 = IA02 EASY512-AB/DA/DC… EASY719-AB/DA/DC… EASY721-DC… EASY819/820/821/822-DC… MFD-R16. visualisation Engineering E Analog inputs Depending upon the device two or four 0 to 10 V inputs are available. Supplying loads such as motors. Incorrect switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly. • Do not lay signal lines parallel to power cables. or use a suppressor circuit for motors and valves. MFD-R17. 1-23 . The resolution is 10-bit = 0 to 1023. 1 I11 = IA03 I12 = IA04 Caution! Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals so that more care must be taken when laying and connecting the signal cables. solenoid valves or contactors and easy from the same power supply may cause interference of the analog input signal when switching. MFD-TA17 EC4P-200 • With short cable lengths. • Connect inductive loads to be switched via the easy outputs to a separate power feed. In this case. MFD-T16. If the cable length is more than around 30 m. only ground the cable at one end. grounding at both ends can result in equalisation currents between the two grounding points and thus in the interference of analog signals. control.

1-24 . The neutral conductor and the reference potential of DCsupplied analog sensors must be electrically connected... Observe the applicable regulations.. the device power must be supplied through a transformer so that the device is isolated from the mains supply. AB devices that process analog signals. visualisation Engineering E Connecting power supply and analog inputs for e…AB device 1 L N ~ 0V EASY200-POW +12 V F1 L01h N01 h L N N I1 I7 I8 Note With easy. control. Ensure that the common reference potential is earthed or monitored by an earth fault monitoring device.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 0. • Analogue input 0 to 10 V. potentiometer 1 kO. 1 kO.5 V.9 V..1 1 a 4.V 0V 0V a a Setpoint potentiometer via separate power supply and potentiometer F1 kO.V -0 V Out 0.g.. visualisation Engineering E Connecting analog inputs of e…DA/DC-… or MFD-R…/T… or EC4P-200 + – +..8 V..25 W b Setpoint potentiometer with upstream resistor 1...20 mA (0. control. – 10 mA Q 4... – 20 mA Q 9. e.55 ˚C 500 O +. resolution 10-bit. • Sensor of 4(0) to 20 mA and a resistance of 500 O give the following approx.. 0. 0 to 1023.25 W.25 W (values for 24 V DC) c Temperature monitoring via temperature sensor and transducer d Sensor 4 to 20 mA with resistor 500 O Note • Pay attention to the differing number and designation of the analogue inputs of each device type. values: – 4 mA Q 1.20 mA) h +12 V 0V +. 0. b c d • Connect the 0 V of the or the MFD-Titan with the 0 V of the power supply of the analogue encoder.3 kO.. 1-25 .10 V -35..

control. shielded < 10 m..... 1-26 . +200 °C MFD-TAP13-NI-A MFD-TP12-NI-A MFD-TAP13-PT-B MFD-TP12-PT-B Note Cable length... +90 °C 0 °C .. +250 °C 0 °C .... visualisation Engineering E Connecting Pt100/Ni1000 with MFD-T(A)P… 1 a b a Three wire connection b Two wire connection MFD-TAP13-PT-A MFD-TP12-PT-A -40 °C . +250 °C -40 °C .. +400 °C 0 °C ... +90 °C 0 °C .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.. +850 °C -200 °C .

control. 3 kHz EC4P-200 max. mark to space ratio should be 1:1 easy500/700 max.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. square wave signal via proximity switch. 1 kHz easy800 max.1 + – +. 1 kHz easy800 max. mark to space ratio 1:1 easy500/700 max. 3 kHz EC4P-200 max. a High-speed counters. 3 kHz EC4P-200 max. 40 kHz Note Observe the different number and designation of the inputs of the “fast counter”. visualisation Engineering E Connecting “high-speed counters”. 50 kHz b Square wave signal via frequency generator.1 1 p A B a b c c Square wave signals via 24 V DC incremental encoder easy800-DC… and MFD-R/T… max. 50 kHz 1-27 . “frequency generator” and “incremental encoder” for each device type. “frequency generators” and “incremental encoders” on e…DA/DC devices or MFD-R…/-T… or EC4P-200 + – +. 5 kHz MFD-R/T… max. 5 kHz MFD-R/T… max.

10 x 28 W with electronic starter. 1000 W at 230/240 V AC b Fluorescent tube. MFD…R and EC4P-…MR. L2.g. max. max. F 8 A/B16 Possible AC voltage range: 24 to 250 V. visualisation Engineering E Connecting relay outputs on EASY…R.. 1 x 58 W with conventional starter at 230/240 V AC c AC motor d Valve e Coil 1-28 . L3 phase to zero conductor Possible DC voltage range: 12 to 300 V DC a Lamp. control. 50/60 Hz e. ES4P… 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 L… L… L… L… L… M a b c d e Fuse protection switch potential L. L1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

Note Please note the following when switching off inductive loads: Suppressed inductive loads cause less interference in the entire electrical system. 0. these inductive loads must be provided with a suppressor circuit. the following applies: Several inductive loads should not be switched off simultaneously to avoid overheating the driver blocks in the worst possible case. 1-29 . It is generally recommended that the suppressor is connected as close as possible to the inductive load. 0. If in the event of an emergency stop the +24 V DC power supply is to be switched off by means of a contact. visualisation Engineering E Connecting transistor outputs on EASY…T.5 A at 24 V DC Indicator lamp 3 or 5 W at 24 V DC. control. 0. and if this would mean switching off more than one controlled output with an inductive load.5 A at 24 V DC Resistor.0 A 24 V DC a a b Contactor coil with zener diode as suppressor. MFD-T… and EC4P…MT.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.5 A at 24 V DC Valve with diode as protective element. ES4P… 1 + 24 V 0V f 2.5 A F 10. Output dependant upon device types and outputs b c d c d If inductive loads are not suppressed.

Q7 and Q8. Q1 and Q3 or Q5. 2 A at 24 V DC if 4 outputs in parallel. 16 mH 12 or 20 W at 24 V DC Output dependant upon device types and outputs 1 0V a a Resistor 1-30 . S1 to S4 or S5 to S8). max.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. if 4 outputs in parallel. Parallel outputs must be activated simultaneously. max. visualisation Engineering E Parallel connection Note The outputs must be connected only in parallel within a group (Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8. control. 2 A at 24 V DC Inductance without suppression max.

EC4P…MRA… + – +. visualisation Engineering E Connecting analog output on EASY820-DC-RC….. Incorrect switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. • Analogue output 0 to 10 V.1 1 0V IA +. MFD-RA…. EC4P…MTA. MFDTA…. greater care must be therefore taken when routing signal cables. 0-1023. Resolution 10-bit. control. b 1-31 ..V 0V 0V 0V Q A1 0V Q A1 a a Servo valve control b Set value sekection for drive control Note • Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals. EASY822-DC-TC….

up to 40 I/O easy700. There are two types of operation: • A master (position 1. Remote expansion. up to 320 I/O Up to eight stations can be interconnected by expanding the inputs and outputs via easyNet. up to 40 I/O easy700. visualisation Engineering E Input/output expansion e Central expansion. station address 1) and up to 7 other “intelligent” or “dumb” stations. a section "Central and remote expansion e". For this the digital or analog I/O expansion modules EC4E… can be used. Observe the CANopen specification! a section "Network connection. easy620). This provides you with up to 24 inputs and 16 outputs. a section "eNet. control. EC4P-200 and MFD-Titan are expanded with easy410. CANopen". There are a maximum of 24 inputs and 16 outputs available.g. The program is contained in the master. One expansion device per basic unit is possible. MFD(-AC)-CP8… or EC4P-200. page 1-34 Networking via CANopen (eControl) easyControl makes it possible to create networks via CANopen. Networking via eNet. “loop through the device” network connection". a section "Central and remote expansion e". Another easy expansion module can be then connected to this (e. easy410. The expansion device can be operated up to 30 m from the basic device. easy800.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. A network length of up to 1000 m is possible. One expansion device per basic unit is possible. MFD(-AC)-CP8… as well as EC4P-200 can be expanded with easy202. An expansion device can be added to each easy800. page 1-33. page 1-33. page 1-39 1 1-32 . easy618 or easy620. easy800. station address 1) and up to 7 other stations. • A master (space 1. Each “intelligent” station has a program. easy410. easy618. easy618 or easy620 using the EASY200-EASY coupling module.

....Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. easy620.R..S.. MFD-AC-CP8. Central expansion MFD S 1 . easy620..... R 1 .I. easy620. easy200 easy410.... MFD-CP8.. easy620...S.. easy618. easy410.. easy618. E+ E- Remote expansion MFD E+ E- F 30 m easy200 R 1 ..Q.R.... easy410..R...Q.S...... easy700 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P 1 2 S 1 ... MFD-AC-CP8. MFD-CP8..I. S 1 .. easy618. Remote expansion S 1 ... easy618.. easy202......R.... E+ E- Q 1 .. EASY-LINK-DS 1-33 ... Central expansion 1 Q 1 ....S.. visualisation Engineering E Central and remote expansion e I 1 . 1 2 R 1 .... easy410. easy700 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P R 1 . E+ E- F 30 m I 1 ..... control. easy202..

• The maximum length easyNet is 1000 m. position1) Station Example 1 Example 2 1 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P 1 1 2 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P easy410 easy618 easy620 2 3 3 MFD-AC-CP8 MFD-CP8 easy200 easy410 easy618 easy620 3 8 8 easy800 easy202 EASY-LINK-DS • Adressing the stations: – Automatic addressing of from station 1 or via easySoft… from the PC. visualisation Engineering E eNet. physical location = station. • Unscreened 4-core cable. each two cores twisted. geographic location and station can be different. “loop through the device” network connection 1 EASY-NT-R (124 O PIN1+2) easyNet Geographic location. the network is no longer active from the interrupted point. • Should easyNet be interrupted or a device is not operational. control. . Characteristic impedance of the cable must be 120 O. 1-34 8 2 1) 1)The geographic location/place 1 always has the device address 1. – Single addressing on the corresponding device or via easySoft… on each station.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

total length. control. including spur cables. each two cores twisted.3 m 1 1 2 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P easy410 easy618 easy620 2 3 F 0.3 m 3 MFD-AC-CP8 MFD-CP8 easy200 easy410 easy618 easy620 3 8 8 easy800 easy202 EASY-LINK-DS • Adressing the stations: – Single addressing on corresponding device or via easySoft… on every device. • Unscreened 4-core cable. or a device is not operational. length of T pieces for easy800 or for MFDTitan is 0. network connection “T piece with spur cable” EASY-NT-R (124 O PIN1+2) easyNet Geographic location. 1-35 . with easyNet is 1000 m.30 m. • The max. • The max.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Three cores are required. position1) Station Example 1 Example2 1 1 easy800 EC4P-200 ES4P F 0. 8 2 1) The geographic location/place 1 always has the station address 1. visualisation Engineering E eNet. the network is still active for the remaining devices. • If easyNet is interrupted between the T piece and the device. Characteristic impedance of the cable must be 120 O.

GND. conductor pair A PIN 3. SEL_IN. the screen braid must be connected to PE at only one end. 1-36 . Assembly of the network cable for eNet The characteristic impedance of the cable must be 120 O. conductor pair A PIN 2. GND. conductor pair B Bus terminating resistor A bus terminal resistor must be connected to the physically first and last device in the network: • Rating of the bus terminal resistor 124 O. page 1-38. conductor pair B PIN 4. Note Cable lengths and cross-sections a table. the braid does not have to be connected to PE. • connect to PIN 1 and PIN 2 of the RJ-45 plug. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a Cable entry side 8-pole RJ45.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. The network cable does not require a screen braid. The minimum operation with easyNet functions with cables ECAN_H. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connection layout of the RJ45 plug on the easy. Select conductor. If a network cable with shield braid is used. visualisation Engineering E Network connection eNet RJ 45 sockets and plugs Connection layout of RJ45 socket on easy and MFD-Titan. MFD(-AC)-CP8…. Data conductor. Data conductor. ECAN_L. ECAN_L. • connection plug : EASY-NT-R. If a PE connection is required nevertheless. EASY-NT-RJ45 a A A B B 1 2 3 4 ECAN_H ECAN_L GND (Ground) SEL_IN Pin assignment for eNet PIN 1. ECAN_H. ground conductor. EC4P-200 and ES4P. control. The SEL_IN cable is used only for automatic addressing.

l = Length of conductor in m Smin = minimum cross-section in mm2 rcu = specific resistance of copper.4 rcu 1 User prepared cables 100 m 4 x 0. visualisation Engineering E Prefabricated cables. twisted pair: EASY-NT-CAB RJ45 plug: EASY-NT-RJ45 Crimping tool for RJ45 plug: EASY-RJ45-TOOL. 1-37 . unless otherwise stated 0.018 Omm2/m S x 12.018 Omm2/m l x rcu 12. when nothing else state 0. RJ45 plug at both ends Cable length [cm] 30 80 150 Type designation EASY-NT-30 EASY-NT-80 EASY-NT-150 Calculating length with known cable cross-section For a known conductor cross section the maximum conductor length is calculated. Calculating cross-section with known cable lengths The minimum cross-section is determined for the known maximum expansion of the network.4 lmax = Smin = Note If the result of the calculation is not a standard cross-section.14 mm2. use the next highest standard cross-section. lmax = Length of conductor in m S = Conductor cross-section in mm2 rcu = specific resistance of copper. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

minimum conductor cross-section mm2 Kbaud F1000 F 500 F 250 F 1251) F 50 F 50 F 50 F 20 F 20 F 20 =10 mm2 0.45 1-38 .18 0.10 0.44 0.14 0. visualisation Engineering E Permissible network lengths with eNet 1 Total cable length of eNet m F6 F 25 F 40 F 125 F 175 F 250 F 300 F 400 F 600 F 700 F 1 000 1) Factory setting Transmission speed Conductor cross-section.36 0.87 1.38 0.75 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.14 0. control.5 1.10 0.25 0.0 1.25 0.5 26 26 26 24 23 21 20 19 17 17 15 0.25 0.02 1.10 0.14 0.50 0.58 0. standardised EN AWG Bus conductor.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.3 m DF51/DV51 DE51NETCAN DF51/DV51 DE51NETCAN 1 2 3 4 5 F 0. control. visualisation Engineering E Network connection. CANopen Loop through the device 124 O T piece with spur line 124 O 1 1 CAN-H 2 CAN-L 3 GND 4 5 6 7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 EC4P-200 EC4P-200 XC100/200 XC100/200 F 0.3 m CAN-H GND CAN-L 124 O 124 O 1-39 .3 m GND CAN-L CAN-H GND CAN-L CAN-H 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 CAN-H GND CAN-L MFD MFD F 0.

25 0. Cable crosssection [mm] 0. which guarantee a secure bus connection (table corresponds with the requirements of the ISO 11898). The following table includes values for the bus length in relation to the cross-section and the connected bus stations. control. The length of the CANopen bus cable depends on the conductor cross-section and the number of bus stations connected. 2 and 5 .75 Maximum length [m] n = 32 n = 64 n = 100 200 360 550 170 310 470 150 270 410 n = number of connected bus users If the bus length is greater than 250 m and/or are more than 64 stations connected. connector and bus termination resistor are defined in ISO 11898. Some requirements and specifications for the CANopen network are listed below. 1-40 . Properties of the CANopen cable Use only a cable that is approved for CANopen with the following characteristics: • Surge impedance 120 O • Capacitance per unit length < 60 pF/m The specifications for cable. 3 and 6 are internally connected.5 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. the ISO 11898 demands a residual ripple of the supply voltage of F 5 %. visualisation Engineering E Bus terminating resistors The ends of the network link must be terminated with 120 O bus termination resistors. 1 6 5 4 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAN_L CAN_H 5 4 3 2 1 120 O 3 2 1 120 O Terminals 1 and 4 .

Example A.3 m (3-core) Example B.3 m (EASY-NT-30) 1-41 . with interface element 8 6 4 2 7 5 3 1 RJ45 RJ45 8 6 4 2 7 5 3 1 b RJ45 RJ45 8 6 4 2 7 5 3 1 IN IN RJ45 d RJ45 OUT OUT easy800 ES4P MFD-CP8 EC4P-200 easy800 ES4P MFD-CP8 EC4P-200 b Recommendation F 0.14 mm2. AWG26 Network connect “through the device”. d F 0. control. visualisation Engineering E Network connection with cable cross-sections > 0.3 m (EASY-NT-30) Note Sreening is required for CANopen. with terminals 1 2 3 4 Network connection “T piece with spur cable” Example A.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. with terminals 1 1 IN 2 IN 3 a RJ45 RJ45 1 2 3 4 c RJ45 4 OUT OUT easy800 ES4P MFD-CP8 EC4P-200 easy800 ES4P MFD-CP8 EC4P-200 a Recommendation F 0.3 m Example B. with interface element c F 0.

visualisation Engineering E Expansion units for networking 1 EASY204-DP EASY221-C0 EASY222-DN EASY205-ASI easy700. • AWB 2528-1401GB EASY204-DP. control relay. multi-function display. The inputs and output points can be expanded via easyNet (a section "eNet. • AWB2528-1479GB EASY221-CO. 1-42 . easy800. • GBAWB2528-1480GB MFD-Titan. • AWB2528-1427GB EASY222-DN. MFD(-AC)-CP8… and EC4P200. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. page 1-35 and a section "eNet. easy800 EC4P-200 MFD…CP8… ES4P A network module can be connected with easy700. easy700 control relay. The network module must be included as a slave in the configuration. Further information can be found in the following manuals: • AWB2528-1508GB easy500. network connection “T piece with spur cable”". page 1-35). • AWB2724-1584GB EC4-200. network connection “T piece with spur cable”". • AWB 2528-1423GB easy800.

the contactor coil actuation. control. e.g. EC4P-200. Up to 8 stations on the easyNET can be intelligently connected with each other. The gateway delivers the supply voltage for the electronic supply of the SmartWire modules and for the power element of the switchgear. ES4P e easyNet station.g. XC100/XC200 b SmartWire Gateway c CANopen PLC. EC4P-200 d CANopen station. EC4P-200. ES4P. visualisation Engineering E SmartWire Gateway The gateway allows the communication between 16 SmartWire modules and easy-NET compatible or CANopen compatible PLCs. e. MFD-CP8NT.g. It has a selector switch to select either easy-NET or CANopen operating mode. MI4/MFD4 e SmartWire module.g. easy800.g. 1 a b CANopen a EC4P b c easy 800 easyNet c easy 800 MFD Titan f SmartWire 16 1 2 3 4 5 d 16 d g SmartWire 1 2 3 4 5 e e f a CANopen PLC e. e.g. In addition to standard fieldbus modules such as remote I/O systems or visualisation devices. e.: for xStart f SmartWire connection cable a Head-end controller (easy800. Up to 126 stations can be connected to a CANopen network. e. this allows a number of switchgear devices can be networked directly with the PLC.g. XC201) b SmartWire Gateway c easyNet d easyNet station. MFD-CP8-NT f SmartWire module. The voltage is supplied to the modules via the SmartWire connection cable.: for xStart g SmartWire connection cable 1-43 .g. depending on the performance level of the CANopen fieldbus master. e. e. Operating mode eNet In easyNET mode the gateway acts as a station on easyNET and the SmartWire master at the same time. CANopen operating mode CANopen mode allows communication between SmartWire modules and controllers with CANopen interface such as EC4--200 or XC100/200.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

.1 ES4P + 24 V 0 V L F5 MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 m EC4P-200 N 115/230 V 50/60 Hz easy800 F5 m F5m easy700 MFD. 1-44 .. No extra software or programming is necessary to operate the “remote display”.CP4. DEL ALT easy500 ESC OK DEL ALT MFD-80... The connection cable MFD-CP4-…-CAB5 can be shortened. ESC OK MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 F5m The display screen of the easyRelay or easyControl is shown on the MFD-80… “detachable display”. visualisation Engineering E Detachable display with protection type IP65 1 + – >1A L. control.1 L N >1A L.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.. MFD-80-B can also be used to operate easyRelay and easyControl..

visualisation Engineering E Communication connections e easy500 easy700 EASY-PC-CAB DEL ALT DEL ALT 1 EASY-USB-CAB ESC OK ESC OK abe MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 EASY209-SE XT-CAT5-X.... a EASY-SOFT-BASIC b EASY-SOFT-PRO c ESP-SOFT d ECP-SOFT(CoDeSys) e OPC MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 be easy800 MFD.. control. ES4P c EC4P-200 d e EASY800-USB-CAB XT-CAT5-X..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching....1) EASY800-PC-CAB EASY800-MO-CAB 1) EU4A-RJ45-CAB1 EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB only EC4P-222… and XC200 1-45 .CP8.

2 = brown. 4 = white. 5 = green >1A +24 V 0 V 1-46 . control. visualisation Engineering E EASY209-SE standard connection Ethernet connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TX– RX+ 1 a 2 g b c d 1 RX– f e COM connection a b c d e f g Ethernet connection (RJ45 socket) Status LED (POW/RUN) COM terminal.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 3 = yellow. cage clamp terminal 5-pole RESET button Device power supply 24 V DC V Device label Strain relief 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 24 V connection +24 V 0V 1 press – 2 insert – 3 remove 1 = grey.

... easy800 MFD…CP8… MFD. The remote station responds to the requests of the active station. The remote device can also be a device in the easyNet. control. 1-47 . Twenty marker double words read or written are possible.. 1 POW-Side The COM-LINK is a point-to-point connection that uses the serial interface. Remote stations can be easy800 or an MFD…CP8….T. This data can be used for reference value input or for display functions.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. and marker areas read and written.. Reading and writing are freely selectable. The stations of the COM-LINK have different functions. Via this interface the status of the inputs and outputs are read./R. It does not recognise the difference whether COM-LINK is active or a PC with EASY-SOFT-PRO is using the interface.T./R. visualisation Engineering E COM-LINK connection MFD-80… MFD…CP8… MFD. The active device is always a MFD…CP8… and controls the complete interface.. The devices of the COM-LINK can be centralised or decentralised extended with easy expansion devices.

1 easy800 Serially controlled printer EASY800-MO-CAB Pin assignment of EASY800-MO-CAB: 2 white T x D 3 brown R x D 5 green GND 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 For information about EASY800-MO-CAB. visualisation Engineering E Connecting and operating the e800 on the serial log printer An SP (SP = serial protocol) function block can be used to send data directly via the serial PC interface on the front of the device. 1-48 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. control. More information is provided in the EASY-SOFT-PRO help. see also AWA2528-2345.

. visualisation Engineering E Connection and modem operation with e or MFD easy700 easy500 DEL ALT easy800 MFD. control. see also AWA2528-2345... 1 DEL ALT ESC OK ESC OK EASY800-PC-CAB EASY-PC-CAB EASY800-MO-CAB Modem 1 Modem 2 PC Fax e-mail SMS Pager OPC For information about EASY800-MO-CAB. 1-49 .CP8..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

With control relay easy this can be done simply.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. expansion device Bit output. visualisation Programming E Programming instead of wiring Circuit diagramms are the basis of all electrotechnical applications. expansion device via easyNET Bit output. basic unit Bit input. That saves time and therefore costs. expansion device via easyNET Diagnostic alarm COM-Link diagnostic alarm Bit output display backlight + Front LEDs Marker Marker COM-Link Marker Byte Marker double word Marker word Marker operand COM-Link Marker x – x x – x – – x – – – – x – – – – – x x x x x x x x x X x x x – – x – x x x – – x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x – x 1-50 . Simple menu operation in many languages simplify the input. basic unit via easyNET Analogue input Bit input. expansion device1) Bit input. 1 S1 K1 S4 S5 S6 K3 K1 K3 K2 K3 Contacts. In practice electrical devices are wired to each other. basic unit Bit output. coils. function modules. operands Operand Description easy500. easy and MFD-Titan are the professional devices for the world market. easy700 easy800 MFD(-AC)-CP8… I nI IA R nR Q nQ QA S nS ID 1ID LE M 1M MB MD MW 1MB/1MW /1MD N P Bit input. basic unit via easyNET Analogue output Bit output. control.

easy700 easy800 MFD(-AC)-CP8… Jump Bit input via easyNET Bit output via easyNET easyNET Analog value comparator A Arithmetic AR Block comparison BC Block transfer BT Boolean sequence BV Counter relays C Frequency counters CF High-speed counters CH Incremental counters CI Comparators CP (reverse order) D Data function block DB PID controllers DC PT1 signal smoothing filter FT Get value from easyNet GT (clock)/Week time clock Ö H/HW Year time switch Y/HY Conditional jump JC Jump label LB Value scaling LS Master reset Z/MR Data multiplexer MX Numerical converters NC Operating hours counters O/OT Pulse output PO Pulse width modulation PW Sychronise clock via network SC Set cycle time ST Serial protocol SP Shift register SR Timing relays T Table function TB Value limitation VC 1) With easy700.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. : nRN nSN x x – x – x x x – x – X – x – X X X X2) X X2) X – X – X x x – x – X – X – X X X X X – x – x – x x x – x – X X X – x – X – X – X – x – x X X – x – X n = NET station 1…8 x x x x X x x x x x x x x – x x x x x x x x x x – x x – x x x – x x x x 1 1-51 . easy800 and MFD…CP8… 2) With easy500 and easy700 programmable as operation type. visualisation Programming E Operand Description easy500. control.

ÈS3 äQ3. ÈM5. ÅS4 èQ3. èD8. RM5. SS4 R Reset (unlatching) RQ4. èM4. the specified function should be used only once for each relay coil. In the wiring diagram. ÅD2. Circuit diagram symbol e Display 1 Unused outputs Q and S can also be used as markers like M and N. Ä:1. RS3 1-52 . ÈD7. RD7. äD8. äM4. SM2. Coil function Contactor function Example Ä ÄQ1. ÄS4.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. visualisation Programming E Coil functions The switching behaviour of the relay coil is determined by the selected coil function. SD3. control. ÄM7 ÅQ1. èS7 ÈQ4. ÄD2. äS7 Å Contactor function with negated result è Cycle pulse on falling edge È Cycle pulse on rising edge ä Surge function S Latch (set) SQ8.

Time range. Analoge value I7 T:00 clock time 30. g.000 constant as value. Parameter display. Time 1 and Time 2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. I1 Time setpoint 1 1 # Output switch status: # N/O contact open. ü Switching function â I2 Time setpoint 2 N/C contact closed S Time range + Parameter display 30. Parameters Switch function Switch with on-delay Switch with on-delay and random time range Switch with off-delay Switch with off-delay and random time range Switching with On-delay and Off-delay Switching with On-delay and Off-delay with random time Single-pulse switching Switching with flashing X ?X â ?â Xâ ?Xâ ü Ü 1-53 . visualisation Programming E Parameter sets for times Example based on EASY512 Depending up on the programme the following parameters can be set: • • • • • Switching function. e. T1 I1 I2 ü I7 S + T1 Relay no.. control..000 T:00 # Possible coil functions: • Trigger = TT. e. g. 30 s I7 Variable.. • Halt = HT. • Reset = RT.

Logic table I1 1 0 Q1 0 1 I1-------ÄQ1 1-54 . This section includes a few circuit examples which are intended to demonstrate the possibilities for your own circuit diagrams. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. In the easy circuit diagram. 1 S 00. The values in the logic table have the following meanings for switching contacts: 0 = N/O contact open.000 M:S 00:00 H:M 00:00 Parameters Displaying the parameter set via menu item “Parameter” Call enabled Access disabled + - Basic circuits The easy circuit configuration is input in ladder diagram.000 to 99. Negation Negation means that the contact opens rather than closes when it is actuated (NOT circuit).999 s Minutes: Seconds 00:00 to 99:59 Hours: Minutes. N/C contact open For relay coils Qx” 0 = Coil not energized 1 = Coil energized Note The examples shown are based on easy500 and easy700. press the ALT button to toggle contact I1 between N/C and N/O contact. 00:00 to 99:59 Resolution easy500. visualisation Programming E Parameters Time range and setpoint time Seconds: 0. easy800 and MFD…CP8… provide four contacts and one coil per rung. MFD…CP8… 5 ms 1s 1 min. easy700 10 ms easy800. N/C contact closed 1 = N/O contact closed.

A parallel circuit of normally closed contacts controls Q2 (NOR circuit). Logic table I1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 I2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 I3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Q1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Q2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-55 . I1-I2-I3-ÄQ1 I1-I2-I3-ÄQ2 Parallel switching Q1 is controlled via a parallel circuit of several normally open contacts (OR circuit). control. Logic table I1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 I2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 I3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Q1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Q2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 I1u------ÄQ1 I2s I3k I1u------ÄQ2 I2s I3k 1 Q2” is actuated via three normally closed contacts connected in series (NAND circuit). you can connect up to three make or break contacts in series within a rung. Use M marker relays if you need to connect more than three make contacts in series. In the easy circuit diagram. visualisation Programming E Series connection Q1 is controlled by a series circuit consisting of three make contacts (AND circuit).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

I2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Contact Q1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Coil Q1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 An XOR circuit stands for an “Exclusive Or” circuit. 1-56 . visualisation Programming E Changeover circuit Logic table I1 I1-I2u---ÄQ1 I1-I2k 1 A two-way circuit is made in easy using two series connections that are combined to form a parallel circuit (XOR).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. control. even in the event of a wire break. A self-latching circuit with wire break monitoring can alternatively be wired using the Set and Reset coil functions. The machine is switched on at the input terminals via normally open contact S1 and is switched off via normally closed contact S2. S1 normally open contact on I1 S2 normally closed contact on I2 I1-------SQ1 I2-------RQ1 Self-latching A combination of a series and parallel connection is used to wire a latching circuit. Logic table I1 0 1 0 1 I2 0 0 1 1 Q1 0 1 1 0 1 The hold-on (self-maintaining) circuit is used to switch machines on and off. I2 is always closed when not actuated. Only when a contact is closed. the current flows via contact Q1 until I2 is actuated. S2 breaks the connection to the control voltage in order to switch off the machine. S1 normally open contact on I1 S2 normally closed contact on I2 Latching is I1uI2----ÄQ1 established by Q1k contact Q1 which is connected in parallel to I1. is the coil energized. When I1 is actuated and reopened. This ensures that the machine can be switched off.

S1 normally open contact on I1 I1-------äQ1 On-delayed timing relays The on-delay can be used to override a short impulse or with a machine. control. I2 inverts the break contact signal of S2 and only switches if S2 is activated in order to disconnect the machine or in the event of a wire break. S1 normally open contact on I1 I1-------TT1 T1-------ÄM1 1 Permanent contact To energize a relay coil continuously. to start a further operation after a time delay. visualisation Programming E Coil Q1 latches if I1 is activated. make a connection of all contact fields from the coil to the leftmost position. and then the“R”-coil. even if I1 is switched on. Logic table ---------ÄQ1 Logic table I1 0 1 0 1 Status of Q1 0 0 1 1 Q1 0 1 1 0 --1 Q1 1 1-57 . This will ensure that the machine will be switched off when I2 is actuated.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Impulse relays An impulse relay is often used for controlling lighting such as for stairwell lighting. Keep to the order that each coil is wired in the easy circuit diagram: first wire the “S”-coil.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. L S1 S2 Q11 Q12 Q11 Q13 K1 Q12 Q13 N 1-58 K1 Q11 Q12 . and also the time delay between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor. control. visualisation Programming E Wiring of contacts and relays Hardwired Wiring with easy t 1 t S1 S1 S2 K1 K1 S2 K1 P1 P1 Star-delta starting You can implement two star-delta circuits with easy. delta contactors. The advantage of easy is that it is possible to select the changeover time between star and .

you can combine star-delta starting with the time switch function. 50. I1u------TT1 dT1----ÄQ1 dT1----TT2 hT2----ÄQ2 If your easy has an integral time switch. 60 ms) 1-59 . delta on (30. visualisation Programming E L N S1 1 Q11 S2 K1 L N I1 Q1 1 2 1 Q2 2 Q11 N Q12 Q13 Function of the e circuit diagram Start/Stop of circuit with the external actuators S1 and S2. use easy to also switch the mains contactor. control. I1: Mains contactor switched on Q1: Star contactor ON Q2: Delta contactor ON T1: Changeover time star/delta (10 to 30 s) T2: Wait time between star off. 40. In this case.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. The mains contactor starts the timing relay in the logic relay.

visualisation Programming E Stairway lighting For a conventional circuit a minimum of five elements are required. S2 E1 E2 E3 S3 L N K3 K1 K3 Q12 K2 Q11 Q12 Q12 Q11 K1 K2 5s K3 6 min Important note Four such stairway circuits can be implemented with one easy device. two auxiliary relays. two timing relays. An impulse relay. With five connections and the easy circuit the stairway lighting is operational.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 1-60 . S1 1 easy requires only four space units. control.

Switched off automatically. control. Continuous light 1-61 . visualisation Programming E S1 S2 1 E1 E2 E3 S3 L N K1 L N I1 Q1 1 2 Button pressed briefly Light Off after 6 min. With continuous lighting this function is not active.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Button pressed for more than 5 s Light On or Off. the impulse changeover relay function is able to switch off continuous lighting where required.

the continuous lighting is also switched off. on-delayed. ondelayed. ( X.00 s) T2: Scan to determine how long the button was pressed.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. When pressed for longer than 5 s. (ü. value 5 s) T3: Switch off after the light has been on for von 6 min. visualisation Programming E The easy circuit configuration for the function below looks like this: Meaning of the contacts and relays used: I1: ON/OFF pushbutton Q1: Output relay for light ON/OFF M1:Marker relay. ( X.This is used to block the “switch off automatically after 6 minutes” function for continuous lighting. value 6:00 min. ( X. on-delayed. impulse with value 00. control. I1------uTT1 hTT2 T2-------SM1 T1u------äQ1 T3s T4k Q1uM1----TT3 h------TT4 Q1-------RM1 1-62 . it changes to continuous lighting. value 4:00 h) 1 I1-------TT2 T2-------SM1 I1u------äQ1 T3k Q1-M1----TT3 Q1-------RM1 The enhanced easy circuit diagram: after four hours. T1: Cyclical impulse for switching Q1 ON/OFF.) T4: Switch off after 4 hours continuously on.

The values in the shift register pass through the register in the following order: 1st. three or four transport steps further on. I1: Shift pulse (PULSE) I2: Information (good/bad) to be shifted (VALUE) I3: Clear content of the shift register (RESET) M1: 1st storage location M2: 2nd storage location M3: 3rd storage location M4: 4th storage location M7: Marker relay for cycle pulse M8: Cyclical pulse for shift pulse 1-63 .g. control. 3rd. Values which are no longer required are deleted via the reset input of the shift register. Block diagram of the 4-way shift register Function: Pulse Value Storage position 1 1 2 3 4 5 Reset = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 a b c d 1 2 3 4 a b c d Pulse Value Reset Storage position Allocate the value 0 with the information content bad. visualisation Programming E 4-way shift register A shift register can be used for storing an item of information – e. sorting of items into “good” or “bad” – two. 4th storage position. 2nd. A shift pulse and the value (0” or 1”) to be shifted are required for the shift register. Should the shift register be accidently deleted.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. no bad parts will be reused.

set 3rd memory position. set 1st memory position. set 4th memory position. delete Delete all memory positions h------ÄM7 dM3----RM4 dM2----RM3 dM1----RM2 hI2----RM1 M8uM3----SM4 dM2----SM3 dM1----SM2 dI2----SM1 I3------uRM1 dRM2 dRM3 hRM4 1-64 . control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. set 2nd memory position. delete 1st memory position. delete 3rd memory position. visualisation Programming E 1 I1uM7----ÄM8 Generate shift pulse 4th memory position. delete 2nd memory position.

counters. a setpoint or actual value Line 4. The text output unit D (D = Display) functions in the circuit diagram like a normal marker M. control. The setpoints of timing relays. counters. operating hours counters. visualisation Programming E Display text and actual values . DISPLAY. These texts can be triggered by the actual values of function relays such as timing relays. Several values. The set values can be edited: • easy500 and easy700. • easy800. analog value comparators. 1-65 . four values. D1 is defined as alarm text and has therefore priority over other displays. ALL EASY! 1 Example of a text display: The text display can display the following: RUNTIME M:S T1 :012:46 C1 :0355 PRODUCED ST Line 1. date. a setpoint or actual value Line 3. analog input values or time and date can be incorporated. 12 characters. analog value comparators can be modified when the text is displayed. two values. 12 characters D2 to D16/D32 are displayed when activated. When a set value is edited the corresponding display remains shown until the value transfer. easy800 can display 32 freely editable texts. display and edit set values easy500 and easy700 can display 16. SWITCHING.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. When several displays are activated they are shown one after the other every 4 seconds. operating hours counters. A precondition is that the easy is in RUN mode and before the texts are displayed the status display is shown. CONTROL. 12 characters Line 2. 12 characters. Should a text be attached to a marker this would be shown at condition 1 of the coil in the easy display. time or scaled analog values. such as actual and setpoint values from function relays.

• Graphic elements – Bit display – Bitmap – Bargraph – Message bitmap 1-66 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Example of a “screen”: • Pushbutton elements – Latching button – Button field • Text elements – Static text – Message text – Screen menu – Running text – Rolling text • Value display elements – Date and time display – Numerical value – Timing relay value display • Value entry elements – Value entry – Timing relay value entry – Date and time entry – 7-day time switch input – Year time switch entry 1 S1 S2 S3 M 3h The following screen elements can be combined. on which the display is shown. visualisation Programming E Visualisation with eHMI The visualisation with easyHMI is by “screens”. control.

controlling and measuring. Access via Ethernet is indispensable for many applications. the devices can be expanded locally or via networks. PS4 series Modular PLC. This offers a high level of flexibility for designing individual automation systems. These call for flexible. 1-67 . Moeller offers a wide range of products for communication between human and machine. Compact PLC. Another benefit is their ability to be integrated in modern communication concepts. visualisation Overview of automation products The requirements placed on automation systems today range from the special manufacturing of single units up to the series production of millions of units. control. open and modular automation products which meet these requirements. allowing you to implement optimum solutions quickly. Moeller offers worldwide economical solutions for the automation of production processes and machines. They can be used for many applications for regulating. If the integrated functions are insufficient. Moeller can offer an optimum range of products and services that can be combined for your control and visualization tasks. HMI systems Compact PLCs are programmable logic controllers which offer outstanding basic features by means of the large number of hardware and software functions. This allows us to provide more efficient solutions and optimise the efficiency of your machines and electrical systems.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. XC100/XC200 1 The outstanding feature of modular PLCs is their scalable design. Firstly to enable efficient communication between controllers and secondly for data exchange with higher-level control systems using communication standards such as OPC. The offer range includes graphical text operator panels (a section "MFD4-5-XRC30". page 1-72) and touch operator panels.

All compact PLCs are networkable and can be networked and programmed via the integrated fieldbus. Remote and local expansion options. The common programming software is Sucosoft S40.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. such as integrated setpoint potentiometers. compact in size. If additional functions are required the devices can easily be expanded locally or via networks. Integrated fieldbus interface (Suconet). a user-friendly programming package conforming to IEC 61131-3. 1 PS4C Compact PLC LE4L ocal expansion module EM4 Expansion module 1-68 . PS4 Compact PLCs are devices which offer outstanding basic features by means of the large number of hardware and software functions and can be used for many applications involving regulating. Small. controlling and measuring tasks. The controllers in this range are very versatile with a wide range of features. control. The PS4 compact PLCs have the following system characteristics: • • • • • Standard programming. • EM4 remote expansion modules. The range consists of: • Compact PLC PS4. • LE4 local expansion modules. Plug-in screw terminals. analog inputs/outputs and memory expansion modules (from PS4-150). visualisation Compact PLC.

of which 2 for PT1000/Ni1000) – 2 analog outputs • Program memory (+optional expansion) – 24 kByte (+32 kByte) – Recipe memory (optional): 32 KByte • Expandable by – Local with LE4 modules – Remote with EM4 modules – Networking: Suconet. • Inputs/outputs – 8 digital inputs – 6 digital outputs – 2 analog inputs – 1 analog output • Program memory – 24 kByte (+32 kByte optional) – Recipe memory (optional): 32 KByte • Expandable by – Local with LE4 modules – Remote with EM4 modules – Networking: Suconet . PROFIBUS-DP. PS4 PS4-141/151 – the universal genius Universal use. locally and remotely expandable for a wide range of configuration options. visualisation Compact PLC. outstanding series features.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. Ethernet PS4-341 – the high-speed PLC Even more speed and larger program and data memory. PROFIBUS-D. Ethernet 1 1-69 . Ethernet PS4-201 – the adaptable PLC Flexible for standard solutions. • Inputs/outputs – 16 digital inputs – 14 (PS4-151: 8)digital outputs – 2 analog inputs – 1 analog output • Program memory – 24 kByte (+32 kByte optional) – Recipe memory (optional): 32 KByte • Expandable by – Remote with EM4 modules – Networking: Suconet. control. • Inputs/outputs – 12 digital inputs – 8 digital outputs (12 A) – 8 analog inputs. PROFIBUS-DP. Ethernet PS4-271 – The building services specialist Locally and remotely expandable for AC applications. • Inputs/outputs – 16 digital inputs – 14 digital outputs – 2 analog inputs – 1 analog output • Program memory (+optional expansion) – 512 kByte – Recipe memory (optional): 512 KByte • Expandable by – Local with LE4 modules – Remote with EM4 modules – Networking: Suconet.

XC100/XC200 XC100 XC200 The modular PLCs of the XC200 series offer a high processing performance and outstanding communications capabilities. visualisation Modular PLC. All XC201. 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 7 3 4 5 14 15 XC-CPU101 2 DC INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 12 13 14 15 EH-XD16 DC INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 12 13 14 15 EH-XD16 DC INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 12 13 14 15 EH-XD16 DC INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 7 11 12 13 14 15 EH-XD16 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 7 3 4 5 14 15 XC-CPU201 1-70 . Locally expandable by up to 15 XI/OC modules. The modular PLC of the XC100 series is a powerful automation system for small and medium-sized applications. The OPC server also supplies the connection with standard OPC client applications.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. The OPC server also simplifies the connection with standard OPC client applications.. The integrated CANopen fieldbus interface provides the interface to the remote periphery. This includes the integrated Ethernet interface in addition to an RS 232 interface and a CANopen fieldbus interface. control.-XV devices also feature an integrated WEB server as a technological highlight.

XC100/XC200 System components • Modular PLCs – XC100 a 8 DI. 0. CANopen. Enter the numbers shown in brackets as the search criterion e. 64 – 256 KByte program/data memory. USB.05 ms/1000 instructions • XI/OC input/output modules c – Can be fitted to the XC100/200 (max. locally expandable with XI/OC I/O modules. “AWB2725-1453”. 15 modules) – Plug-in terminals with screw or springloaded terminal • easySoft-CoDeSys – Programming.5 ms/1000 instructions – XC200 b 8 DI.g. CANopen. including data handling function blocks for text display PLCs The latest version can be found at: www. testing/commissioning in a single tool For further information see the following product overview and manuals: – XC100 hardware and engineering (AWB2724-1453) – XC200 hardware and engineering (AWB2724-1491) – XI/OC hardware and engineering (AWB2725-1452) – XV100 hardware and engineering (AWB2726-1461) – easySoft-CoDeSys PLC program development (AWB2700-1437) – Function blocks for easySoft-CoDeSys (AWB2786-1456). RS 232.net/support.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 4 interrupt inputs Slot for multimedia memory card.moeller. 2 counters. 4/8 KByte for retentive data. 6 DO. 2 interrupt inputs. 1 1-71 . 0. configuring. visualisation Modular PLC. Ethernet. WEB/OPC server. 256 – 512 KByte program/data memory. control. RS 232. 6 DO.

All displays have graphics capability. All buttons can be configured by project. visualisation HMI systems Text operator panel MI4 MFD4-5-XRC-30 The 5. A separate design tool is therefore unnecessary. The high contrast LCD displays come with a durable LED backlight. Insert labels can be provided for function buttons for individual labelling. The Ethernet. This enables the display of different character sets. It can be used solely as an HMI or also as an HMI with integrated PLC functionality and integrated web server. CANopen and RS232 interfaces are integrated on the touch panel. graphics and bargraphs. The display screens are created with the easySoft-CoDeSys programming software.7" touch panel is a colour STN device based on resistive touch technology. 1 1-72 . The MI4 text operator panels are designed for simple and economical machine operation. control.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

CANopen. 422 Suconet K slave Modbus master. Suconet K + RS 232 Suconet K + RS 232 Suconet K + RS 232 Suconet K. RS232. slave Suconet K master PROFIBUS DP master PROFIBUS DP slave XIOC-NET-SK-M XIOC-NET-DP-M XIOC-NET-DP-S 1-73 . XC-CPU101-xx XIOC-SER Interfaces RS232. USB 1 serial interface with RS232C. master or slave PROFIBUS-DP. visualisation Networking PS40 Series Modbus Ethernet CANopen PROFIBUS Suconet Part no. EM4-111-. PS4-141-MM1 PS4-151-MM1 Interfaces Suconet K + RS 232 Suconet K + RS 232 1 Networking PS40 series PS4-201-MM1 PS4-271-MM1 PS4-341-MM1 LE4-501-BS1 LE4-504-BS1 LE4-504-BT1 COBOX EM4-101-. 6 LE4 Suconet K PROFIBUS-DP XC series Modbus Ethernet CANopen PROFIBUS Suconet Part no..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching. 422 Suconet K slave Modbus master.. slave Ethernet Suconet K/K1 Suconet K/K1 EM4-201-DX2 EM4-204-DX1 max.. 485. 485. CANopen 1 serial interface with RS232C. control.. slave Suconet K master PROFIBUS DP master PROFIBUS DP slave Networking XC series XIOC-NET-SK-M XIOC-NET-DP-M XIOC-NET-DP-S XC-CPU201-xx XIOC-SER Ethernet. master PROFIBUS-DP.

8” 320 X 240 320 X 240 STN mono STN mono MFD4-5-XRC-30 5. control. Text operator panel MI4 Resolution Display and operator units MI4-110-KC1 MI4-110-KD1 MI4-110-KG1/2 MI4-117-KC1 MI4-117-KD1 Touch operator panel MI4 120 X 32 120 X 32 120 X 32 120 X 32 120 X 32 MI4-130-TA1 MI4-137-KD1 Ethernet CANopen easyNet serial 3.7” 320 X 240 STN color 1-74 . visualisation Networking Display and operator panels CANopen PROFIBUS MPI Suconet 1 Part no.8” 3.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.

1-75 .2 .7 24 V 0V I I R IA/QA .4 .1 .1 U0 U1 U10 0V 1 A1 2 F3 .5 R .6 . control.4 .3 .0 .5 . earthed operation 1 1 3 5 1 F2 I> I> I> 2 4 6 2 L1 N PE ** F1 T1 1 MM * +24 V 0V T2 +24 V 0V * 0V 2 +24 V 2.3 .6 .5 mm 2 L1 N X1 B1 A B2 A PRG Suconet K .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.2 .4 .1 . visualisation Engineering PS4 Compact PLC PS4-151-MM1 • Wiring for a 230 V AC supply circuit • Relay contacts with different potentials: 230 V AC and 24 V DC Q1 L1 L2 L3 N PE Q2 • 24 V DC inputs from an external power supply unit.7 24 V 0V . ** IEC/EN 60204-1 specifies that a control transformer is required.6 .2 .3 .0 .5 .0 .7 A1 F4 X1 F5 F6 A1 F7 M1 A2 P1 A1 X2 A1 P2 A2 A1 A1 Q11 A2 Q12 A2 Q13 A2 Q14 A2 * Insulation monitoring must be provided where the control circuits are not earthed (EN 60204-1 and VDE 0100-725).

4 .3 . control.0 .2 .2 . visualisation Engineering PS4 PS4-201-MM1 compact PLC • Shared power supply for PLC and inputs/outputs L1 L2 L3 N PE Q1 1 • Non-earthed operation with insulation monitoring 1 3 5 1 1 F2 C1 2 21 1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 13 23 33 C1 F1 2 43 F3 2 A1 S1 22 13 PE Q11 14 24 34 L1 L2 L3 PE Q11 44 L1 N S2 14 P1 12 14 T1 3 0V 11 A1 P1 A2 * T2 +24 V +24 V 0V 0V +24 V Q11 A2 1 1 F4 2 F5 2 +24 V 0 V 13 13 S3 14 14 B4 A 24 V 0V A1 PRG Suconet K . 1-76 .5 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.7 24 V 0V I Q Q13 A2 M1 A2 .1 .6 .3 .1 . 0 V must be linked with the PE potential in the control circuits.4 .5 U0 U1 U10 0V 1 2 A1 A1 A1 Q12 A2 * For operation without insulation monitoring.0 .

7 Digital Input 24 V 0V Digital Input Digital Output PRG Suconet K 1 2 * For operation without insulation monitoring.1 .0 . .5 .0 .3 .5 .5 U0 U1 U10 0 VA .6 .1 .6 .4 .6 .0 .1 .2 .2 .3 .0 . 0 V must be linked with the PE potential in the control circuits.4 . visualisation Engineering PS4 PS4-341-MM1 compact PLC • Shared power supply for PLC and inputs/outputs L1 L2 L3 N PE Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 13 23 33 • Non-earthed operation with insulation monitoring 1 1 3 5 1 1 F2 C1 2 21 1 C1 F1 2 43 F3 2 A1 S1 22 13 PE Q11 14 24 34 L1 L2 L3 PE Q11 44 L1 N S2 14 P1 12 14 T1 3 0V 11 A1 P1 A2 * T2 +24 V 0V +24 V Q11 A2 +24 V 0V F4 F5 F6 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.5 .4 .4 .7 24 V 0 VQ Digital Input Digital Output 0 VI 1-77 .3 .2 .2 .7 0 VI .1 . control.3 .

1 .10 .0 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.9 .12 . control.14 .1 .13 .6 .2 .5 .7 A1 24 V 0V I I .2 . 1-78 .5 .8 .11 .7 24 V 0V Q Q .14 .0 .3 . visualisation Engineering EM4 and LE4 EM4-201-DX2 expansion module and LE4-116-XD1 local expansion module • Inputs and outputs have a separate power supply Q1 L1 L2 L3 N PE Q2 • Earthed operation 1 1 3 5 Q3 1 3 5 I> I> I> 2 4 6 L1 N PE I> I> I> 2 4 6 L1 N PE T1 +24 V 0V * F2 T2 +24 V 1 0V * 2 1 F1 2 15 13 11 11 A1 A1 K1 18 Q15 Q16 Q17 14 12 12 K1 A2 Q12 A2 .4 .3 .15 24 V 0V P1 X2 0V .6 .10 .8 .13 .4 .9 .12 .11 .15 Suconet K1/K 1 2 13 13 A1 X1 Q18 14 Q19 Q14 14 A2 * Insulation monitoring must be provided where the control circuits are not earthed.

XC200 Device arrangement Install the rack and the PLC horizontally in the control cabinet as shown in the following figure.2 %IX 0. then the following terminals must be connected together: 24 V to 24VQ and 0 V to 0VQ.2 %QX 0. %IX 0. Outputs 0 to 3 can be loaded with 500 mA and outputs 4 and 5 with 1 A.1 %IX 0.7 %QX 0.0 %QX 0. visualisation Engineering XC100. and is potentially isolated from the bus.4 %IX 0.0 %IX 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.5 %IX 0. control.6 %QX 0. If only one supply is used. 1-79 .3 %IX 0. 1 a Kerning > 50 mm b Kerning > 75 mm to active elements c Cable duct c a b a b a b a b Terminal assignments The terminals for the power supply and the local I/O have the following assignment: Example of power supply wiring The voltage terminal 0VQ/24VQ is only used for the power supply of the local 8 inputs and 6 outputs. each with a 100 % duty factor (DF) and a simultaneity factor of 1.4 24 VQ 24 V %IX 0.1 %QX 0.5 0 VQ 0V The wiring example shows the wiring with a separate power supply for the PLC and the IO terminals.3 %QX 0.

75 – 0. The interface is not electrically isolated. control. 1 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 CANopen interface Assignment of the 6-pole Combicon connector: Terminal 6 + 24 V H 0VH + 24 VQ H 0 VQ H Signal GND CAN_L CAN_H GND CAN_L CAN_H Serial interface RS 232 This interface is used by the XC100/XC200 to communicate with the PC.60 0. XC200 You use the XT-SUB-D/RJ45 programming cable for the physical connection.34 – 0.50 – 0. The physical connection is implemented via an RJ -45 interface.50 – 0.34 You can use the COM1 or COM2 interface on the PC. The connector has the following assignment: Pin RS232 (XC-CPU101/ 201) 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 Use only a cable that is permissible for CANopen with the following properties: • Surge impedance 108 to 132 O • Capacitance per unit length < 50 pF/m 120 O 120 O CAN_H CAN_L CAN_GND CAN_H CAN_L CAN_GND ETH (XC-CPU201) Baud rate [Kbit/s] 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 – TxD GND – – – Rx– – – Rx+ Tx– Tx+ 20 125 250 500 1000 Length [m] 7 GND – 1000 500 250 100 40 0.60 0.80 0. visualisation Engineering XC100.25 – 0. 1-80 Loop resistance [O/km] 16 40 40 60 70 8 RxD – Core crosssection [mm2] .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Switching.60 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 1 1-81 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 1 1-82 .

DV51 connecting examples DF6 connecting examples DV6 connecting examples Rapid Link system 2-2 2-7 2-29 2-33 2-37 2-40 2-56 2-70 2-74 2-80 2-82 2-88 2 2-1 . DM4 Frequency inverters DF. DV DF51.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Page General Basics of drives engineering DS soft starters DM soft starters DS6 connection examples DS4 connection examples Connection examples.

As a general rule. semi-conductor Electro mechanical Frequencyinverter Motor protection Switching Control M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ Three-phase asynchronous motor A drive task first requires a drive motor whose characteristics with regard to speed. • Where an infinitely adjustable speed or a torque adjustment is necessary. Switching Frequent and silent switching Soft starting Speed control Power distribution Short-circuit. overload Electro mechanical Short-circiuit. . so do the requirements made of the electric drives: • During DOL starting (star-delta. torque and control options are in accord with the set task. the application determines the drive. Soft starters eliminate these to ensure gentle starting and prevent an excessive burden on the power source. semi-conductor Electronic Short-circiuit. short-circuit and overload protection. superfast semiconductor fuses are required for type “1” coordination and may be needed for type “2” coordination. Its popularity is the result of a rugged. overload. frequency inverters (U/f inverters.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives General The complete power supply and control programme for motors As the applications differ. contactless semiconductor contactors are used. 2-2 The three-phase asynchronous motor is the world’s most common electric motor. servo) are used today. standardized sizes and low cost. semi-conductor Electro mechanical Electronic starter Protection Short-circuit. In addition to conventional line. unwanted current and torque peaks occur. the motor is switched with an electromechanical contactor. simple construction. overload. high degrees of protection. 2 • In the simplest case. vector frequency inverters. reversing starter or pole-switching). • If frequent and/or silent switching is required. Combinations consisting of motor protection and line protection are termed motor starter.

an alternating voltage is applied to each phase in turn at a time delay of 120 °. M. (synchronous speed. Slip speed: ns – n s = ns Speed of an asynchronous machine: f x 60 n = (1 – s) p L1 MB ML n N nS n The three-phase motor contains three phase windings that are offset from one another by 120 °/p (p = number of pole pairs). pull-out torque MK and rated load torque MN. 2-3 . n = 1500 r. the asynchronous motor’s rotor can not reach the rotating field’s synchronous speed even at idle. The motor speed is determined by the number of The motor’s electrical and mechanical rating are recorded on its nameplate. The difference between synchronous speed and rotor speed is termed slip. speed of rotating field) Because of the induction effect. The direction of rotation can be reversed by swapping over two of the supply phases: Three-phase motors have typical starting characteristics.p. To generate a rotating field in the motor. mains frequency = 50 Hz. I I A MA MN MM IN 0 Ms Mk ns = f x 60 p 2 ns = Revolutions per minute f = Frequency of voltage in Hz p = Number of pole pairs Example: 4-pole motor (number of pole pairs = 2).m. pullup torque MS. L1 L2 L3 The output power is as follows: P2 = Mxn 9550 h = P2 P1 0 90° 180° 270° 360° P1 = U x I xW3 x cos v P1 = Electrical rating in kW P2 = Mechanical shaft rating in kW M = Torque in Nm n = Speed in rpm h = Efficiency 120° 120° 120° The effect of induction produces the rotating field and a torque in the rotor winding.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives General pole pairs and the frequency of the supply voltage. with starting torque MA.

three-phase asynchronous motors are connected to their power supply with six Star connection Delta connection L3 V1 ULN L1 ILN ULN = W3 x UW ILN = IW W1 W2 V2 U2 U1 L3 V2 V1 L2 ULN L1 ILN ULN = UW ILN = W3 x IW W1 L2 U2 U1 W2 U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 W2 Notes U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 In continuous operation.85 1430 U/min 50 Hz Iso. the mains voltage must be the same as the motor’s rated voltage. There are basically two connection configurations: star and delta. F IP 54 t IEC34-1/VDE 0530 Dy S1 U1 V1 W1 As a rule.-Kl.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives General Motor & Co GmbH Typ 160 l Nr. W2 U2 V2 2 400/690 V 29/17 A 15 kW y 0. terminal bolts. 12345-88 3 ~ Mot. 2-4 .

n = constant My ~ l Md. n = constant D IN MN y IN MN nN U 100 % U 100 % nN D 58 % y t t 2-5 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives General Starting and operating methods The most important starting and operating methods for three-phase asynchronous motors include: DOL starters (electromechanical) Star-delta circuit (electromechanical) 2 D y M 3h M 3h M ~ I.

U 100 % U2 nN . nmax U 100 % U Boost 30 % t Ramp t U Boost t Ramp t UBoost = Start pedestal (adjustable) tRamp = Ramp time (adjustable) U2 = Output voltage (adjustable) UBoost = Start pedestal (adjustable) tRamp = Ramp time (adjustable) 2-6 . n = constant M ~ U/f...Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives General Soft starter and solid state contactor (electronic) Frequency inverter (electronic) 2 Hz A RUN POWER ALARM I PRG O PRG ENTER M 3h M 3h M ~ U2.. n = variable IN MN IN MN nN n0 n1 n2 ..

The controlled drive can be operated at rated-load torque even at low speeds. Vector frequency inverters While conventional frequency inverters control three-phase motors using a charactieristiccontrolled U/f (voltage/frequency) relationship. the motor). Semiconductor contactors Semiconductor contactor allow fast.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Power electronics devices The power electronics devices provide infinitely variable adjustment of physical variables – such as speed or torque – to the application process. Switching takes place automatically at the ideal point in time and suppresses unwanted current and voltage peaks. converted in the power electronics apparatus and fed to the consumer (i. This allows an opimized control of the torque for demanding applications (mixers and agitators. vector frequency inverters work using a sensorless. pumps or fans). The voltage reduction causes a quadratic torque reduction in relation to the motor's normal starting torque. The power is drawn from the electrical mains. transport and conveying installations). The controlled variable is the motor current.g.e. three-phase system with variable voltage and frequency. Soft starters Soft starters ramp the voltage fed to the motor up to 100% of the mains voltage. The motor starts virtually jerk-free. This voltage/frequency control enables stepless speed control of three-phase motors. silent switching of three-phase motors and resistive loads. Soft starters are therefore especially well suited to starting loads with a quadratic speed or torque characteristic (e. extruders. flow-oriented control of the motor’s magnetic field. 2 2-7 . Frequency inverters Frequency inverters convert the AC or threephase system with its constant voltage and frequency into a new.

DV51-320.2 (230 V) 4–7.9–32 1.5 (400 V) 0.37–7.. Rated operational current [A] 11–41 Mains supply voltage [V] 3AC 110–500 Assigned motor rating [kW] – 2 Semiconductor contactor for resistive and inductive load Soft starters Soft starter with bidirectional operation Soft starter with internal bypass relay Soft starter with bypass relay and bidirectional operation Soft starters (in-line connection type) Soft starters (delta connection type) Frequency inverters DS4-340-M DS4-340-M DS4-340-MR DS4-340-MX DS6-340-MX DS4-340-MXR 6–23 6–23 16–23 41–200 16–31 3 AC 110 – 500 3 AC 110 – 500 3 AC 110 – 500 3 AC 230 – 460 3 AC 110 – 500 2.6–11 17.5–260 3 AC 230 – 460 3 AC 230 – 460 1/3 AC 230 3 AC 230 3 AC 400 3 AC 400 1/3 AC 230 3 AC 230 3 AC 400 3 AC 400 7.25–2..5 (400 V) 11–132 (400 V) 0.18–2.5–32 1.4–10 15. DV6-340.5–110 (400 V) 7..2 (230 V) 4–7.5 (230 V) 0..2 –11 (400 V) 2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Moeller drives Designation Part no.5 – 15 (400 V) DM4-340 DM4-340 DF51-322 DF51-320 DF51-340 DF6-340 DV51-322.75 – 132 (400 V) Vector frequency inverters 2-8 . DV51-340. 16–900 16–900 1.5 – 15 (400 V) 18.5–16 2..2 –11 (400 V) 7...37–7..5–16 22–230 1.5 (230 V) 0.5 – 500 (400 V) 11–900 (400 V) 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering POWER Hz A RUN ALARM I PRG O PRG 2 ENTER DS4 soft starters DF frequency inverters DM soft starter DV vector frequency inverters 2-9 .

electronic semiconductor contactors are required. and especially at low rated output (up to about 2. the connection is made with an electromechanical contactor. slippage being s = (ns – n)/ns. 2 I Ie 7 6 5 4 M2 MN 1 3 2 1 ML 0.5 0..2 kW). According to IEC/EN 60947.5 0. In this control mode – on the mains at fixed voltage and frequency – the speed of the asynchronous motor is only slightly below the synchronous speed ns ~ f. type “2” coordination requires the use of a superfast semiconductor fuse..75 1 n/nN I/Ie: 6.10 Features of DOL starting • For low.25 0.2.and medium-power three-phase motors • Three connection lines (circuit layout: star or delta) • High starting torque • Very high mechanical load • High current peaks • Voltage dips • Simple switching devices If an application demands frequent and/or silent switching. Due to rotor slippage.. the semiconductor contactor must be protected with a superfast fuse. On starting (s = 1) a high starting current occurs.5 conditions prevent the effective use of electromechanical switching elements.25. the threephase motor is connected directly to mains voltage. reaching up to ten times the rated current Ie. For type “1” coordination. In most applications. . In addition to short-circuit and overload protection.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering DOL start In the simplest case. or if adverse environmental 2-10 n/nN M/MN: 0. the operating speed [n] deviates from this value in relation to the rotating field: n = ns x (1 – s). – the majority of cases – a superfast semiconductor fuse is not necessary..75 1 0.25 0.

75 1 1 n/nN I/Ie: 1..2.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 0.75 ML 0. 2 convenient motor control. The customer saves on expensive wiring and installation time and reduces the likelihood of faults.5 Features of star-delta starting • For low.5.to high-power three-phase motors • Reduced starting current • Six connection cables n/nN M/MN: 0.. The completely factory prewired SDAINL stardelta combination from Moeller provides . such as – Heater elements in extruders – Heater elements in kilns – Controlling lighting systems.5 • Reduced starting torque • Current peak on changeover from star to delta • Mechanical load on changeover from star to delta 2-11 . – Controlling pumps in paint processing plants. • Other applications: Non-motor-driven loads. I Ie 7 6 5 4 M2 MN 1 3 2 1 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Here are a few examples: • Building services management: – Reversing drive for lift doors – Starting heat-exchanger units – Starting conveyor belts • In critical atmospheres: – Controlling filling station petrol pump motors Motor start in star-delta configuration Most commonly used for starting three-phase motors in the star-delta circuit layout.

to high-power three-phase motors • No current peaks • Zero maintenance • Reduced adjustable starting torque n/nN M/MN: 0. 2 I Ie 7 6 5 4 M2 MN 1 3 2 1 ML 0.. it matches the motor to the load behaviour of the driven machine and accelerates it smoothly.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Soft starters (electronic motor start) The characteristic curves for DOL and stardelta starting show sudden current and torque changes.75 1 0. Soft starters present an electronic alternative to the conventional star-delta switch. Providing infinitely variable control of the three-phase motor’s supply voltage in the starting phase.25 0.75 1 n/nN I/Ie: 1.. especially at medium and high motor ratings: • • • • High mechanical machine loads Rapid wear Increased servicing costs High supply costs from the power supply companies (peak current calculation) • High mains and generator load • Voltage dips with a negative effect in other consumers The ideal scenario of a smooth torque build-up and a controlled current reduction in the starting phase is made possible by the electronic soft starter.. This avoids mechanical jolting and suppresses current peaks.25 0.1 2-12 .5 0..15. which have a number of negative effects.5 Features of the soft starters • For low.5 0.

however. It is advisable to use this circuit type only with motors of a similar rating. protect each motor with thermistors and/or overload relays. however. Problems may arise during starting if there are significant differences in the connected motors' ratings (e. 1.g. The lower-rated motors may not be able to reach the required torque due to the relatively large ohmic resistance of these motors’ stators.5 kW and 11 kW) which are connected in parallel to the output of a soft starter. F11 F12 L1 L2 L3 F1 Q1 2 Q11 L1 L2 L3 Q21 T1 T2 T3 M1 M 3 M2 M 3 2-13 . Caution! Switching must not take place in the soft starter’s output as the resulting voltage peaks can damage the thyristors in the power section. requiring a higher voltage during starting. allow the behaviour of the individual motors to be controlled. This does not.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Parallel connection of several motors to a single soft starter You can also use soft starters to start several motors connected in parallel. Note The total current consumption of the connected motors must not exceed the soft starter’s rated operational current Ie. Each motor must be separately fitted with suitable overload protection. Note You must.

page 2-15 Using soft starters for motors with power-factor correction Caution! No capacitive loads must be connected at the soft starter’s output. frequency inverters or UPS). contactors and rotor resistors of multistage three-phase stator automatic starters can be replaced with soft starters. page 8-53. a figure. Power-factor corrected motors or motor groups must not be started with soft starters. Mains-side compensation is permissible when the ramp time (starting phase) has completed (i. Control is comparable to cascade control with the difference that the changeover is made not to the next motor but to the other winding (TOR = top-of-ramp signal). use capacitors and correction circuits only with a choke fitted upstream. Note If electronic devices (such as. a figure. Note All changeovers (high/low speed) must take place at standstill. a section "Polechanging motors".Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Using a soft starter with pole-changing motors Soft starters can be connected in the supply line before pole-changing. This is done by removing the rotor resistors and assigned contactors and short-circuiting the sliprings of the motor’s rotor. the TOR (Top of Ramp) signal has been issued) and the capacitors exhibit a series inductance. Using soft starters with three-phase slipring motors When upgrading or modernizing older installations. soft starters.e. The soft starter is then connected into the incomer and provides stepless starting of the motor. page 2-16 2 2-14 . The start signal must be issued only when a contact sequence has been selected and a start signal for pole-changing was set.

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13 F1 F1 14 14 Q1 Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 I> I> I> 2 4 6 Q11 2 4 6 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 Q43 Q11 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 2 4 6 Q42 1 3 5 Q41 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Q21 T1 T2 T3 U V W PE Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 K U2 V2 W2 R3 R2 U1 V1 W2 R1 U V W U3 M 3 L M V3 M 3 M1 K L M W3 M1 2-15 2 .

2 2-16 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q11 Q11 L1 L2 L3 Q11 Q12 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Q21 T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 Q21 TOR T1 T2 T3 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 M1 M1 M 3 M 3 Caution! M1 M 3 Not permissible .

In this case the manufacturer must provide appropriate maintenance instructions. the contactor or soft starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit and does not have to be capable of continued use without repairs or parts replacements.1: Type 1 coordination In type “1” coordination. Type 2 coordination In type “2” coordination. 8. also for type “2” coordination.2.5.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Soft starters and classification type to IEC/EN 60947-4-3 The following classification types are defined in IEC/EN 60947-4-3. the contactor or soft starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit and must be capable of continued use without repairs or parts replacements. This is part of normal operation (for the fuse). For hybrid control devices and contactors. The coordinated short-circuit protection device (SCPD) must trip in the event of a short-circuit. 2 L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I> I> I> Q1 I> I> I> F3 F3 L1 L2 L3 Q21 T1 T2 T3 Q21 L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 M1 M 3 M1 M 3 F3: Superfast semiconductor fuse 2-17 . Blown fuses must be replaced. there is a risk of contact welding.

stepless speed control of three-phase motors. f. correction on the mains side. This eliminates the need for p. (I) Constant Mains Energy flow F M 3~ Motor I ~ M f ~ n PL = M. ~ 1) from the supplying mains. f. L1 L2. I Variable Electronic actuator Pel = U x I x √3 x y Frequency inverters convert constant mains voltage and frequency into a DC voltage. Driving Braking 2 U. a b c IGBT L1.f. The reactive power needed for motor operation is supplied by the DC link. from which they generate a new three-phase supply with variable voltage and frequency for the three-phase motor.f.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Design and mode of operation of frequency inverters Frequency inverters provide variable. The frequency inverter draws almost only active power (p. n m v J Load Mxn 9550 U. N L3 M 3~ d a Rectifier b DC link c Inverter with IGBT d Open-/closed-loop control 2-18 .

.1. The possibilities for individual or plant-specific coordination are determined by the specific features of the inverters and by the modulation procedure used.5 according to various principles (modulation procedures) to change the frequency inverter’s output frequency.5 0. In voltage vector control mode.25 0. the amplitude and frequency of the voltage vector are controlled in relation to slippage and load current. feedback. The 2-19 ..75 1 0.8 Modulation procedure of inverters An inverter basically consists of six electronic switches and is today usually made with IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors).. the active and reactive current components are calculated from the measured motor currents.. compared with the values from the motor model and. corrected.5 0. This allows large speed ranges and highly accurate speeds to be achieved without speed n/nN M/MN: 0. 2 M MN 2 I Ie 7 6 5 4 M MN 1 3 2 1 ML I IN 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering The frequency-controlled three-phase motor is today a standard component for infinitely variable speed and torque regulation. energy-saving power either as an individual drive or as part of an automated installation. providing efficient. This control method (U/f control) is the preferred method on a frequency inverter with the parallel operation of several motors. The control circuit switches the IGBTs on and off Sensorless vector control The switching patterns for the inverter are calculated with the PWM (pulse width modulation) switching patterns.1.25 0. if necessary. In flow-regulated vector control.1.75 1 n/nN I/Ie: 0.

2-20 . The key advantage of sensorless vector technology is that the motor current can be X1 R1 X'2 regulated to match the motor’s rated current. Especially noteworthy is the drive’s dynamic output at low speeds. The two current components are set according to their value and phase in a rotating coordinate system (o to the stator reference system (a. The physical motor data required for the model is formed from the entered and measured (self-tuning) parameters. This allows operation at the current limit and the achievement of large speed ranges and highly accurate speeds. The following illustration shows a simplified equivalent circuit diagram for the asynchronous motor and associated current vectors: 2 R'2 s iw b i1 iw o i1 u1 im Xh ~ im V ib im d e a b c ia a b c d e Stator Air gap Rotor Rotor flow-oriented Stator-oriented i1 = Stator current (phase current) iµ = Flux-generating current component iw = Torque-generating current component R’ /s = Slip-dependent rotor resistance 2 In sensorless vector control. the fluxgenerating current iµ and the torquegenerating current iw are calculated from the measured stator voltage u1 and stator current i1. for example in lifting and winding applications.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering amplitude. frequency and inclination of the voltage vector are controlled directly. This allows dynamic torque regulation to be implemented for three-phase asynchronous motors. taking into account the saturation of the main field and the iron loss. b). The calculation is performed with a dynamic motor model (electrical equivalent circuit of the three-phase motor) with adaptive current regulators.

2-21 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering EMC-compliant connection of frequency inverters Network Cable protection F 2 Switching Q Main choke R Interference filters K Frequency inverters T 3~ I PRG O ENTER Motor cable 3 Motor M M 3~ The EMC-compliant mounting and connection is described in detail in the respective devices’ manuals (AWB).

The necessary measures work only in combination and should be taken into consideration at the engineering stage. Electrical and magnetic disturbance fields can be limited to the required levels.e. its immunity) while itself not emitting excessive electromagnetic interference into the environment. All conducting metallic enclosure sections must be electrically connected to the earth potential. To subsequently modify an installation to meet EMC requirements is possible only at considerable additional cost. observe the following information. since this is where high frequency current flows to earth. Earthing measures These must be implemented to comply with the legal standards and are a prerequisite for the effective use of further measures such as filters and screening. 2 T1 K1 M1 M 3h Tn Kn Mn M 3h PE K1 = Radio interference filter T1 = Frequency inverter PE PE e PE PE 2-22 . The contact points must be free from paint and rust. the important factor is not the cable’s crosssection. Measures for EMC-compliant installation are: • Earthing measures • Screening measures • Filtering measures • Chokes They are described in more detail below. For EMC. EMC compliance The EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) of a device is its ability to withstand electrical interference (i. but its surface. highly conductive and routed directly to the central earthing point (potential equalization bar or star earth).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Notes about correct installation of frequency inverters For an EMC-compliant installation. Use galvanized mounting plates and materials. The tests and values are based not on individual components but on a typical complete drive system. All earthing points must be low-impedance. The IEC/EN 61800-3 standard describes the limit values and test methods for emitted interference and noise immunity for variablespeed electrical drives (PDS = Power Drives System).

U. earth at both ends with large-area connections b PVC outer sheath c Drain wire (copper. 1 x green/yellow e Textile and PVC fillers e d c 2-23 . W. PE) d PVC cable insulation 3 x black. V.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Screening measures L1 L2 L3 PE M 3 2 F 300 mm a b Four-core screened motor supply cable: a Copper screen braid.

Control and signal lines must be twisted and can be double-screened. the inner screen being connected to the voltage source at one end and the outer screen at both ends. 4. Interruptions in the screen. Do not connect the screen with pigtails.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Screening reduces emitted interference (noise immunity of neighbouring systems and devices against external influences). Four-wire motor cables are recommended (three phases plus PE). Free. motor. unscreened cables should not be longer than about 100 mm. must have a low impedance and be bridged with a large contact area. internal DC link. Cables laid between the frequency inverter and the motor must be screened.. braking resistance b Signal cables: analog and digital control signals Inside control panels.2 x 8. sever the screen near the module and establish a large-area contact with earth potential (PES.1 o 3.2 e o 4. but the screen must not be considered a replacement for the PE cable. 2 b a f 100 a Power cables: mains. screen terminal). such as terminals. too. Example: Screen attachment for maintenance switch MBS-I2 Note Maintenance switches at of frequency inverter outputs must be operated only at zero current.5 2-24 . cables should be screened if they are more than 30 cm long. To do this. The screen must be connected to earth (PES) at both ends with a large-area connection. etc. The motor cable must be laid separately from the control and signal lines (>10 cm) and must not run parallel to any power cables. contactors. chokes.

and which must be limited to a prescribed level (emitted interference). with reference value potentiometer R1 (M22-4K7) and mounting accessories ZB4-102-KS1 Filtering measures Radio interference filters and line filters (combinations of radio interference filter and mains choke) protect against conducted highfrequency interference (noise immunity) and reduce the frequency inverter’s high-frequency interference.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Example for screen earth kit and signal cables: 1 H O L 2 1 P24 15 2 3 Cu 2. which is transmitted through or emitted from the mains cable.5 mm M4 2 2 F 20 m PES PE PES 4K7 M R1 REV M FWD ZB4-102-KS1 Example for a standard connection of frequency inverter DF5. Note The mounting surfaces of frequency inverters and radio interference filters must be free from paint and must have good HF conductivity. Filters should be installed as closely as possible to the frequency inverter to keep the length of the connecting cable between frequency inverter and filter short. I O 2-25 .

At the frequency inverter’s output. can be much larger than the rated values. The use of mains chokes is especially recommended where several frequency inverters are connected to a single mains supply point when other electronic devices are also connected to the same supply network. A reduction of the mains current interference is also achieved by installing DC chokes in the frequency inverter’s DC link. or • an additional conductor must be fitted. chokes are used if the motor cables are long and if multiple motors are connected in parallel to the output. This reduces the current harmonics and improves the mains quality.5 mA. To prevent dangerous voltages. EN 60335 states that one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: • the protective conductor must have a crosssection f 10 mm2. and protect the motors from excessive rates of voltage rise (> 500 V/µs) resulting from high pulse frequencies. or • the protective conductor must be opencircuit monitored. the filters must be earthed. chokes reduce the current-dependent phase effect and improve the power factor.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Filters produce leakage currents which. the earthing connections and cables must have a low resistance and large contact surfaces. in the event of a fault (such as phase failure or load unbalance). Z1 L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 R2 S2 T2 2 G1 L/L1 L2 N/L3 U V W Chokes Fitted on the frequency inverter’s input side. M 3h e e E E E E With leakage currents f 3. 2-26 . As the leakage currents are high-frequency interference sources. They also enhance the protection of the power semiconductors in the event of an earth fault or short-circuit.

g. e.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Example: EMC-compliant mounting and connection 2 15 PES PE PES a PES b PES W2 U2 V2 U1 V1 W1 PE PES c a Metal plate. MSB-I2 b Earthing terminal c Maintenance switches 2-27 .

a clear space of at least 100 mm should be maintained both above and below the device. from the mains supply to the motor feeder. suppressor. Detailed information on the individual device series is provided in the installation instructions (AWA) and manuals (AWB). If you prefer to use the selection tool online. this is available at: www. the assigned products are shown immediately. frequency inverter. The slide shows immediately the components of a complete drive train. Selection aids 2 F 30 ° F3 0° F 30° F 30° To ensure adequate air circulation for cooling. A range of different mains voltages as well as open-loop and closed-loop control of frequency inverters are shown. as well as the mains choke. f 100 a f 100 a a Free space at the sides depends on the device series.net/en/support/slider/index.moeller. Once the required motor rating is set. The selector slide allows a fast and clear configuration of the individual drive solution components required without the need for a PC or any other tool.jsp 2-28 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Basics of drives engineering Mounting instructions Electronic devices such as soft starters and frequency inverters must normally be fitted vertically. motor choke and sinusoidal filter. All information is available in German and English so that the slide can be used internationally. This includes the mains fuse and mains contactor. The selector slide can be obtained free of charge.

5 to 10 s) • Adjustable start pedestal (30 to 100 %) • Relay contact (N/O contact): operating signal. 0.5 t-Stop (s) 0 10 2-29 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS soft starters DS4 product features • Construction. mounting and connection as for contactor • Automatic control voltage detection – 24 V DC g 15 % – 110 to 240 V AC g 15 % – safe starting at 85 % Umin • Operation indication by LED • Individually adjustable start and stop ramps (0.5 0 50 80 40 60 10 U-Start (%) 1 30 2 100 U-Start t t-Start t-Stop 5 0.5 A – safe starting at 85 % Umin • Operation indication by LED • Individually adjustable start and stop ramps (1 to 30 s) • Adjustable start pedestal (30 to 100 %) • Two relays (NO contact): Ready and TOR (top of ramp) 2 2 1 5 U t-Start (s) 0. TOR (top of ramp) DS6 product features • Design and terminals in power section as per circuit-breaker (NZM) • External control voltage – 24 V DC g 15 %.

-MR DS6-340-...Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS soft starters Example: Setting values and applications t-Start.-MX M 3 2-30 .....-MX DS4-340-...-M DS4-340-. t-Stop l 10 s 2 U-Start l1s l 30 % Jl0 l 60 – 90 % JlL Power section versions L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 DS T1 T2 T3 DOL Starters DOL starter with bypass Reversing starters Reversing starter with internal bypass DS4-340-..-MXR DS4-340-..

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS soft starters Connecting star points when using soft starters or semiconductor contactors Note DS4 and DS6 soft starters are two-phase controlled. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Q21 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 The connection of a three-phase load in the star point at PE or the N conductor is not permissible. Risk of death or serious injury. a dangerous voltage is also present in the OFF/STOP state. When the power supply (ULN) is switched on. 2T1 4T2 6T3 PE M 3~ 2-31 . Example DS4: L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 2 M1 M 3 R1 Caution! Not permissible: Danger! 1L1 3L2 5L3 PE Dangerous voltage.

on M(X)R the current rotating field direction is also indicated. REV.5 s interval Lit OFF U Ue A1. ramp is active (soft start or soft stop). LEDs lit only briefly. Error 2 Lit OFF OFF OFF OFF Flashing at 0. on M(X)R the current rotating field direction is also indicated. Device in operation.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS soft starters LED displays Example DS4: Red LED Green LED Lit Function Init. but no start signal Device in operation. Init itself takes about 2 seconds Depending on device: – All devices: LED briefly lit once – DC devices: after a brief pause.5 s interval OFF Flashing at 2 s intervals Flashing at 0. A2 FWD. 0 Uout = 100 % Run(FWD/REV-) LED Error-LED Initialization Fault Ready for operation In ramp Top of ramp 2-32 . the LEDs briefly light up again Device is off Ready for operation. power supply OK. top-of-ramp reached.

such as motor protective relays.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DM soft starters Product features • DM4 is a three-phase controlled soft starter • Configurable.g. transformers – can be controlled with the DM4. reducing the voltage results in a reduction of the high starting currents of the three-phase motor. three-phase resistive and inductive loads – heaters. In three-phase regulator control mode. For starting motors at rated-load torque and/or for motor operation at a motor speed that is independent of the supply frequency. although the torque is also reduced [Istartup ~ U] and [M ~ U2]. intelligent interfaces can also be used: • Serial RS 232/RS 485 interface (configuration through PC software) • Suconet K fieldbus module (interface on every Moeller PLC) • PROFIBUS DP fieldbus module The DM4 soft starters provide the most convenient method of implementing soft starting. In addition to phase failure and motor current monitoring. external components. so that the soft starters do not require additional. for example. Additional plant-specific settings can be defined with an optional keypad. the motor winding temperature is signalled through the built-in thermistor input. With the soft starter. lighting systems. 2 2-33 . e. fault signal. Both openloop and – with measured value feedback – closed-loop control are possible. After starting.g. TOR (top of ramp) Ten preprogrammed parameter sets for typical applications can be simply called up with a selector switch. DM4 complies with the IEC/EN 60947-4-2 standard. communications-capable soft starter with plug-in control signal terminals and interface for optional units: – Operator control and programming unit – Serial interface – Fieldbus connection • Application selector switch with userprogrammable parameter sets for 10 standard applications • I2t controller – Current limitation – Overload protection – Idle/undercurrent detection (e. Instead of the keypad. the motor reaches its rated speed with all of the solutions described above. belt breakage) • Kickstarting and heavy starting • Automatic control voltage detection • 3 relays. a frequency inverter is required.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DM soft starters The application selector switch enables direct assignment without parameter entry.pump kickstart 4 .pump kickstart 4 .pump 3 .recip compressor 9 .standard 1 .high torque 2 .screw compressor fa ult su pp ly ru n a c/l b 2-34 .standard 1 .screw compressor flash 0 .high inertia fan 8 .light conveyor 5 .recip compressor 9 .high inertia fan 8 .low inertia fan 7 . 2 0 .heavy conveyor 6 .heavy conveyor 6 .high torque on 2 .light conveyor 5 .low inertia fan 7 .pump 3 .

In-delta circuit As a rule. the soft starter must be able to supply 1. soft starters are connected directly in series with the motor (in line). no current limitation Notes Default settings. Longer ramp-up times.fan Pump drives up to 15 kW Pump drives over 15 kW longer startup times HighInertfan High-inertia fan RecipCompres ScrewCompres Reciprocal compressor Screw compressor 1) For the “High Torque” setting. optimization matched Increased current consumption.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DM soft starters Standard applications (selector switch) Labelling on device Standard High torque1) Indication on keypad Standard High Torque Meaning Standard High breakaway torque Small pump Large pump Light conveyor Heavy-duty conveyor Low-inertia fan Fan drive with relatively small mass inertia moment of up to 15 times the motor’s inertia moment Fan drive with relatively large mass inertia moment of over 15 times the motor’s inertia moment. The DM4 soft starters also allow a delta connection. suitable without adaptation for most applications Drives with higher friction torque at standstill 2 Pump Pump Kickstart Light conveyor Heavy conveyor Low inertia fan High inertia fan Recip compressor Screw compressor Small pump Large pump LightConvey HeavyConvey LowInert. so that additional motor protection must be fitted in the parallel phase or in the supply cable. Note The delta connection is more cost-effective at motor ratings over 30 kW and when replacing star-delta switches. p. Advantage: • This circuit is cheaper because the soft starter has to be laid out for only 58 % of the motor full load current. Higher start pedestal. Disadvantages over in-line connection: • As in a star-delta circuit. the motor must be connected with six conductors.5 times the motor’s rated current. • The DM4’s overload protection is active only in one line.f. 2-35 .

86 M U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 M / 690 V 55 kW 1410 rpm 3~ 3~ 55 kW 400 V W2 U2 V2 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 W2 U2 V2 55 kW 400 V .2 2-36 In-Line ULN 400 V NZM7-125N I I I In-Delta I I I NZM7-125N-OBI DILM115 DILM115 100 A 100 A 3 DM4-340-30K (59 A) Electronic motor starters and drives DM soft starters DM4-340-55K (105 A) 400 S1 50 Hz 100 / 59 A cos ϕ 0.

2 L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I> I> I> F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 PE TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 Ready PE 0 V + 24 . Standard connection of the DS6-340-MX The terminals of NZM can be optimally adapted to those of the DS6 by using NZM1/2XAB spacers.A2 EN + A1 13 14 23 24 Q1 M1 M 3~ + 24 V 0V 2-37 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS6 connection examples Compact motor starter The devices of the DS6 series in conjunction with the mounting and connection accessories of the NZM circuit-breaker series offer the features of the compact electronic motor starters up to 110 kW.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS6 connection examples Compact motor starter DS6 soft starter. NZM circuit-breaker and P3 maintenance switch 2 ON L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 NZM1 Trip OFF I> I> I> F3 3L2 1L1 5L3 PE TOR Ready Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 PE 0 V +24 -A2 EN +A1 13 14 23 24 DS6 + 24 V 0V 1 3 4 V 5 6 W 7 Q32 2 U 8 Start/Stopp P3 M1 M 3~ 2-38 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS6 connection examples DS6-340-…-MX and NZM circuit-breaker with emergency-stop function to IEC/EN 60204 and VDE 0113 Part 1 L1 L2 L3 PE 2 a D2 U> Q1 3. 230 V 3 AC. 400 V NZM1-XUHIV208-240AC NZM2/3-XUHIV208-240AC NZM1-XUHIV380-440AC NZM2/3-XUHIV380-440AC 2-39 . NZM2) Q21:DS6 soft starters M1:motor F3: Superfast semiconductor fuses (optional) a Control circuit terminal b Undervoltage release with early-make auxiliary contact 3 AC.13 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 PE TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 Ready PE 0 V +24 -A2 EN +A1 13 14 23 24 S3 M1 M 3~ Q1 + 24 V 0V n Emergency-Stop Q1: Power and motor protection (NZM1.14 I> I> I> b D1 3.

Minimum connection of DS4-340-M(X) In the event of a fault. Note: Connecting the motor directly to mains power can cause overvoltage and destruction of the soft starter’s semiconductors.1. No contactors are required to operate individual motor feeders. unidirectional rotation In standard operation the soft starter is connected into the motor supply line. the soft starter decelerates for the set ramp time and stops. Note: The overload relay’s signalling contacts are linked into the On/Off circuit.3. Standard connection.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Linking the overload relay into the control system We recommend using an external overload relay instead of a motor-protective circuitbreaker with built-in overload relay.6 and for working on the motor is required according to EN 60204-1 section 5. 1: Start/soft start n Emergency-Stop 2-40 . A central switching element (contactor or main switch) with isolating properties to isolate the mains according to EN 60947-1 section 7. 2 L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I I I F2 F2 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 01 S3 TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 M1 M 3~ Q21 A1 A2 0: Off/soft stop. This allows controlled ramping down of the soft starter through the control section in the event of an overload.

Softstarter DS4-340-M L1 L2 L3 PE L01/L+ K1 K2t t > tStop + 150 ms K1 Q1 F2 S1 Soft Start Soft Stop I I I Q11 F2 F3 S2 Q11 1L1 3L2 5L3 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Ready Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 K1 L00/L– K2t Q11 Q21 A1 A2 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 M1 M 3~ b F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination S1: Q11 off (unguided deceleration) Additional to Q1 S2: Q11 on Q21: Soft starter b: Activation withQ11/K2t optional M1: Motor Q1: Line protection Q11:Mains contactor (optional) F2: Motor-protective relay 2-41 2 .

in addition to Q1 (optional) Q21: Soft starters M1: Motor 2-42 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Soft starter without mains contactor L1 L2 L3 PE L01/L+ K1 Q1 I I I 2 F2 S1 F2 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 S2 K1 M1 M 3~ K1 L00/L– n Emergency-Stop S1: Soft stop S2: Soft start Q21 A1 A2 Q1:Line protection F2: Overload relays F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination.

in addition to Q1 (optional) n Emergency-stop M1: Motor K1.Connection of soft starter with mains contactor L1 L2 L3 PE L01/L+ K1 Soft Stop F2 S1 K1 K2t t = 10 s Soft Start K3 K3 Q1 I I I Q11 F2 S2 K1 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples TOR A1 Q21 K1 L00/L– F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination. K3: contactor relays K2t: Timing relay (off-delayed) S1: Q11 off S2: Q11 on 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 K2t Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Q11 K3 Q21 A2 M1 M 3~ Q1: Q11: Q21: F2: Line protection Mains contactor (optional) Soft starters Overload relays 2-43 2 .

bidirectional rotation Note: The device of the DS4-..-M(X)R series have a built-in electronic reversing contactor Minimum connection of DS4-340-M(X)R function. in addition to Q1 M1: Motor n: Emergency-Stop 0: Off/Soft stop 1: FWD 2: REV 2-44 . 2 L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I I I F2 F2 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 S3 102 TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 FWD REV Q21 M1 M 3~ 0V Q1:Line protection Q21: Soft starters F2: Overload relays F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination. You need to only specify the required direction of rotation..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Reversing circuit standard connection. The DS4 then internally ensures the correct control sequence.

Reversing starter without mains contactor L1 L2 L3 PE L01/L+ Q1 F2 S1 K1 K1 S3 K2 K2 I I I Q11 F2 S2 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples TOR K2 K1 L00/L– n: Emergency-Stop Q21: Soft starters S1: Soft stop M1: Motor K1. K2: Contactor relays S2: Soft start FWD S2: Soft start REV Q21 K1 FWD REV 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 K2 Q21 0V M1 M 3~ Q1:Line protection F2: Overload relays F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination. in addition to Q1 2-45 2 .

in addition to Q1 (optional) M1:Motor 2-46 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Reversing soft starter with mains contactor 2 L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I I I Q11 F2 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 TOR Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 M1 M 3~ Q1:Line protection Q11:Mains contactor (optional) Q21:Soft starters F2: Overload relays F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination.

L01/L+ K1 F2 Soft Stop K1 Soft Start FWD K3 Soft Start REV K4 K2t t = 10 s S1 K3 K4 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples S2 K4 Q11 K3 K1 K3 FWD REV K1 K2t K4 Q21 n: Emergency-Stop S1: Q11 Off (unguided deceleration) S2: Q11 On FWD: Clockwise rotation REV: Anticlockwise rotating field 0V Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 L00/L– 2-47 2 .

-M. If an external bypass for devices with reversing function (DS 4 -. In this case. the Top-of-Ramp function is mapped to relay 13/14. have to switch the motor load. one direction of rotation Caution! The DS4-. you must include an additional bypass contactor for the second direction of rotation as well as additional interlocks to prevent a short-circuit through the bypass contactors! The bypass connection allows a direct connection of the motor to the mains to suppress heat dissipation through the soft starter.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples External bypass.-MR) is to be fitted.-MX(R) devices have built-in bypass contacts.. The soft starter controls the bypass contactor so that no further user action is required. the bypass may have to switch under AC3 conditions (for example if the Enable signal is removed with a command or the soft stop ramp time is 0). the circuit must be laid out so that either a higher-priority isolating element trips first or the bypass must be laid out to AC3. 2 2-48 ... If an Emergency-Stop requires an immediate disconnection of the voltage. therefore.. once mains voltage is reached).e. By default. Because the bypass contactor is switched only at zero current and does not. an AC1 layout can be used... The bypass contactor is actuated once the soft starter has completed the acceleration phase (i. The following types therefore only apply to DS4-.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I< I< I< F2 2 F2 F3 S3 1L1 3L2 5L3 01 TOR Q22 Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 Q21 TOR Q21 A1 A2 13 14 A1 A2 M M1 3~ S3: Q1: Q21: Q22: F2: Soft start/stop Cable protection Soft starters Bypass contactor Overload relays Q22 F3: Semiconductor fuse for Additional type 2 coordination in addition to Q1 M1: (optional) Motor 2-49 .

in addition to Q1 (optional) M1:Motor Q11 1L1 3L2 5L3 TOR Q22 Q21 2T1 4T2 6T3 13 14 Q31 M1 M 3~ 2-50 . 2 L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I I I F2 F3 Q1:Line protection Q11:Mains contactor (optional) Q21:Soft starters Q22:Bypass contactor Q31:Motor contactor F2: Overload relays F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Pump control. the bypass contactor must be laid out to AC3 here. In the latter setting the soft Pump starter is fully bypassed. But because the output circuit must not be opened during operation. single direction of rotation. the interlocks ensure that changeovers take place only after a stop. continuous operation In pump applications the bypass contactor is often required to provide emergency operation capability. This is achieved with a service switch that allows a changeover from soft starter operation to DOL starting through the bypass contactor. Note In contrast to simple bypass operation.

Pump control. single direction of rotation. continuous operation K1 S1 S4 S2 K2 K3 S5 K5 K5 K4 K6t Q22 Q21 TOR 13 K1 K3 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples K2 K2 a 14 S3 Q31 K1 K4 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 K1 K3 Q21 E2 39 K2 Q31 Q11 K5 Q21 A1 A2 K6t K4 Q22 b c d c Hand d Auto e Soft start/soft stop e f RUN g Bypass f g n Emergency-Stop a t > t-Stop + 150 ms b Enable 2-51 2 .

The set off-delay time must be greater than the ramp time. c RUN 2-52 . Observe the thermal load on the soft starter (starting frequency. page 2-54 n Emergency-Stop S1: Q11 Off S2: Q11 On a Soft start/soft stop b Simulation of RUN relay Timing relay K2T simulates the RUN signal of the DS4. you may have to select a soft starter with a higher load cycle. a section "Soft starter with motor cascade. This ensures that the next motor branch can not be connected as long as the soft starter is running. If motors are to be started at short intervals. 2 a section "Soft starter with motor cascade. To be on the safe side. keep to the following changeover sequence: • • • • • Start using soft starter Switch on bypass contactor Disable soft starter Switch soft starter output to the next motor Restart d Off-time monitoring Set the timing relay K1T so that the soft starter is not thermally overloaded: calculate the time from the soft starter’s permissible operating frequency or select a soft starter that allows the required time to be reached. control section part 1". use 15 s. To switch off individual motors. e Changeover monitoring Set the timing relay to a return time of about 2 s.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control) When starting several motors one after the other using a soft starter. current load). page 2-55 a Motor 1 b Motor 2 c Motor n i Switching off individual motors The Off switch results in all motors being switched off at the same time. you need to make use of N/C contact i. control section part 2".

2.Soft starter with motor cascade Q11: Mains contactor (optional) F3: Semiconductor fuse for type 2 coordination (optional) Q21: Soft starters M1.: Motor L1 L2 L3 N PE Q11 F3 Q21 14 1L1 2L2 3L3 TOR 2T1 4T2 6T3 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples 13 Q14 Q24 Q15 Q25 Qn Qm Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Q13 Q23 I> I> I> Qn3 I> I> I> I> I> I> M1 M 3~ M2 M 3~ Mn M 3~ 2-53 2 ....

page 2-52 . control section part 1 2 K1T K4 Q1 S1 Qn1 Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples Q14 Q24 S2 K1 K1 K4 K12 K22 Kn2 K2 Q21 TOR 13 14 K2T K4 K4 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 K1 Q21 Q11 K2 A1 A2 K2T K3 K4 K1T K4T a b c d e a section "Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)".2-54 Soft starter with motor cascade.

page 2-52 2-55 2 .Soft starter with motor cascade. control section part 2 i i i Q11 K22 Q14 Q(n-1)1 K3 Kn2 K3 Q14 Q15 Q15 K12 Q24 Q25 Q25 K(n-1)2 Qn Qm Qm Electronic motor starters and drives DS4 connection examples K12 K3 K4T Q41 Q25 K22 K4T Qn Qn Qm Kn2 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Q14 Q15 K12 Q24 a b c a section "Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)".

this is effected via the enabling signal. 2 S1 K1 S2 K1 K1 Q21 E2 39 2-56 . When the operating conditions n Emergency-Stop S1: Off S2: On Q21:Soft starters (E2 = 1 a enabled) require an immediate de-energization. for Emergency-Stop) The digital input E2 is programmed in the factory so that it has the "Enable" function.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples. DM4 Enable/immediate stop without ramp function (e. Caution! You must in all operating conditions always first stop the soft starter ("Run“ relay scanning). The soft starter is enabled only when a High signal is applied to the terminal. the regulator in the soft starter is immediately blocked and the power circuit disconnected. Normally the drive is always stopped via a ramp function. which in rare cases may destroy the thyristors of the soft starter. before you mechanically interrupt the power conductors. In the event of wire breakage or interruption of the signal by an Emergency-Stop circuit. Otherwise a flowing current is interrupted – thus resulting in voltage peaks.g. The soft starter cannot be operated without enabling signal. and after that the "Run“ relay drops out.

include a second contact of the overload relay in the On/Off circuit. The soft starter switches off but the mains contactor remains on. the soft starter’s output is immediately de-energized. b The signalling contacts of the overload relay are linked into the enabling circuit. which are shown in the following diagram: n Emergency-Stop S1: Off 2 F1 K1 S2: On Q21:Soft starters. This allows controlled ramping down of the soft starter through the control section in the event of an overload. the soft starter decelerates for the set ramp time and stops. Caution! Connecting the motor directly to mains power can cause overvoltage and destruction of the soft starter’s semiconductors. There are two options. a S1 b S2 K1 K1 Q21 E2 39 2-57 . enablr (E2 = 1 h enabled) a The overload relay’s signalling contacts are incorporated in the On/Off circuit.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples. To de-energize the mains contactor as well. In the event of a fault. In the event of a fault. DM4 Linking the overload relay into the control system We recommend using an external overload relay instead of a motor-protective circuitbreaker with built-in overload relay.

either a mains contactor upstream of the soft starter or a central switching device (contactor or main switch) is necessary. DM4 With separate contactor and overload relay L1 L2 L3 N PE Standard connection For isolation from the mains.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples. Actuation 2 Q1 I> I> I> K1 S2 Q11 S1 F2 K1 E2 F3 E1 K1 Q21 39 Q21 39 a 1L1 2L2 3L3 b L N ~ Q21 + Thermistor = – Thermistor S1: Soft start S2: Soft stop F3: Superfast semiconductor fuses (optional) a Enable b Soft start/soft stop 2T1 4T2 M 3~ 2-58 6T3 T1 T2 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples. DM4 Without mains contactor L1 L2 L3 N PE 2 Q1 I> I> I> Q2 I> I> I> a F1 F2 1L1 3L2 5L3 L N Start/Stop b ⎧ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎩ E1 E2 Enable 39 0 V Analog 0 V (E1.E2) 7 +12 +12 V DC REF 1: 0–10 V 8 REF 2: 4–20 mA Analog Out 1 62 63 1 ~ Q21 = K1.RUN + Thermistor .TOR K3 K4 0 V Analog ~ = Analog Out 2 PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 I mot M 3~ M1 c F3: Superfast semiconductor fuses (optional) a Control voltage through Q1 and F11 or separately via Q2 b See Control section c Motor current indication 2-59 .Thermistor K2.

RUN + Thermistor .E2) 7 +12 +12 V DC REF 1: 0–10 V 8 REF 2: 4–20 mA 62 Analog Out 1 63 1 ~ Q21 = K1.Thermistor K2. DM4 Soft starters with separate mains contactor L1 L2 L3 N PE 2 Q1 I> I> I> Q2 I> I> I> b Q11 F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 L N Start/Stop F11 a ⎧ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎩ E1 E2 Freigabe 39 0 V Analog 0 V (E1.TOR K3 K4 0 V Analog ~ = Analog Out 2 PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 T1 T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43 7 I mot M 3~ M1 c T1: + Thermistor T2: – Thermistor E1: Start/stop E2: Enable a See Control section b Control voltage through Q1 and F11 or through Q2 c Motor current indication 2-60 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples. DM4 Soft starters with separate mains contactor Actuation 2 K1 Q1 S1 Q11 K1 S3 13 S4 K2 K2 K1 Q21 RUN 14 S2 Q21 OK (no error) K1 33 34 K1 Q21 a E2 39 K2 Q21 E1 39 Q11 b n Emergency-Stop S1: Off (unguided deceleration) S2: On S3: Soft start S4: Soft stop (deceleration ramp) a Enable b Soft start/soft stop 2-61 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4
Bypass circuit

2

L1 L2 L3 N PE

Q1
I> I> I>

Q1
I> I> I>

Q11

b
F11

a
F3
1L1 3L2 5L3 L N Start/Stop

0 V Analog

+12 V DC

~
Q22 Q21

REF 2: 4–20 mA

REF 1: 0–10 V

0 V (E1;E2)

Freigabe

⎧ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎩
E1 E2 39 7 +12 8 1

=

PE

K1;RUN + Thermistor - Thermistor

K2;TOR

K3

K4 0 V Analog

~

=
Analog Out 1 62 Analog Out 2 63

2T1

4T2

6T3

T1

T2

13

14

23

24

33

34

43

7

I mot M1 M 3~

c

T1: + Thermistor T2: – Thermistor E1: Start/stop E2: Enable

a See Control section b Control voltage through Q1 and F11 or through Q2 c Motor current indication

2-62

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4
Bypass circuit After completion of the acceleration phase (full mains voltage reached), the soft starter M4 actuates the bypass contactor. Thus, the motor is directly connected with the mains. Advantage: • The soft starter’s heat dissipation is reduced to the no-load dissipation. • The limit values of radio interference class Actuation "B“ are adhered to. The bypass contactor is now switched to a noload state and can therefore be AC-1 rated. If an immediate voltage switch-off is required due to an emergency stop the bypass contactor must also switch the motor load. In this case it must be AC-3 rated.

2

K1 S3 S1 K1 Q22 S4 K2 K2 K1 Q21 RUN
13 14

Q21 TOR

23 24

S2 Q21 OK (no error) K1
33 34

K1

Q21

E2 39

K2

Q21

E1 39

Q11

Q22

a n Emergency-Stop S1: Off (unguided deceleration) S2: On a Enable b Soft start/soft stop

b

2-63

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4
In-delta circuit
L1 L2 L3 N PE

2

Q1
I> I> I>

Q2
I> I> I>

Q11

a
F11

b
F3 1L1 3L2 5L3 L N
Start/Stop

E1 E2 39
0 V (E1;E2)
0 V Analog Enable

7

+12
+12 V DC REF 1: 0–10 V

8 1
REF 2: 4–20 mA

~
Q21

=

PE

K1;RUN K2;TOR + Thermistor – Thermistor

K3 K4
0 V Analog

~

=

W1 2T1 V1 4T2 U1 6T3

T1

d

T2 13 14 23 24 33 34 43

7

62 63

Analog Out 1

I mot

c

M1

M 3~ W2 V2 U2

a Control voltage through Q1 and F11 or through Q2 b See Control section

c Motor current indication d Thermistor connection

2-64

Analog Out 2

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4
A delta connection allows the use of a soft starter with a lower rating than the motor it is used to control. Connected in series with each motor winding, the current the soft starter needs to supply is reduced by a factor of W3. This layout has the drawback that six motor supply cables are needed. Apart from that Actuation there are no restrictions. All soft starter functions remain available. For this you have to connect the motor in delta and the voltage in this connection method must agree with the mains voltage. For 400 V mains voltage the motor must therefore be marked with 400 V/690 V.

2

K1 Q1 S1 K1 S3
13

S4

K2

K2

Q21 RUN

14

S2

K1

Q21 OK (no error) K1

33 34 E2 39 E1 39

Q21 a

K2

Q21 b

Q11

n Emergency-Stop S1: OFF S2: ON a Enable b Soft start/soft stop E2: Enable

2-65

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4
Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control) When starting several motors one after the other using a soft starter, keep to the following sequence when changing over: • • • • • Start using soft starter Switch on bypass contactor Block soft starter Switch soft starter output to the next motor Restart a section "Control section part 2", page 2-69 a Motor 1 b Motor 2 c Motor n i Switching off individual motors The Off switch results in all motors being switched off at the same time. To switch off individual motors, you need to make use of N/C contact i. Observe the thermal load on the soft starter (starting frequency, current load). If motors are to be started at short intervals, you may have to select a soft starter with a higher load cycle.

2

a section "Control section part 1", page 2-68 n Emergency-Stop S1: Q11 Off S2: Q11 On a Soft start/soft stop b RUN c Off-time monitoring Set the timing relay K1T so that the soft starter is not thermally overloaded: calculate the time from the soft starter’s permissible operating frequency or select a soft starter that allows the required time to be reached. d Changeover monitoring Set the timing relay to a return time of about 2 s. This ensures that the next motor branch can not be connected as long as the soft starter is running.

2-66

Cascade
Q2
F11
I> I> I>

L1 L2 L3 N PE

Q1

F3

1L1

2L2

3L3

L

N

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4

Q21

~

=

+ Thermistor

2T1

4T2

6T3

T1

– Thermistor

PE

T2

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Q14

Q15

Q24

Q25

Qn4

Qn5

Q13
I> I> I>

Q23

Qn3
I> I> I>

I> I> I>

M1

M 3~

M2

M 3~

Mn

M 3~

2-67

2

2-68

Control section part 1

2

K1T

K4

Q1

S1 Q14 Qn Q24

Q21 OK (no error) 34

33

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4

S2 K12 K2 K22 Kn2

K1

K1

K1

K4

Q21 23 TOR 24
E1 39

Q21 13 K4 RUN 14

K4

K1 Q21

Q21

E2

39

Q11

K2

K3

K4

K1T

K4T

a

b

c

d

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

a section "Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)", page 2-66

Control section part 2

i
K12 Q25 Kn2 Q(n-1)1 K4T K3 Qm K22 Q14 K4T Q24 Q25 K22 Qn K3 Q24 Q25 K(n-1)2 Qn Qm

i

i

Q11

Q14

Q15

Q15

K12

K3

Qn Qm Kn2

Electronic motor starters and drives Connection examples, DM4

Q14

Q15

K12

Q24

a

b

c

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

a section "Starting several motors sequentially with a soft starter (cascaded control)", page 2-66

2-69

2

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Frequency inverters DF, DV
Features of DF frequency inverters • Infinitely variable speed control through voltage/frequency control (U/f) • High starting and acceleration torque • Constant torque in motor’s rated range • EMC measures (optional: radio interference filter, screened motor cable) Additional features of sensorless vector control for frequency inverters DV51 and DV6 • Infinitely variable torque control, also at zero speed • Low torque control time • Increased concentricity and constancy of speed • Internal brake chopper • Speed control (options for DV6: control module, pulse generator) General The DF and DV frequency inverters are factorypreset for their assigned motor rating, allowing drives to be started immediately after installation. Individual settings can be made with an optional keypad. Various control modes can be selected and configured in a number of layers. For applications with pressure and flow control, all devices contain a built-in PID controller that can be matched to any system. A further advantage of the frequency inverters is that they eliminate the need for external components for monitoring and motor protection. On the mains side, only a fuse or circuit-breaker (PHKZ) is needed for line and short-circuit protection. The frequency inverter’s inputs and outputs are monitored internally by measurement and control circuits, such as overtemperature, earth fault, shortcircuit, motor overload, motor blockage and drive belt monitoring. Temperature measurement in the motor winding can also be incorporated in the frequency inverter’s control circuit through a thermistor input.

2

2-70

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Electronic motor starters and drives Frequency inverters DF, DV

b a
POWER ALARM RUN 1 2 OFF OPE RBUS
POWER

2
Hz A RUN
ALARM

I
PRG

O

PRG

ENTER

Hz A

POWER ALARM

I
PRG

O

RUN PRG

ENTER

g

c

h

e

f

d

a b c d e

DV51 vector frequency inverter DEX-L2… EMC filter DF51 frequency inverters DF6 frequency inverters DEX-BR1... braking resistors

f DEX-LN… mains choke, DEX-LM… motor choke, SFB… sinusoidal filter g DEX-CBL-… connection cables h Keypads DEX-KEY-…

2-71

FF2

FF1

REV

L1 6 4 3 2 1 P24 CM2

L2

L3

PE

RBr

DC+

DC– – + W * 0V 0...10 V +10 V PE K12 K14 K11 5 L AM H O 0...10 V OI 0V 4...20 mA L 12 RUN 11 FA1

Electronic motor starters and drives Frequency inverters DF, DV

BR

U

V

RST

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

M 3~ i

e

* PNU C005 = 19 (PTC)

BR* 6* 5*

DV51 only DV51 only Input RST for DF51

– +

L+

2CH

FWD

2-72

Block diagram, DF51, DV51
1 N 3 PE +24 V

2

L

RJ 45 ModBus

Block diagram DF6
+24 V

AT

RST

FF2

FF1

REV

L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 FW P24

FWD

3

RJ 45 RS 422 – + K1 K2 K3 – + PLC CM1 PTC 10 V (PWM) TH FM AMI 4...20 mA AM 0...+10 V H +10 V O 0...10 V OI 4...20 mA L O2 0V i RS 485 SN RP SN SP

L+

DC+

RBr

DC–

Electronic motor starters and drives Frequency inverters DF, DV

BR*

U

V

W PE K12 K14 K11 K23 K24 K33 K34

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

M 3~

BR* DF6-320-11K, DF6-340-11K and DF6-340-15K only

–10 V...+10 V

e

2-73

2

suitable radio interference suppression measures must be implemented according to product standard IEC/EN 61800-3. DV51 connecting examples Basic control Example 1Reference input through potentiometer R1 Enable (START/STOP) and direction control through terminals 1 and 2 with internal control voltage n Emergency-Stop circuit S1: OFF S2: ON Q11: Mains contactor F1: Line protection PES:Cable screen PE connection M1:230 V 3-phase motor Note: For EMC-conformant mains connection.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51. 2 S1 S2 Q11 Q11 DILM12-XP1 (4th pole can be broken off) DILM A1 1 3 5 13 A2 2 4 6 14 2-74 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51. – Directional control through terminals 1 and 2 – External reference input from potentiometer R1 M M REV FWD R11 FWD: Clockwise rotating field enable REV: Anticlockwise rotating field enable 2-75 . DV51 connecting examples Wiring L N PE F1 1 h 230 V.. 50/60 Hz f M t M 2 PE FWD Q11 REV L N PE T1 L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE PES PES H O L 2 1 P24 PES X1 PES PES M 3~ PE 4K7 M1 e – Single-phase frequency inverter DF51-322-..

frequency inverters with EMC-conformant connection Actuation Example 2 Setpoint entry via potentiometer R11 (fs) and fixed frequency (f1. f2. reference frequency fS FF1: Fixed frequency f1 FF2: Fixed frequency f2 FF1+ FF2: Fixed frequency f3 2 Q1 S1 S2 Q11 Q11 2-76 . f3) via terminal 3 and 4 with internal control voltage Enable (START/STOP) and rotation direction selection via terminal 1 n Emergency-Stop circuit S1: OFF S2: ON Q11:Mains contactor R1: Main choke K1: RFI filter Q1:Line protection PES: Cable screen PE connection M1:400 V 3-phase motor FWD: Clockwise rotating field enable.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51. DV51 connecting examples DF5-340-...

DV51 connecting examples Wiring L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 PE I Q11 U1 V1 W1 PE 3 h 400 V.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51. 50/60 Hz f f2 f3 fs = fmax f1 2 FF1 FF2 FWD I I R1 U2 V2 W2 L1 L2 L3 PE K1 L1 L2 L3 PE T1 L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE PES PES H O L 4 3 X1 PES PES M 3~ PE R11 M1 e 2-77 FWD 1 P24 FF2 FF1 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51.75 kW 1410 rpm 4.67 50 Hz PES X1 PES PES 230 V 4A 0. Select the appropriate frequency inverter for your mains voltage: Q11 DILM7 +DILM12-XP1 1 R1 2 L PE • DF51-322 for 1 AC 230 V DEX-LN1-009 • DF51-340 for 3 AC 400 V • Model-specific accessories for EMC-complaint connection.75 kW motor described below can be delta-connected FAZ-1N-B16 to a single-phase 230 V mains (version A) or star-connected to a 3-phase 400 V mains.0 / 2. K1 DE51-LZ1-012-V2 L N PE N PE DF51-322-075 DV51-322-075 T1 L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE PES 230 S1 / 400 V 0.75 kW Mains: 3/N/PE 400 V 50/60 Hz 1 h 230 V. 50/60 Hz L N PE F1 2 The 0.75 kW U1 V1 W1 M1 W2 U2 V2 M 3~ e 2-78 .3 A cos ϕ 0. DV51 connecting examples Version A: Motor in delta circuit Motor: P = 0.

DV51 connecting examples Version B: Motor in star circuit L1 L2 L3 PE PKM0-10 Q1 I DILM7 Q11 U1 V1 W1 PE 3 h 400 V.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF51.75 kW U1 V1 W1 M1 W2 U2 V2 M 3~ e 2-79 .3 A 0. 50/60 Hz 2 I I R1 DEX-LN3-004 U2 L1 V2 L2 W2 L3 K1 DE51-LZ3-007-V4 L1 L2 L3 PE PE DF51-340-075 DV51-340-075 T1 L+ DC+ DC– U V W PE PES PES X1 PES PES 400 V 2.

20 °C) 2 Q1 S1 S2 Q11 Q11 n Emergency-Stop circuit S1: OFF S2: ON Q1: Line protection Q11: Mains contactor PES: Cable screen PE connection K1: Radio interference suppression filter 2-80 . When the room temperature rises. frequency inverters Actuation Example: Temperature regulation for ventillation system.. the fan speed must increase..g. The target temperature can be set with potentiometer R11 (e.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF6 connecting examples DF6-340-.

50/60 Hz L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 PE I Q11 L1 L2 L3 PE 50 ˚C 100 % 20 ˚C 40 % 4 mA 10.20 mA PES M 3~ PE 4K7 R11 M1 M FWD e i B1 2-81 ..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DF6 connecting examples Wiring 3 h 400 V.4 mA 20 mA 2 I I K1 L1 L2 L3 PE PID L+ DC+ DC– U T1 V W PE PES PES OI H O L FW P24 PES X1 PES 4..

...20 mA 0.+10 V 2-82 Block diagram DV6 +24 V 2 3 RJ 45 RS 422 RS 485 SN RP SN – + 11 12 13 14 15 CM2 PLC CM1 TH FM AMI AM H O OI L O2 SP L+ DC+ RBr DC– K1 BR* Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples U V W PE K12 K14 K11 .+10 V 10 V (PWM) 4..20 mA M 3~ +24 V P24 e i Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 BR* DV6-340-075.. DV6-340-11K and DV6-320-11K only –10 V...10 V 0V 4...AT RST FRS FF2 JOG 2CH FF1 REV L1 L2 L3 PE 1 – + 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FW P24 RO TO J51 FWD OL IP FA1 RUN QTQ PTC +10 V 0..

Block diagram: speed control circuit. vector frequency inverter DV6 with encoder interface module DE6-IOM-ENC VF + G – o – i Vn Vi + o' + e i' u' FFWG v' – v VG KREF + + PWM KFB APR ASR ACR M 3h Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 FB 2-83 2 .

control and monitoring through PLC Motor with thermistor (PTC resistor) n Emergency-Stop circuit S1: OFF S2: ON Q1:Line protection Q11:mains contactor K2: Control contactor enable RB: Braking resistance B1: Encoder.... braking resistor Actuation 2 Q1 TI S1 RB Q11 Q11 PLC G1 K2 T2 K11 S2 K12 K3 Q11 Enable K2 M11 Example: Hoisting gear with speed regulation. 3 channels 2-84 PES:Cable screen PE connectionirmes M11:Holding brake .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples DV6-340-. vector frequency inverters with built-in encoder module (DE6-IOM-ENC) and external DE4-BR1-..

EP5 EG5 EAPEAN EBP EBN EZP EZN 2 T1 PES CM2 I. Q. Q. 50/60 Hz L1 L2 L3 PE Q1 I Q11 L1 L2 PE L3 I I K1 L1 L2 L3 PE DE6-IOM-ENC T1 T2 PE i Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples DE4-BR1....Wiring 3 h 400 V. Q.. I.. P24 n1 n2 n3 REV FWD L+ DC+ DC– BR U V W PE Th CM1 CM2 11 12 13 1 2 3 8 FW P24 1 RB Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 PES PES b M 3~ M1 i M11 a e B1 m 2-85 2 . PES I.... Encoder Q. Q...

6 Nm 1 2-86 .4 – 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples Installing encoder interface module DE6-IOM-ENC 2 1 2 4 3 M3 x 8 mm 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives DV6 connecting examples EG5 2 F 20 m EG5 1 2 15 3 M4 ZB4-102-KS1 Order ZB4-102-KS1 separately! TTL (RS 422) A A B B C C EP5 EG5 EAP EAN EBP EBN EZP EZN – + 5VH M 3h 2-87 .

it allows electrical drives to be installed and taken into operation much more quickly than with conventional methods. This publication is available for download as PDF file from the Moeller Support Portal. r circuit-breaker to protect from overload and short-circuits c Motor control unit r 3-phase electronic overload protection with DOL starter. Because the Rapid Link modules can be simply fitted into a power and data bus. Note The Rapid Link system must not be commissioned without referring to the manual AWB2190-1430. bidirectional operation and soft starting 2-88 . 2 a b c d e f g h j i i k k Function modules: a Interface control unit r the interface to the open field bus b Disconnect control unit r power infeed with lockable rotary handle. the aid of a power and data bus in which the rapid link modules are installed. A time-saving installation is implemented with . expandable DOL starter or reversing starter function d Speed control unitr controls three-phase asynchronous motors with four fixed speeds.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system System Rapid Link Rapid Link is a modern automation system for material handling systems.

They can be connected to the power and data bus at any point without having to interrupt the bus. Engineering is simplified by full flexibility in system layout and mounting.5 mm2. a Piercing pins b Flat cable. protected against polarity reversal The power bus supplies the Rapid Link function modules with main and auxiliary power. The installation meets the usual requirements. outer core diameter < 5 mm.5 a b 2 a + 10 – 4 2 Engineering The Rapid Link function modules are installed immediately adjacent to the drives. flexible copper conductor to IEC/EN 60228) with round cable feeders 2-89 . The power bus can consist either of a flexible busbar (flat cable) or standard round cables: • The flexible busbar RA-C1 is a 7-core flat cable (cross-section 4 mm2) and has the following structure: M L+ PE N L3 L2 L1 • For the power bus you can also use conventional round cables (cross-section 7 x 2. There is no need to cut and strip cables. two metal pins pierce through the cable’s jacket and into the two cores to establish a contact with the AS-Interface® cable. unscreened flat cable with a cross-section of 2 x 1. The AS-Interface® data bus is a system solution for networking different modules.5 mm2 or 7 x 4 mm2. apply ferrules or connect individual cores. Plug-in tap-off points can be quickly and safely connected at any point along the bus. When a link is connected to the flat cable. ASInterface® networks are quick and easy to implement.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system Power and data bus: e AS interface® flat cable f g h i j k Link for M12 connector cables Flexible busbar for 400 V h and 24 V Power feed for flexible busbar Plug-in power link for flexible busbar Round cable for 400 V h and 24 V Plug-in power link for round cable 6. It is used to transfer both power and all data traffic between the PLC and I/O and also supplies the connected devices with energy to a certain extent. AS-Interface® uses a geometrically coded.

2 Danger! • Rapid Link must be operated only on threephase systems with earthed star point and separate N and PE conductors (TN-S network). This arrangement also conforms to IEE wiring regulations. safe isolation according to IEC/EN 60947-1 Annex N or IEC/EN 60950. . That means that the contactor’s contacts in the RAMO are allowed to weld in the event of a short-circuit in the motor terminal strip or the motor supply cable.5 mm2 / 4 mm2 1. The power sections are supplied through disconnect control unit RA-DI (see illustration below) with: • Ie = 20 A/400 V at 2.5 mm2 1. • All devices connected to the power and data bus must also meet the requirements for 3 AC 400 Vh. The 24 V DC power supply unit must be earthed on the secondary side.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system RA-C2.5 mm2 PES PES 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 Motor/Speed Control Units 1. The 30 V DC PSU for the ASInterface®-/RA-IN-power supply must meet the safe isolation requirements according to SELV.5 mm2 • Ie = 20 to 25 A/400 V at 4 mm2. The combination of RA-DI and RA-MO fulfills the requirements of IEC/EN 60947-4-1 as 2-90 starter with type “1” coordination.5 mm2 1. The cable can have an external diameter of 10 to 16 mm. 24 V H 50/60 Hz F 6 mm2 RA-DI Disconnect Control Unit RA-DI Q1 ⎧ ⎨ ⎩ 2.5 mm2 PES PES e M 3h e M 3h e M 3h e M 3h Disconnect control unit RA-DI protects the cable from overload and provides short-circuit protection for the cable as well as all connected RA-MO motor control units.5 mm2 RA-MO RA-SP 1. Round cables up to 6 mm2 can be used to feed power to disconnect control unit RA-DI.5 mm2 RA-SP RA-MO 1. It must not be operated unearthed.

-B4HI 2 1. Here. Instead of the disconnect control unit.5 1A 103 8 6 4 3 0. • Therefore the short-circuit current Icc at the mounting location must not exceed 10 kA a characteristic curve.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system The affected RA-MO motor control unit must be replaced after a short-circuit! When you configure a power bus with a disconnect control unit. • The total load current (about 6 x mains current) of all connected speed control units must not exceed 110 A. the short-circuit current must exceed 150 A..5 A 15 Icc rms [kA] 2-91 . 2 [A s] 105 8 6 4 FAZ-B FAZ-C 63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A 2 1. observe the following: • Even in the event of a 1-pole short-circuit at the line end. • The total current of all running and simultaneously starting motors must not exceed 110 A. you can use a 3-pole miniature circuit-breaker In F 20 A and B or C characteristic.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0. Z i dt 2 2 • Observe the voltage drop in your specific application..5 1 1.5 104 8 6 2A 6A 4A 3A 4 FAZ-. you must observe the following: • The let-through energy J in the event of a short-circuit must not exceed 29800 A2s.

unscreened.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system Motor Control Unit Motor control unit RA-MO allows the direct bidirectional operation of three-phase motors.09 to 3 kW). Alternatively you can assemble your own motor supply cable with plug SET-M3-A with 8 x 1. The connection to the ASInterface® data bus and the motor is described below. The motor is connected through a halogenfree. The connection to the power bus is described in the earlier general section “Rapid Link system”.5 mm2. DESINAconformant motor supply cable with a length of 2 m (SET-M3/2-HF) or 5 m (SET-M3/5-HF). The unit is connected to AS-Interface® through an M12 plug with the following PIN assignment: M12 plug PIN 1 2 3 4 Function ASi+ – ASi– – 2 External sensors are connected through an M12 socket. The length of the motor cable is limited to 10 m.2 kW M 3h 4 On the RA-MO the motor feeder features a plastic-encapsulated socket. The rated current is adjustable from 0. 8 x 1.3 to 6. Connections Motor control unit RA-MO is supplied ready for installation.5 mm2 3 h 400 V PE 50/60 Hz 24 V H 1 4 PE 6 7 8 3 5 2-92 .6 A (0. PIN 1 2 3 Function L+ I L– I 400 V F 2.

2-93 . cables 6 and 7 must be linked at the motor. otherwise the RA-MO issues a fault message...Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system M 3h SET-M3/. 1 • 3 4 5 6 7 8 PE 1 – 3 5 6 4 2 7 PE U – W – – – V – PE – – – – T1 – – T2 – – – – B1 (h/–) – B2 (h/+) – – – i 2 Motor connection without thermistor : Motor connection with thermistor : 5 8 1 7 3 PE 5 8 1 7 3 PE 6 7 1 2 3 * 6 7 1 2 3 * T1 T2 U V W PE e T1 T2 U V M3h W PE e i M 3h If motors are connected without PTC thermistor (thermoclick).

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system Note The two connections illustrated below apply only for motor control unit RA-MO. their manufacturers provide braking rectifiers. 2-94 . If the DC circuit is opened at the same time. which are fitted in the motor terminal strip. the voltage at the braking coil drops off much quicker. Connecting a 400 V AC brake: Connecting a 400 V AC brake with rapid braking: 4 6 1 7 3 PE 2 : 1 7 3 PE 5 4 1 2 3 * 1 2 3 * B1 B2 U V W PE e PE e M 3h M 3h For controlling braking motors. causing the motor to also brake more quickly.

(SET-M4/2-HF) or 5 m. screened. 400 V M 3h 3 h 400 V PE 50/60 Hz 1 4 PE 6 7 8 3 5 2-95 . therefore. the RA-SP speed control unit’s enclosure is fitted with a heat sink and requires an EMC-conformant mounting and connection. To meet EMC requirements. The length of the motor cable is limited to 10 m. The motor is connected through a halogenfree 4 x 1. Notes Unlike the other Rapid Link system devices. DESINA-conformant motor supply cable with a length of 2 m. meet EMC requirements. The connection to the ASInterface® data bus and the motor is described below.5 mm2 + 2 x (2 x 0. The motor cable’s screen must have a large-area connection with PE at both ends.5 mm2 + 4 x 0. with 4 x 1. Connections Speed control unit RA-SP is supplied ready for connection.75 mm2 contact. The connection to the power bus is described in the earlier general section “Rapid Link system”. . (SET-M4/5-HF). this is connected with PE and heat sink over a large area.75 mm2). Alternatively you can assemble your own motor supply cable with plug SET-M4-A. and the motor connection terminals must also. The unit is connected to AS-Interface® through an M12 plug with the following PIN assignment: M12 plug PIN 1 2 3 4 Function ASi+ – ASi– – 2 On the RA-SP the motor feeder features a metal-encapsulated socket. The matching plug is also metal-encapsulated and the motor cable is screened.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system Speed Control Unit RA-SP Speed control unit RA-SP is used for electronic variable speed control of three-phase motors.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system RA-SP2-.. 1 • 3 4 5 6 7 8 PE 1 – 3 5 7 6 2 8 PE U – W – – – V – M 3h 400 V AC – – – – T1 – – T2 – – – – B1 (h) – B2 (h) – – – 230 V AC – – – B1 (h) – B2 (h) – – – PE EMC correct installation of motor conductors SET-M4/. 1 3 2 B1/B2 U1... i 2 Servo cable SETM4/. W1..... 341(230)-.. V1. 341-. PE 4 T1/T2 2-96 ...

.75 kW 1430 rpm 3.1 A cos ϕ 0.9 / 1. their manufacturers provide braking rectifiers.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system 5 8 1 7 3 PE 5 8 1 7 3 PE PES PES F 10 m PES PES 2 T1 T2 U V W PE T1 T2 U V W PE M3h i e M3h i e U1 230 S1 / 400 V 0. For controlling braking motors.2 / 1. which are fitted in the motor terminal strip..79 50 Hz U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 5 8 1 7 3 PE 4 6 5 8 1 7 3 PE PES PES PES PES T1 T2 U V W PE e M 3h B1 B2 T1 T2 U V W PE e M3h i RA-SP2-341-.. Notes When using speed control unit RA-SP. RA-SP2-341(230)-.75 kW 1430 rpm 1.9 A cos ϕ 0.79 50 Hz V1 W1 400 S1 / 690 V 0.. do not connect the braking rectifier directly to the motor terminals (U/V/W)! 2-97 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Electronic motor starters and drives Rapid Link system EMC correct assembly of speed control unit RA-SP 2 PE PES e 2-98 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 2 2-99 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 2 2-100 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Page RMQ Signal Towers SL LS-Titan® position switches 3-2 3-11 3-13 3-24 3-25 3-27 3-29 3-30 Electronic position switches LSE-Titan® Analog electronic position switches Inductive proximity switches LSI Optical proximity switches LSO Capacitive proximity switches LSC 3 3-1 .

In detail. • Highest degree of protection up to IP67 and IP69K (suitable for steam-jet cleaning). • Built-in safety circuits for highest operational reliability and accessibility. • Terminations using screws and Cage Clamp1) throughout. 3-2 Cage Clamp is a registered trade mark of Messrs. • Impact and vibration resistant. the shape and colour. The use of LED elements and laser inscription throughout offer maximum reliability. • Expanded operating temperature range 25 to +70 °C. this means: • High-quality optics for a uniform appearance. • Emergency-Stop actuators with pull and turnto-release function. efficiency and flexibility. • Light testing circuit. • Text and symbols can be freely combined.e. • Emergency-Stop buttons with lighting option for active safety. RMQ16 .000 h. The required control signals are produced either manually by control circuit devices or mechanically by position switches. • 100. • Switching contacts suitable for use with electronic devices to EN 61131-2: 5 V/1 mA. • Contacts switch differing potentials. • Customer-specific symbols and inscriptions from 1 off. • For use also in safety-related circuits using positive operation and positively opening contacts. • Spring-loaded Cage Clamp terminals for reliable and maintenance free contact. i. • Complying with industry Standard IEC/EN60947.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ Commands and signals are the fundamental functions for controlling machines and processes. • All actuators in illuminated and nonilluminated version. • LED operating voltage from 12 to 500 V. 1) 3 Advanced technology has been used consistently in the development of the new control circuit devices RMQ-Titan®. • Clear contrast using LED element lighting. • Freely programmable switching behaviour on all selector switch actuators: springreturn/stay-put.machine lifespan. WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH. • Abrasion-proof and clearly contrasting laser inscription. • Low power consumption – only 1/6 of filament lamps. Minden. The respective application governs the degree of protection. even in daylight.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ RMQ-Titan® system overview ATEX 3 ATEX 3-3 .

One contact element is assigned to each On and each Off position. This allows for example two speed settings for each direction. The actuator is available either as a rotary button or as a thumb-grip. Labels Moeller offers various types of labels for all operating elements. 3-4 . Different variants of the joystick have 2/4 positions and other variants have 2 settings for each position. They can be specifically selected for various applications and can be laser-inscribed to suit the customer's requirements.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ RMQ-Titan® Four-way pushbutton Moeller has added more operator elements to its highly successful range of control circuit devices RMQ-Titan. 0 1 0 1 2 3 Selector switch actuators The selector switch actuators have four positions. For this a standard make open contact and an early-make contact are fitted in series. • Blank. Momentary contact and latching contact versions are available. • With inscription 0–1–0–2–0–3–0–4. The actuator has four individual button plates. Versions available are: Joystick with double contact The joystick allows the control of up to four directions of movement on machines. It has a modular design.. Contact elements from the RMQ-Titan range are used. with each direction of movement being assigned one contact element. Four-way pushbutton The four-way pushbuttons enable users to control machines and systems in four directions of movement. Customised inscriptions are also possible. • With direction arrows. The Labeleditor software enables customized inscriptions to be designed and these can subsequently be permanently applied to the labels by laser and are wipe-proof. The front rings and front frames are of the familiar RMQ-Titan format and colour.

4 0 1. 2) N/C: Positive opening safety function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1.1 .1 3 0 1.5 0 .4 .1 .8 5.5 1) Stroke in connection with front element.5 M22-(C)K(C)01 x x x x .2 .8 5.5 – x x – .2 .3 .5 M22-CK20 – x x – .3 .2 3.4 0 3.2 .6 2.3 .6 5.4 2.8 1.5 M22-(C)K01D2) x – x – .5 M22-K10P – x x – .2 5.7 0 .8 5. 3-5 .3 0 .2 M22-CK02 5.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ Contact versions Screw terminals Springloaded terminals x Front fixing Base fixing Contact Contact travel diagram1) x x x .6 M22-CK112) 5.1 .2 0 1.5 M22-(C)K(C)10 x x x – .

...Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ Terminal markings and function numbers (conventional number/circuit symbol).. M22-XLED230-T 3-6 M22-(C)LED(C)230-.. EN 50013 10 13 01 21 14 22 23 3 20 13 11 13 21 02 11 21 14 24 14 22 12 33 22 21 31 30 13 23 33 21 13 21 12 13 21 31 03 11 14 24 34 14 22 34 14 22 32 12 22 32 Voltage versions with series elements Ue h/H 12 – 30 V h/H 1 2 1 2 1 2 X1 X2 M22-XLED601) 1x 2x 3x . 240 V Ue F 220 VDC M22-XLED60/ M22-XLED220 M22-(C)LED(C)-.. 1) For increasing the voltage AC/DC. Ue h 85 – 264 V h. 7x M22-XLED220 1x Ue FAC/DC 60 V 90 V 120 V .. .. 50 – 60 Hz 1 2 1 2 X1 X2 M22-XLED230-T1) 1x 2x Ue F 400 V~ 500 V~ 1) AC– for increasing the voltage 50/60 Hz.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ Circuit for light test The test button is used to check operation of the indicator lights independently of the respective control state... M22-XLED-T for Ue = 12 to 240 V AC/DC (also for light test with signal towers SL) 13 14 2 1 13 14 13 14 a 3 4 3 12 – 240 V h/H 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 M22-XLED-T M22-XLED60/ M22-XLED220 2 1 M22-XLED60/ M22-XLED220 2 1 M22-XLED60/ M22-XLED220 2 1 2 X1 2 X1 2 X1 X2 X2 X2 M22-(C)LED(C)-. 3-7 . Decoupling elements prevent voltage feedback. 1) a Test button 1) Only for elements 12 to 30 V.

1) X2 X2 X2 N a Test button 1) For elements 85 to 264 V. 3-8 ..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ M22-XLED230-T for Ue = 85 to 264 V AC/50 – 60 Hz L1 13 13 14 13 14 3 85 – 264 V h/50 – 60 Hz 14 a 3 4 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 X1 X1 X1 1 M22-XLED230-T M22-(C)LED(C)230-..

* = File name generated by Labeleditor Please order: 1 x M22-XDH-G-RMQ_Titan_xxxxx.zip • Button plate in green with special inscription Basic type: M22-XDH-* 3-9 3 1. individual lock mechanism no. * = Colour (here "W" for white).moeller.zip .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ Labeleditor 1.net/support. MS1.zip • Key-operated button. This file name is part of the article to be ordered (see Ordering examples). and 3. the Labeleditor issues a file name such as “RMQ_Titan_12345. 2. Ordering examples • M22-XST insert plate for M22S-ST-X legend plate mount with special inscription Basic type: M22-XST-* * = File name generated by Labelditor Please order: 1 x M22-XST-RMQ_Titan_xxxxxx.zip • Double pushbutton actuator with white button plates and special symbols Basic type: M22-DDL-*-*-* Customised inscription of devices using the Labeleditor software You can label your device to your individual requirements in four simple steps: • Download the inscription software: www. MS*: * = Number of individual lock mechanism. 2 positions. must be stated here 2 x Please order: 1 x M22-DDL-W-RMQ_Titan_xx xxx. * = Colour (here "G" for green). The email address is automatically set for the selected product by the program. individual symbol Basic type: M22-WRS*-MS*-* WRS*: * = Number of positions.zip”.zip-RMQ_Titan_xxxxx. -*: * = File number assigned in Labeleditor Please order: 1 x M22-WRS2-MS1-RMQ_Titan_xxxxxx. 2. • Send order to the Moeller sales office or the electrical wholesalers. When your template is sent. keyword: “Labeleditor” • Creation of label template (menu-guided in the software) • Send the label template to the factory by email. * = File name assigned by Labeleditor.

a ATEX equipment code Note What does ATEX stand for? a section. grain storage and preparation.net/en/support/pdf_katalog.jsp 3-10 . agriculture and the pharmaceutical industry. The approval has the test number BVS 06 ATEX E023U and BVS 06 ATEX E024X. ATEX directive for operators 1999/92/EC (binding from 06/2006) allows approved devices with the above test number to be used in dust environments. cement works. indicator lights. metal and wood processing plants. The housings. * User-definable customer code.moeller.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices RMQ ATEX approval Surface-mounted devices with ATEX approval are used for example in areas laden with explosive dust such as in milling facilities. animal feed industry. in the aluminium industry. conical Double actuators Illuminated selector switch actuators Joystick 4-way pushbuttons Emergency-Stop pushbuttons Foot and palm switches Potentiometer 3 Order Order with the designation M22COMBINATION-* with the suffix M22-ATEX or FAK-COMBINATION-* with the suffix FAKATEX. The basic devices listed in our Main Catalogue can be ordered with approval in accordance with the ATEX directive 94/9/EC. zone 22. Further information is provided in the Main Catalogue for Industrial Switchgear. www. the application “everything. page 4-17. have the equipment code Ex II3D IP5X T85°C. except for mining” and for category 3 (normal safety). max. 10 characters. and foot and palm switches etc. pushbutton actuators. The switches are approved for device group II. category 3. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Pushbutton actuators. flush and extended Mushroom-headed pushbutton Selector switch actuators Keyswitches Illuminated pushbuttons Indicator light lens assemblies. Moeller supplies devices from the RMQ-Titan and FAK range in compliance with the ATEX directive for manufacturers: 94/9/EC (binding from 06/2003).

flashing light. strobe light or acoustic indicator even from a distance. they can be reliably recognized as continuous light. • Use of filament bulbs or LEDs as required. Product features • Continuous light.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Signal Towers SL Signal Towers SL – everything under visual control at all times Signal towers SL indicate machine states using visible and acoustic signals. • A large number of complete units simplifies selection. Mounted on control panels or on machines. ordering and stock holding for standard applications. flashing light. • Excellent illumination by specially shaped lenses with Fresnel effect. and dealt with as necessary. • Free programmability permits the actuation of five addresses. The various colours of the light elements indicate the operating status in each case to IEC/EN 60204-1 an: RED: 3 Dangerous state – immediate action necessary YELLOW: Abnormal status – monitor or -action GREEN: Normal status – no action necessary BLUE: Discontinuity – action mandatory WHITE: Other status – can be used as required. • Simple assembly without tools by bayonet fitting. 3-11 . • Automatic contacting by built-in contact pins. strobe light and acoustic indicator can be combined as required.

a red strobe light and in parallel with it an acoustic indicator can indicate and announce the dangerous status of a machine. Insert both jumpers into the same position on the pcb – and it's done! (a section "Circuit for light test"..5 Ue = 24 – 230 Vh/H Five signal lines from a terminal strip in the basic module run through each module. Thus. The module is addressed via a wire link (jumper) on each printed circuit board..) 3-12 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Signal Towers SL Programmability 2 3 4 1 3 5 BA15d F 7 W 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 054321 N 1. for example. page 3-7. Five different addresses can also be allocated several times.

In addition. all the operating heads and the adapter for accepting the RMQ-Titan actuators have a bayonet fitting that enables quick and secure fitting. Pushbuttons. Actuating devices RMQ-Titan® simply snap fitted Another unique feature is the possibility to combine control circuit devices from the RMQTitan range with the position switches LS-Titan. Using the bayonet fitting.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches New combinations for your solutions with LS-Titan® a 3 LS-Titan RMQ-Titan a Operating heads in four positions. 3-13 . each turned by 90°. The complete unit then has at least the high degree of protection IP66 at front and rear. the heads can be attached in any of the four directions (4 x 90°). can be fitted subsequently. selector switches or EmergencyStop buttons can all be directly snapped on to any position switch as operating head.

LSM LS4…ZB LSR… LS…ZB LS…ZBZ 3-14 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches Overview 3 LS.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches Safety position switches LS4…ZB.” Simple tools are: pliers. and the Swiss accident prevention authority (SUVA). hoods and grilles. BG BG ET 06183 Sicherheit geprüft tested safety BGIA 0603010 Sicherheit geprüft tested safety Sicherheit geprüft tested safety LS4…ZB BG LS…ZBZ LS…ZB PRÜFZ ET 06165 Sicherheit geprüft tested safety LSR-ZB… BG PRÜFZ PRÜFZ PRÜFZ ERT ERT ERT ET 07014 ERT 3-15 . 3 Certification All Moeller safety position switches are certified by the German employers liability insurance association or by the Technical Monitoring Service (TÜV). the term positive opening is defined as follows: “The execution of a contact separation as the direct result of a predetermined motion of the actuating element of the switch via non-spring operated parts (e. They meet the requirements of the German Trade Association for the testing of positively opening position switches for safety functions (GS-ET-15). scissors. Positive opening Mechanically operated position switches in safety circuits must have positively opening contacts (see EN 60947-5-1/10.g. Rheinland. Positive opening is an opening movement by which it is ensured that the main contacts of a switch have attained the open position at the same time as the actuating element assumes the Off position.ZB position switches offer additional manipulation safety by means of an operating head which can rotate but cannot be removed.91).. penknives etc. pins. Moeller position switches all meet these requirements. nails. flaps. wire. Here. LS…ZB Moeller safety position switches have been specially designed for monitoring the position of protective guards such as doors. These reqquirements include: “Position switches for safety functions must be designed so that the safety function cannot be bypassed manually or with simple tools. not dependent on a spring)“.. screwdrivers. In addition to these requirements. LS.

ZB disconnects power • No danger 3 LS…ZB closed open a Safety contact b Signalling contact a b 21 13 22 14 21 13 22 14 Door closed Door open a Safety contact (21 – 22) closed Signalling contact (13-14) open a Safety contact (21 – 22) open Signalling contact (13-14) closed 3-16 ..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches “Personnel protection” by monitoring the protective device LS…ZB LS4…ZB STOP • Door open • LS..

spring-powered interlock (closed-circuit current principle) LS-S02-…FT-ZBZ c d e a b c d e 22 12 A1 A2 21 11 A1 US 22 12 A2 21 11 22 12 A1 US A2 21 11 Safety contact Signalling contact Interlocked Released open a b Door closed and a Coil at (A1.12) remains closed a Only possible once it is released Signalling contact (11 .g. A2) e.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches "Enhanced personnel protection" with separate signal for door position LS…ZBZ • • • • • Stop signal Waiting time Machine is stopped Protective device open No danger STOP 3 LS…FT-ZBZ. Close door a Both contacts in the open position tamperproof against simple tools a Signalling contact (11 – 12) closes Door open Interlock door a Disconnect the voltage from coil (A1. A2) 1st actuator interlocked 2nd safety contact (21-22) closes 3-17 .12) opens. via zero-speed monitor Safety contact (21 – 22) opens Signalling contact (11 . A2) de-energized also Door open interlocked with mains failure or wire break: Door interlocked = safe state Safety contact (21-22) closed Signalling contact (11-12) closed Door released a Apply voltage to coil (A1.

Door open a Disconnect the voltage from coil (A1. via zero-speed monitor Safety contact (21 – 22) opens Signalling contact (13-14) remains open a Only possible once it is released Signalling contact (13 .22) open Signalling contact (13-14) closed a Apply voltage to coil (A1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches LS-S11-…FT-ZBZ c d e a b c d e 22 14 A1 A2 21 13 A1 US A2 21 13 A1 US 22 14 A2 21 13 Safety contact Signalling contact Interlocked Released open 3 a b 22 14 Door closed and a Coil de-energised (A1. Interlock door a Signalling contact (13 .14) opens.g.14) closes. A2) interlocked even with mains failure or wire breakage: Door interlocked = safe state Safety contact (21-22) closed Signalling contact (13-14) open Door released Door open a Safety contact (21 . A2) Close door e. A2) 1st actuator interlocked 2nd safety contact (21-22) closes 3-18 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches "Process protection and enhanced personnel protection" with separate signal for door position LS…ZBZ STOP • • • • • Stop signal Waiting time Process sequence halted Protective device open Product OK 3 LS…MT-ZBZ. A2) 1st actuator interlocked 2nd safety contact (21-22) closes 3-19 .12) opens. magnet-powered interlock (operating current principle) LS-S02-…MT-ZBZ c d e a b c d e 22 12 A1 US A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 Safety contact Signalling contact Interlocked Released open a b 21 22 12 21 22 12 21 11 11 11 Door closed and a Voltage on coil (A1. Door open a Both contacts in the open position tamperproof against simple tools a Signalling contact (11 – 12) closes Close door Door open Interlock door a Apply voltage to coil (A1. Safety contact (21 – 22) opens Signalling contact (11 . A2) e.12) remains closed a Only possible once it is released Signalling contact (11 .12) closed Door released a Coil de-energised (A1.g. via zero-speed monitor. A2) interlocked Safety contact (21-22) closed Signalling contact (11 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches LS-S11-…MT-ZBZ c d e a b c d e 22 14 A1 US A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 Safety contact Signalling contact Interlocked Released open 3 a b 21 13 22 14 21 13 22 14 21 13 Door closed and a Voltage on coil (A1.g. A2) 1st actuator interlocked 2nd safety contact (21-22) closes 3-20 .14) closes. A2) interlocked Safety contact (21-22) closed Signalling contact (13-14) open Releasing of doora Coil de-energised (A1. Safety contact (21 – 22) opens Door open a Only possible once it is released Signalling contact (13 . via zero-speed monitor.14) opens. Close door Interlock door a Apply voltage to coil (A1. A2) e.22) open Signalling contact (13-14) closed a Signalling contact (13 . Door open a Safety contact (21 .

. disconnects power • No danger 3 LSR…TKG..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches “Personnel protection” by monitoring of the protective mechanism LSR…I(A) /TKG LSR…I(A)/TS STOP • Hinged protective cover open • LSR. LSR…TS Closed open a Safety contact b Signalling contact a b 21 13 22 14 21 13 22 14 Hinged a Safety contact (21 – 22) closed protective cover Signalling contact (13-14) open closed Hinged a Safety contact (21 – 22) open protective cover Signalling contact (13-14) closed open 3-21 .

by positive operation and positively opening contacts LS4…ZB • IEC 60947. EN 60947. EN 60947. LSM Standards • IEC 60947. VDE 0660 a EN 50047 • Dimensions • Fixing dimensions • Switching points • Minimum IP65 • Also for use in safety circuits.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches LS. VDE 0660 a EN 50041 • Dimensions • Fixing dimensions • Switching points • IP65 • Safety position switches for protection of personnel • With separate actuating element for protective guards • Positive operation and positively opening contacts • Approval of German Trade Association • Coded actuating element • Operating head: – Can be rotated by 90° – Can be actuated from both sides • Actuating element – Convertible for vertical and horizontal fixing • With triple coding 3 Suitable applications Actuation • • • • • • • • Plunger (centre fixing) Plunger head (centre fixing) Rotary lever Angled roller lever Adjustable roller lever Actuating rod Spring-rod Operating heads adjustable in 90° steps 3-22 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices LS-Titan® position switches LS…ZB Standards • IEC 60947. EN 60947. VDE 0660 • IP65 LS…ZBZ • IEC 60947. VDE 0660 • IP65 3 Suitable applications • Safety position switches for protection of personnel • With separate actuating element for protective guards • Positive operation and positively opening contacts • Approval of German Trade Association • Coded actuating element • Operating head: – Can be rotated by 90° – Can be actuated from four sides and from above • Safety position switches for protection of personnel • With separate actuating element for protective guards • Positive operation and positively opening contacts • Electromagnetic interlocking • Approval of German Trade Association • Coded actuating element • Operating head: – Can be rotated by 90° – Can be actuated from four sides Actuation 3-23 . EN 60947.

1 Q1 electron.5 5.5 6.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Electronic position switches LSE-Titan® Switching point variably adjustable The switching point on electronic position switches LSE-Titan is adjustable and variable.5 LSE-02 +Ue 5.5 6. For this purpose. Q1 0V Q2 Q2 default = 3. Adjustment to a new switching point is carried out as follows: Move the plunger from the original to the new switch position. This ensures a defined and reproduceable switching point. The LED now flashes with a high pulse frequency and the new switching point is retentively set. Note adjust fasten LED adjust 1s fmax F 2 N This means that all the devices are also suitable for safety applications designed for personnel or process protection. adjust Bauart geprüft Functional TÜV Rheinland Safety Type approved Contact travel diagram LSE-11 +Ue 0 0.5 to 5. 3 The position switch is overload as well as conditionally short-circuit proof and has snapaction switching behaviour.1 Q1 electron. Q1 0V Q2 Q2 default = 3.0 0 0. They have the same function as electromechanical position switches. The LSE-11 and LSE-02 devices can be used in safety-oriented circuits. Two high-speed and bounce-free PNP switching outputs enable high switching frequencies.5 mm (supplied as = 3 mm). The switching point lies in the range from 0.0 3-24 . press the setting button for 1 s.

25. Simple rotational-speed dependent control systems of fan motors or smoke-venting blowers signal the opening angle of the air damper (e. mechanically actuated position switches directly linked with the world of automation Analog position switches LSE-AI (4 to 20 mA) and LSE-AU (0 to 10 V) represent another innovation in electronic position switches. The analog position switches also have a diagnosis output for further processing of data. short circuit against 0 V and short circuit against +Ue. 50 or 75 %) and thus save power and material wear. The outputs Q1 and Q2 are constantly scanned for overload.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Analog electronic position switches Analog electronic position switches Two types are available: • LSE-AI with current output. The actual position is converted in analog fashion into voltage (0 to 10 V) or current (4 to 20 mA) and then continuously signalled to the electronics. This means that the safe status can be monitored and analysed at all times. such as brake shoes. Contact travel diagram LSE-AI I [mA] 20 3 4 0 S [%] 100 LSE-AU U [V] 10 S [%] 0 100 Connection diagram +24 V (–15 / +20 %) LSE-AI +Ue diagnosis +Q2 analog +Q1 0V F 200 mA 4 – 20 mA A < 400 O 0V Q Ue 3-25 . can be scanned and the results processed further. The position switch also has a self-test function. Even objects of varying sizes or thicknesses. Using them. Analog.g. • LSE-AU with voltage output. it is now possible for the first time to monitor the actual position of a flue gas valve or an actuator continuously.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Analog electronic position switches +24 V (–15 / +20 %) LSE-AU +Ue diagnosis +Q2 analog +Q1 0V F 200 mA F 10 mA 3 0V V 0 V – 10 V Q Ue Contact diagram Normal scenario LSE-AI Q1 Q2 LED 4 – 20 mA Q Ue LSE-AU 0 – 10 V Q Ue LED t LED t Fault scenario LSE-AI Q1 Q2 LED 0 mA 0V LSE-AU 0V 0V LED t Reset LED t +Ue +Ue t >1s >1s t 3-26 .

00 x S n 3 a b e c d a b c d e Oscillator Rectifier Amplifier Output Power supply Properties of inductive proximity switches The following details apply to all inductive proximity switches: • Protective insulation to IEC 346/VDE 0100 or IEC 536.35 – 0. power is withdrawn from the system. The change in the oscillation amplitude of the oscillator results in a current change. • Operational temperature range –25 to +70 °C • Oscillating load: Cycle time 5 minutes. which is evaluated in the downstream electronics and is converted into a defined switching signal. Switching interval S The switching distance is the distance at which a metal part approaching the active surface effects a signal change at the output. amplitude 1 mm in the frequency range 10 to 55 Hz.35 – 0. The switching distance depends on: • Approach direction • Size • Material of the metal part The following correction factors must be used for different materials: Steel (St 37) Brass Copper Aluminium Stainless steel 1. • Protection type IP67.25 – 0. which is caused by the formation of eddy currents.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Inductive proximity switches LSI The inductive proximity switch operates on the principle of the attenuated LC oscillator: When metal enters the response range of the proximity switch. • Maintenance and wear-free (long service life).50 x Sn 0. for the duration of the attenuation. A steady-state signal is available at the output of the unit. • High operating frequency or switching frequency. The metal part causes an energy loss.60 – 1.00 x Sn 0. The eddy current losses are related to the size and nature of the metal part.50 x Sn 0. Sn = Rated switching distance 3-27 .45 x Sn 0. • Have a steady-state output which remains activated as long as the unit is being attenuated • Bounce-free switching behaviour in the microseconds-range (10–6 s). • Comply with IEC 60947-5-2. • Resistant to vibration. • Any required mounting position • LED display indicates the switching or output status and simplifies adjustment during installation.

I Load N DC voltage mode DC inductive proximity switches have three terminals and are operated with a protective low voltage. U Sensor L1 Sensor R Load U Supply 3 U. + U Sensor Sensor U Supply R U. I Load Load – 3-28 . The switching behaviour can be determined more precisely. and is independent of the load.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Inductive proximity switches LSI AC operating mode AC inductive proximity switches have two terminals. The load is connected in series with the sensor. because the load is actuated via a separate output.

which is reflected by a triple reflector or mirror. black.4 x Sd 0.8 x Sd 1 x Sd 0. white. as long as they do not have a gloss finish. gloss Aluminium. Reflected-light beam Material Factor app. anodized Polystyrene. untreated Card. 200 g/m2 Metal. The portion of this light which strikes the receiver ensures a switching signal is produced. The degree of reflection of the object surface to be monitored affects the operating range Sd. black. All other frequencies are attenuated.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Optical proximity switches LSO Working principle The optoelectronic sensors in the switch operate using modulated infrared light. The unit can also be set to detect transparent objects. Evaluation takes place of “Reflection“ and “No reflection“. grey Wood. assuming adequate intensity. These states mean the same as presence or absence of an object in the sensing range. There are two types of optical proximity switch. The interruption in the light beam causes the unit to switch. white PVC. Precision plastic optics ensure long range and long sensing distances. a The unit transmits a pulsed infrared light beam. Proximity switch transmitters and receivers are matched to one another.6 x Sd 0. 3-29 . matt Sd = Operating range Reflected-light barrier 1 x Sd 1. Paper. distinguished by their function. black. Light barriers identify objects irrespective of their surface.2 – 1. matt. Reliable detection is always achieved if the object is the same size as the reflector. The reflector size must be chosen such that the object to be detected virtually completely interrupts the light beam. gloss Card.5 x Sd 0. The following correction factors apply to different reflecting material characteristics.1 x Sd 3 b a Object a a Object b Reflector The reflected-light beam transmits infrared light to the object being scanned.3 x Sd 0. white Cotton.6 x Sd 1.1 – 1. Infrared light can penetrate even severe dirt on the optics. The sensor receiver has an integral bandpass filter to amplify primarily the transmitted frequency. which reflects this light in all directions. and thus ensures reliable operation. This gives the units good resistance to extraneous light. Visible light therefore cannot affect their operation.

(eWater = 80!) Influence of environmental conditions As can be seen from the following diagram. The electrode surfaces of this capacitor are arranged in the feed-back branch of a highfrequency oscillator circuit. The coupling capacitance is increased. need not be taken into account. When an object approaches the active surface of the proximity switch. Materials with a high dielectric constant achieve great switching distances. the capacitance rises relative to the dielectric constant e of the insulator. The oscillation amplitude is monitored via an evaluation circuit and converted into a switching command. Reduction factors for various metals. Note 3 A+ B– C B A B C a b e c d When scanninng organic materials (wood. The dielectric constant for all solid and liquid materials is greater than that for air. etc. BMain electrodes C Auxiliary electrodes 3-30 . grain. Metals achieve the greatest switching distances due to their high conductivity.) it must be noted that the attainable switching distance is greatly dependent on their water content. such as are necessary with inductive proximity switches. the switching distance Sr is dependent on the dielectric constant er of the object to be monitored. Objects made of non-conductive materials affect the active surface of a capacitive proximity switch in the same way. Effects Capacitive proximity switches are activated both by conductive as well as non-conductive objects. You can imagine these as the electrodes of a capacitor that are opened up. With other materials. it is reduced relative to the dielectric constant of the object to be monitored. Metal objects produce the maximum switching distance (100 %). This effects a rise in the coupling capacitance between the plates and the oscillator begins to respond. Actuation by objects made of non-conductive materials (insulators): When an insulator is brought between the electrodes of a capacitor. This is adjusted such that it will not oscillate when the surface is clear. a Oscillator b Evaluation circuit c Amplifier d Output e Power supply A. it enters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Capacitive proximity switches LSC Working principle The active area of a capacitive proximity switch LSC is formed by two concentrically arranged metal electrodes.

7 4 4 4 4.9 3 3 3.2 3. 3-31 .6 3.3 2. Due to the high dielectric value of water.2 2.5 4.3 2.3 2.5 5 5 6 8 25. the fluctuations with wood can be significant.8 2.5 2.5 2.2 2. Damp wood therefore is registered much more effectively by capacitive proximity switches than dry wood.6 3.2 2.2 2. vacuum Teflon Wood Paraffin Kerosene Oil of terpentine Transformer oil Paper Polyethylene Polypropylene Cable insulation Soft rubber Silicone rubber Polyvinyl chloride Polystyrene Celluloid Perspex Araldite Bakelite Silica glass Hard rubber Oil-impregnated paper Chipboard Porcelain Laminated paper Quartz sand Glass Polyamide Mica Marble Alcohol Water er 1 2 2 to 7 2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Control circuit devices Capacitive proximity switches LSC er Material Air.8 80 80 60 30 10 1 3 10 20 40 60 80 100 sr [%] The following table lists the dielectric constants er of some important materials.4 4.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 3 3-32 .

reversing switches (Reversing) star-delta switches Multi-Speed Switches Interlock circuits Single-phase starting switches Meter selector switches Heater switches Step switches Rotary switches and switch-disconnectors with ATEX approval 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-17 4 4-1 . main switches. maintenance switches Changeover switches.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Page Overview ON-Off switches.

4 Refer to the latest issue of our Main Catalogue for “Industrial Switchgear”. b ON-OFF switches. meter selector switches. function and contact sequence.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Overview Use and mounting forms Moeller rotary switches and switch-disconnectors are used as: a Main switches. 275 A. rated uninterrupted current 1) In enclosed version (surface mounting). function and contact sequence. Centre mounting. 077643) in addition to the switches listed in the Main Catalogue. star-delta switches. c Safety switches. Rear mounting. multi-speed switches. Mounting form c – – – x x – – x x x x – – – – d x x x x x x x – – – – – – – – e – x x x – – – – – – – – – – – f x x – – – – – – – – – – – – – g k + + + + – – + + + + + + + + h k k k – – – – k k – – – – – – i – k k k k + + + + + + – – – – j k k k – – – – k k k k – – – – k – + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Basic type TM T0 T3 T5b T5 T6 T8 P1-25 P1-32 P3-63 P3-100 P5-125 P5-160 P5-250 P5-315 ATEX – j j j j – – j j j j – – – – Iu [A] 10 20 32 63 100 160 3151 ) Use as a – x x x x x x x x x x x x x x b x x x x – – – x x x x x x x x 25 32 63 100 125 160 250 315 Iu = max. main switches used as Emergency-Stop devices. 4-2 . f Step switches. Surface mounting. + Irrespective of the number of contact units. coding switches. k Dependent on the number of contact units. Other contact arrangements are listed in the K115D/F/GB specialist catalogue (order no. control switches. d Changeover switches. e Reversing switches. The following mounting forms are available: g h i j k Flush mounting. max. Service distribution board mounting.

finger-proof incoming terminals.. electricians can protect himself against anyone switching on without authorization (a section "Circuit diagram example for maintenance switches with a load shedding contact and (or) switch position indicator".. page 4-4). main switches.. if required). red thumb-grip handle (black. heating or combined loads. By attaching their own padlock to the SVB padlocking feature./ P1-32/. warning label. an additional maintenance switch is required close to each drive..N/NHI11 ON OFF L1 L2 L3 N N 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 N N 13 14 21 22 Maintenance switches are fitted to electrical machines or installations to provide safe working conditions in accordance with the safety regulations. 1) FS 908 1) Load shedding contact 4-3 . padlocking feature. main switches T0-2-1 P1-25 P1-32 P3-63 P3-100 P5-125 P5-160 P5-250 P5-315 ON OFF L1 L2 L3 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 These switches can also be used as switch-disconnectors for lighting... 4 FS 908 Maintenance switches (safety switches) with auxiliary contacts T0-3-15680 ON L1 OFF 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 L2 FS 908 L3 N N 1) P1-25/.. If it is not clear which drive is associated with which main switch./ P3-63/./ P3-100/.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches ON-Off switches. Main switches to IEC/EN 60 204 for rear mounting switches with door interlock... N and PE terminal. maintenance switches On-Off switchs../ .

maintenance switches Circuit diagram example for maintenance switches with a load shedding contact and (or) switch position indicator L1 L2 L3 N F1 F0 FAZB4/1-HS 95 T0(3)-3-15683 maintenance switch Function Load shedding: When switching on. the contactor is first disconnected by opening the early-break contact. main switches. then the contactor is activated via the late-make N/O contact. the main current contacts close first.11-12 9-10 4-4 .3-4. 4 1 3 5 Q11 2 4 6 F2 96 21 F2 O 22 13 13 I Q11 14 14 1 3 5 7 9 11 Q1 2 U 4 V 6 W 8 10 12 A1 M 3 P1 P2 Q11 A2 P1: On P2: Off Q11: Load shedding T0(3)-3-15683 circuit diagram 1-2.5-6 7-8. When switching off.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches ON-Off switches. Switch position indication: The position of the switch can be signalled to the control panel or mimic diagram panel via additional make and NC contacts. then the main contacts isolate the motor supply.

reversing switches Changeover switches T0-3-8212 T3-3-8212 T5B-3-8212 T5-3-8212 T6-3-8212 T8-3-8212 0 1 2 L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10 2 FS 684 4 Reversing switches T0-3-8401 T3-3-8401 T5B-3-8401 T5-3-8401 0 1 2 L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 0 2 FS 684 4-5 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Changeover switches.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches (Reversing) star-delta switches Star-delta switches T0-4-8410 T3-4-8410 Y 0 L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 YΔ T5B-4-8410 T5-4-8410 FS 635 4 W2 W1 V2 U1 U2 V1 Reversing star-delta switches T0-6-15877 T3-6-15877 0 Y Y L1L2L3 SOND 28 1 ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Y 0 Y FS 638 W2 W1 V2 U1 U2 V1 Standard contactor interlock a section "Interlock circuits". page 4-11 1) 4-6 .

non-reversing Tapped winding T0-4-8440 T3-4-8440 T5B-4-8440 T5-4-8440 1 0 2 L1 L2L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1 2 FS 644 1U 2W 2U 1W 1V 2V 4 a without connections 2 separate windings T0-3-8451 T3-3-8451 T5B-3-8451 T5-3-8451 1 0 2 L1L2L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1U 2U 0 1 2 FS 644 1W 1V 2W 2V 4-7 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Multi-Speed Switches 2 speeds.

reversing T0-5-8453 T3-5-8453 0 1 2 1 2 L1 L2L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 0 1 2 FS 629 1U 2U 1W 1V 2W 2V 4-8 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Multi-Speed Switches 2 speeds. reversing Tapped winding T0-6-15866 T3-6-15866 0 1 2 1 2 L1 L2 L3 2 1 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FS 629 4 1U 2W 1W 2U 2V 1V 2 separate windings.

non-reversing Tapped winding arrangement.(B)d = (B)y y 4-9 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Multi-Speed Switches 3 speeds. single winding for low speed T0-6-8455 T3-6-8455 T5B-6-8455 T5-6-8455 1 0 2 3 L1 L2 L3 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1U 2W 2U 1W A 1V 1W B 1V 1U 2V FS 616 4 0-(A)y.

single winding for high speed T0-6-8459 T3-6-8459 1 0 2 3 L1 L2 L3 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1U 2W 2U 1W A 1V 1W B 1V 1U 2V FS 616 4 T5B-6-8459 T5-6-8459 1 0 2 3 FS 420 0-(B)d.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Multi-Speed Switches 3 speeds.(B)y y -(A)y 4-10 . non-reversing Tapped winding arrangement.

The following points are common to all interlock circuits: Without mains disconnection (SOND 27) Mains disconnection only by contactor primarily for star-delta circuit Q11 F0 F2 S0 Q1 01 2 • Protection against automatic restarting after a motor overload or power failure • The facility for remote disconnection (e. With mains disconnection (SOND 28) Mains disconnection by contactor and switch 4 Q11 F0 F2 S0 Control section SOND 27 Power section without mains disconnection Circuit as required Q11 Q11 Q1 01 2 Control section SOND 28 Power section without mains disconnection Circuit as required Q11 Q11 M 3~ M 3~ Interlock with contactor (SOND 29) Contactor can be energized only when switch is in an operating position Q11 F0 F2 S0 S1 Q11 Q11 Q1 01 2 Interlock with contactor (SOND 30) Contactor can be energized only when switch is in an operating position Q11 F0 F2 Control section SOND 29 Power section S0 Q1 01 2 Control section SOND 30 Power section S1 Q11 Q11 Circuit as required M 3~ M 3~ Circuit as required 4-11 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Interlock circuits Interlock circuits between rotary switches and contactors with overload relays provide neat and economical solutions for many switching drive tasks.g. emergency-stop) can be provided by one or more Off pushbuttons.

4 L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 0 L3-L1 L2-L3 L1-L2 0 L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-N L2-N L3-N L1L2L3 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 L1L2 L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FS 1410759 FS 164854 V V Ammeter selector switches T0-5-15925 T3-5-15925 For direct measurement 0 L3 L2 L1 L1 L2 L3 0 L1L2L3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 FS 9440 A L1 L2 L3 4-12 L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Single-phase starting switches Meter selector switches enable you to measure currents. Some of the most common ones are shown below. voltages and power in three-phase systems with only one measuring device. Voltmeter changeover switch T0-3-8007 3 x phase to phase 3 x phase to neutral with “0” position T0-2-15922 3 x phase to neutral without “0” position L2-L3 L1-L2 L3-L1 Numerous circuits are possible for the different measurements.

L1 L2 L3 W 1 2 3 11 FS 953 10 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 4-13 .e. only when the four-cable system is balanced. i. 0 1 2 The Aron circuit will give a correct result for four-cable systems only when the sum of the currents equals zero. The total wattage is calculated by adding together the two wattages.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Meter selector switches Ammeter changeover switch T0-3-8048 T3-3-8048 For measurement via transformers. complete rotation possible 0 L3 L2 L1 L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 FS 9440 0 L1L2L3 0 4 A Wattmeter selector switches T0-5-8043 T3-5-8043 Two-phase method (Aron circuit) for three-cable installations loaded as required.

Industrial Switchgear and in the catalogue K 115. complete rotation possible 1 0 2 1+2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 1+2 2 0 FS 193840 Further heater switches. and number of steps are described in the Moeller Main Catalogue. with alternative circuitry. 3 steps T0-2-8316 T3-2-8316 T5B-2-8316 1 0 2 3 L1 L2 L3 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I 1 2 3 II III FS 420 4 I II III T0-2-15114. output stages. 4-14 .and 3-pole. 2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Rotary switches Heater switches 1-pole disconnection.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Rotary switches Step switches
One step closed in each position, complete rotation possible T0-6-8239 T3-6-8239
345 2 6 1 7 12 8 1110 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

FS 301

4

4-15

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Rotary switches Step switches
Stay-put switches On-Off stay-put switch 1-pole: T0-1-15401 2-pole: T0-1-15402 3-pole: T0-2-15403
0 1

0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6

FS 415

4
Changeover switches 1-pole: T0-1-15421 2-pole: T0-2-15422 3-pole: T0-3-15423
2 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1-pole: T0-1-15431 2-pole: T0-2-15432 3-pole: T0-3-15433
20 1
HAND

0

AUTO

HAND 0 AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

FS 429

FS 1401

On-Off stay-put switches 1-pole: T0-1-15521 2-pole: T0-2-15522 3-pole: T0-3-15523 With pulsed contact in the intermediate position
ON OFF

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1

FS 908

4-16

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Rotary switches Rotary switches and switch-disconnectors with ATEX approval
What does ATEX stand for? ATmosphéres EXplosibles = ATEX Explosive atmospheres Gas Dust Two standards For operators: 1999/92/EC (binding from 06/2006) Explosion risk assessment Gas, steam, mist Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2 Dust Ex risk For manufacturers: 94/9/EC (binding from 06/2003) Device groups Group I II Application Mining Everything, except mining

4

Zone 20 permanent, frequent, long periods Zone 21 occasional Zone 22 normally not, but then for short time

Selection of devices and protective systems by categories Gas, steam, mist Zone 0, 1, 2 Zone 1, 2 Zone 2 Dust Zone 20, 21, 22 Zone 21, 22 Zone 22 Category 1 1, 2 1, 2, 3

Selection of devices by device groups Group I I II II II Category M1 M2 1 2 3 Safety Very high High Very high High Normal

4-17

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Rotary switches Rotary switches and switch-disconnectors with ATEX approval
ATEX approval for Moeller Moeller offers T rotary switches (from 20 to 100 A) and P switch-disconnectors (from 25 to 100 A) in accordance with the binding ATEX Directive 94/6 EC (binding from 06/2006). The switches are provided with the equipment marking Ex II3D IP5X T90°C and are approved for the Ex zone 22 in explosive dust atmospheres. • ON-OFF switches or, • Changeover switches. The following ATEX switches are available:
Current range 20 A 25 A 32 A 63 A 100 A T rotary switches T0-…/I1 – T3-.../I2 T5B-.../I4 T5-.../I5 P switch-disconnectors – P1-25/I2 P1-32/I2 P3-63/I4 P3-100/I5

4

Explosive dust atmospheres are present in: • • • • • • • • • Mills, Metal polishing workshops, Woodworking facilities, Cement industry, Aluminium industry, Animal feed industry, Grain storage and preparation, Agriculture, Pharmacy etc.

Note Moeller ATEX switches have passed the EC prototype test for main, maintenance and manual override switches for the current ranges from 20 to 100 A. They are approved for explosive dust atmospheres in accordance with category II 3D, with the test number: BVS 04E 106X. For further information see installation instructions AWA1150-2141.

The ATEX switches are used as: • Main switches • Maintenance switches • Repair switches,

General installation and application notes • Only suitable cable glands may be used for category 3D! • Use only temperature resistant cables (> 90°C)! • The maximum surface temperature is 90°C! • Operation only permissible at an ambient temperature between –20 and +40°C! • Observe the technical data of the switch used! • Never open the device in dust explosive atmospheres! • Observe the requirements of EN 50281-1-2! • Check that the device is free of dust prior to assembly! • Do not open the device while it is energized!

4-18

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays
Page Contactor relays SmartWire Contactors DIL, overload relays Z Contactors DIL Overload relays Z ZEV electronic motor-protective system Thermistor machine protection device EMT6 CMD contactor monitoring device 5-2 5-8 5-24 5-30 5-35 5-38 5-45 5-48

5

5-1

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays Contactor relays
Contactor relays Contactor relays are often used in control and regulating functions. They are used in large numbers for the indirect control of motors, valves, clutches and heating equipment. In addition to the simplicity which they offer in project engineering, panel building, commissioning and maintenance, the high level of safety which they afford is a major factor in their favour. between the contact input and output. All Moeller contactor relays have double-break contacts. The German Trade Associations demand that, for control systems of power-driven metalwork presses, the contacts of contactors must be interlocked and opposing. Interlocking means that the contacts are mechanically connected to one another such that N/C contacts and N/O contacts can never be closed simultaneously. At the same time, it is necessary to ensure that the contact gaps are at least 0.5 mm over the entire life, even when defective (e.g. when a contact is welded). The contactor relays DILER and DILA fulfil this requirement.

5

Safety The contactor relay contacts themselves constitute a considerable safety feature. By design and construction they ensure electrical isolation between the actuating circuit and the operating circuit, in the de-energized state, Moeller contactor relays Moeller offers two ranges of contactor relays as a modular system: • Contactor relays DILER, • Contactor relays DILA. and the modules are described on the following pages. Modular system The modular system has many advantages for the user. The system is formed around basic units, which are equipped with additional functions by means of modules. Basic units are intrinsically functional units, consisting of an AC or DC drive and four auxiliary contacts.

Modules with auxiliary functions Auxiliary contact modules have 2 or 4 contacts. The combination of normally open contacts and normally closed contacts comply with EN 50011. The auxiliary contact modules of the contactors DILEM and DILM cannot be snapped onto the basic device to prevent duplication of terminal markings e.g. contact 21/22 on the basic unit and 21/22 on the add-on auxiliary contact module. The DILA and DILM7 to DILM32 contactors of the DILA-XHIR11 auxilary contact are available specially for switching very low signals for electronic applications.

5-2

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays Contactor relays
The system and the Standard European Standard EN 50011 “Terminal markings, reference numbers and reference letters for certain contactor relays” has a direct bearing on the use and application of the modular system. There are various types, which the Standard differentiates between by means of reference numbers and reference letters, depending on the number and position of the make and N/C contacts in the device, and their terminal markings. Ideally devices with the reference letter E should be used. The basic devices DILA-40, DILA-31, DILA-22 as well as DILER-40, DILER-31 and DILER-22 comply with the E version. Example 1 DILA-XHI04
51 61 71 81

For 6 and 8 pole contactor relays, the “E” version means that four make contacts must be arranged in the lower/rear contact level. If, for example, the available auxiliary contact modules are used in the DILA-22 and DILA-31, they result in contact combinations with reference letters X and Y. Below are 3 examples of contactors with 4 normally open and 4 normally closed contacts with different reference letters. Version E is to be preferred.

5

Example 2 DILA-XHI13
53 61 71 81

Example 3 DILA-XHI22
53 61 71 83

52 62 72 82

54 62 72 82

54 62 72

84

+ DILA-40
A1 13 23 33 43

+ DILA-31
A1 13 21 33 43

+ DILA-22
A1 13 21 31 43

A2 14 24 34 44

A2 14 22 34 44

A2 14 22 32 44

q 44 E DILA40/04

q 44 X DILA31/13

q 44 Y DILA22/22

5-3

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays Contactor relays
Coil connections
A1

On the contactor relay DILA the coil connection A1 is at the top and A2 at the bottom. As suppressor circuits the following are connected on the front: • RC suppressors • Varistor suppressors The DC operated contactors DILER and DILA have an integrated suppressor circuit.

A1 A2 A2
DILER DILA

5

On the top positioned terminals A1–A2 of the contactor DILER the following accessories are connected to limit the relay coil switch off voltage peaks: • RC suppressors • Diode suppressors • Varistor suppressors Suppressor circuit Electronic equipment is today being increasingly used in combination with conventional switching devices such as contactors. This equipment includes programmable logic controllers (PLCs), timing relays and coupling modules, whose operation can be adversely affected by disturbances from interactions between all the components. One of the disturbance factors occurs when inductive loads, such as coils of electromagnetic switching devices, are switched off. High cut-off induction voltages can be produced when such devices are switched off and, under some circumstances, can destroy adjacent electronic devices or, via capacitive coupling mechanisms, can generate interference voltage pulses and thus cause disruptions in operation. Since interference-free disconnection is impossible without an accessory, the coils may be connected to a suppressor module, depending on the application. The advantages and disadvantages of the various suppressor circuits are explained in the following table.

5-4

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Notes

5

5-5

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays Contactor relays
Circuit diagram Load current and voltage responses Proof against incorrect connection also for AC –
I0 t0 t1 t2 t t

Additional dropout delay

Induction voltage limiting defined

+ D –

i 0

Very long

1V

5

u U 0 0 U

+ D ZD –

i 0


I0 t0 t1 t2 t U t

Medium

UZD

u U 0 0

i I0 0 VDR u U0 0 U t1 t2

yes
t t

Short

UVDR

R C

i I0 0 u U 0 0

yes
t0 t

Short

T 1

t

5-6

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays Contactor relays
Circuit diagram Damping also below ULIMIT Increased rating with circuitry Notes

+ D –

Advantages:

Dimensioning uncritical, minimum possible induction voltage, very simple and reliable Long drop-out delay Very short drop-out delay. Dimensioning uncritical. Simple construction No damping below UZD Dimensioning uncritical. High energy absorption. Very simple construction No damping below UVDR HF damping due to stored energy, immediate de-energisation, highly suitable for AC. Precise dimensioning required
5-7

5

Disadvantage:
+ D ZD –

Advantages:

Disadvantage: –
VDR

Advantages:

Disadvantage: yes
R C

yes

Advantages:

Disadvantage:

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Contactors and relays SmartWire
Connect, don't wire The heart of a modern machine control system is the PLC (programmable logic controller). Typically the PLC is mounted in a control panel in a central position of the system. The switchgear is connected with special cables to the input and output terminals of the PLC for the control and return signals. In a distributed system the connections between the switchgear and the remote input/output system are of a similar type. The system SmartWire system is used for the connection between the switchgear and the PLC. The inputs/outputs of the PLC are relocated to the switchgear and connected with a plug-in cable. The switchgear is supplied, as much as possible, by the connection cable. This saves time with control wiring, saves space in the control panel (because cable trunking is no longer requiered) and reduces the necessary inputs/outputs on the PLC.

5

5-8

5 A SmartWire power module SmartWire connection cable SmartWire module for DILM Reversing starter MSC-R up to 12 A The SmartWire system connects the switching device with the PLC. The SmartWire module for DILM takes over the functions of several inputs/outputs. The SmartWire module is connected with a gateway via a SmartWire connection cable. The gateway then connects the SmartWire system with the superimposed field bus and therefore 5-9 . contactors or the contactors of the motor starters.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays SmartWire Overview SmartWire The SmartWire system consists of the following components: 1 2 3 6 XI/ON 10 6 5 5 7 4 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Gateway for easyNet and CANopen Gateway for PROFIBUS-DP XI/ON gateway SmartWire-I/O module DOL starter MSC-D up to 32 A DOL starter MSC-D up to 15. SmartWire modules for DILM are mounted directly on relays.

The slaves can be eithar SmartWire modules for DILM or SmartWire I/O modules. SmartWire power module 5 The SmartWire module for DILM is fixed directly onto a contactor DILM7 to DILM32. For this purpose the 6 pole SmartWire connection cable is connected via the sockets IN and OUT. The power module has two applications: • Exceeding the power capacity of the contactors in the total SmartWire chain of 72 W/3 A. 5-10 . Via the 4 inputs various sensors can be integrated into the SmartWire system via floating contacts.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays SmartWire allows communication with various field bus systems. The SmartWire system can consist of a line with up to 16 slaves. 3 A at 250 V. • Requirement of selective safety switch-off of individual contactor groups or motor starter groups. As well as the communication signals a 24 V supply for the contactor coil is also transmitted via the SmartWire connection cable. The SmartWire module for DILM allows a contactor or a motor starter to be directly controlled from a PLC and the return signals to be monitored. SmartWire-I/O module With a SmartWire power module a second connection for the contactor coil control voltage can be made at another position in the SmartWire chain. a relay DILA or a motor starter MSC. Both digital relay outputs Q1 c and Q2 g can be used in the actuation of actuators up to a rated current of AC-15. SmartWire module for DILM The SmartWire I/O module provides digital inputs and outputs in the SmartWire system.

Aux way b j c 24 V 0V 24 V 0V 24 V 0V 24 V 0V 5 d d a M M M M M M M M M e a b c d e f g h i j SmartWire module for DILM: SWIRE-DIL Gateway SmartWire power module: SWIRE-PF SmartWire connection cable: SWIRE-CAB-… SmartWire end plug: SWIRE-CAB-000 Field bus Programmable logic controller Earth Fuse SmartWire I/O module: SWIRE-4DI-2DO-R 5-11 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays SmartWire Assembly SmartWire system 24 V DC 24 V 0V h i g f Gate.

For the electrical interlocking of both contactors this bridge is removed and the auxiliary break contact (21-22) of the other contactor is connected as floating contact. Star-delta starters with 3 SmartWire modules for DILM They control the contactors so the terminals A1-A2 of the contactors do not have to be wired. When required. Terminals X3-X4 are supplied with a bridging connection. page 5-15 5-12 . A return signal is also fed back to the SmartWire system via the SmartWire module for DILM. The terminals X3-X4 are supplied with a bridging connection. For the electrical interlocking of both contactors this bridge is removed and the normally closed auxiliary contact (21-22) of the other contactor is connected as floating contact. Also a return signal to the system is fed for each of the SmartWire system modules for DILM. page 5-13 Reversing starters The reversing starter is assembled from a PKZM0 and two contactors DILM7 to DILM32. page 5-18 5 A return signal to the PLC is available at terminals X1-X2. a figure. A SmartWire module for DILM is mounted on each contactor. The SmartWire module for DILM controls the contactors so the terminals A1-A2 of the contactors must not be wired.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays SmartWire DOL starters The SmartWire module for DILM controls the contactor so the terminals A1-A2 must not be wired. Also a return signal will be given back for each to the system SmartWire via the SmartWire module for DILM. a figure. The further operation is the same as that of a conventional star-delta starter. page 5-14 and a figure. The inputs of the SmartWire I/O module are used to implement return signals to the SmartWire system. If in the application electrical interlocking is required the bridge can be removed and the floating contacts connected. Also a return signal is fed back to the SmartWire system via the SmartWire module for DILM. The terminals X3-X4 are supplied with a bridging connection. page 5-17 With SmartWire module for DILM and ETR4-51 timing relay The SmartWire module for DILM controls mains contactor Q11 so that terminals A1-A2 do not have to be wired. The PLC and the changeover between star contactor and delta contactor have the same wiring and function as the conventional star-delta starter assembly. a floating auxiliary contact of the PKZ motor-protective circuit-breaker can be connected here. page 5-16 with SmartWire-I/O module The SmartWire I/O module actuates contactor Q11 via digital relay output Q1. a figure. a figure. a figure.

14 1.13 1.21 Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 IN OUT -Q11 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q11 2 6 4 1 3 5 PE U U V W PE V W PE Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 X1 M 3~ -M1 5-13 5 .13 1.22 A1 1.14 1.Circuit diagram DOL starters SmartWire 6 6 L1 SmartWire L2 L3 -Q1 1 3 5 1.

5-14 SmartWire 6 6 6 Circuit diagram for reversing starter with DILM7 to DILM12 with electrical interlock bridge SmartWire SmartWire 5 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 1.14 1.22 -Q12 21 22 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q1 3 4 IN OUT A1 A1 1.13 1.13 1.14 -Q11 6 1 5 3 5 2 4 6 -Q12 1 2 IN OUT -Q11 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC -Q12 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 PE X1 U V W PE U V W PE M 3~ -M1 .21 Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 -Q11 22 21 1.

13 1.14 1.22 I> I> I> -Q11 21 22 2 4 6 -Q11 4 IN OUT A1 1 3 1.Circuit diagram for reversing starter with DILM17 to DILM32 SmartWire SmartWire 6 6 6 L1 SmartWire L2 L3 1 3 5 1.14 3 6 5 2 4 6 -Q12 1 5 -Q1 1.21 Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 -Q12 22 21 1.13 2 IN OUT A1 -Q11 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC -Q12 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 PE X1 U V W PE U V W PE M 3~ -M1 5-15 5 .

54 I> I> I> -Q1 1.53 2 4 6 -Q11 2 4 6 1 3 5 3 5 2 4 6 -Q12 -Q13 1 3 5 2 4 6 -Q13 1 -Q11 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC 21 22 IN OUT PE -Q12 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 X1 U1 V1 W1 PE V2 W2 U2 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC U1 V1 W1 PE -Q12 21 22 IN OUT -M1 3~ M V2 W2 U2 -Q13 X1 X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC .5-16 Circuit diagram for star-delta starter with 3 SmartWire modules for DILM SmartWire SmartWire 6 6 6 6 5 L1 SmartWire SmartWire L2 L3 Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 1 3 5 1.53 1.54 X1 IN OUT 1.

Circuit diagram for star-delta starter with SmartWire I/O module L01 -Q1 1.53 L1 L2 L3 13 14 6 -Q1 1 3 5 1.54 1.54 1.62 -K2 SmartWire SmartWire 6 Contactors and relays SmartWire I> I> I> 57 58 67 13 2 4 6 -K1 -K1 68 -Q11 14 -Q11 2 4 6 1 3 22 21 22 21 3 5 2 4 6 -Q12 1 5 3 5 2 4 6 -Q13 1 -Q12 -Q13 -Q1 1.62 PE IN OUT V+ I1 A1 A1 A1 I2 I3 I4 V+ Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 X1 -Q11 A2 U1 V1 W1 PE V2 W2 U2 U1 V1 W1 PE -K1 -Q13 A2 -Q12 A2 -K2 Q1 13 14 Q2 23 24 -M1 3~ M L02 V2 W2 U2 5-17 5 .61 1.61 1.53 1.

62 -Q11 I> I> I> SmartWire 6 6 2 4 6 SmartWire -K1 17 18 17 -K1 -Q11 2 4 6 1 3 5 3 5 2 4 6 -Q12 1 3 5 2 4 6 -Q13 1 28 -Q12 -Q1 1.54 1.5-18 Circuit diagram for star-delta starter with SmartWire I/O module for DILM and ETR4-51 timing relay L01 -Q1 1.61 1.54 1.61 22 21 -Q13 22 21 PE Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 X1 -Q11 L02 U1 V1 W1 PE V2 W2 U2 U1 V1 W1 PE X2 X3 X4 24V 0V DC -K1 A1 A1 A1 -Q13 A2 A2 -Q12 A2 -M1 3~ M V2 W2 U2 .53 5 L1 L2 L3 13 14 Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 1 3 5 1.62 IN OUT X1 1.53 1.

page 5-20 and a figure. it can be laid out to provide safety shutdown functionality using the configuration described below. controllers up to EN 954-1 safety category 1 can be set up.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays SmartWire SmartWire system for safety-relevant applications In most applications an emergency stop function and power-off when a guard or protective door is opened is required in addition to normal operational switching. the safety relay isolates the control voltages for both the group contactor and the motor contactors. With this circuit layout. With this redundant isolation the circuit fulfills the requirements for category 3 PLCs. page 5-23 5 5-19 . a figure. In an emergency. page 5-21 Measures to achieve a higher safety category In many applications PLCs with safety category 3 or 4 according to EN 954-1 are required. a figure. Additional SmartWire power modules can be combined into contactor groups that can be switched off together in an emergency. Although the SmartWire system is not designed for transmitting safety-relevant signals. Category 3 controllers can be built with an additional series-connected group contactor upstream of the motor outgoers. the control voltage for the contactor coils can be switched off through the safety relay’s Enable circuit. In an emergency. page 5-22 and a figure.

5 Circuit diagram for safety power-off 5-20 -Q02 I> I> I> 400 2h 0 L1 L2 L3 PE Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q01 I> I> I> H 0 -T01 24 -F01 -F02 13 21 -S01 NOT AUS -K01 -K02 Gateway In NET Out Out 24V 0V 14 24V 0V 22 -F03 -K01 -K03 Power-Module 23 24 -F04 24V 0V Aux 21 Power-Aux SmartWire In Out -S02 RESET 22 -K01 A1 A2 Y1 Y2 Y3 13 23 33 41 SmartWire NET U Aux Ready Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 RESET 6 6 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A2 X3 X4 K1 SmartWire 6 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A2 X3 X4 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A1 X1 X2 IN OUT 6 6 6 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT CONTROL-LOGIC POWER -Q11 K1 14 24 34 42 -Q12 A2 X3 X4 -Q13 A2 X3 X4 -Q14 A2 X3 X4 -Q15 .

Mains circuit for safety relevant switch-offs L1 L2 L3 PE Contactors and relays SmartWire -Q1 -Q3 I> I> I> 2 4 2 6 6 4 1 3 5 5 3 3 5 -Q2 -Q4 I> I> I> 1 3 5 1 1 -Q5 1 3 5 I> I> I> 2 4 6 2 4 6 I> I> I> I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q11 2 4 6 6 1 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 4 6 -Q12 2 -Q13 2 -Q14 2 -Q15 2 4 6 PE U U V W PE U V V W PE U V W PE W PE U U V V W PE W PE U U V V W PE W PE Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 U V W PE U V W PE -M1 -M1 M 3~ -M3 -M2 M 3~ M 3~ -M1 -M4 M 3~ -M1 -M5 M 3~ -M1 -M1 5-21 5 .

32 1.31 1.5-22 Control circuit for redundant switch-offs 5 L1 L2 L3 -Q02 I> I> I> 400 2h 0 PE -Q01 Contactors and relays SmartWire I> I> I> H 0 -T01 24 -F01 -F02 23 24 24V 0V 21 14 34 24V 0V Aux 24V 0V 22 21 13 -F03 -K01 -K03 Power-Module -K01 33 -F04 -Q15 -K02 Gateway In NET Out Out 22 21 -Q14 21 22 -Q11 22 21 -K01 -Q16 SmartWire NET U Aux Ready In 22 13 -Q13 21 -Q12 22 Power-Aux SmartWire Out -S02 RESET 14 A1 A2 S34 S35 13 23 33 RESET 6 6 A1 A2 A2 X3 X4 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A2 X3 X4 6 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT A2 X3 X4 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT K1 SmartWire 6 6 6 A1 X1 X2 IN OUT CONTROL-LOGIC Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 POWER -Q11 -Q12 K1 – + CH1 + CH2 + – -Q16 S21 S12 S12 S33 S31 S22 14 24 34 -Q13 A2 X3 X4 -Q14 A2 X3 X4 -Q15 1.22 .21 -S01 NOT AUS 1.

Main circuit for redundant switch-offs L1 L2 L3 PE Contactors and relays SmartWire -F1 I> I> I> 2 4 2 6 2 6 4 4 6 -Q1 -Q3 I> I> I> I> I> I> 1 5 3 -Q2 -Q4 -Q5 1 3 5 5 5 3 3 1 1 1 3 5 I> I> I> 6 2 4 I> I> I> 2 4 6 1 5 6 2 6 4 -Q16 2 -Q12 2 4 6 3 5 1 3 5 3 1 4 6 -Q11 2 -Q13 1 3 5 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 4 -Q14 2 -Q15 2 4 6 PE W PE U U V W PE V W PE W PE U U V V W PE W PE U U V V W PE W PE U U V V W PE W PE Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 U V U V -M1 -M1 M 3~ -M2 M 3~ -M3 M 3~ -M1 -M4 M 3~ -M1 -M5 M 3~ -M1 -M1 5-23 5 .

3-pole 5 DILM7 … DILM15 DILM17 … DILM38 DILM40 …DILM72 DILM80 … DILM170 DILM185 … DILM250 DILM300 … DILM500 DILM580 … DILM1000 DILH1400 5-24 DILM1600 DILH2000 DILH2200 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL. overload relays Z Overview of DIL contactors.

4 pole DILEM4 5 DILMP20 DILMP32 … DILMP45 DILMP63 … DILMP80 DILMP125 … DILMP200 Part no.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL. Rated operational current 50 – 60 Hz open AC-1 40 °C A 50 °C A 20 21 30 41 60 76 116 150 188 60 °C A 191) 20 28 39 54 69 108 138 172 conventional free air thermal current Ith = Ie AC-1 open Ith = Ie A 20 20 32 45 63 80 125 160 200 DILEM4 DILMP20 DILMP32-10 DILMP45-10 DILMP63 DILMP80 DILMP125 DILMP160 DILMP200 1) At 55 °C 22 22 32 45 63 80 125 160 200 5-25 . overload relays Z Overview DILP contactors.

5 2. 400 V 3 4 3 4 5.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL. 230 V 1.5 6.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 660 V.5 3. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – DILEEM DILEM DILM7 DILM9 DILM12 DILM15 DILM17 DILM25 DILM32 DILM38 DILM40 DILM50 DILM65 DILM72 DILM80 DILM95 DILM115 DILM150 DILM170 5 17 25 32 38 40 50 65 72 80 95 115 150 170 5-26 .6 9 7 9 12 15.5 4. rating [kW] AC-3 220 V.5 4 5 7.5 18. overload relays Z Rated operating current Ie [A] At 400 V 6.5 11 15 18.5 7 11 14 17 17 23 30 35 35 63 75 90 96 140 1000 V Conventional free air thermal current Ith = Ie [A] AC-1 at 60 °C 20 20 20 20 20 20 35 40 40 40 50 65 80 80 90 110 130 160 185 Part no.5 10 11 12.5 20 25 25 30 37 48 52 380 V. 690 V 3 4 3.2 2.5 max.5 15.5 7.2 2.5 7.

Auxiliary contact blocks For surface mounting DILEEM DILEM DILM7 DILM9 DILM12 DILM15 DILM17 DILM25 DILM32 DILM38 DILM40 DILM50 DILM65 DILM72 DILM80 DILM95 DILM115 DILM150 DILM170 ZB150-35 up to ZB150-175 DILM150-XHI(V)… DILM1000-XHI(V)… ZB65-10 up to ZB65-75 DILM32-XHI11-S ZB32-0.16 up to ZB12-16 Electronic motor protection system ZEV – – 5 5-27 . overload relays Z Part no.16 up to ZB32-38 ZEV + ZEV-XSW-25 ZEV-XSW-65 ZEV-XSW-145 ZEV-XSW-820 02DILEM 11DILEM 22DILEM DILA-XHI(V)… DILM32-XHI… For side mounting Motor overload relay ZE-0.16 up to ZE-9 ZB12-0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL.

108 108 108 132 132 132 600 600 800 800 DILM185 DILM225 DILM250 DILM300 DILM400 DILM500 DILM580 DILM650 DILM750 DILM820 5 580 650 750 820 1000 1600 1400 2000 2200 1) Please enquire 315 500 – – – 560 900 – – – 1000 1600 – – – 1100 1) 1000 1800 1400 2000 2200 DILM1000 DILM1600 DILH1400 DILH2000 DILH2200 – – – 5-28 . overload relays Z Rated operating current Ie [A] At 400 V 185 225 250 300 400 500 max.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL. 230 V 55 70 75 90 125 155 185 205 240 260 380 V. 400 V 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 660 V. 690 V 175 215 240 286 344 344 560 630 720 750 1000 V Conventional free air thermal current Ith = Ie [A] AC-1 at 60 °C 275 315 350 400 500 700 800 850 900 1000 Part no. rating [kW] AC-3 220 V.

Auxiliary contact blocks For surface mounting DILM185 DILM225 DILM250 DILM300 DILM400 DILM500 DILM580 DILM650 DILM750 DILM820 – ZW7-63 up to ZW7-630 ZEV + ZEV-XSW-25 ZEV-XSW-65 ZEV-XSW-145 ZEV-XSW-820 – For side mounting Motor overload relay Z5-70/FF250 up to Z5-250/FF250 Electronic motor protection system ZEV DILM1000-XHI… 5 DILM1000 DILM1600 DILH1400 DILH2000 DILH2200 – – – – – – 5-29 . overload relays Z Part no.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL Accessories Device DILE(E)M DIL7 to DILM170 AC DC DILM185 to DILM500 j – – – j to DILM185 j – j j j j j DILM580 to DILM2000 j – – – – – j – to DILM820 j j j j 1) Suppressor circuit RC suppressors Varistor suppressors Motor suppressor module – j j – j j j j – – – – – – j j to DILM15 j j j – – from DILM17 – – – to DILM32 j – – to DILM15 j j j – – from DILM17 – – – to DILM32 5 Star-point bridge Paralleling link Mechanical interlock Sealable shroud Cable terminals Individual coils Electronic modules Electronic modules including coils Terminal cover Timer module 1) Terminal cover to DILM1000. 5-30 .

• Screw or spring terminals The contactors DILE(E)M and DILA/DILM12. The shake proof and maintenance free spring terminals can terminate two conductors each of 0. up to 2000 A.1 W necessary.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL Contactors DILM These are designed and tested to IEC/EN 60 947. are available with screw or spring terminals. For contactors DILM80 to DILM170 Allen screws are used. • Integrated auxiliary contact The contactors up to DILM32 have an integrated auxiliary contact as N/O or N/C contact. Additional terminal covers are available from DILM185 onwards. • Accessible control voltage connections The coil connections are on the front of the contactor. • Terminals Up to DILM72 the connection terminals for all auxiliary contacts and coils as well as for main conductors can be tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. There are two coil terminals (110 to 120 V 50/60 Hz and 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz). • Control of the contactors DILM185 to DILM2000 by three different methods: – Conventionally via coil terminals A1-A2 – Directly from a PLC via terminals A3-A4 – By a low power contact via terminals A10-A11. Equipment features • Magnet system Due to the new electronic operation the DC contactors from 17 to 72 A have a sealing power of only 0. • Intergrated suppressor DC With all DC contactors DILM a suppressor is integrated in the electronics. • Contactors with screwless terminals They have spring terminals in the mains current circuit as well as for the coil terminals and auxiliary contacts. They give total security with varying cross sections and have protection against incorrect insertion to ensure safe connection. • Conventional control of contactors DILM185-S to DILM500-S via coil terminals A1-A2. Even for 170 A is only 2. They are not covered by the main current wiring. • Mechanical interlock With two connectors and a mechanical interlock an interlocked contactor combination up to 150 A can be achieved 5-31 5 . including the corresponding auxiliary contacts. DILE(E)M and DILM up to 72 A can also be snapped on to a 35 mm top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715. • Can be controlled directly from the PLC The contactors DILA and DILM to 32 A can be controlled directly from the PLC. For every motor rating between 3 kW and 900 kW there is a suitable contactor available. • Mounting All contactors can be fitted on to a mounting plate with fixing screws. • Plug-in suppressors AC With all AC contactors DILM up to 170 A a suppressor can be simply plugged in on the front when required. • All contactors up to DILM170 are finger and back-of-hand proof to IEC 536 (VDE 0160 part 100).5 W.75 to 2. • Double-frame terminal for contactors DILM7 to DILM170 With the new double frame-clamp the connection area is not limited by the screw.5 mm2 with or without ferrules.

The integration of electronics in the contactor drives makes different technical features possible which enable the contactors to offer outstanding performance in their daily use. The mechanical interlock ensures that both connected contactors cannot be similtaneously be operated. They allow reliable operation between 0. Whilst AC contactors were used 20 years ago with additional resistors and specially wound DC coils with a lot of copper were used till recently.2 x Ucmax of the rated actuation voltage.5 to 132 kW/400 V xStart DC-actuated contactors The market for DC actuated contactors is growing due to the increasing use of electronics. Rated actuation voltage RDC24 RDC60 RDC130 RDC240 24…27 V DC 48…60 V DC 110…130 V DC 200…240 V DC 5 • DIUL reversing contactors from 3 to 75 kW/400 V • SDAINL star-delta starters from 5. the next quantum leap has started. The xStart contactor series DILM7 to DILM170 has been particularly optimized in the development of DC actuated contactors. Even with a mechanical shock the contacts of both contactors cannot close similtaneously. Voltage tolerance Contactors are built in compliance with the IEC/EN 60947-4-1 standard. In addition to individual contactors. The DILM17 to DILM170 DC contactors are no longer switched on or off in the conventional way using a coil but by means of an electronic unit. The requirement for operational safety even with small mains supply fluctuations is implemented with the reliable switching of contactors at between 85 to 110 % of the rated actuation voltage. The DC actuated DILM17 to DILM170 contactors now cover an even wider range in which they switch reliably.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL without extra space requirement. The greater voltage tolerance than stipulated by the standard increases operating safety even with less stable mains conditions. 5-32 .7 x Ucmin and 1. complete contactor combinations are also available from Moeller: Universal voltage coils The DILM17 to DILM170 DC actuated contactors cover the entire DC control voltage range with only 4 control voltage variants. Electronic components are now in use for the drives of DC actuated contactors.

This allows side by side mounting of the contactors in the control panel. Thanks to their electronics. contactor coils are often connected in parallel with additional suppressor circuits (RC elements. the DC actuated contactors DILM17 to DILM170 switch without any effect on the network. The otherDILM7 to DILM15 DC operated contactors have a built-in suppressor circuit. An additional suppressor is therefore unnecessary since the coils do not generate any external overvoltages.1 W 37… 45 kW 55… 90 kW 1) AC-3 For project design. the issue of overvoltage protection in control circuits is therefore unnecessary since all DC operated contactors are free of system disturbance or are provided with a suppressor circuit. 5-33 .5… 37 kW 24 W 0. This allows the design of AC.5 W 5 90 W 149 W 1. To prevent damage.5 W 7. which it reduces to the required holding power after startup. which can then also be used with the same accessories.3 W 2.and DC-operated contactors with the same physical dimensions.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL Integrated suppressor Conventionally operated contactors generate voltage peaks at the coil to current change dI/dt which can have a negative effect on other components in the same control circuit. varistors or diodes). the reduced sealing power also means a considerable reduction in the heat dissipation in the control panel. Rated power 1) Contactor Power consumption Pick-up Holding 0. Contactor dimensions The electronic circuit provides the coil with a high making capacity. Pick-up and holding power The pickup of DC-operated contactors DILM17 to DILM170 is electronically controlled. A sufficiently high power is provided for the pickup to ensure that the contactor switches reliably.5… 15 kW DILM17 DILM25 DILM32 DILM38 DILM40 DILM50 DILM65 DILM72 DILM80 DILM95 DILM115 DILM150 DILM170 at 400 V 12 W 18. When using DC operated contactors from Moeller in the project design. The low power needed to hold the contactor is also controlled by the electronics.

The auxiliary contact of the contactor DILM can be used as mirror contact to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Appendix F to show the condition of the main contacts. Physical motor design means that rated currents for the same rating sometimes differ widely. from less than one operation per day up to a thousand operations or more per hour. a high switching frequency coincides with inching and plugging duty. Furthermore it determines the ratio of the transient peak current and the locked-rotor current to the rated operational current (Ie). • Lighting contactors DILL for 12 to 20 A/400 V (AC-5a) or 14 to 27 A/400 V (AC-5b).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Contactors DIL Applications The three-phase motor dominates the electric motor sector. The difference can be. lighting fittings. Apart from individual low-power drives. Other applications • Capacitor contactors for power factor compensation DILK for 12. Switching electrical heating installations. A mirror contact is a normally closed contact that cannot be similtaneously closed with the normally open main contacts. depending on the travel. 5 5-34 . transformers and power factor correction installations. increases the wide range of different uses for contactors. Quite often. Any interrelationships required between a number of contactors can easily be produced by means of interlocks via their auxiliary contacts.5 to 50 kvar/400 V. Contactors are actuated manually or automatically. with their typical individual characteristics. for example. The power rating in kilowatts (kW) or the current rating in amperes (A) is therefore the critical feature for correct contactor selection. using various types of command devices. which are often switched directly by hand. time. in the case of motors. The switching frequency can vary greatly in every application. most motors are controlled using contactors and contactor combinations. pressure or temperature.

The equilibrium between the reference and actual value occurs at various temperatures depending on the magnitude of the current. Tripping occurs when the reference temperature is reached. They monitor the temperature of the motor winding indirectly via the current flowing in the supply cables. • Overload. When a specific temperature is reached. Phase-failure sensitivity Overload relays Z offer. To prevent nuisance tripping. they operate an auxiliary switch. minimum times are also given for the limit current and locked-rotor current. Whatever the current. They have phase failure sensitivity to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0660 part 102 and therefore can also provide protection for EEx e motors (a following diagramms). the relay must trip out before the motor insulation is endangered. The heating is caused by resistances through which the motor current flows. and offer proven and cost-efficient protection from destruction as a result of: • Non starting. The tripping delay depends on the magnitude of the current and preloading of the relay. 5 S 97 95 97 95 97 95 98 96 98 96 98 96 Normal operation (no fault) a Trip bridge b Differential bar c Differential travel Three phase overload One phase drops out 5-35 . • Phase-failure. Overload relays operate by using the characteristic changes of shape and state of the bimetal when subjected to heating.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Overload relays Z Motor protection using Z thermal overload relays Overload relays are included in the group of current-dependent protective devices. an effective protection against phase failure. which is why EN 60947 states maximum response times. due to their design.

and thus accelerates the tripping action. ZE These tripping characteristics are mean values of the scatter bands at an ambient temperature of 20 °C from cold. due to the German Physical/Technical Bureau (PTB). the tripping delay of the overload relay drops to about a quarter of the value shown. ZB12. 2h 100 60 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 0. Design note a section "Motor protection in special applications". ZB65.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 x Setting current 1 1. ZB32. page 8-1. The trip and differential bars lie against the bimetallic strips with uniform pressure. page 8-8. 5 Tripping characteristics The overload relays ZE.6 ZB12. This differential movement is converted in the device by a step-up mechanism into a supplementary tripping movement. ZB65 and the ZB150 up to 150 A are.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Overload relays Z When the bimetallic strips in the main current section of the relay deflect as a result of three-phase motor overloading. 2h 100 60 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 0. ZB32. When units are warm. then the trip and differential bars will cover different distances. If. suitable for protection of EEx e-motors to the ATEX-Guidelines 94/9 EG. all three act on a trip bar and a differential bar.6 ZB150 Minutes 3-phase Minutes 3-phase Seconds 2-phase Seconds 2-phase 1 1. The tripping time is dependant upon the current. In the relevant manual all tripping characteristics are printed for all currents.5 2 3 4 6 8 1015 20 x Setting current 5-36 . A shared trip lever switches over the auxiliary contact when the limits are reached. in the event of phase failure for instance. one bimetallic strip does not deflect (or recover) as strongly as the other two. Further information to motor protection a section "All about Motors".

5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 x Setting current 5-37 .6 ZW7 Minutes Maximum Minimum Seconds 5 1 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Overload relays Z 2h 100 60 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 40 20 10 6 4 2 1 0.

they trip out as soon as the supply voltage fails. the entire protected range from 1 to 820 A is covered using only an evaluator. These are combined with an evaluation unit so that seperate arrangement of the current sensor and the evaluation unit is possible. In the event of excessive temperature rise. With electronic motor-protective relays. The motor-protective relay is supplied with an auxiliary voltage. In the ZEV System. phase failure and unbalanced current consumption. the relay protects the motor against earth faults. The acquisition of the actual flowing motor current in the three external conductors of the motor connections is with motor protection system ZEV with seperate push-through sensors or a sensor belt. In addition. These earth faults currents are registered on an external summation current transformer. The built-in thermistor connection allows the relay to be used as complete motor protection. With direct measurement. the conductor cross-sections used in the load circuit have no influence on the tripping accuracy. The current sensor is based on the Rogowski principle from the measurement technology. evaluats them and reports earth-fault currents to the microprocessor in the relay. Indirectly. electronic motor-protective relays are current-dependent protective devices. The evaluator has a multi-voltage version. Selecting one of the eight tripping classes (CLASS) allows the motor to be protected to be adapted from normal to extended starting conditions. 5 5-38 . The sensor belt has no iron core. unlike a current transformer. Small currents flow out even in the event of minor damage to the motor winding insulation. the motor is monitored for overload. which adds together the currents in the phases. This allows the thermal reserves of the motor to be used safely.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Operating principle and control Like overload relays operating on the bimetallic strip principle. the signal is passed to the tripping unit and the auxiliary contacts are actuated. the temperature in the motor winding is detected by means of one or more PTC thermistors. which enables all voltages between 24 V and 240 V AC or DC to be applied as supply voltage. Due to this inductive current detection. it is possible to set higher current ranges than is possible with electromechanical thermal overload relays. therefore it doesn´t become saturated and can measure a very wide current range. A reset is not possible until the thermistors cool to less than the response temperature. The ZEV electronic motor-protective system carries out motor protection both by means of indirect temperature measurement via the current and also by means of direct temperature measurement in motors with thermistors. The devices have monostable behaviour.

The above mentioned. Very good tripping accuracy is achieved and the tripping delays are constant over the entire setting range. Further information can be found in the manual AWB2300-1433G “Motor protection system ZEV. The motor current is entered without tools using the keypad. 5 Evaluation device 1 to 820 A Current sensors 1 to 25 A 3 to 65 A 10 to 145 A Sensor belt 40 to 820 A 5-39 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system In addition to the usual N/C contact (95-96) and the N/O contact (97-98) for overload relays the motor protection relay ZEV is equipped with a programmable N/O contact (07-08) and a programmable N/C contact (05-06). the relay trips after 2. and therefore a faster error handling is possible. The programmable contacts can be assigned to various signals. to the detected temperature rise of the motor. such as • Earth-fault. overload monitoring of motors in EEx e areas”. The tripping delay in comparison with the cold state is reduced as a function of the preloading of the motor. The accredition exists for overload protection of explosion proof motors of the explosion protection “increased safety” EEx e to Directive 94/9/EC as well as the report of the German Physical/Technical Bureaux (PTB report ) (EG-Prototype test certificate number PTB 01 ATEX 3233). usual contacts react directly via thermistors or indirectly via the current. If the motor current imbalance exceeds 50 %. In addition the display allows a differential diagnosis of tripping causes. including phase-failure sensitivity.5 s. • Separate indication of thermistor tripping • Internal device fault The function assignment is menu-guided using a display. • Pre-warning at 105 % thermal overload. ZEV electronic motor-protective system Tripping in the event of a 3 pole balanced overload at x-times the set current takes place within the time specified by the tripping class. and can be clearly verified on the display.

7 1 15 10 CLASS 5 2 x Ie 5 8 Tripping limits for 3 pole balanced load Response time < 30 min.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Tripping characteristics tA Minutes Tripping characteristics for 3 phase loads ZEV 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 CLASS 40 35 30 25 20 These tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time from cold to the current (multiples of set current IE ). After preloading with 100 % of the set current and the temperature rise to the operational warm state associated with it. at up to 115 % of the set current > 2 h at up to 105 % of the set current from cold 5-40 . 15 %. the stated tripping delays tA are reduced to approx. Seconds 5 20 10 5 2 1 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Electronic motor-protective system ZEV with earth-fault protection and thermistor monitored motor L1 L2 L3 N PE Z1 Z2 f S1 S2 C1 C2 Y1 Y2 A1 A2 ~ = e Q11 95 97 05 07 Q11 PE Reset a d A D Class 5 L1 L2 L3 I µP % b c M 3~ T1 T2 Mode > Up Down Fault Programmable contact 1 Programmable contact 2 Current sensor with A/D transducer Self hold-in of the contactor prevents an automatic re-start after the control voltage has failed and then returned (important for EEx e applications. a AWB2300-1433G) f Remote reset a b c d e < Test Reset 96 98 06 08 Q11 5-41 .

up to six PTC thermistor temperature sensors with a thermistor resistance of RK F 250 O or nine with a RK F 100 O can be connected to terminals T1-T2. With switch off due to thermistor 5-42 . no dangerous condition can occur should a sensor fail as the device would directly switch off. to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082. With temperature monitoring with thermistors. Additionally.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Thermistor protection With thermistor motor protection. the thermistor tripping can be programmed to different trip messages on contacts 05-06 or 07-08. R[ ] 12000 5 4000 a 1650 c d b 750 TNF –20° a b c d TNF –5° TNF TNF +5° TNF +15° i [°C] TNF= Nominal response temperature Tripping range IEC 60947-8 Re-switch on range IEC 60947-8 Tripping at 3200 O g 5 % Re-switch on at 1500 O +10 % input contacts 95-96 and 97-98 switch over. The ZEV switches off at R = 3200 O g15 % and switches on again at R = 1500 O +10 %.

– Store the tripping. • Confirmation of the short-circuit after clearing with pushbutton S3.5 mA. – Overload tripping. 5-43 . • max. type EIL 230 V AC from Crouzet). cable length to sensor 250 m (unscreened). • Setting current monitor: – Device to lowest current level. • Total PTC thermistor sensor resistance F 1500 O • Programming ZEV: “Auto reset”.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Electronic motor-protective system ZEV with short-circuit monitoring at the thermistor input L1 L2 L3 N PE Z1 Z2 a S1 S2 C1 C2 Y1 Y2 A1 A2 ~ = Q11 95 97 05 07 S3 Q11 PE Reset 5 A D L1 L2 L3 I µP % Class M 3~ T2 T1 Mode > Up Down < Test Reset 96 IN1 IN2 IN3 11 98 06 08 Q11 K1 M A1 A2 12 14 Short-circuits in the thermistor circuit can be detected if required by the additional use of a current monitor K1 (e. Basic data • Short-circuit current in the sensor circuit F 2.g.

And this saves the user time and money. Mounting details of every device can be found in the mounting instructions AWA2300-1694 or the manual AWB2300-1433D. Mounting on the current conductors Due to the fixing band the Rogowski sensor ZEV-XSW-820 is particularly easy to mount.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays ZEV electronic motor-protective system Device mounting The mounting of the device is very simple due to the clip-on and the push-through mounting. 5-44 . ZEV mounting and current sensor 3 2 1 5 1 Wrap the band around the current conductors. Attaching the sensor coils a following diagram. • Place the ZEV in the desired mounting position. • Click the ZEV on the current sensor. 3 Pull the fixing band tight and close with the velcro fastener. 2 Engage the fixing pin. • Position motor conductors through the current sensor.

the sensor resistance becomes high and causes the 5-45 . they also respond to a broken wire in the sensor circuit. Because of their integrated short-circuit monitoring the EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are especially suitable for this application. With the EMT6-(K)DB(K) the automatic re-switch on can be defeated by switching the device to “Hand”. re-switch on lock-out and stores the fault by a loss of voltage. A2 T1 T2 22 14 5 PTC N L A1 Y1 +24 V Tripped Y2 Reset 21 13 US Power A2 T1 T2 22 14 PTC N Method of operation The output relay is actuated when the control voltage is switched on and the resistance of the PTC thermistor temperature sensor is low. Since all the units use the closed-circuit principle. For protection of EEx e motors the ATEX Directives require short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit. The unit is reset using the reset button. On reaching the nominal actuation temperature (NAT).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Thermistor machine protection device EMT6 EMT6 for positive temperature coefficient thermistor L A1 Power Tripped 21 13 US output relay to drop out. The defect is indicated by an LED. The EMT6-DBK also has a zero voltage safe. The auxiliary contacts operate. Switching on again is possible only after the fault has been rectified and the control voltage is present again. The EMT6-K(DB) and EMT6-DBK are fitted with a short-cicuit in sensor circuit monitor. As soon as the sensors have cooled enough so that the respective smaller resistance is reached the EMT6-(K) switches automatically on again. Should the resistance in the sensor circuit fall below 20 ohms it trips. The thermistor machine protection relays EMT6… are accredited for protection of EEx e motors to ATEX Directive 94/9 EG by the German Physical/Technical Bureaux.

the thermostat trips or T = Tmax. Q11 goes to self-maintain. When T = Tmax the changeover contact of the contact thermometer has the position I-III. 5-46 . the safety thermostat F4 has not tripped and the condition T F Tmin is satisfied. The sensor circuit of the EMT6 (K3) is low resistance. Switching off the heater The heater circuit-breaker Q11 stays in self maintain until main switch Q1 is switched off. Main circuit-breaker Q11 drops out. Switching on the heater The heater can be switched on provided main switch Q1 is switched on. When S1 is actuated. which maintains itself via a N/O contact. the control voltage is applied to contactor relay K1. the N/C contact K3/21-22 open.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Thermistor machine protection device EMT6 EMT6 as contact protection relay L1 L2 L3 N -Q1 I> I> I> 3 400 V 50 Hz Application example Control of a storage tank heater a Control circuit b Heater Q11: Heater protection L1 a 5 A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 -Q11 A2 U V W b 400 V 50 Hz Functional description For this see circuit page 5-47. The low resistance sensor circuit of the EMT6 guarantees that Q11 is actuated via K2 N/O contact 13-14. the pushbutton S0 is pressed. The changeover contact of the contact thermometer has the position I-II.

for example.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays Thermistor machine protection device EMT6 Open-circuit protection A safety thermostat ensures fault isolation in the event of an open circuit in the sensor circuit of 13 K3. L1 -F1 4AF -K1 14 230 V 50 Hz -S0 -K2 13 14 -Q11 13 14 -S1 -K1 -F4 a A1 X1 5 II III -K3 T1 T2 A1 T2 T1 A1 21 22 A1 -K1 A2 . If.H1 X2 23 24 -K2 -K3 EMT6 A2 -Q11 EMT6 A2 A2 N a Contact thermometer changeover contact I-II position at T F Tmin I-III position at T F Tmax S0: Off S1: Start F4: Safety thermostat K1: Control voltage "On" K2: Switch-on at T F Tmin K3: Switch-off at Tmax 5-47 . limit value Tmax is not detected. the thermostat’s N/C contact F4 opens to switch off the power.

the CMD trips the backup circuit-breaker. The PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breakers can be used as backup motor-protective circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors when fitted with a U-PKZ2 (18VDC) undervoltage release. the CMD is only approved for use with specific Moeller contactors as well as motor-protective circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors. It can also be used in the US automotive industry where solutions are required that can reliably detect the welding of the motor starters and safely disconnect the motor feeder.-XUV undervoltage release. Applications Operating principle 5 The CMD (Contactor Monitoring Device) monitors the main contacts of a contactor for welding. F). Further information can be found in the manuals • CMD(24VDC) AWB2441-1595 • CMD(110-120VAC). All auxiliary break contacts of these contactors are designed as mirror contacts and 5-48 These combinations are used in safety-oriented applications. The break contact is designed as a mirror contact. The CMD also monitors the functioning of the internal relay using an additional auxiliary make contact of the monitored contactor. It compares the contactor control voltage with the state of the main contactors and indicates this reliably with a mirror contact (IEC EN 60947-4-1 Ann. Now one contactor and Moeller's CMD is enough. For this the auxiliary make and break contact is positively driven. The CMD contactor monitoring relay is used for Emergency-stop applications in compliance with EN 60204-1. This also applies to NZM1 to NZM4 circuit-breakers or N1 to N4 switch-disconnectors with an NZM. consisting of contactor. CMD can be used for monitoring the welding of all DILEM. S(E)-(A)-PKZ2 and DILM7 to DILH2000 contactors. motor-protective circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector via an undervoltage release.. Previously the series connection of two contactors was recommended for circuits of safety category 3. It also has UL and CSA approval for the North American market. circuit-breaker and CMD. Approved switchgear combinations To ensure the functional reliability of the entire unit. CMD(220-240VAC) AWB2441-1600 . The CMD is approved as a safety module by the German employers' liability association.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Contactors and relays CMD contactor monitoring device can be used for monitoring tasks. If the contactor coil is de-energized and the contactor does not drop out.

14 -Q1 I> I> I> -Q11 T1 T2 T3 a -K 21 22 -Q11 -S1 34 b TEST -S3 21 22 13 14 Contactors and relays CMD contactor monitoring device 1 3 5 -Q11 2 4 6 14 14 -S2 13 -Q11 13 PE U -X1 V W PE PE -Q11 L02 A1 A2 -F2 CMD A1 L S21 S22 S13 S14 S31 S32 A2 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 -Q1 D1 D2 U< D2 L02 -M1 M 3 ˜ a Switching by safety relay or safety PLC b Signal contact to PLC evaluation 5-49 5 .Circuit for DOL starters L01 -F1 1.13 21 22 33 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L01 -Q1 1.

5 Circuit for reversing starters L01 -F1 1.14 L1 L01 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 -Q1 -Q11 22 21 I> I> I> T1 T2 T3 -Q12 21 22 a -K -Q11 -S1 22 21 44 43 b TEST 13 14 Contactors and relays CMD contactor monitoring device 43 -Q12 44 -Q11 -S3 22 22 14 21 14 21 1 3 5 2 4 6 -Q12 1 3 5 -S2 13 14 14 22 -Q11 13 13 -Q12 13 -S4 21 2 4 6 A1 L S21 S22 S13 S14 S31 S32 A1 L S21 S22 S13 S14 S31 S32 V W PE PE 32 32 A2 -Q12 -Q11 A2 A2 A1 31 -Q11 -Q12 A1 31 -F2 CMD -F3 CMD -Q1 D1 D2 U< Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 PE U -X1 A2 D2 D1 D2 L02 L02 -M1 M 3 ˜ a Switching by safety relay or safety PLC b Signal contact to PLC evaluation .13 5-50 L1 L2 L3 -Q1 1.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 5 5-51 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 5 5-52 .

PKZM0 and PKZM4 – releases PKZM01. PKZM0 and PKZM4 – operating principle schematics PKZ2 – overview PKZ2 – remote operator PKZ2 – release PKZ2 – auxiliary switches. PKZM0 and PKZM4 PKZM01.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers Page Overview PKZM01. trip-indicating auxiliary contacts PKZ2 – operating principle schematics 6-2 6-4 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-12 6-14 6-16 6-17 6-18 6 6-1 . PKZM0 and PKZM4 – auxiliary contacts PKZM01.

Major system modules: motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM0 The PKZM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker is a modular and efficient system for switching and protecting motor loads up to 32 A and transformers up to 25 A. PKZ2 PKZ2 for motor and distribution circuit protection The PKZ2 is a modular and efficient system for protecting. short-circuit and phase-failure in three-phase power supplies. The major system modules are: • Motor-protective circuit-breakers • System-protective circuit-breakers • (High-capacity) contact modules Description a section "Motor and system protection". switching. page 6-4. protection and isolation of circuits primarily associated with motor loads. The major system modules are: • Motor-protective circuit-breakers • Transformer-protective circuit-breaker • (High-capacity) contact modules Description a section "The motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. Major system module: motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM4 The PKZM4 system is a modular and efficient system for switching and protecting motor loads up to 63 A. 6 PKZM01 The motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM01 reintroduces the pushbutton actuation up to 16 A which was very popular with customers. Many accessory parts from the PKZM0 can be used. they protect these motors against destruction from locked-motor starting.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers Overview Definition Motor-protective circuit-breakers are circuit-breakers used for switching. PKZM0 and PKZM4". page 6-12. 6-2 . They have a thermal release for protection of the motor winding (overload Moeller motor-protective circuit-breakers protection) and an electromagnetic release (short-circuit protection). The following accessories can be fitted to motor-protective circuit-breakers: • • • • undervoltage releases. At the same time. The mushroom actuator for Emergency-Stop operation on simple machines is also being reintroduced. Auxiliary contact. Trip-indicating auxiliary contact. overload. signalling and remote operation of motors and systems in low-voltage switchgear systems up to 40 A. The PKZM01 is preferably installed in surface-mount or flush-mount enclosures. It is the “big brother” of the PKZM0 and can be used with almost all PKZM0 accessory parts. Shunt release.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers Overview PKZM01 Circuit-breaker in surface mounting enclosure PKZM0 Circuit-breaker PKZM4 Circuit-breaker PKZ2 Circuit-breaker 6 PKZ2 Compact starter MSC-D DOL Starters MSC-R Reversing starters 6-3 .

The rated current with the PKZM0 up to 32 A is split into 15 ranges. The phase-failure sensitivity of PKZM0 Motor starter combinations The motor-starter combinations MSC are available up to 32 A.5 kW/400 V) are available for motor ratings of more than 5. Furthermore. The motor start is also guaranteed in every operational situation. The compact starters and high-capacity compact starters with the PKZ2 (up to 18. Standard auxiliary contact NHI.5 kW/400 V or the combination of PKZM4 with the proven contactor DILM. Both are fitted to a top-hat rail and mechanically and electrically interconnected by a connector element. and PKZM4 can be used to protect EEx e motors. a plug-in electrical connector is used to establish the connection with the main circuit wiring. technical solution for motor protection. Both can be mechanically connected without the use of tools. PKZM0 and PKZM4 The motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. The releases are sensitive to phase failure and are temperature-compensated. The MSC is available as direct-on-line starter MSC-D and as reversing starter MSC-R. PKZM0 and PKZM4 use bimetallic releases which are delayed depending on the magnitude of the current to offer a proven. Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM. Motor starters up to 16 A consist of a motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM0 and a contactor DILM. The motor-protective circuit-breakers are set to the rated motor current in order to protect the motors. Shunt release A. The motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM0 and the contactor DILM up to 16 A feature the respective interfaces for this purpose. The installation (motor) and the supply cable are reliably protected by short-circuit releases.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. The following accessories complement the motor-protective circuit-breaker for the various secondary functions: • • • • Undervoltage release U. An ATEX certificate has been awarded. permanently set to 14 x Iu. 6 6-4 . The motor-starter combination MSC from 16 A consists of a motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM0 and a contactor DILM. for the PKZM01 it is split into 12 ranges and for the PKZM4 up to 63 A into 7 ranges. PKZM0 and PKZM4 PKZM01.

Transformer-protective circuit-breakers and current limiters PKZM0-T The transformer-protective circuit-breaker is designed for protecting transformer primaries. where an overload relay or a thermistor overload relay is used as well. A version with springloaded terminals on both sides.... PKZM0 and PKZM4 Motor-protective circuit-breakers for starter combinations PKM0 The PKM0 motor-protective circuit-breaker is a protective switch for starter combinations or for use as a basic unit in a short-circuit protective switch in the range 0. 6 6-5 . CL-PKZ0 The current limiter module CL-PKZ0 is a short-circuit protective device specially developed for the PKZM0 and PKZM4 for non-intrinsically-safe areas.. All the PKZM0 system accessories can be combined with the PKZM0-T.16 A to 25 A are permanently set to 20 x Iu. The current limiter can conduct an uninterrupted current of 63 A. Any feed direction may be used. The connections are maintenance-free. and a combined version which features springloaded terminals on the outgoer side only can be chosen.16 A to 32 A. The overload release in the PKZM0-T is set to the rated current of the transformer primary. the motor protective-circuit breaker trips via the instantaneous release and produces a permanent isolating gap.-C The PKZM0 features a version with springloaded terminals. In the event of a short-circuit. it is possible to connect them using B3. The switching capacity of the series connected PKZM0 or PKZM4 + CL is 100 kA at 400 V. The CL module has the same base area and uses the same terminations as the PKZM0. This circuit-breaker is used for protection of resistive loads where no overloading is to be expected.-PKZ0 three-phase commoning links. once any defect has been rectified. The conductors can be connected here without ferrules. PKZM0-. The basic unit is without overload release. The response ranges of the short-circuit releases are higher here than with motor-protective circuit-breakers in order to cope with the even higher inrush currents of idling transformers without tripping. The system is ready to operate again.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. While the current limiter returns for the closed rest position. These protective switches are also used in motor-starter combinations with and without automatic reset. When they are mounted on a top-hat rail alongside one another. The module may be used for individual or group protection. The short-circuit releases in the types from 0. the contacts of the motor-protective circuit-breaker and CL will open. but equipped with short-circuit release.

8 = 50 A PKZM0-25.8 = 57.8 = 51...2 A PKZM0-16/20.PKZ0. PKZM4-16/20 or 2 x (16 A + 20 A) x 0.6 A PKZM0-20.8 = 60 A 6-6 . PKZM4-25 3 x 25 A x 0. PKZM4-20 or 3 x 20 A x 0. PKZM0 and PKZM4 Individual and group protection with CL-PKZ0 Iu = 63 A Use the BK25/3-PKZ0 for terminals > 6/4 mm2 For grouped connection with three-phase commoning link B3.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> l> 6 Examples: PKZM0-16. Note utilization factors to IEC/EN 0660 500. PKZM4-16 or 4 x 16 A x 0.

14 1.54 1.13 1.62 1.43-4. It is thus possible to indicate the difference between short-circuit and overload. PKZM0 and PKZM4 They switch at the same time as the main contacts. "+" 4.61 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01.44 or 4.32) or short-circuit release (contact "+" 4.13-4.13 1. In the event of a voltage/overload release (contact 4.14 1. They are available with screw terminals or springloaded terminals.22) two potential-free contacts are actuated independently of one another.21 1. I> 1.32 1. PKZM0 and PKZM4 These provide information about the reason for the circuit-breaker having tripped.21 1.44 4.31 "I >" 4.14 1.43 "I >" 4.31-4.22 1.13 1. They are used for remote indication of the operating state.34 Integrated: 1.33 against one another.22 6-7 .22 1.21 I> 4.14 4. PKZM0 and PKZM4 – auxiliary contacts Auxiliary switches and standard auxiliary contacts NHI for PKZM01.53 6 I > 1.32 4.13 4.22 1.21 1.31 1.21-4.53 1.14 or 4. and interlocking of switches Side mounted: 1.54 Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts AGM for PKZM01.

PKZM0 and PKZM4 – releases Voltage releases These operate according to the electromagnetic principle and act on the switch mechanism of the circuit-breaker. In the event of power failure. They are used for safety tasks. Uncontrolled restarting of machines is thus reliably prevented. The undervoltage release U-PKZ20. the undervoltage release switches the circuit-breaker off via the switch mechanism. The VHI-PKZ0 can be used together with the PKZM4! D1 Shunt releases These switch the circuit-breaker off when they are connected to voltage. C1 6 C2 U< D2 6-8 . Undervoltage releases These switch the circuit-breaker off when no voltage is present. allows the circuit-breaker to be switched on. Shunt releases can be provided in interlock circuits or for remote releases where voltage dips or interruptions are not to lead to unintentional switch off.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. The safety circuits are proof against wire breaks. which is connected to voltage via the early-make auxiliary contacts VHI20-PKZ0 or VHI20-PKZ01.

PKZM0 and PKZM4 Manually operated motor-starter L1 L2 L3 -Q1 I> I> I> T1 T2 T3 6 6-9 . PKZM0 and PKZM4 – operating principle schematics Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01.

21 4.13 -Q1 1.22 1 -Q1 4.) + NHI11-PKZ0 + AGM2-10-PKZ0 L1 L2 L3 1. PKZM0 and PKZM4 – operating principle schematics Motor-protective circuit-breakers with auxiliary switches and trip-indicating auxiliary contacts PKZM01(PKZM0-.14 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01.43 4.44 T1 T2 T3 4..22 4.31 4..32 4.14 6 For differential fault message (Overload or short-circuit) L1 1.13 1.21 4..21 -Q1 1.13 I> I> I> 4.44 2 -Q1 4.14 -X1 -X1 -X1 3 -X1 4 X1 -E1 X2 -X1 N -E2 X1 -E3 X2 X1 -E4 X2 X1 X2 5 E1: circuit-breaker ON E2: circuit-breaker OFF E3: general fault.22 4.43 4.14 -Q1 1.13 1.)(PKZM4. overload release E4: short-circuit release 6-10 ..

13 1..14 21 S1: Off S2: On S3: Circuit-breaker On -S1 22 13 -S3 14 13 13 -S2 14 -K1 14 C1 -Q1 A1 -Q11 A2 N C2 6-11 ..22 I> I> I> C2 -Q11 A1 A2 13 14 21 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 -X1 1 2 3 PE 6 U1 V1 W1 M 3 -M1 L1 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM01. PKZM0 and PKZM4 – operating principle schematics Remote switch off via shunt release High-capacity compact starter with auxiliary contact and shunt release PKZM0-.14 1..21 Q11: Contact module -Q1 C1 1. + A-PKZ0 L1 L2 L3 1.13 -Q1 1./S00-.

AC-3). of a pushbutton. Special motor-protective trip block ZMR-. This results in numerous application options and adaptation to widely differing requirements. . the normally closed contact 95–96 must be used to shed the contact module or contactor. for example.5 kW. There is a choice of trip blocks: In the event of an overload.. consists of: • Basic device.6 to 40 A) • System-protective trip blocks (5 versions for the range from 10 to 40 A) All trip blocks are equipped with adjustable overload and short-circuit releases. It is inherently short-circuit proof up to a rated operational current of 16 A. • Plug-in trip block. The normally closed contact and normally open contact are suitable for carrying two different potentials. which ensures remote indication. moves the contacts back to the original position after tripping. The circuit-breaker has a switching capacity of 30 kA/400 V.5 x Ie For an EEx e application.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – overview Motor and system protection The PKZ2 achieves its modularity by combining the motor or system-protective circuit-breaker with various accessories. to. to achieve disconnection. The trip block has a manual and an automatic position: • Automatic position: The normally closed contact and normally open contact automatically return to the original position after the bimetallic strips have cooled down. At the same time.. The circuit-breaker The circuit-breaker PKZ2/ZM. at the unit. The contact can be actuated again by actuation. The PKZ2 also complies with the requirements stipulated in EN 60204 for disconnectors and main switches.. Important note! Standards The PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker complies with the IEC 947. Overload from .-PKZ2 This trip block features an overload relay function which allows the following interesting application: 6-12 6 • Motor-protective trip blocks (11 versions for the range from 0. a normally open contact (97–98) is actuated... the circuit-breaker does not trip. • Manual position: An acknowledgement locally. a normally closed contact (95–96) is actuated which switches off the contactor in the control circuit (contactors up to 18. Instead..: • Motor-protective trip blocks: 8.. EN 60947 and EN 60947 standards..5 to 14 x Ie • Motor-protective trip blocks: 5 to 8.

A1 13 21 (High-capacity) contact module for 24 V DC control voltage An actuating voltage of 1 V DC can be used with the contact module SE2A-G-PKZ24 (2 V DC) and the high-capacity contact module S-G-PKZ24 (24 V DC).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – overview (High-capacity) contact module S-. It is necessary to take account of: • • • • Pick-up capacity: 150 VA. The contact module features the same functions and properties of a standard contactor. In the event of a short-circuit the contacts of the PKZ2 and CL-PKZ2 will open.. and a combination circuit-breaker is produced by using a circuit-breaker (PKZ2/ZM-.. high-capacity contact module.. A1 A2 13 14 +24 V A2 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 14 22 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 6 • Switch + S-PKZ2... A2 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 14 22 I >> 2 T1 I >> 4 T2 I >> 6 T3 6-13 .-PKZ2 A compact starter combination is produced by combining a contact module S-. Holding current: 113 mA.. The PKZ2 trips via the magnetic release and remains in this position.7 W.. A high-capacity compact starter is obtained by using a motor-protective circuit-breaker (PKZ2/ZM. and is suitable for 1 x 106 AC-3 operations.3 A (16 – 22 ms) Holding power: 2.. A1 13 21 Current limiters CL-PKZ2 A specially developed current-limiter module which can be attached and featuring the same contours is available to increase the switching capacity of the circuit-breaker to 100 kA/400 V. The CL-PKZ2 returns to the rest position after the short-circuit... Both units are ready for operation again after the fault.-8) as the switch. The high-capacity contact module increases the switching capacity of the combination to 100 kA/400 V. Pick-up current 6.-PKZ2 (contactor) featuring the same contours with the PKZ2: • Switch + standard contact module SE1A-.-PKZ2.) as the switch.. It can be used for operational switching of 1 x 106 AC-3 operations..

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – remote operator The remote operator allows the PKZ2 to be switched on and off remotely during operation. After tripping. This allows actuation using low current units. Both remote operators must be supplied with the mains supply of 72 W/VA for 74 ms at the terminals 700–30 during the switching operation (On/Off/Reset). e. The remote operators can optionally be set for manual or automatic operation. Twelve voltage versions are available per remote operator. from the semiconductor outputs of a PLC (24 V DC). without any coupling elements.g. control circuit devices. it can be reset to 0 by the remote operator. • Automatic position: remote switching is possible. An integrated normally open contact (33–34) when closed indicates the automatic position of the remote operator. but with the same reference potential. • The electronic remote operator RS-PKZ2 can be actuated directly. 6 Minimum command time for the remote operators RE-PKZ2 and RS-PKZ2 CONTROL ON I 0 f 15 CONTROL OFF/RESET I 0 f 15 t (ms) LINE I CONTROL 0 ON OFF F 30 Main contact F 30 t (ms) f 300 t (ms) OFF/RESET ON 6-14 . The PKZ2 system has two remote operators: • In the RE-PKZ2 – the electronic remote operator for standard applications – both CONTROL and LINE are separate inputs.g. 230 V 50 Hz). Electrical isolation between the CONTROL and LINE allows it to take power for the switching process from a separate power supply (e. These cover a wide application range. • Manual position: remote switching on is reliably electrically interlocked.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – remote operator Remote operator RE-PKZ2 Off and Reset separate L 72 74 L(+) 72 LINE I> I T A20 A40 B20 ON A20 0 OFF CONTROL A40 RESET B20 N(-) 74 33 34 I ON A20 0 OFF L(+) 72 LINE CONTROL A40 RESET B20 N(-) 74 33 34 Off equals Reset Remote operator RS-PKZ2 Off equals Reset L 72 74 L(+) 72 LINE CONTROL I> ON T A20 A30 A0 A20 A30 OFF/ RESET + A0 – 24 V N(-) 74 33 34 I ON L(+) 72 LINE CONTROL A20 0 A30 OFF/ RESET A0 24 V~/ N(-) 74 33 34 6 6-15 .

Undervoltage release with a 200 ms dropout delay.13 2.14 2. These are an economic option for switching off remotely. Three versions are available: • Non-delayed. D1 2.24 Shunt release A Shunt releases trip the circuit-breaker when a voltage is applied.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – release Voltage releases Undervoltage release U Undervoltage releases trip the circuit-breaker in the event of a power failure and prevent restarting when the power returns. • With 200 ms dropout delay. D1 2. • With/without early-make auxiliary contact. C1 C2 6-16 .13 6 U< U< D2 2. The undervoltage release can be energized early by an additional link (see circuit diagram).23 Undervoltage releases which switch off without delay are suitable for Emergency-Stop circuits.14 D2 2. Shunt releases are suitable for AC and DC. and one version covers a wide voltage range.

.22 are connected in series.22 1.22 1.31 4..21 "I >" 4. 4.. One contact pair (normally open & normally closed) signals general tripping and one pair signals tripping in the event of a short circuit. for indication of the position of the main contacts of the contactor and/or those of the circuit-breaker.21 1.14 1. trip-indicating auxiliary contacts NHI standard auxiliary contacts The NHI is available in two versions..43 13 21 I> A1 A2 PKZ 2(4)/ZM.13 1.22 I> 1.21 NHI11 NHI . featuring the same contours. NHI for circuit-breakers. Two separate contact pairs signal that the circuit-breaker is in the tripped position.32 1.14 1.22 44 NHI 2-11S Trip-indicating auxiliary contact AGM The trip-indicating auxiliary contact is of particular importance.14 32 1.32 1.21 43 1.21 1.43 4.14 1.22 PKZ 2(4)/ZM.43 1.. then it is also possible to indicate overload tripping differentially.43/4..31 1.13 1. 1. "+" 4.13 1.44 NHI 22S 1. NHI22 1.31 1. S for the starter combination.13 I> PKZ 2(4)/ZM. fitted and featuring the same contours.13 31 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – auxiliary switches.21/4. 1.44 4./S NHI 11S 1.44 6 14 22 I >> 1.44 and the normally closed contact 4.13 1.21 or 1... If the normally open contact 4.22 4.14 6-17 .32 AGM 2-11 4.14 1. for indicating the position of the main contacts of the switch.

. consisting of: • Basic device • Trip block • Contact module SE1A.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Motor-protective circuit-breaker consisting of: • PKZ2 basic unit • Plug-in trip block Z L1 L2 L3 High-capacity compact starter. consisting of: • Basic device • Trip block • High-capacity contact module fitted with same contour profile L1 L2 L3 -Q1 I> I> I> -Q1 T1 T2 T3 I >> I >> I >> 6 Compact starter.-PKZ2. which can be attached and has the same contours. for operational switching L1 L2 L3 A1 A2 13 14 21 22 I >> I >> I >> T1 T2 T3 Circuit-breaker with current limiter fitted L1 L2 L3 –Q1 -Q1 I> I> I> I> A1 A2 13 14 21 22 T1 T2 T3 I> I> I >> I >> I >> T1 T2 T3 6-18 ..

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics On-off switching with remote operator Separate actuation of OFF and RESET Circuit-breaker with remote operator.. VS3./RE(.. Auxiliary switch for signalling the manual/automatic position of the remote operator.. Indicates the automatic position when closed. Example 1: PKZ2/ZM-.SPS with floating contacts).. standard version.. AGM.) L1 72 74 33 A20 A40 B20 34 N -Q1 1 2 L1 L2 L3 -X1 I> I> I> 6 72 74 T1 T2 T3 -Q1 A20 A40 B20 -X1 3 4 -X1 5 6 -X1 7 13 13 13 33 -S11 14 -S01 14 -S21 14 -Q1 34 8 -X1 a Separate actuation of OFF and Reset b Reset c OFF d ON Actuation by control circuit devices (for example pushbuttons NHI. EK.. 6-19 .

SPS with floating contacts). 6-20 . AGM. Indicates the automatic position when closed. L1 Example 2: PKZ2/ZM-.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Common actuation of OFF and RESET Circuit-breaker with remote operator... standard version..) 72 74 33 A20 A40 B20 34 N L1 L2 L3 -Q2 9 10 -X1 I> I> I> 6 -Q2 72 74 T1 T2 T3 B20 A20 A40 11 12 13 -X1 -X1 -X1 14 13 13 33 -S12 14 -S02 14 -Q2 34 15 -X1 a Off = Reset b Off/Reset c ON Actuation by control circuit devices (for example pushbuttons NHI. Auxiliary switch for signalling the manual/automatic position of the remote operator. EK... VS3../RS(.

. Indicates the automatic position when closed.. L1 Example 3: PKZ2/ZM-.. 24 V DC version with electronic outputs For direct actuation by a programmable logic controller (PLC).) 72 74 33 A20 A40 B20 34 N -Q3 1 2 L1 L2 L3 -X2 I> I> I> 72 74 T1 T2 T3 6 B20 -Q3 A20 A30 -X2 3 4 -X2 5 24 V 33 ON OFF/ RESET -Q3 34 -X2 6 Actuation by PLC with 24 V DC electronic outputs. Auxiliary switch for signalling the manual/automatic position of the remote operator. 6-21 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Circuit-breaker with remote operator../RS(.

... L1 Example 4: PKZ2/ZM-.. Indicates the automatic position when closed. Auxiliary switch for signalling the manual/automatic position of the remote operator. 6-22 ./RS(.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Circuit-breaker with remote operator Actuation by control circuit devices.) 72 74 33 A20 A40 B20 34 N -Q4 7 8 L1 L2 L3 -X2 I> I> I> 6 72 74 T1 T2 T3 -Q4 A20 A30 A0 9 -X2 10 -X1 11 13 13 24 V / ~ 33 -S22 14 -S23 14 -Q1 34 12 -X2 S22: On S23: Off/Reset Actuation by control circuit devices via 24 V AC/DC.

14 1 -Q1 1.43 4..31 4.22 4.43 4.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Indication by auxiliary switches Circuit-breaker with auxiliary contact and trip-indicating auxiliary contact.13 -Q1 1.21 4.14 For differential fault indication. L1 6 1.21 4. L1 L2 L3 1..32 4. + NHI11-PKZ2 + AGM2-11-PKZ2 -Q1 1.13 1.13 1.44 T1 T2 T3 4. Overload tripping E4: Short-circuit tripping 6-23 .22 2 -Q1 4.21 Example: PKZ2/ZM-.44 3 -Q1 4.13 I> I> I> 4.14 4 -X1 X1 -X1 X1 -X1 X1 -X1 X1 -E1 X2 -E2 X2 -E3 X2 -E4 X2 N -X1 5 E1: Circuit-breaker On E2: Circuit-breaker Off E3: General fault.14 1.22 4.

21 1.14 1. -Q1 D1 2. + NHI22-PKZ2 + UHI-PKZ2 All poles of the Emergency-Stop circuit are isolated from the mains supply in the event of a power failure.31 1.43 Example: PKZ2/ZM.44 U> D2 2.13 1.14 I> I> I> T1 T2 1 2 T3 3 W1 6 PE -X1 U1 V1 M 3 -M1 L1 2.14 21 -S1 22 21 D1 -S2 22 -Q1 U< D2 N 6-24 .32 1..13 S1: Emergency-Stop S2: Emergency-Stop -Q1 2.13 1.22 1.. L1 L2 L3 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Use of the undervoltage release in the Emergency-Stop circuit Motor-protective circuit-breaker with auxiliary contact and undervoltage release.

14 21 S1: Off S2: On S3: Circuit-breaker Off -S1 22 13 -S3 14 -S2 C1 -Q1 A1 -Q11 A2 C2 N 6-25 .14 1.22 I>I> I> C2 -Q11 A1 A2 13 21 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 14 22 -X1 1 2 3 PE 6 U1 V1 W1 M 3 -M1 L1 -Q1 1.13 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Remote switch off via shunt release High-capacity compact starter with auxiliary contact and shunt release Example: PKZ2/ZM-...13 1.21 Q11: High-capacity contact module -Q1 C1 1./S-PKZ2 + A-PKZ2 L1 L2 L3 1.

14 1.21 31 43 -Q1 I> I> I> 13 21 -Q11 A1 A2 14 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 1./S-PKZ2 + NHI2-11S-PKZ2 L1 L2 L3 1.14 -Q1 1..22 32 44 6 1 2 -X1 3 PE U1 V1 W1 M 3 -M1 L1 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics High-capacity compact starter with maximum number of auxiliary contacts fitted Example: PKZ2/ZM.22 -Q1 32 -Q1 44 -Q11 14 -Q11 22 -K1 N 13 21 31 43 A1 A2 -K2 A1 A2 -K3 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 -K4 A2 -K5 A2 -K6 A2 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 K1: Circuit-breaker On K2: Circuit-breaker Off K3: Contact module Off K4: Contact module On K5: Contact module On K6: Contact module Off 6-26 .21 31 43 13 21 -Q1 1..13 1.13 1.

22 4./RE + NHI11-PKZ2 + AGM2-11-PKZ2 A20 A40 B20 34 -Q1 1.43 4.32 T1 T2 T3 4.13 I> I> I> 4.22 4.13 1.21 4. indication: manual-auto K1: Circuit-breaker On K2: Circuit-breaker Off K3: Overload indication K4: Short-circuit indication 6-27 .14 -S2 13 14 -S1 -S2 13 14 21 22 72 74 A20 A40 B20 -Q1 A1 A1 A1 A1 N -K1 13 21 22 43 A2 14 31 32 44 -K2 13 21 22 43 A2 14 31 32 44 -K3 13 21 22 43 A2 14 31 32 44 -K4 13 21 22 43 A2 14 31 32 44 S1: On S2: Off S5: Reset Q1: Auxiliary contact.21 Example: PKZ2/ZM.13 1.14 6 1..13 L1 -Q1 -S5 13 14 1..31 4.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Remotely actuated circuit-breaker with switch status indication Motor-protective circuit-breaker with remote operator + auxiliary contact (1 NO.44 -Q1 4.21 4.44 4.14 1.43 4.14 -Q1 1. 1 NC) + trip indicating auxiliary contact 72 74 33 L1 L2 L3 1.22 -Q1 4.

.13 1.22 1.21 -Q1 I> I> I> 1. + NHI11-PKZ2 with CL/EZ-PKZ2 L1 L2 L3 1.14 1.14 -Q1 1. separate mounting 6-28 .22 T1 T2 T3 6 -Q2 L1 L2 L3 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 A1 A1 -K1 PE A2 -K2 A2 -X1 1 2 3 N U1 V1 W1 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 13 21 31 43 14 22 32 44 M 3 -M1 K1: Circuit-breaker On K2: Circuit-breaker Off Q2: Current limiter..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics Circuit-breaker with current limiter in separate mounting Example: PKZ2/ZM.21 L1 -Q1 1.13 1.

The L1 L2 L3 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 – operating principle schematics ZMR-.13 14 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 -Q1 1.22 95 97 -Q1 96 -Q1 98 -Q11 A1 A2 13 21 1..PKZ2 with an overload relay function and with simultaneous indication. high-capacity contact module S and NHI11-PKZ2.21 circuit-breaker thumb-grip remains in the “On” position.-PKZ2 special trip block with overload relay function For switching off a contactor in the control circuit in the event of an overload by means of a trip block ZMR-...14 6 -X1 4 -X1 1 2 3 PE -E1 A1 X1 U1 V1 W1 X2 5 M 3 -M1 N -Q11 A2 -X1 Q11: Shutdown E1: Overload indication Q11: High-capacity contact module 6-29 . Circuit-breaker with trip block ZMR.13 1.. L1 -Q1 1.14 97 95 I> I> I> 98 96 T1 T2 T3 1.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 6 6-30 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Page Overview Shunt releases Undervoltage releases Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts Internal circuit diagrams Remote switch-off with voltage releases Application of the undervoltage release Shutdown of the undervoltage release Indication of the switch position Short-time delayed circuit-breaker – internal circuit diagrams Mesh network circuit-breakers Remote operation with motor operator as a transformer switch with residual current device IZM circuit-breakers 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-8 7-11 7-13 7-14 7-15 7 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-26 7-1 .

additional shunt or undervoltage releases to suit the respective versions. and deliberate load shedding. NZM3 NZM4 7 Switch-disconnectors without overload or tripping units are available in the same sizes as the circuit-breakers and can be fitted with NZM1 NZM2 Note The NZM7.g. earth-fault protection or the capability for energy management by recognition of load peaks. The current states of the circuit-breaker on site can be visualized via a Data Management Interface (DMI) or via digital output signals. Additionally. The electronic releases of frame sizes NZM2. they have additional protective functions such as fault-current protection. NZM10 and NZM14 circuit-breakers are no longer included in Moeller's product range. the circuit-breakers can be connected to a network. Depending on the version. part 1. NZM3 and NZM4 feature communication capabilities. Circuit-breakers NZM and switch-disconnectors are built and tested according to standard IEC/EN 60947. Circuit-breakers NZM are distinguished by their compact shape and their current-limiting characteristics. they are suitable for use as main switches according to IEC/EN 60204/VDE 0113. e. PROFIBUS-DP.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Overview NZM circuit-breakers These circuit-breakers protect electrical equipment against thermal overloading and short circuits. 7-2 . They cover the rated current range from 20 to 1600 A. In conjunction with a locking device. They feature isolating characteristics. This chapter provides information about these devices. They have been replaced by the new device generation.

short-circuit current Ikmax. Transformer protection. IZM3 7-3 . Min. also for preventative maintenance. motor operators or voltage releases. system downtimes can be reduced or even prevented. for applications ranging from simple system protection with overload and short-circuit release to digital releases with a graphical display and the possibility of creating selective networks. Ambient temperature. Important information can be passed on. 7 IZM devices offer different tripping electronics. For example. IZM1 IZM2 Detailed information about the IZM circuit-breaker is provided in AWB1230-1407.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Overview IZM circuit-breakers The IZM offers a circuit-breaker for use in the high rated current range from 630 A. The basic selection criteria of an IZM circuit-breaker are: • • • • • • Max. the IZM circuit-breakers open up new possibilities in power distribution. short-circuit current. trip-indicating auxiliary contacts. main application areas can be implemented by different settings of the trip electronics: • • • • System protection. Protective function. 3 or 4-pole design. IZM circuit-breakers and IN switch-disconnectors offer the main switch isolating characteristics in accordance with IEC/EN 60204-1 as they are lockable in the OFF position. by enabling rapid intervention in processes. They can be adapted to a wide range of requirements by means of a comprehensive range of mounted accessories such as auxiliary contacts. They can therefore be used as supply disconnection devices. With their communication-capability. IZM circuit-breakers are built and tested in accordance with IEC/EN 60947. They thus increase the transparency of the system. Rated operational current In. collected and evaluated. fixed-mounted or withdrawable units. Depending on the type of equipment to be protected. Generator protection. Motor protection.

the intermittent operation must be ensured by positioning appropriate auxiliary contacts (supplied) upstream of the circuit-breaker. 7-4 . A normally open contact actuates the system. Tripping does not occur in the event of wire breakage. This measure is not required when using a shunt release with 100 % DF. When de-energized. If the shunt release is rated for intermittent duty (overexcited shunt release with 5% DF). L2) 7 Shunt releases are solenoids that actuate a tripping mechanism when a voltage is applied to them. loose contacts or undervoltage. the system is in its rest position. Shunt releases are used for remote tripping when an interruption in the voltage is not intended to lead to automatic disconnection.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Shunt releases Shunt releases A (Q1) L1 (L+) C1 C2 -S11 0 Q1 E1 -Q1 -Q1 C1 C2 N (L-.

These are the ideal tripping elements for totally reliable interlocking tasks (e. for example. This release is used to prevent brief interruptions in power leading to disconnection of the circuit-breaker.g. The circuit-breakers cannot be closed when the undervoltage releases are de-energized.06 and 16 s. Actuation is produced by a normally closed contact. L2) U< D2 7-5 . They are also suitable for very reliable interlocking and remote switching off since disconnection always occurs in the event of a fault (e. Undervoltage releases trip the circuit-breaker when the power fails in order.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Undervoltage releases Undervoltage release U (Q1) L1 (L+) D1 D2 -S11 0 Q1 U< E1 -Q1 D1 -Q1 U< D2 Undervoltage releases are solenoids that actuate a tripping mechanism upon interruption of the voltage. The system is in the rest position when energized. Emergency-Stop). L2) 7 Off-delayed undervoltage release UV (Q1) L1 (L+) D1 D2 -S11 0 Q1 U< The off-delayed undervoltage release is a combination of a separate delay unit (UVU) and the respective release. to prevent motors from restarting automatically. N (L-. The delay time is adjustable between 0.g. Undervoltage releases are always designed for uninterrupted operation. D1 E1 -Q1 -Q1 N (L-. wire breakage in the control circuit).

7-6 . 4). and for the remote indication of the switching state. for example. 3. They can be used for interlocking with other switches. test or voltage release. short-circuit. overcurrent. No fleeting contact when switched on or off manually or switched off with the motor (exception: manual switch off with motor operator NZM2. or by a motor operator. • Standard auxiliary contacts behave like main switch contacts • Switch position indication • Interlock • Disconnection of the shunt release Auxiliary contact – trip-indicating HIA 7 L1L2L3 HIA + I + L1L2L3 HIA I + L1L2L3 HIA + I 0rI Switch-on 0RI Switch-off +RI Trip Q contacts closed q contacts opened Used to provide command and signal output relating to electrical tripping of the circuit-breaker (trip position +) as is required. No pulse is produced when the switch is opened or closed manually. • Indication that the switch is in the tripped position • Switch position indication only if tripping is caused by. for example. for mesh network switches.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contact – standard HIN + L1L2L3 HIN I + L1L2L3 HIN I + L1L2L3 HIN + I Used to provide command or signal outputs from processes which are governed by the position of the contacts.

Furthermore. page 7-11. 7 NZM 1. Because of its early-make characteristic. a section "Remote switch-off with voltage releases". they allow a switch position indication. + L1L2L3 HIV I + L1L2L3 HIV + I 0rI Switch-on 0RI Switch-off +RI Trip Q contacts closed q contacts opened 7 NZM 4 + L1L2L3 HIV I + L1L2L3 HIV I + L1L2L3 HIV + I 7-7 . 2. page 7-5. 3. 3 + L1L2L3 HIV I + L1L2L3 HIV I + L1L2L3 HIV + I NZM 10 + L1L2L3 HIV I Used to provide command or signal outputs from processes which are initiated before the closure or opening of the main contact system. they can be used for interlocks with other switches.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Contact diagrams of the auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contact – early make HIV NZM1. Because they close early. a section "Application of the undervoltage release". With the circuit-breaker in the Tripped position. the HIV is in the same position as it is at OFF. it can be used to apply voltage to the undervoltage release (a section "Undervoltage releases". 2. page 7-13).

23 1.12 1. .14 4.24 4.12 4.21 3.12 1.11 4.24 -Q1 I> I> I> HIN T1 T2 T3 HIA 1.21 4. 2 NC or 1NO/1NC HIV: 2 S NZM2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 3 2 1 -Q1 .24 7-8 1.11 3.13 3.14 1.13 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Internal circuit diagrams NZM1 Contact elements M22-K10 (K01. Details about the auxiliary contacts: a section "Maximum configuration:".24 1.44 1.23 3. page 7-8 L1 L2 L3 1.43 1.11 1. Two early-make auxiliary contacts (2 NO) are also available.14 T1 T2 T3 HIA 1.42 HIV 4. 2 NC or 1NO/1NC HIA: 1 NO.13 3.13 .14 4.24 4... K02.14 3.21 I> I> I> HIN 1. K11) from the RMQ-Titan range from Moeller are used for the auxiliary contacts.12 4.22 HIV 4.11 4. K20.. L1 L2 L3 1. 2 NO.22 Maximum configuration: NZM 7 1 HIN: 1 NO.13 4.22 3.23 1. 1 NC.13 4.. 1 NC.14 3.23 4.41 4.23 4. 2 NO.

. I> I> I> HIN 1.11 1.13 4.44 4.13 3.13 3..22 4.13 4.64 1.11 4.13 1.11 3. . .24 NZM7 In the NZM7 two auxiliary contact modules can be fitted as NHI (NC or NO) as well as a trip-indicating auxiliary contact RHI (NC or NO)...41 3. Contact elements EK01/EK10 are used from the Moeller RMQ range of control circuit devices.14 1.33 3.21 1..24 4.14 T1 T2 T3 1..13 -Q1 . ..23 3.12 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Internal circuit diagrams NZM3 Details about the auxiliary contacts: a section "Maximum configuration:".14 4.63 4.43 3.23 1.14 3.14 T1 T2 T3 HIA 4.14 1.24 NZM4 Details about the auxiliary contacts: a section "Maximum configuration:".11 -Q1 . 1.61 4.11 4... .12 4. 7 I> I> I> HIN 1.13 3.64 1.62 1.12 HIA 4.14 3.13 HIV 3..62 1.11 4..61 4.23 4. Early-make auxiliary contacts (2 NO) are also available.12 4. page 7-8 L1 L2 L3 1.34 L1 L2 L3 -Q1 I> I> I> NHI 1.63 1.12 7-9 . page 7-8 L1 L2 L3 1..14 RHI VHI 4.42 HIV 3.12 1.

32 VHI 3.13 1.13 4.44 1.31 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 3.11 1.21 4.21 4.32 1.14 4.21 3.33 .22 3.7 7-10 -Q1 I> NZM14 NZM10 I> ZM(M)- Circuit-breakers Internal circuit diagrams -Q1 I> L1 L2 L3 NHI L1 L2 L3 NRHI 003 RHI 1.14 1.21 1.43 4.34 1.14 1.24 4.13 3.22 1.31 1.14 3.12 4.11 4.43 1.22 4.12 1.14 4.44 4.22 1.

D1 D2 -Q1 D1 L1 (L+) -Q1 U< D2 N (L-. L2) -S. In order to de-energize the entire control circuit when using a shunt release.14 L1 (L+) Terminal designation with NZM14 When the switch is in the Off position. L2) -S. -S. -S.13 1.14 C1 7 -Q1 1. L2) 7-11 . the entire control circuit is live. the control voltage must be connected downstream of the switch terminals.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Remote switch-off with voltage releases Remote switch-off with undervoltage releases L1 N (L+) (L-.14 -Q1 HIN -Q1 C2 1.13 1.11 1. C1 C2 -Q1 1.12 1. L2) Remote switch-off with shunt releases L1 N (L+) (L-. N (L-.

-S. VDE 0113 part 1 With the main switch in its OFF position all control elements and control cables which exit the control panel are voltage free.14 D2 HIV -Q1 -Q1 U< E1 NZM -Q1 7-12 .13 3.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Remote switch-off with voltage releases Main switch application in processing machines with Emergency-Stop function conform to the standard IEC/EN 60204-1. L1 L2 L3 D1 N HIV -Q1 D2 -Q1 U< E1 NZM -Q1 7 -S. The only live components are the control-voltage tap-offs with the control lines to the early-make auxiliary contact. L1 L2 L3 D1 3.

3. If the undervoltage release is to be disconnected in two poles.g. L2) 7 Starting interlock of the undervoltage release L1 N (L+) (L-.13 3. L2) L1 (L+) -S5 -S6 -Q1 1.13 Circuit-breakers with undervoltage release produce a positive Off position in conjunction with interlocking auxiliary contacts on the starter (S5). ancillary devices on the motor (e.14 D1 D1 D2 1.13 1. then a further normally open contact of Q2 must be connected between terminals D1 and N. L2) 7-13 . The circuit-breaker cannot be closed unless the starter or switch is in the zero or Off position.14 -S6 -S5 -Q1 U< D2 N (L-.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Application of the undervoltage release Switch-off of the undervoltage release L1 N (L+) (L-. brush lifting. L2) L1 (L+) D1 D2 HIV -Q1 3. S6) or on all switches in multi-motor drives.14 -Q1 D1 The early-make auxiliary contact HIV (Q1) can – as shown above – disconnect the undervoltage release from the control voltage when the circuit-breaker is in the Off position.14 -Q1 U< D2 N (L-. 1.13 3. The early-make auxiliary contact HIV (Q1) will always apply voltage to the undervoltage release in time to permit closure.

22 D1 D2 1. 7-14 .11 Terminal marking for NZM14 When interlocking three or more circuit-breakers. L2) 7 1. each circuit-breaker must be interlocked with the series-connected normally closed contacts of the auxiliary contacts on the other circuit-breakers using one contactor relay – for contact duplication – per auxiliary contact.21 -Q1 1.22 D1 D1 -Q1 U< D2 -Q2 U< D2 N (L-.22 -Q1 1. If one of the circuit-breakers is closed.22 D1 D2 1. L2) L1 (L+) 1.21 -Q2 1.21 1. the others cannot be closed.14 -Q1/Q2 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Shutdown of the undervoltage release Interlocking of several circuit-breakers using an undervoltage release L1 N (L+) (L-.12 1.21 -Q2 1.

12 1.13 4.14 1.14 X1 X2 -P1 -Q1 4.13 1.12 -Q1 4.13 4.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Indication of the switch position ON and OFF indication with auxiliary contact – standard HIN (Q1) L1 (L+) -F0 N (L-.13 1.14 X2 N (L-.11 -Q1 1. L2) L1 -F0 (L+) 1.21 L1 -F0 (L+) 1.22 -Q1 1.21 1.14 X1 -P2 -P1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X1 X1 X1 -P1 X2 -P2 X2 -P1 X2 -P2 X2 N (L-.14 Terminal designation with NZM14 L1 -F0 (L+) -Q1 -P1 4. L+) 7 P1: On P2: Off Tripped indication using trip-indicating auxiliary contact HIA (Q1) Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts for mesh network switches L1 N (L+) (L-. L2) -F0 X1 4.14 1. L+) P1: Tripped 7-15 . L+) N (L-.11 4.22 1.

S NZM14-. Trip-block ZMV only for circuit-breaker types NZM10N NZM10S Adjustable short-time delay: 0. Where the prospective short-circuit currents are extremely high. 10.. 500.. 750. 150. 750. 200. 250. 500. S(H) Standard circuit-breakers -Q1 7 NZM14-. 200.. 150..H Adjustable short-time delay: I> I> 100.. 100. 1000 ms NZM10. 300../ZMV. Trip block VE Adjustable short-time delay: 0. 20. 60... 300 ms 7-16 . 200.. 50.. L1 L2 L3 NZM2(3)(4). 300. 1000 ms NZM14-.-VE. additional installation protection is achieved by instantaneous releases..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Short-time delayed circuit-breaker – internal circuit diagrams Time-discriminating network topology Short-time delayed circuit-breakers NZM2(3)(4)/VE. NZM10/ZMV and NZM14 enable a time-discriminating network design with variable stagger times. 100.. which respond without any delay.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Mesh network circuit-breakers NZM1... 51 (C1) 53 (C2) 230 V 50/60 Hz N 21 230 V 50/60 Hz N 21 22 a Mesh network relay b Mesh network relay with low power contacts 7-17 . NZM7. NZM10. NZM14 Circuit with capacitor unit and shunt release 230 V.. 51 (C1) 22 53 (C2) NZM-XCM 23 HIN-NZM. NZM3. The capacitor unit which provides the energy for the shunt release of the mesh network 18 19 20 23 24 circuit-breaker can be configured independently of the circuit-breaker. NZM4. 50 Hz.. NZM2. Connect NZM-XCM to the supply side! 21 22 7 19 24 18 USt 24 V H 19 24 b L1 18 L1 20 NZM-XCM 23 20 a HIN-NZM.

L2) N (L-. L2) N (L-. L2) N (L-. L2) 7-18 . 10 L1 (L+) 0 I P1 0 I 70 71 72 75 70 71 72 75 L1 (L+) L1 (L+) HIA P1 0 I 70 71 72 P1 NZM-XR 74 NZM-XR 74 NZM-XR 74 75 N (L-. L2) N (L-. 3. L2) 7 NZM14 L1 (L+) 0 I L1 (L+) 0 I 70 71 72 70 71 72 L1 (L+) RHI 0 I 70 71 72 R-NZM14 74 R-NZM14 74 R-NZM14 74 N (L-. 4 and NZM7.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers Remote operation with motor operator Two-wire control Three-wire control Three-wire control with automatic return to the Off position after tripping NZM2.

L2) 7-19 . an undervoltage release must be used instead of the shunt release. a Buchholz relay) on the high-voltage side.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers as a transformer switch Faults upstream of the low-voltage circuit-breaker. this provides protection against undervoltage. L2) N (L-. Circuit-breakers with undervoltage releases Q1 L1 N (L+) (L-. e. are disconnected by suitable protective devices (e. This interlocking with the Circuit-breakers with shunt releases Q1 L1 N (L+) (L-. L2) -S7 C1 C2 Q1 C1 high-voltage circuit-breaker must always be provided when transformers are being operated in parallel. in the transformer itself. L2) -S7 D1 D2 L1 (L+) -S7 L1 (L+) -S7 7 -Q1 C2 Q1 D1 -Q1 U< D2 N (L-. If only one normally open contact is available as the auxiliary contact. S7 thus isolates the transformer from the network on both sides. At the same time. The S7 auxiliary contact of the high-voltage circuit-breaker trips out the NZM transformer switch on the low-voltage side in order to prevent feedback to the high-voltage network.g.g.

60. the main contacts are opened. No auxiliary voltage is required.3 0. 450 – 60. 3 0.1. 0.3. 150.03 0.) These kinds of residual current releases can be attached to the NZM1 and NZM2 circuit-breakers. 3 0. In the event of a fault.1. 7 Part no.5.03. • Short-circuit protection. Depending on type the residual current releases protect the following: • Persons against direct contact (basic protection).e. i. 300. Rated current range A Ue IDn tv Sensitivity V 200 – 415 200 – 415 200 – 415 280 – 690 280 – 690 50 – 400 50 – 400 A 0. • Fault-current protection. The main functions and the associated values are shown in the following table. 0. 0. 1. 150. • Persons against indirect contact (fault protection). 450 AC/DC pulsating current NZM1(-4)-XFI30(R)(U) NZM1(-4)-XFI300(R)(U) NZM1(-4)-XFI(R)(U) NZM2-4-XFI301) NZM2-4-XFI1) NZM2-4-XFI30A1) NZM2-4-XFIA1) 1) 15 – 125 15 – 125 15 – 125 15 – 250 15 – 250 15 – 250 15 – 250 Devices are not dependent on the supply voltage.03 0. 0.1. 7-20 . 450 – 60. The circuit-breaker and the residual current release must be reset to restore the supply. 1. These device combinations fulfill the following tasks: • Overload protection.03 0. the residual current release trips the circuit-breaker.3. • Dangers of an earth fault (fire etc. 300. 150. 1 ms – – 10.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers with residual current device Residual current releases combined with circuit-breakers are used for protection against the effects of leakage currents.3 0. 300.

The NZM2-4-XFI… has fixed contacts..21 I> I> I> I> 6... +NZM2-4-XFI NZM1-(4)-XFI 7-21 .. The NZM1(-4)-XFI… allows two M22-K… contact elements from the Moeller RMQ-Titan range to be clipped in.. NZM2-4. With 2-pole operation it must be ensured that voltage is applied to both terminals required for test functions.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers with residual current device They can be used in three-phase and single-phase systems.13 6. N L1 L2 L3 0+I Q1 Trip indication is implemented via auxiliary contacts. Contact representation for “not released” NZM1(-4)-XFI… M22-K10 M22-K02 b NZM2-4-XFI… 6.14 6.22 7 I n tv c a d a a b c d Test button (T) NZM1-(4).

The compact ring-type transformer is placed without any particular space requirement at a suitable position in the power chain. permanently set. The three relay types are: • Rated fault current 30 mA. • Rated fault current from 30 mA to 5 A and a delay time from 20 ms to 5 s which is variable in stages. • Rated fault current 300 mA. 7 230 V AC g 20 % 50/60 Hz 3VA N L L1 L2 L3 N 1S1 1S2 5 6 7 8 > 3 m – 50 m LOAD 1 2 3 4 NO C NC 50/60 Hz 250 V AC 6A 7-22 . The fault current relay indicates when a fault current has exceeded the predefined fault current by using a changeover contact. There are three different relay types and seven different transformer types available.to 4-pole electrical power networks. permanently set. The contact signal can be processed further as a signal in programmable logic controllers or can initiate a trip via the undervoltage release of a circuit-breaker/switch-disconnector. They cover operating currents ranging from 1 to 1800 A.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers with residual current device Residual-current relays PFR with ring-type transformers The area of application for the relay/transformer combination ranges – depending on the standards involved – from personnel protection to fire prevention to general protection of systems for 1.

6A 5 6 7 8 NZM. C2 C1 7 1 2 3 4 1S1 1S2 PFR-W LOAD 7-23 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers with residual current device Trip of circuit-breakers with shunt release and possible external reset of the relay by a pushbutton (NC contact) N L1 L2 L3 -S.-XA...

D2 U< D1 1S1 1S2 PFR-W LOAD 7-24 ..Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Circuit-breakers with residual current device Trip of circuit-breakers with undervoltage release and possible external reset of the relay by a pushbutton (NC contact) N L1 L2 L3 -S. 6A 5 6 7 8 7 1 2 3 4 NZM..-XU.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 7 7-25 .

1) Jumper with no N-converter L1 L2 L3 N 24 V LDC external Power supply Terminating resistor...7 Terminal assignment of the control circuit plug Internal Terminals External L/L+ 7-26 X8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Control circuit plug IZM-XKL(-AV) for customer connection Control circuit plugs X8. XU 8 9 XHIS signalling switch on second voltage release 1) current transformers in transformer´s star point or summation current transformers 1200 A/1 A . X5 are identical X8: Optional control circuit plug (Standard for IZM. 120 O no external system bus module External Internal X7 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Tripped signalling switch XHIA DPWrite Free IN Enable 1 2 3 Signal state Spring-operated stored energy XEE electrically “ON” IZM-XCOM-DP L/L+ 4 Free – + 5 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 X7: Optional control circuit plug Not available with communication function IZMXCOM-DP.) G transformer S2 a Electronic overload release a G transformer S1 IZM-XW(C) N current transformer IZM-XW(C) N current transformer external voltage transformer. star External voltage transformer L3 External voltage transformer L2 External voltage transformer L1 0 V DC 24 V DC Internal system bus + Internal system bus – Us N/Le.. g.. X6. X7. XFR remote reset and IZM....-D. Us 6 XHIS signalling switch on second voltage release Close – + 7 XE Open – + OUT XA.-U. At the position of X7 a communications module is located..

b brown Optional motor cut-off switch XMS 7-27 7 .X6: Standard control circuit plugs X6 L/L+ N/LUs XE/A first shunt release 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S1 "N/C" N/LL/L+ US Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S1 "N/O" Closing release XE/A “Ready to close” auxiliary switch XHIB Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S2 “N/O” Standard auxiliary switch XHI: S2 “N/C” X5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 X5: Optional control circuit plug Only XUV “non-delayed trip”Only XUV Emergency-Stop or short L/L+ N/LUS XU. XHI40: S7 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standard auxiliary contact XHI11/XHI22/XHI31: S3 “NC”. XHI31/XH40: S8 “NO” Motor operator a black-white. XHI40: S7 Standard auxiliary contact XHI22: S4 “NO”. XUV or XA1 second voltage release Standard auxiliary contact XHI11/XHI22/XHI31: S3 “NO”. XHI31/XHI40: S8 “NO” a b M 2 1 L/L+ N/LUS Standard auxiliary contact XHI22: S4 “NC”.

. XHI40: S8 optionale Zusatz-Hilfsstromschalter Optional auxiliary switches XHI: S1. XHI22: S4 oder XHI40: S7.7 Auxiliary switches 7-28 XHI11(22)(31): S3. Intern Internal Klemmen Terminals Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Klemmen Terminals Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Leitungsnummer Wire no. XHI: S2 Standard-Hilfsstromschalter Standard auxiliary switches Leitungsnummer Wire no.

4 X7. XU oder XUV AusgelöstMeldeschalter XHIF XHIS XHIA XHIS1 Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers X6.1 X7.zustandsmeldung meldung “Ready to close” signal “Spring charged” signal Signal 1st voltage release energized Signal 2nd voltage release XA1.3 X7.10 X7. XU or XUV energized Bell switch alarm Meldeschalter erster Spannungsauslöser XA Meldeschalter zweiter Spannungsauslöser XA1.6 X7.14 XHIA energized de-energized Farbe / color de-energized de-energized energized XA1 Intern Internal XHIB XHIF XHIS XA XHIS1 XU Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Leitungsnummer Wire no.6 X7. Klemmen Terminals Farbe / color XUV Reset 7-29 7 . Trip X7.12 Klemmen Terminals X6-6 X7-10 Leitungsnummer Wire no.Signalling switches XHIB EinschaltSpeicherbereitschafts.

7 Voltage release/electrical manual reset Optional: XA1 zweiter Arbeitsstromauslöser XU Unterspannungsauslöser oder XUV Unterspannungsauslöser. Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers XHIS XA XHIS1 XA1 XU XUV Leitungsnummer Wire no. verzögert Option: 2nd shunt release or undervoltage release or undervoltage release with delay Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Intern Internal Farbe / color 7-30 XA erster Arbeitsstromauslöser 1 st shunt release Klemmen Terminals Leitungsnummer Wire no. Klemmen Terminals Emergency-Stop or short terminals .

Klemmen Terminals 7-31 7 .Closing release/electrical ON Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers XEE Elektrisch "EIN" Electrical "ON" XE Einschaltmagnet Closing release Klemmen Terminals Leitungsnummer Wire no. 4 XEE 3 Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Intern Internal XE Leitungsnummer Wire no.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Intern Internal Leitungsnummer Wire no. remote reset magnet XM Motorantrieb XM Motorantrieb Optional: Motorabstellschalter XMS Charging motor optional: motor cut-off switch XMS XFR remote reset coil S 13 cut-off switch for remote reset coll XFR Fern-Rücksetzmagnet S13 Abstellschalter für Fern-Rücksetzung Farbe / color Farbe / color 7-32 Motor operator XMS XFR Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Klemmen Terminals Leitungsnummer Wire no.7 Motor operator. Klemmen Terminals .

... 2)When no metering module and also no BSS module is used: direct connection X8 to XZM.. 7-33 7 . Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 BSS-Modul BSS module S42/S43 S45 1)Termination resistor on X8-1/X8-2. if no external system bus module.Protective circuits for overcurrent release with breaker status sensor and metering module Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser Messmodul Metering module Breaker Status Sensor Internal system bus Interner Systembus Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Trip magnet for overcurrent release Overcurrent release 1) Klemmen Terminals N-Wandler N sensor Spannungswandler Voltage transformer + G-Wandler G sensor Messmodul Metering module Interner Systembus Internal system bus + Intern Internal XZM.

metering module only Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser Messmodul Metering module Interner Systembus Internal system bus 7 Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Trip magnet for overcurrent release Overcurrent release 1) Klemmen Terminals + G-Wandler G sensor N-Wandler N sensor Spannungswandler Voltage transformer Messmodul Metering module + Intern Internal Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 XZM.. .. if no external system bus module (a figure.- Interner Systembus Internal system bus 7-34 Protective circuits for overcurrent release. page 7-26). 1)Termination resistor on X8-1/X8-2.

1/X8.. page 7-26). if no external system bus module (a figure.Protective circuits for overcurrent release. breaker status sensor only Auslösemagnet für Elektronischer Überstromauslösung Überstromauslöser Breaker Status Sensor Interner Systembus Circuit-breakers IZM circuit-breakers Trip magnet for overcurrent release Overcurrent release Breaker Status Sensor Internal system bus 1) Klemmen Terminals N-Wandler N sensor + G-Wandler G sensor Intern Internal Interner Systembus Internal system bus XZM. 7-35 7 .. + Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 BSS-Modul BSS module 1)Termination resistor on X8.2.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 7 7-36 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Page Motor protection Engineering notes Circuit documents Power supply Control circuit supply Contactor markings Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Direct switch-on with PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start Star-delta switching of three-phase motors Star-delta starting with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 Control circuit devices for star-delta starting Pole-changing motors Motor windings Multi-speed contactors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Multi speed switch with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 8-3 8-14 8-18 8-20 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-33 8-37 8-38 8-48 8-51 8-53 8-56 8-59 8-61 8-69 8-74 8-89 8 8-1 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Page Three-phase current-automatic stator starters Three-phase automatic rotor starters Switching of capacitors Duplex pump control Fully automatic pump control Off position interlock of the loads Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic reset 8-91 8-96 8-100 8-104 8-106 8-110 8-111 8 8-2 .

the various short-circuit ratings and coordination types.net/en/support/slider/index. The selector slide has several variants of the movable section with numerical values for DOL and reversing starters or star-delta starters.jsp The Moeller selector slide enables you to determine quickly and reliably which motor starter is your most suitable for the application .moeller. They can vary according to the installation requirements. If you prefer to use the selector slide online. All you need the operating voltage. this is available on the Internet at: www. Standard cable cross-sections and permissible cable lengths are stated for the tripping of protective devices in compliance with standards. 8 8-3 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Selection aids The selector slide can be used for dimensioning devices with short-circuit coordination types 1 and 2. The selector slide can be obtained free of charge. the motor rating.

Frequently recurring operating cycles These make motor protection difficult. pressure and position switches).no higher. Overload relays with automatic reset These can be used only with pulsed contact devices (three-wire control) such as pushbuttons etc. When is it right for the overload relay to trip? Only when the current consumption of the motor increases due to mechanical overloading of the motor. Special circuitry Special circuitry such as is found in star-delta starters. Their maximum rating is shown clearly on every relay and must be adhered to without fail. no lower. it will nevertheless provide adequate protection against non-starting. The reset button can be fitted as an external feature in order to make it accessible to all personnel. The following important questions and answers give a further guide to the behaviour of an installation with motor protection. undervoltage or phase failure when the motor is at or nearly full load. Motors which are rated for a high frequency of operation will withstand this setting to a certain degree.. To what current must the overload relay be set? To the rated motor current .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Overload relay with manual reset These should always be used where continuous contact devices are required (e. then either the load on the motor should be reduced or the motor should be exchanged for a larger one. Higher ratings – chosen for instance according to the cable cross-section – would lead to the destruction of the motor and relay. A relay set to too low will prevent the full utilization of the motor. If a correctly set relay trips too frequently. individually compensated motors. may require that the relay setting deviates from the rated motor current. to prevent automatic restarting. or when the motor fails to start due to a stalled rotor. but also the relay. The relay should be set higher than the rated motor current in view of its shorter time constant. against the effects of short circuits. it will not guarantee full overload protection. Although this will not ensure complete protection against overload. set too high. the cooling of the bimetal strips cannot lead to automatic reconnection. current transformer-operated relays etc. Moeller overload relays are always supplied with manual reset but can be converted to automatic reset by the user. Backup fuses and instantaneous releases These are needed to protect not only the motor. because on these. 8 8-4 .g.

1 pole 2 pole 8 8-5 . this will also endanger the contactor and motor. 30). Therefore. reduced cooling due to a reduction in speed or motor dirt. 20. 3-pole overload relays should be so connected in the case of single-phase and DC motors so that all three poles of the overload relay carry the current. They determine different tripping characteristics for the various starting conditions of motors (normal starting to heavy starting). In most cases. whether in single-pole or 2-pole circuits. An important characteristic feature of overload relays conforming to IEC/EN 947-4-1 are the tripping classes (CLASS 10 A. What causes destruction of the overload relay? Destruction will take place only in the event of a short circuit on the load side of the relay when the back-up fuse is rated too high. temporary additional external heating of the motor or bearing wear. always adhere to the maximum fuse rating specified on every relay. 10.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection When does the overload relay fail to trip in good time although the motor is at risk? With changes in the motor which do not cause an increase in current consumption: Effects of humidity.

8-6 .5 1.0 1.2 1. Type of overload relay Multiple of current setting Reference ambient temperature Tripping time in minutes F2 F4 F8 F 12 D Tripping class 10 A 10 20 30 7. the response limits must apply equally to the highest and the lowest setting of the associated current.2 1.2 Tripping time in seconds 2 < T F 10 4 < T F 10 6 < T F 20 9 < T F 30 + 40 °C A t>2h starting from cold state of relay B tF2h C Tripping class 10 A 10 20 30 8 Non-ambient temperature compensated thermal relays and magnetic relays Ambient temperature compensated relay 1.5 7.2 + 20 °C In the case of thermal overload relays with a current setting range.05 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Pick-up times Response limits of time-delayed overload relays at all-pole load.

The point of destruction is the point of intersection between the projected tripping curves and the multiple of the current. The making and breaking currents of the motor flow in thermal overload relays which are used for motor protection. depending on the utilization category and the size of the motor. It is common practice to state in the details of protective devices which type of co-ordination is ensured by them. Overload capacity Overload relays and releases have heating coils which can be thermally destroyed by overheating.0 2 poles 1 pole + 40 °C 2 poles 1 pole 1. it is permissible for the current flowing during the operating time of the protective device to damage the motor starter.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Response limits of 3-pole thermal overload relays at 2-pole load Type of thermal overload relay Multiple of current setting Reference ambient temperature A t > 2 h. The point of destruction depends on the frame size and design and is usually approximately 12 to 20 x Ie.32 0 1. Short-circuit rating of the main circuit With currents that exceed the breaking capacity of the motor starter in relation to the utilization category (EN 60947-1). the response limits must apply equally to the highest and the lowest setting of the associated current. with phase-failure sensitivity 3 poles 1. 8-7 . without phase-failure sensitivity Non-ambient temperature compensated. without phase-failure sensitivity Ambient temperature compensated. The permissible behaviour of starters under short-circuit conditions is defined in the so-called types of co-ordination (1 and 2).0 B tF2h 2 poles 1 pole 1.9 2 poles 1 pole + 20 °C 8 In the case of thermal overload relays with a current setting range.25 0 1.15 0 + 20 °C 3 poles 1. These currents are between 6 and 12 x Ie (rated operational current).0 0. starting from cold state of relay Ambient temperature compensated.

Industrial Switchgear apply when the incoming cable is looped once through the transformer relay. Up to two times rated current Ie. VDE 0660 Part 200). i. Adjusting the current transformer-operated overload relay ZW7 for lower rated motor current The setting ranges quoted in the Moeller Main Catalogue. overload relays ZB. Motor protection in special applications Heavy starting duty An adequate tripping delay is essential in order to allow a motor to start up smoothly.7 at rated operational voltage.e. it would be completely wrong to adjust an overload relay which tripped out before the run-up time expired. it provides normal overload protection during normal operation. It does not have to be fit for renewed operation without repair. Within this range it does not differ from the normal overload relay. The tripping delays can be taken from the tripping characteristics in the Moeller Main Catalogue. In the case of especially high-inertia motors. The combination is subjected to three test disconnection's at 1000 A prospective current with a power factor between 0. In the majority of cases. the transformation ratio I1/I2 of the saturable core current transformers is practically linear. It must be fit for renewed operation. Welding of the contacts may not occur (EN 60947-5-1. the secondary current no longer increases proportionally to the primary current. However. supplying an overload relay Z. The tripping characteristic of the overload relay must not differ from the given tripping curve after a short circuit. 8 8-8 .5 and 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Type 1 coordination In the event of a short circuit the starter must not endanger persons and installations. within the transformer characteristic range (I > 2 x Ie) .. It is used principally for medium and large motors. and hence permits longer starting times. there are other solutions to the problem: Current transformer-operated overload relays ZW7 The ZW7 consists of three special saturable core current transformers. This non-linear increase in the secondary current produces an extended tripping delay if overcurrents greater than twice rated current occur. Industrial Switchgear.. motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ(M) or circuit-breakers NZM can be used. Type 2 coordination In the event of a short circuit the starter must not endanger persons and installations.. whose run-up time exceeds the tripping delay of the above devices. but the motor would no longer be adequately protected during normal operation. solve the starting problem. it is true. There is a risk of contact welding for which the manufacturer must give maintenance instructions. Short-circuit withstand strength of the auxiliary switch The manufacturer details the required overcurrent protective device. to a current level higher than the rated motor current. However. This would.

the necessary range adjustment is achieved by looping the incomer several times through the aperture in the relay. Example: With the ZW7-63 relay. The change in the rated motor current quoted on the rating plate is inversely proportional to the number of loops. Because of the additional parallel contactor. Motor and starting procedure have to be selected carefully when dealing with machines having a very large rotating mass. Only when the motor has reached full speed is the bridging contactor switched off and the full motor current is then Star-delta starter (y D) 1 operating direction Changeover time with overload relay in position A: < 15 s B: > 15 < 40 s Ie B -Q11 A -Q15 -Q13 -Q11 -Q15 -Q13 -Q11 -Q15 C -Q13 Ie carried by the overload relay. 8 C: > 40 s Ie Setting of the overload relay 0. which are practically the only ones subject to this problem when direct starting is used. Provided it has been set correctly to the rated motor current. One must ensure that the motor is able to tolerate the high temperature generated by direct starting.58 x Ie 1 x Ie 0.5 A can be accommodated by looping the leads twice through the relay. The motor is a limiting factor with regard to the tripping delay of the current transformer-operated relay and the bridging period.58 x Ie Full motor protection in Y (star) Only partial motor protection in Motor not protected in Y (star) position position y position 8-9 . for the prescribed starting time.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection If the current transformer-operated overload relay ZW7 is required to provide protection to a motor of below 42 A rating (minimum value in the setting range of 42 A to 63 A). the overload relay does not carry the full current during starting. this will ensure full motor protection during operation. which has a setting range from 42 A to 63 A. Starting must be monitored. Bridging of motor protection during starting For small motors the bridging of the motor protection during starting is more economical. Depending on the operating conditions adequate protection of the motor winding may no longer be given by an overload relay. a motor rating of 21 A to 31. In that case it must be weighed up whether an electronic motor-protective relay ZEV or a thermistor overload relay EMT 6 in conjunction with an overload relay Z meets the requirements.

Heavy starting duty Current transformer-operated overload relays ZW7 Bridging of motor protection during starting Bridging during starting using bridging relay 8 -Q11 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12 For medium and large motors For small motors.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Multi-speed switches 2 speeds One tapped winding 2 separate windings 3 speeds 1 x tapped winding + 1 winding -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 -Q11 -Q21 Attention must be paid to short-circuit protection of the overload relays. Separate supply leads should be provided if required. no protection Automatic cut out during starting 8-10 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Individually compensated motor Ie Iw Ib Ic IEM cos v Ue Pc C = Rated motor operational current [A] Iw = I e xy [ A ] = Active current Proportion of motor 2 2 = Reactive current rated operational current [A] Ib = Ie – Iw [ A ] –6 = Rated capacitor current [A] Ic = U e× 3 × 2πf × C × 10 [ A ] } = Setting current of overload relay [A] = Motor power factor = Rated operational voltage [V] = Rated capacitor output [kvar] = Capacitance of capacitor [mF] Ic = P c × 10 3 -----------------3 × Ue Capacitor connected to contactor terminals to motor terminals 8 -Q11 IEM PC -Q11 IEM PC Setting IEM of overload relay I EM = 1 × I e I EM = 2 Iw + ( Ib – Ic ) 2 Capacitor does not relieve loading of cable between contactor and motor. 8-11 . Capacitor relieves loading of cable between contactor and motor. normal arrangement.

gases. NTC thermistors have a falling resistance-temperature characteristic. bearings etc. Copies of PTB certification are available on request. These standards specify that motors above 2 kW used for frequent starting and stopping should be adequately protected for this type of duty. The PTC sensor fitted in the stator winding ensures that the stator winding and rotor are adequately protected even with a stalled rotor. With PTC thermistors the resistance at low temperature is small. The delayed temperature rise in the stator can lead to a delayed tripping of the thermistor overload relay. They are therefore suitable for monitoring the temperature of series motors. it is set higher than the predefined operational current. It is therefore advisable to supplement the protection of rotor-critical motors by a conventional overload relay. 8 8-12 . it is necessary to differentiate between stator-critical and rotor-critical motors: • Stator-critical motors Motors whose stator winding reaches the permissible temperature limit quicker than the rotor. Thermistor overload relays can be used in conjunction with up to six PTC sensors to DIN 44081 for direct monitoring of temperatures in EEx e motors compliant to the ATEX directive (94/9 EC). transformers. Generally. On the other hand. the thermistor protection monitors the motor winding. intermittent operation and excessive frequency of operation. Three-phase motors above 15 kW are usually rotor-critical. Overload protection for motors in accordance with IEC/EN 60204. When designing motor protection. the use of overload relays in conjunction with thermistor overload relays is to be recommended. heaters. Temperature monitoring of electric motors Thermistor overload relays EMT6 comply with the characteristics for the combination of protective devices and PTC sensors to VDE 0660 Part 303. thermistors have positive (PTC thermistors) or negative (NTC thermistors) temperature coefficients. • Rotor-critical motors Squirrel-cage motors whose rotor in the event of stalling reaches the permissible temperature limit earlier than the stator winding. which does not exhibit the pronounced change behaviour of the PTC thermistor characteristic. From a certain temperature it rises steeply. This can be achieved by fitting temperature sensors. oils. The overload relay then assumes stalling protection. Depending on the application. where there is frequent starting and stopping of motors. In order to avoid premature tripping out of the overload relay in these operating conditions. If the temperature sensor is not able to ensure adequate protection with stalled rotors. an overcurrent relay must also be provided.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Thermistor overload relay for machine protection Thermistor overload relays are used in conjunction with temperature-dependent semiconductor resistors (thermistors) for monitoring the temperature of motors.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor protection Protection of current and temperature-dependent motor-protective devices Protection of the motor under the following conditions Overload in continuous operation Extended starting and stopping Switching to stalled rotor (stator-critical motor) Switching on stalled rotor (rotor-critical motor) Single-phasing Intermittent operation Excessive frequency of operation Voltage and frequency fluctuations Increased coolant temperature Impaired cooling + Full protection (+) Partial protection .No protection Using bimetal + (+) + (+) + – – + – – Using thermistor + + + (+) + + + + + + Using bimetal and thermistor + + + (+) + + + + + + 8 8-13 .

Three-phase automatic rotor starters with starting resistors Resistors are connected in the rotor circuit of the motor to reduce the starting current of motors with slip-ring rotors. with a very low level of starting torque. The current taken from the mains is thus reduced. Three-phase autotransformer starters with starting transformers This type of starting is preferable where the same starting torque is to be obtained as with the primary resistance starters but the starting current taken from the mains is to be further reduced. The number of steps of the automatic starter is determined by the maximum permissible starting current and by the type of the motor. A reduced voltage Ua (approximately 70 % of the rated operational voltage) is supplied to the motor when starting via the starting transformer.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Engineering notes Three-phase automatic starters I Md I a I' Md b M'd 20 40 60 80 100 % n Automatic stator starters three-phase current with startup resistors Single or multi-step resistors are connected upstream of the three-phase squirrel-cage motors to reduce the starting current and torque. the starting current is approximately three times the motor full-load current. Thus. the torque of the motor is practically proportional to the current taken from the mains. I Md I a Md I' b 8 I Md M'd 20 40 60 80 100 % n 20 40 60 80 100 % n I: Line current Md: Torque n: Speed a Reduction of the line current b Reduction of the torque 8-14 . In contrast to stator resistance starters.5 to 2 times the motor full-load current. With single-step starters. the resistors can be so designed that the starting current is only 1. the current taken from the mains is reduced to approximately half the direct starting current. With multi-step starters.

6/0.36/0.7/0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Engineering notes Important data and features of three-phase automatic starters 1) Type of starter 2) Type of starter 3) Number of starting stages Stator resistance starter (for squirrel-cage motors) Star-delta switches 1 only With starting resistors Normally 1 With starting transformers Normally 1 Rotor starter (for slipring rotors) Rotor resistance starter Selectable (no longer selectable when current or torque have been determined) none 4) Voltage reduction at the motor 0.36/0.5 to pull-out torque 7) Current and torque reduction Current reduction much greater than torque reduction. 0.6/0.49/0. enclosed) 150 – 300 350 – 500 500 – 1500 8-15 .75 x Ie Selectable: from 0.33 x inrush current at rated operational voltage Selectable (see 4) 0. DOL starting = 100 (with overload relay.49/0.75 x Ua (transformer tappings) 5) Starting current taken from mains 0.5 x rated current 8 5a) Starting current at the motor 6) Starting torque 0.56 x inrush current at rated operational voltage Selectable (see 4) 0.56 x tightening torque at rated operational voltage Proportional Selectable (see 5) from 0.7/0.33 x tightening torque at rated operational voltage Proportional a2 x tightening torque at rated operational voltage Current reduction less than torque reduction Selectable (see 4) 0.58 as with yd starter a x inrush current at rated operational voltage Selectable: 0.g.58 x rated operational voltage Selectable: a x rated operational voltage (a < 1) e. From pull-out torque to rated speed almost proportional 500 – 1500 8) Approximate price (for similar data).5 to about 2.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Engineering notes Switching of capacitors DIL contactors for capacitors – individual switching Individual compensation L1. When installing capacitors. A discharge circuit or discharge device must reduce the residual voltage of the capacitor to 8-16 less than 50 V within a minute of the capacitor being switched off. According to these. be reliably switched by Moeller DIL contactors. No switch-disconnectors or fuses must be installed between the discharge circuit and the capacitor. capacitors not directly connected to an electrical device which forms a discharge circuit.. Capacitors connected in parallel to the motor do not require a discharge device. however.3 -F1 Group compensation L1..3 -F1 -Q11 -Q31 -Q11 M 3 -C1 -C1 M 3 -M1 M 3 -M2 M 3 -M3 8 -M1 When capacitors are switched on. contactors are heavily stressed by transient current peaks. When a single capacitor is switched on. the VDE specification 0560 part 4 (Germany) and the standards which apply to each country should be observed. currents up to 30 times the rated current can occur.. . these can. since discharging is performed via the motor winding. should be equipped with a rigidly connected discharge device..

Where standard contactors are used. 8 8-17 . This produces inrush current peaks which can exceed 150 times the rated current.. Special contactors for capacitors such as those available from Moeller in the DILK… range. should be used here. This is achieved either by longer incoming leads to the capacitors or by inserting an air-cored coil with a minimum inductance of approximately 6 mH (5 windings. with short connecting elements between contactor and capacitor. diameter of the coil approximately 14 cm) between contactor and capacitor.. The reactors also act to limit the inrush current and normal contactor can be used. it must be noted that the charging current is taken not only from the mains but also from the capacitors connected in parallel.3 -F1 -F2 -F3 -Q1 -Q11 -Q12 -Q13 -Q31 -Q32 I> a -C2 M 3 -M1 M 3 -M2 M 3 -M3 -C0 -C1 a Additional inductance with standard contactor In the case of group compensation where capacitors are connected in parallel. which can control inrush current peaks of up to 180 times the rated current. Use of reactors Frequently the capacitors in group compensation are provided with reactors to avoid harmonics. The use of series resistors is another way of reducing high inrush currents. there is danger of welding.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Engineering notes Contactor for capacitor DILK… – Individual and group compensation Group compensation L1. A further reason for these peak currents is the use of low-loss capacitors as well as the compact construction. If no special contactors are available. the inrush currents can be damped by additional inductance's.

Examples for drawing up circuit documents are given in IEC 1082-1. IEC/EN 61082-1. Circuit diagrams Explanation of the mode of operation. The supplier and the operator must agree on the form in which the circuit documents are to be produced: paper. Equivalent circuit diagrams. Diagrams indicate the voltage-free or current-free status of the electrical installation. The circuit documents are divided into two groups: Classification according to the purpose Classification according to the type of representation Simplified or detailed • Single-line or multi-line representation • Connected. there is the process-orientated representation with the function chart (see previous pages). They must also agree on the language or languages in which the documentation is to be produced. • Equivalent circuit diagram: Special version of an explanatory circuit diagram for the analysis and calculation of circuit characteristics. diskette. This support covers: • • • • • • • • • • • Explanatory circuit diagrams.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Circuit documents General Circuit documents serve to explain the function of circuits or electrical connections. installation and maintenance of electrical installations. 8 8-18 . etc. Flow diagrams. user information must be written in the official language of the country of use to comply with EN 292-2. A distinction is drawn between: • Block diagram: Simplified representation of a circuit with its main parts. They provide information for the construction. tables Time flow diagrams. Device wiring diagrams. Assignment diagrams. Terminal diagrams. tables Wiring diagrams. semi-connected or separate representation • Topographical representation In addition to this. Block diagrams. which shows how the electrical installation works and how it is subdivided. Explanatory tables or diagrams. which shows how the electrical installation works. • Circuit diagram: Detailed representation of a circuit with its individual components. film. Interconnection diagrams. In the case of machines. the connections or the physical position of the components.

in general. • Interconnection diagram: Representation of the connections between the device or combination of devices within an installation. Representation of the physical position of the electrical equipment. • Assignment diagram (location diagram). Formulae. They show the internal and/or external connections but.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Circuit documents L1. do not give any information about the mode of operation. • Unit wiring diagram: Representation of all the connections within the device or combination of devices. L2. • Terminal diagram: Representation of the connection points of an electrical installation and the internal and external conductive connections connected to them. Tables”. L3 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 I> I>I> 2 4 6 Q1 I> Q 1 3 5 1 3 5 Q11 Q12 Q11 2 4 6 Q12 2 4 6 PE U V W M 3~ M 3~ Circuit diagram: 1-pole and 3-pole representation 8 Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams show the conductive connections between electrical components. wiring tables can also be used. 8-19 . You will find notes on the marking of electrical equipment in the diagram as well as further diagram details in the section “Specifications. which does not have to be to scale. Instead of wiring diagrams.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Power supply 4-conductor system. TN-C-S L11 a Protective earth conductor Protective earth terminal in enclosure (not L21 L31 totally insulated) N PE L1 L2 L3 N PEN Overcurrent protective device in the supply is required for compliance to IEC/EN 60204-1 8 5-conductor system. TN-S L11 L21 L31 N a Protective earth conductor Protective earth terminal in enclosure (not totally insulated) L1 L2 L3 N PE Overcurrent protective device in the supply is required for compliance to IEC/EN 60204-1 8-20 .

remove link and provide insulation monitoring. In non-earthed control circuit. I I I 2 4 6 0 L01 L02 8-21 . IT L11 L21 L31 PE L1 L2 L3 Overcurrent protective device is required in the supply for compliance to IEC/EN 60204-1 For all systems: use the N conductor only with the agreement of the user L1 L3 Separate primary and secondary protection 1 3 5 8 Earthed control circuit.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Power supply 3-conductor system.

Maximum ratio of U1/U2 = 1/1. remove link and provide insulation monitoring. In non-earthed control circuit.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Power supply L1 L3 Combined primary and secondary protection Earthed control circuit.73 Circuit not to be used with STI/STZ (safety and isolating transformers). 1 3 5 I> I> I> 2 4 6 0 L01 L02 8 8-22 .

2 4 6 ab 0 L01 A1 15 S1 S2 E L 15 E R< A1 16 18 E A2 16 18 L A2 PE L02 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 DC power supply with three-phase bridge rectifier 8 I I I 2 4 6 Yy0 – + 8-23 . with insulation monitoring on the secondary side L011 a Clear button b Test button I.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit supply L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 Separate primary and secondary protection. I. I.

Q22 = mains Type of component Mains contactors Standard motor 3 speed One speed Forward Up Hoist DIL (/Z) DIUL (/Z) SDAINL (/Z) SDAIUL (/Z) Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q12 Q17 Q17 Q17 Q11 Q17 Q17 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q14 Q18 Q21 Q21 Q21 Q21 Q21 Q13 Q16 to Qn 1-n starting stages Q22 Q12 Q13 Q13 Q23 Q23 Q23 Q23 Q19 Q15 Q15 Reverse Down Lower Low speed Forward Up Hoist Reverse Down Lower High speed Forward Up Hoist Reverse Down Lower Star Delta Starting stage Notes 2 speed/4 speed contactor with anticlockwise rotation for high speed). 8-24 . the circuit diagram for a reversing star-delta starter. the basic type is always maintained. the code letter Q. is formed by combining the basic circuit of the reversing contactor and that of the standard star-delta starter. which shows the function of the component (e. as well as numerical identification.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Contactor markings The contactors in contactor combinations have. in accordance with EN 61346-2 for equipment and function. Thus. The following table shows the marking used in this Wiring Manual and in Moeller circuit documentation.g. Step contactors 8 UPIL (/Z/Z) UPIUL (/Z/Z) UPSDAINL (/Z) U3PIL (/Z/Z/Z) UPDIUL (/Z) ATAINL (/Z) DAINL DDAINL DIL + discharge resistors DIGL + discharge resistors With contactor combinations which are made up of several basic types. for example.

Industrial Switchgear (Technical data for contactors) 2) 1) 8-25 . L1 L2 L3 -F1 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 -F1 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q11 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 -F2 97 98 97 95 PE 96 95 96 1 3 4 5 6 -Q11 -Q11 2 2 -F2 2 4 6 98 PE PE U U V W V W U V W 8 M 3 -M1 M 3 -M1 M 3 -M1 Protective device in the supply line in accordance with Moeller Main Catalogue. L1 L2 L3 13 14 Fuses with overload relay Short-circuit protection2) for contactor and overload relay by means of fuses F1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Typical circuits with DIL contactors Fuseless without overload relay Short-circuit protection1) and overload protection by means of PKZM motor-protective circuit-breaker or NZM circuit-breaker. Short-circuit protection3) for contactor by means of fuses F1. Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay. 3) Fuse size in accordance with Moeller Main Catalogue. Industrial Switchgear or AWA installation instructions.

In the event of an overload. The contactor switches on the motor and maintains itself after the button is enabled via its 8-26 own auxiliary contact Q11/14-13 and pushbutton 0 (three-wire control contact). in the normal course of events.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Typical circuit with bridging of overload relay during starting Without overload relay L1 (Q11/1) -F0 13 95 with overload relay L1 (Q11/1) -F0 -Q1 -F2 14 96 21 21 0 -S11 I 0 22 13 14 22 13 14 -S11 I 8 -Q11 N F2 96 -Q11 A1 A2 14 13 14 -Q11 13 A1 -Q11 N Q11 I 13 22 A2 0 22 Q11 14 21 The short-circuit capacity of the contacts in the circuit has to be considered when selecting F0. by actuation of pushbutton 11. Contactor Q0 is de-energized. Double actuator 21 13 A 14 13 B 14 Control circuit device I: ON 0: OFF For connection of further control circuit devices a section "Pulse encoder". page 8-37 Method of operation: Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of contactor Q11. . it is de-energized via the normally closed contact 95-96 on overload relay F2.

page 8-29 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q11 2 6 -Q14 2 97 95 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 U V W PE M 3 -M1 8 8-27 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Application on drive motors with heavy starting duty L1 L2 L3 -F1 For connection when used with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZM. and circuit-breakers NZM(H)... a section "Fuses with overload relays"...

K1 is likewise disconnected and. which corresponds to the starting time of the motor.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 13 Q14:Bridging contactor K1: Timing relays Q11:Mains contactor -F2 96 21 -Q1 14 0 -S11 I 22 13 14 22 -Q14 14 13 -Q14 44 43 -Q11 14 13 F2 96 21 0 22 Q14 14 21 13 I Q11 22 -S11 A 16 14 21 13 B -K1 15 A1 A1 8 -Q14 N -K1 A2 A2 A1 -Q11 A2 Control circuit device I: ON 0: OFF For connection of further control circuit devices a section "Pulse encoder". The mains contactor Q11 is closed via Q14/44-43 and maintains itself via Q11/14-13. cannot be energized again until after the motor has been switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. voltage is applied to the timing relay K1. 14 -Q11 22 . bridging contactor Q14 is disconnected by K1/16-15. At the same time. When the set time has elapsed. normally closed contact 95-96 on overload relay F2 effects de-energization. exactly like Q14. page 8-37 Function Actuation of pushbutton I energizes bridging contactor Q14 which then maintains itself via Q14/13-14. The normally closed 8-28 contact Q11/22-21 prevents Q14 and K1 closing whilst the motor is running. In the event of an overload.

DIUL reversing contactor Fuseless without overload relay Short-circuit protection and overload protection by means of motor-protective circuit-breaker PKZM or circuit-breaker NZM. Fuse size in the supply line in accordance with Moeller Main Catalogue. Short-circuit protection1) for contactor by means of fuses F1. L1 L2 L3 -F1 -F1 L1 L2 L3 -Q1 I>I>I> 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12 -Q11 -Q12 97 95 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 -F2 8 U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE M 3 -M1 1) M 3 -M1 M 3 -M1 Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of the overload relay F2 8-29 . L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 Fuses with overload relays Short-circuit protection1) for contactor and overload relay by means of fuses F1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Two directions of rotation. Industrial Switchgear or AWA installation instructions.

anticlockwise Q11 13 I 21 22 F2 96 0 21 22 Q12 Q12 14 13 II 21 22 21 21 22 22 21 13 -S11 A B C Control circuit device (three-way pushbutton) I = Clockwise 0 = Stop II = Anticlockwise Q11 Q11 14 13 I -S11 F2 96 0 Q12 Q12 13 14 II 22 14 13 14 13 13 14 14 13 A 14 13 B 14 C 8-30 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors Changing direction of rotation after actuation of the 0 push-button L1 (Q11/1) -F0 13 95 13 Changing direction of rotation without actuation of the 0 push-button L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 -Q1 14 21 -F2 96 -Q1 14 21 -F2 96 0 22 21 22 0 22 21 22 II 22 I 21 13 14 II 22 I 21 13 14 -S11 I 13 14 -S11 I II 13 14 14 14 II 14 14 8 -Q11 13 22 -Q12 13 22 -Q11 -Q12 13 22 13 22 -Q12 21 A1 -Q11 21 A1 -Q12 21 A1 -Q11 21 A1 -Q11 A2 -Q12 A2 -Q11 A2 -Q12 A2 N N Q11: Mains contactor. clockwise Q12: Mains contactor.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
Operating principle: Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of contactor Q11. It switches on the motor running clockwise and maintains itself after pushbutton I is enabled via its own auxiliary contact Q11/14-13 and pushbutton 0 (three-wire control contact). The normally closed contact Q11/22-21 electrically inhibits the closing of contactor Q12. When pushbutton II is pressed, contactor Q12 closes (motor running anticlockwise). Depending on the circuit, direction can be changed from clockwise to anticlockwise either after pressing pushbutton 0, or by directly pressing the pushbutton for the reverse direction. In the event of an overload, normally closed contact 95-96 of overload relay F2, normally open contact 13-14 of the motor-protective circuit-breaker or the circuit-breaker will switch.

Operating direction and two speeds (reversing contactor) Special circuit (tapped winding) for feed drives, etc.
L1 L2 L3

FORWARD: feed or high speed RETRACT: high speed only STOP: tapped winding

-F1

8
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6

-Q17

-Q22

2

-Q21

2

97

95

97

95

-F21
2 4 6 98 96

-F2
2 4 6 98 96

PE 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W

M 3 -M1

-Q23

1 2

3 4

5 6

8-31

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct-on-line start of three-phase motors
L1 (Q17/1) -F0
95

-F2/F21 0

96 21 22 22 13 14

0: Stop I : Low speed – FORWARD (Q17) II: High speed – FORWARD (Q21 + Q23) III: High speed – BACK (Q22 + Q23)

III
21 22

III

-S11 II I

21 14 21

I
13

22 13 14

II -Q17
13 14

-Q21

14 13 31

14

-Q22 -Q17

13

21

-Q17 -Q22

22 22 21 22

32 32

8

31

-Q22 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 N

32 21 22 22 21 A1 A2

-K1

-Q21
21 31 13 14

Q17: Feed forward Q21: High speed forward Q23: Star contactor K1: Contactor relay Q22: Retract high speed

-K1
13

-K1 -Q23

43 44 44 43 A1

-Q23 -Q21

14 A1 A2

A1

A1

-Q23

-K1
A2

A2

-Q22

A2

Operating principle: Forward travel is initiated by pressing pushbutton I or II according to the speed required. Pushbutton I switches on the feed motion via Q17, which maintains itself via its normally open contact 13-14. If the feed movement is to occur at high speed, star contactor Q23 is energized via pushbutton II which energizes high speed contactor Q21 via its normally open contact Q23/13-14. Both contactors are maintained via Q21/13-14. A direct switch over from feed to high-speed during the forward travel is possible.
8-32

High speed reverse is initiated by pushbutton III. Contactor relay K1 picks up and energizes star contactor Q23 via K1/14-13. High-speed contactor Q22 is energized via normally open contacts K1/43-44 and Q23/44-43, and is maintained via Q22/14-13. The reverse motion can only be stopped via pushbutton 0. Direct changeover/reversal is not possible.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct switch-on with PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker
Reversing
L1 L2 L3 -Q1

I> I> I>

T1

T2

T3

L1

L2

L3 A1 13 14 21 11

L1

L2

L3

-Q11

A1 A2

13 14

21 22

-Q12 I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3

A2

8
I>> I>> I>>
T1 T2 T3

U

V

W

M 3 -M1

Instead of the high-capacity contact modules S-PKZ2, contact module SE1A…-PKZ2 can also be used provided a switching capacity of the circuit-breaker of 30 kA/400 V is sufficient.

8-33

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct switch-on with PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker
Q11 13 I L1 -S11 (Q11/1) -F0
1.13 21 21 22

Q1 1.14 0

Q12 14 II

Q12 13 -S11 L1 (Q11/1) -F0 -Q1 0
1.13 1.14 21 22 21

Q11 13 I
21

Q11 14 0
21

Q12 14 II
21 13 22

Q12 13

22

21

22

13

22

13

14

14

13

13

14

14

13

A
1.14 21

B

C

A

B

14

C

-Q1 0
22 21 22

22 21 13 14

-S11 II

22 14

-S11 II
21 13 22 14

I
13 14 14 14

I
13

-Q11
13

-Q12
13 22 22

-Q11

14 13 22

-Q12

14 13 22

8
-Q12 -Q11

-Q11
21 A1 21 A1

-Q12
21 A1

-Q11
21 A1

-Q12
A2 A2

-Q11
A2

-Q12
A2

N

N

a

a

a Stop S11 Q1 Q12 Q11 F0 RMQ-Titan, M22-… PKZ2/ZM-… S/EZ-PKZ2 S/EZ-PKZ2 FAZ
-Q12 -Q11
14 14 13

-Q12
13

a
22 22 21

-Q11
21

a remove links with position switches
8-34

14

22

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct switch-on with PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker
Two speeds
L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21

L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.21

-Q1
1.14 1.22

-Q2
1.14 1.22

I> I> I>

I> I> I>

T1 T2 T3

-Q17

A1 A2

13

21 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3

14 22

-Q21

A1 A2

13

21 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3

14 22

Instead of the high-capacity contact modules S-PKZ2, contact module SE1A…-PKZ2 can also be used provided a switching capacity of the circuit-breaker of 30 kA/400 V is sufficient.

8
1U 1V 1W 2U

M 3 -M1

2V 2W

1U

2U

1W

1V

2W

2V

n<

n>

8-35

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Direct switch-on with PKZ2 motor-protective circuit-breaker
Version 1
L1 (Q17/1) -S11 -F0
13

Version 2
Q17 13 I
21 21 22

Q2 1.14 0

Q21 14 II
21 22 22

Q21 13

21

22

21

-F0 -Q1 -Q2 0
22 1.13 1.14 1.13 1.14 21 13

13

14

14

13

14

13

14

14

13

-Q1 -Q2 0

1.14 1.13 1.14 21 22 21

A

B

C

A

B

C

22 21 13

21

22 21 13 14 14 14

-S11 II n> I n<
13 14 14 14 22 14

-S11 II n> I n<

22 14 13

-Q17

13 22

-Q21

13 22

-Q17

13 22

-Q21

13 22

8

-Q21 -Q17

21 A1 A2

-Q17 -Q21

21 A1 A2

-Q21 -Q17

21 A1 A2

-Q17 -Q21

21 A1 A2

N Stop n< n>

N Stop n< n>

S11 Q1, Q2 Q21 Q17 S11

RMQ-Titan, M22-… PKZ2/ZM-…/S S-PKZ2 S-PKZ2 RMQ-Titan, M22-…

– – n> n< –

8-36

14

1.13

22

22

Q17 13 L1 (Q17/1) -S11

I

Q21 Q17 Q2 14 1.14 14 II 0
21

Q21 13

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start
Typical example of circuits with contactors DILM… Pulse encoder
F2 96 0
22 21

Q11 Q11 Q11 14 I 13 A2 -S11
22 21

F2 96 0
21 22

Q11 Q11 13 14 I
21 22

0
21 21 22

I
22 14

-S11

13

14

13

14

13

13

13

14

A
X1 X2

14

B

A

14

Illuminated pushbutton actuators
F2 96 0
22

Two two-way pushbuttons
Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96 1 0 Start
0 S11 1 2 3 4 I

Q11 Q11 A2 14
22 21

I

Q11 13
21

Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96

13

B

0 I 1 Start
1 S11

0 1 Start 1 2 3 4

14

A

13

B

14

C

13

Double actuator pushbutton with indicator light

T0-1-15511 spring-return switch with automatic return to position 1 Maintained contact sensors

T0-1-15366 spring-return switch with automatic return to rest position

8

Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96

I ON 0 OFF
0 1 2 3 4 1 S11

Q11 A1

F2 96
2

P>

I4
1

-S12

Changeover switch T0-1-15521 MCS pressure switches with fleeting contact in the intermediate position

8-37

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Star-delta starters with overload relay Arrangement in the motor line In a standard circuit configuration, the star-delta starter with overload relay, including a thermally delayed overcurrent relay are situated in the cables leading to the motor terminals U1, V1, W1 or V2, W2, U2. The overload relay can also be operated in a star circuit as it is usually connected in series with the motor winding and the relay current flowing through it = rated motor current x 0.58. For the complete circuit diagram a section "Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL", page 8-40. Arrangement in the mains supply line Instead of the arrangement in the motor line, the overload relay can be placed in the mains supply line. The section shown here indicates how the circuit differs from that on a section "Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL", page 8-40. For drives where the F2 relay trips out when the motor is starting in the star circuit, the F2 relay rated for the rated motor current can be switched in the mains line. The tripping delay is thus increased by approximately four to six times. In the star circuit the current also flows through the relay but here the relay does not offer full protection since its limit current is increased to 1.73 times the phase current. It does, however, offer protection against non-starting.

-Q11

1

3 5

2 4 6

97

95 96

-F2

2 4

6

98

U1 V1 W1

-F1

8
-F2
2 4 6

97 98

95 96

-Q11

1 3 5 2 4 6

U1 V1 W1

8-38

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Configuration in the delta circuit Instead of the arrangement in the motor line or mains supply line, the overload relay can be placed in the delta circuit. The section shown here indicates the modified circuit diagram from a section "Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL", page 8-40. When heavy, long-starting procedures are involved (e.g. for centrifuges) the F2 relay, rated for relay current = rated motor current x 0.58, can also be connected in the connecting lines between delta contactor Q15 and star contactor Q13. In the star circuit no current then flows through relay F2. This circuit is used wherever exceptionally heavy and long starting procedures are involved and when saturable core current transformer-operated relays react too quickly.

-Q15 -F2

1 2

3

5

4 6

-Q13
97 95 96

1 3 5 2 4 6

2

4

6

98

V2 W2 U2

8

8-39

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 14 21

-Q1
22

B

-F1
I> I> I>
2 4 6

1

3 4

5

1

3 4

5

1

3 4

5 6

-Q11
2 6

-Q15
2 6

-Q13
2

97

95 96

8

A

-F2
2 4 6 98

PE

U1 V1 W1

V2

M 3 -M1

W2 U2

Arrangement and rating of protective devices
Position A F2 = 0,58 x Ie with F1 in position B ta F 15 s Motor protection in y and d configuration Position B Q1 = Ie ta > 15 – 40 s Only partial motor protection in y configuration

Rating of switchgear Q11, Q15 = 0.58 x Ie Q13 = 0.33 x Ie
8-40

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
Further notes on the configuration of the overload relay a section "Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL", page 8-40. SDAINLM12 to SDAINLM55 Pushbutton actuators

0 S11 I

21 22

Q11
13 14 13 14 54 53 54 53 54 53

K1: Timing relay approx. 10 s Q11: Mains contactor Q13: Star contactor Q15: Delta contactor Double actuator

Q11

K1 Q15

17 18 22 21 A1

K1 Q13 Q15

17 28 22 21 A1 A2

Q13

Q15

A1

A1

Q11 (–)N

A2

K1

A2

Q13

A2

N

Y

Function Pushbutton I energizes timing relay K1. The normally open contact K1/17-18 (instantaneous contact) which applies voltage to star contactor Q13, which closes and applies voltage to mains contactor Q11 via normally open contact Q13/14-13. Q11 and Q13 maintain themselves via the normally open contacts Q11/14–13 and Q11/44–43. Q11 applies voltage to motor M1 in star connection.

8

SDAINLM70 to SDAINLM260

0 S11 I

21 22

Q11
13 14 13 14 44 43 14 13 14 13

Q11

K1 Q15

17 18 22 21 A1

K1 Q13 Q15

17 28 22 21 A1 A2

Q13

Q15

A1

A1

Q11 (–)N

A2

K1

A2

Q13

A2

N

Y
8-41

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors
SDAINLM12 to SDAINLM260 Two-wire control
L1 (Q11/1) -F0
HAND
95

For connection of further control circuit devices a section "Control circuit devices for star-delta starting", page 8-51

-F2
96

2 4

2

-S14 P > MCS
14

1

-S14 Q SW

1

-Q11

13 14 14

-Q11

44 43

-Q13
13

-Q15
13

8
-S11

F2 96

0
22

Q11 Q11 14 13 I
21 13 22 14

13

21

A

14

B

Double actuator Control circuit device I = ON 0 = OFF

8-42

normally closed contact Q15/22-21 interrupts the circuit of Q13 Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL EM Pushbutton actuators L1 (Q11/1) -F0 HAND -F2 96 21 2 thus interlocking against renewed switching on while the motor is running. Maintained contact sensors L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 13 -F2 96 -Q1 14 95 0 -S11 22 13 14 1 -S14 P > MCS 14 4 1 8 I 14 -Q11 13 44 14 -S14 Q SW 15 2 -Q11 -Q13 -K1 13 22 16 18 22 13 14 -Q11 43 44 -Q11 43 -Q13 13 -Q15 21 -Q13 21 F2 96 0 21 22 Q11 Q11 14 44 I 21 13 22 A1 A1 A1 A1 -K1 A2 -Q11 A2 -Q13 A2 -Q15 A2 13 14 N A B K1: Timing relay approx. 10 s Q11: Mains contactor Q13: Star contactor Q15: Delta contactor Double actuator Control circuit device I = ON 0 = OFF 8-43 14 -S11 . Star contactor Q13 drops out. At the same time.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors When the set changeover time has elapsed. or in the event of an overload by the normally closed contact 95-96 of overload relay F2. K1/17-18 opens the circuit of Q13 and after 50 ms closes the circuit of Q15 via K1/17-28. or via normally open contact 13-14 of the circuit-breaker. The motor cannot start up again unless it has previously been disconnected by pushbutton 0. Delta contactor Q15 closes and switches motor M1 to full mains voltage.

or in the event of an overload. normally open contact Q13/14-13 applies voltage to mains contactor Q11.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors For connection of further control circuit devices a section "Control circuit devices for star-delta starting". The motor cannot be started up again unless it has previously been disconnected by pushbutton 0. or via the normally open contact 13–14 of the circuit-breaker. page 8-51 Function Pushbutton I energizes star contactor Q13. by normally closed contact 95–96 of overload relay F2. Delta contactor Q15 closes and switches motor M1 to full mains voltage. Q11 and Q13 maintain themselves via normally open contact Q11/14-13 and Q11 additionally via Q11/44-43 and pushbutton 0. which closes and applies mains voltage to motor M1 in star connection. thus interlocking against renewed switching on while the motor is running. Star contactor Q13 drops out. When the set changeover time has elapsed. K1 opens the circuit of Q13 via changeover contact 15-16 and closes the circuit of Q15 via 15-18. normally closed contact Q15/22–21 interrupts the circuit of Q13. 8 8-44 . Timing relay Q11 is energized at the same time as mains contactor K1. At the same time.

58 x Ie 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors Automatic reversing star-delta starter SDAIUL Reversing L1 L2 L3 -Q1 -F1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 14 22 1 3 5 13 21 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q11 2 6 -Q12 2 6 -Q15 2 6 -Q13 2 97 95 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 8 PE W1 V1 U1 V2 M 3 -M1 W2 U2 Rating of switchgear Q11. Q15 : Q13 : 0. and is lower than with automatic star-delta starters for only one direction of operation 8-45 . Q12: Ie F2.58 For other arrangements of overload relay a section "Star-delta starters with overload relay". page 8-38 The maximum motor output is limited by the upstream reversing contactor.33 x Ie Standard version: Relay current = motor rated current x 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors Changing direction of rotation after actuation of the 0 pushbutton L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 -F2 0 II -S11 I 13 Three-way pushbutton Control circuit devices I = Clockwise 0 = Stop II = Anticlockwise Q11 13 I 21 21 22 22 96 21 22 21 22 14 13 -Q1 14 F2 96 0 Q12 14 II 22 21 13 22 14 Q12 13 -S11 I II 14 44 43 17 18 22 21 A1 44 43 17 28 22 21 A1 A2 14 13 13 13 14 A 14 13 B 14 21 C -Q11 -Q11 13 -Q12 -K1 -K1 -Q13 -Q15 -Q12 22 22 -Q12 -Q11 21 A1 A1 -Q15 -K1 -Q13 -Q11 -Q12 21 A1 A2 8 A2 A2 A2 N 8-46 .

g. thus interlocking against renewed switching on while the motor is running. At the same time. timing relay K1 is triggered. 8-47 . Motor direction can be changed. Delta contactor Q15 energizes and switches motor M1 to the delta configuration. i. depending upon the circuit. full mains voltage. K1/17-28 closes the circuit of Q15. which energizes and switches on motor M1 in the star connection.g. page 8-51 Function Pushbutton I energizes contactor Q11 (e.e. anticlockwise). Pushbutton II energizes contactor Q12 (e. which drops out.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta switching of three-phase motors Changing direction of rotation without actuation of the 0 pushbutton Three-way pushbutton L1 (Q11/1) Control circuit devices I = Clockwise -F0 0 = Stop 95 II = Anticlockwise 13 -F2 0 II -S11 I 96 21 22 21 21 22 22 22 14 21 22 14 13 14 22 21 13 -Q1 14 Q11 Q11 F2 13 14 96 I 0 -S11 I II 44 43 17 18 22 21 A1 A2 44 43 17 28 22 21 A1 A2 14 Q12 14 II Q12 13 13 14 13 14 A 13 14 21 B C -Q11 13 -Q11 -Q12 -K1 -K1 -Q13 -Q15 -Q12 13 22 22 -Q12 -Q11 N 21 A1 A2 -Q15 A1 -Q11 -Q12 21 A1 A2 -K1 A2 -Q13 8 For connection of further control circuit devices a section "Control circuit devices for star-delta starting". The contactor first energized applies voltage to the motor winding and maintains itself via its own auxiliary contact 14-13 and pushbutton 0. disconnection is effected by normally closed contact 95–96 of overload relay F2. or by direct actuation of the reverse button. In the event of an overload. Normally open contact 44-43 fitted to each mains contactor energizes star contactor Q13. When the set changeover time has elapsed. clockwise). At the same time. either after pressing pushbutton 0. K1/17-18 opens the circuit of Q13. normally closed contact Q15/22–21 interrupts the circuit of Q13.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta starting with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 1.13 1.22 U F 690 V I> I> I> L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 Q13 A1 A2 13 14 21 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 U F 500 V L1 A1 13 14 21 22 L2 L3 A1 L1 L2 L3 8 -Q11 A2 -Q15 A2 13 14 21 22 1 3 4 5 6 -Q13 2 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 1U 1V 1W 2V M 3 -M1 2W 2U With Icc > Icn short-circuit proof installation required. 8-48 .21 -Q1 1.14 1.

14 21 22 13 14 -S11 I 14 -Q11 13 44 14 -Q11 43 -Q13 13 -K1 15 16 18 A2 22 22 -Q15 21 A1 A1 A1 -Q13 21 A1 8 -K1 A2 -Q11 A2 -Q13 A2 -Q15 A2 N 10 s N Y 2 x RMQ-Titan.13 1.14 S11 21 13 22 14 21 13 22 14 0 Q11 Q11 43 A214 I Q11 44 Q11 Q11 Q1 44 14 1.14 0 1 2 3 4 1 S11 A B 8-49 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta starting with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 L1 (Q11/1) -F0 -Q1 0 1. M22-… with indicator light M22-L… T0-1-8 rotary switch Q1 1.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Star-delta starting with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 S11 Q1 dQ15 yQ13 yQ13 K1 Q11 F0 RMQ-Titan. M22-… PKZ2/ZM-… S/EZ-PKZ2 DIL0M Ue F 500 V AC S/EZ-PKZ2 Ue F 660 V AC ETR4-11-A S/EZ-PKZ2 FAZ t N t y (s) Motor protection Setting 15 – 40 (y) + d l 8 8-50 .

Two-wire control Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96 I ON 0 OFF 0 1 2 3 4 1 14 8 Q11 Q11 14 44 F2 96 S14 S11 Changeover switch T0-1-15521 e.g. selector switch Rotary switch T with fleeting contact in the LS position switches intermediate position MCS pressure switches 8-51 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for star-delta starting Automatic star-delta starters SDAINL Pulse encoder F2 96 -S11 0 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 13 14 44 A2 I 21 21 F2 96 21 0 22 Q11 14 21 I Q11 44 21 22 0 22 21 13 I 22 -S11 -S11 22 13 14 13 22 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 X1 X2 A B A B Illuminated pushbutton actuators Two two-way pushbuttons F2 96 21 Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11 13 A2 14 44 1 21 22 22 Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96 1 0 Start Q11 Q11 F2 14 13 96 14 0 I 1 Start 0 I 1 S11 1 2 3 4 -S11 0 1 Start 1 2 3 4 S11 13 14 13 A B C Double actuator pushbutton with Spring-return switch T0-1-15511 Spring-return switch indicator light with automatic return to position T0-1-15366 with automatic return to rest position. 1.

1) Overload relays always with manual reset 8-52 . without Switch T0-1-8210 remains self-maintaining circuit in position 1 or 2 (inching) automatic return to 0 only for reversing contactors 1 0 2 START Q12 F2 Q12 Q11 14 96 13 13 START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 0 2 START START FS 140660 Spring-return switch T0-2-8177 with automatic return to position 1 or 2 Q11/13 Q12/22 Q12/13 Q11/22 Position switches Connected by removing the links between contactor terminals Q11/13 and Q12/22 and between Q12/13 and Q11/22 and interposing the position switches. Reversing after actuation of pushbutton 0 1 0 2 13 14 E 0 1 2 FS 4011 FS 684 8 Changeover switch1) Spring-return switch1) T0-1-8214.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for star-delta starting Three-phase reversing contactor DIULRR Reversing star-delta starter SDAIUL F2 96 I -S11 21 22 21 22 13 14 13 14 Q12 Q11 II 13 13 -S11 Q11 13 I 21 22 Q12 F2 A2 21 96 0 21 22 Q11 Q12 Q12 21 14 II 13 21 22 13 14 13 14 A B A B C D Two-way pushbutton1) without self-maintaining circuit (inching) for use only with reversing contactors Q12 F2 Q11 13 96 13 1 1 2 3 4 0 2 Three-way pushbutton with indicator light.

1 separate winding 2 reversible tapped windings 1:2 Tapped winding The y/y y is preferred for better matching of the motor to machines in which the torque increases by a quadratic factor (pumps. 1V. y/d starting can be used to provide smooth starting or to reduce the starting current for the low speed condition (a section "Motor windings". low/high 1500/3000 – 4/2 1/2 – 1000/1500 6/4 1/2 obtained by altering the number of poles. because nine terminals are available. The usual types are: 1 reversible tapped winding 2 separate windings 1 reversible tapped winding 1:2. 2U. Several speeds can be 2 speeds 1:2 2 speeds 3 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds The various tapped winding configurations give differential output ratios for the two speeds Type of connection d/y y y/y y Output ratio 1/1. Comparable to EN 60034-8. It has the additional advantage that. 2W. Example: 1U. Preferred speed combinations are: 750/1500 – 8/4 1/2 500/1000 – 12/6 1/2 8 The code numbers are prefixed to the main notations to denote increasing speed. Both windings are arranged in y connection and are completely independent of one another. page 8-56).8 0. motors with separate windings allow any combination of speed and any output ratio. fans. 8-53 . 2 speeds – separate windings In theory. Moeller multi-speed starters can be used for both types of connection. rotary compressors).3/1 The d/y y configuration comes nearest to satisfying the most common requirement for constant torque. Motors with tapped winding Motors with separate windings Number of poles Code no.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Pole-changing motors The speed is determined by the number of poles on induction motors. 2V.5–1. 1W.

tapped windings . Preferred speed combinations are: 750/1500/3000 8/4/2 Z = separate winding (in the circuit diagrams) 750/1000/1500 8/6/4 Y 8-54 . Return also to zero. Circuit C Selection of either speed from zero. 8 3 speeds The 1:2 speeds . Switching back and forward between low and high speed (high braking torque). This speed can be below.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Pole-changing motors Motor circuit Circuit A Selection of low and high speed only from zero. Return only to zero. High speed Low speed Off (zero) Switch-on and further switching Switch-off Circuit B Selection of either speed from zero. Switching from low to high speed possible. between or Speeds Number of poles Connectio n 1000/1500/3000 6/4/2 X above the two tapped winding speeds.are supplemented by the speed of the separate winding. No return to low speed. page 8-84). only to zero. The circuit must consider it (a figure.

Return only to zero. Return to low speed (high braking torque) or to zero. Circuit B Selection of any speed from zero and from low speed. A range of rotary switches is equipped with this connection (a section "Multi-Speed Switches". Circuit C Selection of any speed from zero and from low speed. 8-55 .tapped windings . page 4-7).can follow in sequence or overlap. 3rd speed 2nd speed 1st speed Off (zero) 4 speeds The 1:2 speeds . Return only to zero.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Pole-changing motors Motor circuit Circuit A Selection of any speed only from zero. This is achieved with additional motor terminals. as the following examples show: 1st winding or 1st winding 500/1000 500/1000 2nd winding 2nd winding 1500/3000 = 500/1000/1500/3000 750/1500 = 500/750/1000/1500 8 For motors with 3 or 4 speeds the non-connected winding has to be opened at certain pole ratios to avoid inductive circulating currents.

page 8-74 8-56 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor windings Tapped winding 2 speeds Motor circuit 2 speeds 2 separate windings Low speed d 1U 2W 2V 2U 1W 1W 2U 1V 2V 1V 1W 1V 1W Tapped winding with yd starting at low speed Low speed y Low speed y 1U 2W Low speed 1U 1U 2W1 2W2 2U2 2U1 2V2 2V11V High speed yy 2U 1W 1V 1U 2V High speed yy 2U 1W 2W 1U 1V High speed 2U Low speed d 2W2 2U1 1W 1U 2W1 2U2 2V1 1V 8 2W 2V 2W 2V 2V2 a figure. page 8-61 a figure. page 8-61 a figure. page 8-65 High speed yy 2U1 1W 2U2 2W2 1V 2V1 1U 2V2 2W1 a figure.

page 8-83 a figure.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Motor windings Tapped winding 3 speeds Motor circuit X Motor circuit Y 2 windings. medium and 2 windings. low and medium speed – tapped winding 2 2 1U 3W 3V 1V 1U 2W 2U 1W 2V 1V or 2 2U 3W 3V or 2 1U 3W 3V or 2 1U 2W 2V 8 2W 3U 2V 1W 3U 1V 1W 2U 1V Low speed Separate winding 1 1U Medium speed Separate winding 1 2U High speed Separate winding 1 3U 1W 1V 2W 2V 3W 3V a figure. page 8-87 8-57 . low and high high speed – tapped winding speed – tapped winding 2 2U 3W 3U 2W 3V 2V 1W 3U Motor circuit Z 2 windings. page 8-85 a figure.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 8 8-58 .

otherwise each relay must be protected by its own back-up fuse. The operating sequence and L1 L2 L3 indexing facilities of rotary switches allow for these possibilities. as shown in the diagram. Multi-speed contactor starters can achieve these circuits by interlocking with suitable control circuit devices. it must not be larger than the back-up fuses specified on the rating plate of either overload relay. If. Fuse protection of the overload relays When a common fuse is used in the supply line. the starting temperature rise is to be reduced or high inertia loads are to be accelerated. It may be necessary to prevent switching from high to low speed in order to avoid oversynchronous braking. it should be possible to switch each speed on and off directly. for example. depending on the nature of the drive. 8 -F11 -F1 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 96 -Q17 2 6 97 -Q21 2 95 -F21 2 4 6 98 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 8-59 . or undesirable. it is advisable to switch to low speed first and then to high speed.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi-speed contactors Certain operating sequences for multi-speed motors may be necessary. In other cases.

L1 L2 L3 which provide all the advantages of a fuseless circuit. the fuse in the supply line protects the switches from welding. 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q2 I> I> I> 2 4 6 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 8 -Q17 2 6 -Q21 2 8-60 . Normally.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi-speed contactors Fuseless surface mounting Multi-speed motors can be protected against short circuits and overloads by motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ or circuit-breakers NZM.

page 8-56 Synchronous speeds One multi-speed winding 8-61 . 2 speeds Multi-speed contactors UPIL Fuseless. with motor-protective circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker. non-reversing. L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q2 I> I> I> 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q21 2 6 -Q17 2 6 -Q23 2 8 PE 2U 2V 2W 1U M 3 -M1 1V 1W a section "Motor windings".Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. without overload relay.

Q17: I1 (low speed) Q1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Motor terminals Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm Contactors Rating of switchgear Q2. Q21: I2 (high speed) Q23: 0. 2V. Q23 8 8-62 . 1W 12 500 8 750 4 1500 Q17 2U.5 x I2 1U. 2W 6 1000 4 1500 2 3000 Q21. 1V.

high speed 13 21 -S11 C -Q17 -Q21 13 21 8 -Q21 -Q23 22 22 21 A1 -Q17 22 -Q23 A1 14 13 A1 A2 -Q17 A2 -Q23 A2 -Q21 N For connection of further control circuit devices a figure. page 8-69. page 8-71 Function Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17 (low speed). wich maintains itself via its normally open contact 13-14. low speed Q23: Star contactor Q21: Mains contactor. Speed can be changed either after pressing pushbutton 0 (circuit A) or directly by pressing the appropriate pushbutton (circuit C). depending upon the circuit. 8-63 . Q21 and Q23 maintain themselves via normally open contact 13-14 of Q21. Pushbutton II energizes star contactor Q23 and via its normally open contact 13-14 mains contactor Q21. The motor can be switched off either by pressing pushbutton 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit A (a figure. a figure. page 8-70. page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton L1 (Q11/1) -F0 13 Q17 13 I 21 22 F21 96 0 22 Q21 14 II Q21 13 22 14 13 14 13 21 -Q1 14 13 A B 14 -Q2 14 21 0 -S11 II 22 21 22 I 22 21 14 13 14 I II 14 13 21 13 14 Three-way pushbutton I: Low speed (Q17) 0: Stop II: high speed (Q21 + Q23) Q17: Mains contactor. by normally open contact 13–14 of the circuit-breaker. or in the event of an overload. a figure.

low speed Q23: Star contactor Q21: Mains contactor.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit C (a figure. page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton L1 (Q11/1) -F0 -Q1 -Q2 13 14 13 14 21 Three-way pushbutton I: Low speed (Q17) 0: Stop II: High speed (Q21 + Q23) Q17 14 -S11 Q17 13 I 21 22 F21 96 0 22 II 21 Q21 13 Q21 14 21 13 14 13 13 A 22 B 14 C 0 -S11 II I 22 21 22 14 13 I II 14 13 22 14 13 21 21 13 14 8 -Q17 -Q21 -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 21 21 22 A1 22 14 -Q23 A1 13 A1 A2 -Q23 A2 A2 -Q21 N Q17: Mains contactor. page 8-72 8-64 14 22 . high speed For connection of further control circuit devices a figure.

two speeds Multi-speed contactor UPDIUL. page 8-56.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Two separate windings. Q21 = I2 (high speed) Motor windings a section "Motor windings". Q17 = I1 (low speed) Q2. non-reversing. 8-65 . fuseless without overload relay L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q2 I> I> I> 2 4 6 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q17 2 6 -Q21 2 8 PE 1U 1V 1W 2U M 3 -M1 2V 2W Rating of switchgear Q1.

page 8-56. page 8-59. Motor windings a section "Motor windings". two speeds Multi-speed contactor UPDIUL. 8-66 . with fuses and overload relay L1 L2 L3 F1 F1 1 3 5 1 3 5 Q17 2 4 6 97 95 Q21 2 4 6 97 95 F21 2 4 6 98 96 F2 2 4 6 98 96 8 1U 1V 1W 2U M 3 M1 2V 2W Fuse size in accordance with data on the rating plate of overload relays F2 and F21. If overload relays F2 and F21 cannot be protected by a common fuse.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Two separate windings. non-reversing. then use circuit a figure.

page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton L1 (Q17/1) -F0 Q1 Q2 0 S11 II I F2 F21 14 13 14 21 22 21 96 95 96 13 FL1 -F2 -F21 95 96 95 96 -Q1 -Q2 0 -S11 II I 14 13 14 21 22 I 22 14 13 14 14 22 21 22 14 13 14 22 II 21 13 14 I II 14 21 13 14 Q17 13 22 Q21 Q17 13 22 21 A1 -Q17 -Q21 13 22 -Q21 -Q17 13 22 21 A1 Q21 21 A1 8 21 Q17 A2 Q21 A2 N -Q17 N A1 -Q21 A2 A2 Q17: Mains contactor. low speed Q21: Mains contactor. page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton L1 FO 13 95 Circuit C (a figure.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit A (a figure. 8-67 . page 8-73. high speed Q17 F21 Q21 Q21 96 13 14 13 0 I II 21 21 22 21 22 22 Q17 14 Q17 F21 13 96 I 22 Q21 Q21 13 14 0 II 22 21 13 22 14 -S11 -S11 13 14 13 13 14 14 21 13 21 13 A B C A 14 B 14 C Three-way pushbutton I: Low speed (Q17) 0: Stop II: High speed (Q21 + Q23) For connection of further control circuit devices a figure.

after pushbutton I is released.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Operating principle Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of contactor Q17. Speed can be changed either after pressing pushbutton 0. depending upon the circuit. by normally closed contact 95–96 of overload relays F2 and F21. 8 8-68 . or directly by pressing the appropriate pushbutton. The motor is switched off either by pressing pushbutton 0. maintains itself via its auxiliary contact 13-14 and pushbutton 0.which switches on the low speed of the motor and. or in the event of an overload.

page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton with indicator lights L1 -F0 95 -F2/F21 0 II 96 21 22 21 22 I 22 14 13 14 14 I II -Q17 13 22 21 13 14 -Q21 13 22 A -Q21 21 A1 -Q17 21 A1 B 8 B N -Q17 A2 D -Q21 A2 Q17 13 I -S11 21 Q21 F21 Q17 Q21 Q21 A2 96 21 14 13 21 0 II 22 21 22 21 22 Control circuit devices I : Low speed (Q17) 0: Stop II : High speed (Q21) 13 13 14 14 13 A B C D E 14 8-69 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Two separate windings. two speeds Circuit A (a figure. non-reversing.

page 8-55) Two three-way pushbuttons L1 -F0 95 -F2/F21 96 21 0a 22 21 0b IIb 22 21 22 22 14 13 13 14 21 Ib IIb 21 13 14 Ia IIa Ib 13 14 22 IIa 21 14 Ia -Q21 13 22 14 13 22 8 A -Q17 22 -Q21 21 -Q17 21 B Q21 F21 Q17 13 96 13 Ia 0a IIa 21 21 21 22 22 22 Q21 14 -S11 Control circuit devices Ib 21 22 0b 21 22 IIb 21 22 -S11 A B C I: Low speed (Q17) 0: Stop II: High speed (Q21) Remove existing links and rewire 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 A B C 8-70 14 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Circuit A (a figure.

page 8-55) One three-way pushbutton L1 -F0 95 8 -F2/F21 96 21 0 II 22 21 II 22 14 13 14 14 13 14 I -Q17 13 22 -Q21 13 22 A -Q21 21 A1 -Q17 21 A1 B -Q17 N A2 -Q21 A2 8-71 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Circuit A (a figure. page 8-55) L1 -F0 95 T0-1-8210 changeover switch Always set overload relay to manual reset Q21 F2 Q17 13 96 13 1 0 2 1 2 3 4 S12 -F2/F21 96 1 -S12 2 1 -S12 -Q17 2 4 3 14 14 -Q21 13 22 13 22 A -Q21 21 -Q17 21 B Circuit B (a figure.

page 8-55) Two three-way pushbuttons L1 -F0 95 -F2(1) 0a 0b IIb IIa Ib 96 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 14 13 Ia 14 13 14 14 -Q17 -Q21 A 13 -Q21 13 22 22 21 IIa 13 14 IIb 13 14 -Q17 21 B Control circuit device for circuit B 8 Q17 Q17 14 13 Ia 21 22 F21 96 0a 21 22 21 Q21 Q21 13 14 IIa 22 21 Ib 22 0b 21 22 IIb 21 22 13 14 13 14 13 14 S11 13 14 13 14 13 14 S11 A B C A B C 8-72 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Circuit B(a figure.

page 8-55) Two three-way pushbuttons L1 -F0 95 -F2(1) 0a 0b IIb IIa Ib 96 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 14 13 22 21 22 21 13 14 Ib Ia Ia A 14 13 -Q17 -Q21 14 13 22 21 -Q21 -Q17 14 13 22 21 IIa IIb 13 14 B Control circuit device for circuit C Q17 Q21 F21 14 13 14 96 0a Ia 21 21 22 22 IIa 21 22 Q21 13 -S11 8 Ib 21 22 0b 21 22 IIb 21 22 C -S11 13 14 13 14 13 14 A B C A 13 14 B 13 14 13 14 8-73 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Control circuit devices for UPDIUL multi-speed contactors Circuit C (a figure.

Q23 = 0.5 x I2 8-74 . Q17 = I1 (low speed) Q2. 2 speeds Multi-speed contactors UPSDAINL Star-delta starting at low speed Fuseless Without overload relay L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 -Q2 I> I> I> 2 4 3 4 6 5 1 2 I> I> I> 2 1 4 3 4 6 5 6 -Q17 -Q21 6 2 8 -Q23 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 -Q19 2 1U 1V 1W PE 2U2 2V2 2W2 2U1 3 Y -M1 2V1 2W1 Rating of switchgear Q1. non-reversing.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. Q21 = I2 (high speed) Q19.

page 8-56. Motor windings a section "Motor windings".Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors With fuses and overload relays L1 L2 L3 -F1 1 3 4 5 -Q17 2 6 97 -Q21 95 1 2 3 4 5 6 97 95 -F2 2 4 6 98 96 -F21 2 4 6 98 96 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 -Q23 2 5 6 -Q19 2 1U 1V 1W 2U2 2V2 2W2 PE 2U1 8 3 Y -M1 2V1 2W1 Rating of switchgear F2. Q17 = I1 (low speed) F21. If F2 and F21 cannot be protected by a common fuse. Q21 = I2 (high speed) Q19. Q23 = 0. then use circuit on a figure. 8-75 . page 8-59.5 x I2 F1 = I2 Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on multi-speed contactors without motor protection.

This state is maintained by Q21/43–44: The coil of star contactor Q23 is re-energized by normally open contact Q21/14–13. Q23) 14 21 22 13 14 -F21 -Q17 -Q17 43 44 -Q23 13 14 32 15 -K3 16 21 -Q19 13 14 13 II 22 22 -Q19 31 22 -Q23 -Q19 -Q21 21 II 22 14 13 A1 14 -Q21 -Q17 A2 43 44 22 21 A1 A2 8 N -Q21 21 A1 A1 A1 -Q17 A2 -K3 A2 -Q23 A2 -Q19 -Q21 21 22 21 21 13 Function Actuation of pushbutton I energizes the coil of star contactor Q23. K3/15-16 opens the circuit of Q23. 14 22 Q17: Mains contactor. Actuation of pushbutton II de-energizes the coil of Q17 and via Q17/22–21 energizes the coil of Q21. Q19. low speed K3: Timimg relays Q23: Star contactor Q19: Delta contactor Q21:Mains contactor. Its normally open contact 13-14 energizes the coil of contactor Q17. the coil of delta contactor Q19 is energized and maintains itself via Q19/13-14. Q19) 0: Stop II: High speed (Q21. At the same time. When the set time has elapsed. The motor runs at high speed. timing relay K3 is triggered. The motor runs in star at low speed. Pushbutton 0 (= Stop) effects disconnection. 8-76 22 13 14 13 A 14 B C The motor runs in delta at low speed.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors L1 (Q17/1) -F0 -Q1 -Q2 -S11 0 I 13 14 21 13 14 13 95 96 95 96 Circuit Low speed selected only from zero. The contactors are maintained via auxiliary contact Q17/13-14. high speed only via low speed without actuation of the Stop button. The timing relay is de-energized via normally closed contact Q19/32-31. which drops out. Three-way pushbutton I: Low speed (Q17. high speed Q17 43 Q17 F21 Q17 13 96 14 I 0 Q21 Q19 22 44 14 II -S11 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. Q17 = I1 (low speed) F1. reversing. Q21 = I2 Q23 = 0. Q12 = I2 (low and high -F2 speed) F2. 2 speeds (direction preselected) Multi-speed contactors UPIUL Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on multi-speed contactors without motor protection. L1 L2 L3 -F1 1 3 4 5 6 -Q11 2 1 3 4 5 6 -Q12 2 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 97 98 95 96 -Q17 Rating of switchgear Q11.5 x I2 (high speed) -Q21 2 6 97 98 95 2 -F21 2 4 6 96 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 -Q23 PE 1U 1V 1W M 3 -M1 2U 2V 2W 8-77 .

Pushbutton III energizes Q17. Speed-selection buttons III and IV are made operative by Q11/44–43. Pushbutton 0 must be pressed before any change in speed or direction. Auxiliary contact Q17/14–13 makes low-speed pushbutton III inoperative. optionally followed by SLOW–FAST with no return to low speed. Pushbutton IV 8-78 14 . -F2 -F21 0 -S11 II I 96 95 96 21 22 21 22 14 13 14 44 44 43 22 13 22 I -Q11 -Q11 IV III 43 21 22 14 13 21 13 14 13 -Q12 III -Q17 14 13 21 -Q12 14 II IV 21 13 14 -Q21 14 13 21 -Q21 -Q17 -Q23 -Q23 A1 A2 22 22 21 A1 22 14 13 A1 A2 8 N 22 -Q12 -Q11 22 21 A1 A2 -Q23 -Q17 -Q11 -Q12 21 A1 A2 A2 -Q21 F21 96 21 Q11 13 0 21 22 Q12 Q12 Q17 Q11 Q17 Q17 43 14 21 13 14 13 I III II IV 21 22 22 21 22 21 22 -S11 A B C D E Control circuit device 0: Stop I: Forward (Q11) II: Back (Q12) III: Slow (Q17) IV: Fast (Q21 + Q23) energizes high-speed contactors Q23 and Q21. which maintains itself via its contact 14–13. Contactor Q11 selects the direction. 14 13 13 14 14 13 14 13 13 Function Contactor Q11 is energized by pressing pushbutton I.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 Five-way pushbutton Connection Change of direction FORWARD–REVERSE after actuation of Stop button. and maintains itself after release of pushbutton I via its auxiliary contact 14–13 and pushbutton 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. Q22 = I2 Q23 = 0.5 x I2 (high speed) 8-79 . Q17. 2 speeds (Direction and speed selected simultaneously) Multi-speed contactor UPIUL L1 L2 L3 Fuseless without overload relay 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 I> 2 I> 4 I> 6 -Q2 I> 2 I> 4 I> 6 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q17 2 6 -Q18 2 6 -Q21 2 6 -Q22 2 8 PE 1U 1V 1W 2U M 3 -M1 2V 2W -Q23 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rating of switchgear Q1. Q21. Q18 = I1 (low speed) Q2. reversing.

5 x I2 (high speed) Overload relays F2 and F21 are not used on multi-speed contactors without motor protection 8-80 . Q18 = I1 (low speed) F21.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Multi-speed contactor UPIUL With fuses and overload relays L1 L2 L3 -F1 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 -Q17 2 6 -Q18 -Q21 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q22 6 2 97 95 97 95 -F2 2 4 6 98 96 -F21 2 4 6 98 96 8 1U 1V 1W 1 3 4 5 6 PE 2U M 3 -M1 2V 2W -Q23 2 Rating of switchgear F2. Q21. Q22 = I2 Q23 = 0. Q17.

Always operate Stop button before changeover.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit Simultaneous selection of direction and speed via one pushbutton. L1 (Q17/1) -F0 -Q1 -Q2 13 95 -F2 14 13 14 21 96 95 96 -F21 0 22 22 14 14 14 14 32 -Q23 21 31 -Q17 13 -Q18 -Q21 13 13 -Q22 13 -Q17 31 31 8 -Q22 -Q21 32 22 21 21 22 -Q18 21 21 32 -Q22 I IV 21 13 22 21 22 14 -K1 22 22 II -S11 I III IV 22 14 13 22 21 13 14 43 II III 14 21 13 -K1 14 32 44 44 -Q18 -Q17 N 21 A1 -Q17 -Q18 22 A1 -Q23 -Q21 13 A1 -K1 A1 14 13 -Q21 -K1 31 A1 -Q23 -Q22 43 A1 A2 -Q23 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 Q17:Slow forward Q18:Slow back Q21:Fast forward Q23:Star contactor K1: Contactor relay Q22:Fast back 8-81 .

Contactors Q17.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors F21 Q23 Q18 Q21 Q17 Q23 Q18 Q22 22 22 32 96 21 21 14 32 I III IV II 0 21 21 21 22 22 22 21 21 22 22 -S11 A B C D E Five-way pushbutton Control circuit device 0: Stop I: Slow forward (Q17) II: Slow back (Q18) III: Fast forward (Q21 + Q23) IV: Fast back (Q22 + Q23) 13 13 14 13 13 14 13 Function Desired speed and direction can be selected by actuation of the appropriate pushbutton. Q18. Q21 and Q23 maintain themselves by their contact 14–13 and can be de-energized only by actuation of pushbutton 0. 8 8-82 14 14 14 . Contactors Q21 and Q22 can maintain themselves only when Q23 has picked up and contact Q23/13/13–14 or 44–43 is closed.

5 x I3 8-83 . 1W 12 500 8 750 2 2U. Q11 : Q1. Q17 : Q3. Q21 : Q23 : I1 (low speed) I2 (medium speed) I3 (high speed) 0. page 8-85 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 1 3 5 13 14 -Q1 I> 2 I> 4 I> 6 -Q2 I> 2 I> 4 I> 6 -Q3 I> 2 I> 4 I> 6 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 -Q17 2 6 -Q11 2 6 -Q21 2 8 1U 1V 1W PE 2U 2V 2W 3U M 3 -M1 3V 3W -Q23 1 2 3 4 5 6 Synchronous speed Winding Motor terminals Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm 1 1U. 2W 8 750 4 1500 2 3U. Q23 Rating of switchgear Q2. 3 speeds. 1V. 2V.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. 3V. 2 windings Multi-speed contactor U3PIL Multi-speed contactor U3PIL with overload relay a figure. medium and high speed. 3W 4 1500 2 3000 Number of poles rpm Contactors 6 1000 Q11 4 1500 Q17 2 3000 Q21. Non reversing.

. normally open contact 13–14 of the 8-84 4-way pushbutton 0: Stop I: Low speed (Q11) II: Medium speed (Q17) III: High speed (Q21 + Q23) motor-protective circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker can also switch off. pushbutton II mains contactor Q17 (medium speed). No return to low speed.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit of motor winding: X Circuit A L1 (Q17/1) -F0 -Q1 -Q2 -Q3 0 III -S11 II I 13 21 21 21 22 22 22 21 13 14 21 22 22 21 22 21 14 13 22 14 Circuit A Selection of any speed only from zero. The motor is always switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. Return only to zero. Switching in steps from high to medium or low speed is not possible. Speed sequence from low to high is optional. F22 96 -S11 Q11 14 0 21 22 -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 Q11 Q17 Q17 Q23 13 14 13 14 III II I 21 21 22 21 13 22 22 14 Q21 13 8 -Q11 N 13 13 A 14 14 13 B C 14 D Q11: Low speed winding 1 Q17: Medium speed winding 2 Q23: High speed winding 2 Q21: High speed winding 2 Function Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q11 (low speed). In the event of an overload. All contactors maintain themselves by their auxiliary contact 13–14. only to zero. pushbutton III star contactor Q23 and via its normally open contact Q23/14–13 mains contactor Q21 (high speed). F22 96 0 Q11 14 I Q17 14 II Q21 14 III Q21 13 13 13 A 14 14 13 14 B C D III II 13 14 22 21 31 32 32 31 A1 A2 14 13 14 13 -Q11 -Q17 -Q11 -Q21 -Q23 -Q17 13 14 22 21 21 22 22 21 A1 A2 A1 A2 -Q21 -Q11 -Q17 -Q23 -Q23 -Q21 13 14 32 31 31 32 14 13 A1 A2 Circuit B Selection of any speed from zero or from low speed.

2W 8 750 6 2 3U.5 x I3 8-85 . 1W 12 500 8 1 2U. Non-reversing. Q11: F4. 3V. 2 windings Multi-speed contactor U3PIL Multi-speed contactor U3PIL without overload relay a figure. 2V. 1V. Q23 Rating of switchgear F2. Q17: F3. 3W 6 1000 4 rpm Contactors 750 Q17 1000 Q11 1500 Q21. Q21: Q23: I1 (low speed) I2 (medium speed) I3 (high speed) 0. 3 speeds. low and high speed. page 8-83 L1 L2 L3 F1 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 Q17 2 6 Q11 2 6 Q21 2 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 F2 2 98 96 F3 2 98 96 F4 2 98 96 8 3U 3V 3W 1U 1V 1W 2U M 3 M1 2V 2W 1 3 4 5 6 Q23 2 Synchronous speed Winding Motor terminals Number of poles rpm Number of poles 2 1U.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding.

In the event of an overload. F21 and F22 can also switch off. F22 96 21 0 Q17 14 21 22 I Q11 14 22 II Q21 14 22 III Q21 13 22 14 21 13 A 14 14 14 B C 14 III 14 13 II Q17 13 14 22 13 Q11 Q17 Q21 Q23 Q11 13 13 Q21 14 22 21 21 22 22 21 A1 13 14 32 Q11 Q21 21 31 32 32 31 A1 A2 Q11 Q17 Q23 A1 31 31 32 14 13 A1 A2 Circuit B Selection of any speed from zero or from low speed. normally closed contact 95–96 of overload relays F2. No return to low speed. The motor is always switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. 21 13 13 13 13 14 A B 14 14 C D Speed sequence from low to high is optional. pushbutton II mains contactor Q11 (medium speed). pushbutton III star contactor Q23 and via its normally open contact Q23/14–13 mains contactor Q21 (high speed).Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit of motor winding: Y Circuit A L1 F0 F2 F3 F4 S0 0 S3 III S2 II S1 I 95 96 13 13 21 22 22 21 21 22 14 Circuit A Selection of any speed only from zero. 8-86 14 . All contactors maintain themselves by their auxiliary contact 13–14. only to zero. 4-way pushbutton 0: Stop I: Low speed (Q17) II: Medium speed (Q11) III: High speed (Q21 + Q22) F22 Q17 Q17 Q11 Q11 Q21 14 I 13 14 13 14 96 III 0 II 22 21 21 22 22 22 8 N Q23 Q17 13 21 -S11 D Q23 A2 A2 Q21 13 Q21 -S11 21 Q17: Low speed winding 1 Q11: Medium speed winding 1 Q23: High speed winding 2 Q21: High speed winding 2 Function Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17 (low speed). Return only to zero. Switching in steps from high to medium or low speed is not possible.

Q17: F4. 1W 12 500 12 500 2 2U. page 8-59 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 Q17 2 6 Q11 2 6 Q21 2 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 1 3 4 5 6 97 95 F2 2 98 96 F3 2 98 96 F4 2 98 96 8 3U 3V 3W 1U 1V 1W 2U M 3 M1 2V 2W 1 3 4 5 6 Q23 2 Synchronous speed Winding Motor terminals Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm 2 1U. Q11: Q23: I1 (low speed) I2 (medium speed) I3 (high speed) 0. 2W 6 1000 6 1000 1 3U. 3W 4 1500 2 3000 Number of poles rpm Contactors 8 750 Q17 4 1500 Q21. 1V. 3V. Q21: F3. 3 speeds.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Tapped winding. Non-reversing. Q23 2 3000 Q11 Rating of switchgear F2.5 x I3 8-87 . low and medium speed. 2V. 2 windings Multi-speed contactor U3PIL L1 L2 L3 F1 Multi-speed contactor U3PIL without overload relay a figure.

4-way pushbutton 0: Stop I: Low speed (Q17) II: Medium speed (Q21 + Q23) III: High speed (Q11) Speed sequence from low to high is optional. pushbutton III mains contactor Q11. No return to low speed. Return only to zero. 8-88 . normally closed contact 95–96 of overload relays F2. All contactors maintain themselves by their auxiliary contacts 13-14.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switches of three-phase motors Circuit of motor winding: Z Circuit A L1 (Q17/1) -F0 -F2 -F21 -F22 0 III -S11 II I 95 13 13 13 13 96 21 22 22 21 22 21 14 13 Circuit A Selection of any speed from zero. In the event of an overload. only to zero. 13 14 22 21 31 13 32 32 31 A1 A2 -Q21 -Q11 -Q17 -Q23 -Q23 -Q21 13 14 32 31 31 32 14 13 A1 A2 -Q11 -Q17 -Q21 -Q23 -Q11 F22 96 -S11 Q11 14 0 21 21 22 I Q11 Q17 Q17 Q23 Q23 13 13 14 13 14 II III 21 22 21 13 22 22 14 14 14 13 8 N A 13 B C 14 14 D -Q23 -Q17 Q17: Low speed winding 1 Q23: Medium speed winding 2 Q21: Medium speed winding 2 Q11: High speed winding 1 Function Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q17 (low speed). pushbutton II mains contactor Q23 (low speed) and via its normally open contact Q23/14-13 mains contactor Q21 (high speed). F21 and F22 can also switch off. F22 96 21 0 22 Q11 14 I 21 22 Q17 14 II 21 22 Q21 Q21 14 III 13 21 22 -S11 A 14 B 14 14 C D III II -Q17 -Q11 -Q21 13 14 22 21 21 22 22 21 A1 A2 A1 A2 14 13 14 13 Circuit B Selection of any speed from zero or from low speed. The motor is always switched off by pressing pushbutton 0. Switching in steps from high to medium or low speed is not possible.

13 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switch with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 L1 L2 L3 U F 690 V L1 L2 L3 A1 -Q23 13 21 A2 14 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 1.22 -Q2 1.14 1.21 L1 L2 L3 1.22 I> I> I> I> I> I> U F500 V -Q21 A1 A2 13 21 14 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 -Q17 A1 A2 13 21 1 3 4 5 6 14 22 I>> I>> I>> T1 T2 T3 -Q23 2 8 2U 2V 2W 1U M 3h -M1 1V 1W Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm Number of poles rpm 12 500 8 750 4 1500 6 1000 4 1500 2 3000 8-89 .14 1.13 1.21 -Q1 1.

Q17 Q23 Q23 RMQ-Titan.14 21 A 13 B 13 C A B C 0 22 21 22 21 13 14 14 22 21 14 22 21 13 14 14 13 22 21 14 13 A1 A2 -S11 II n> I n< 22 14 13 -S11 II n> I n< 22 14 13 -Q17 -Q21 14 13 22 13 22 -Q17 14 13 22 -Q21 -Q17 8 -Q21 21 22 -Q17 -Q23 A1 21 14 13 A1 -Q21 -Q23 21 22 21 A1 -Q23 -Q17 21 A1 -Q23 A1 -Q23 A2 A2 -Q21 A2 -Q17 A2 -Q23 A2 -Q21 N Stop n< n> N Stop n< n> Circuit Aa figure. Q21 Q2.14 0 21 22 Q21 14 II 21 22 Q21 13 22 14 -S11 13 14 13 14 14 13 14 -Q1 -Q2 0 13 1.13 1.14 0 22 Q21 14 II 21 22 Q21 13 L1 (Q17/1) -F0 -Q1 -Q2 1.14 21 1.14 1. M22-… PKZ2/ZM-…/S PKZ2/ZM-…/S DIL0M S/EZ-PKZ – n> n< yn > Ue F 500 V yn > Ue F 660 V – – – – F0 – – – – FAZ 8-90 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Multi speed switch with motor-protective circuit-breakers PKZ2 Q17 13 I 21 21 22 L1 (Q17/1) -S11 -F0 1.13 Q17 13 I 21 Q17 Q2 14 1.13 1. page 8-55 S11 Q1.13 Q2 1.14 1. page 8-55 Circuit Ca figure.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase current-automatic stator starters Three-phase automatic stator resistance starter DDAINL with mains contactor and resistors. Rating of switchgear: Starting voltage: 0.6 x Ie 8-91 .36 x direct switching system Q1.6 x Ue Inrush current: 0. Q11: Ie Q16. 3-phase version L1 L2 L3 1 2 3 13 14 -F1 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q11 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 -Q17 6 X Y Z 2 -Q16 2 -R2 U1 V1 W1 -R1 U2 V2 W2 97 95 2 4 6 -F2 98 PE 96 8 U V W M 3 -M1 When using F1 instead of Q1.6 x direct switching system Tightening torque: 0. 2-stage. Q17: 0. use F2.

2-stage.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase current-automatic stator starters DDAINL three-phase automatic stator resistance starter with mains contactor and resistors. 3-phase version L1 (-Q11) -F0 13 -Q1 0 -S11 I -F2 95 96 14 21 22 13 14 22 32 14 -Q11 21 -Q11 -Q16 15 18 A1 A2 31 14 13 14 -Q11 13 8 N -K1 -Q16 A1 A2 -Q17 -K2 13 A1 A2 A1 A2 15 -K2 -Q11 18 -K1 A1 A2 -Q17 Q16: Step contactor K1: Timing relay Q17: Step contactor Two-wire control Always set overload relay to manual reset K2: Timing relay Q11: Mains contactor L1 (Q11/1) -F0 13 -Q1 -S12 14 22 32 -Q11 21 -Q11 31 8-92 .

Q16. Timing relay K2 is connected directly to Q16/13 and resistor R2 is connected by means of its terminals U1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase current-automatic stator starters Three-wire control Double actuator I = ON 0 = OFF F2 96 0 21 Q11 32 I 21 22 22 Q11 21 Two-wire control -S12 F2 96 Q11 Q11 22 32 -S11 13 13 A 14 B 14 Function Pushbutton I energizes step contactor Q16 and timing relay K1. 8 8-93 . normally open contact Q17/14-13 energizes K2. normally open contact K1/15-18 energizes Q17. 6. 4. Q11 maintains itself via Q11/14-13. V1 and W1 to Q11/2. When the set starting time has elapsed. The motor is connected to the supply with rotor resistors R1 + R2. K2/15-18 energizes mains contactor Q11. Q11/32-31 and pushbutton 0. Q17. resistor R2 and timing relay K1 are omitted in single-stage starting circuits. When the set starting time has elapsed. Step contactor Q17 bypasses the starting stage R1. In the event of an overload. Q16/14-13 – self-maintaining through Q11. At the same time. This bypasses the second starting stage R2. Step contactor Q17. normally closed contact 95-96 of the overload relay F2 or normally open contact 13-14 of the motor-protective circuit-breaker switch off the motor. and the motor runs at the rated speed. The motor is switched off with pushbutton 0. K1 and K2 are de-energized by normally closed contacts Q11/22-21 and Q11/32-31.

Q11 Q16 Q13 = 0. 3-phase L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 Q1 I>I> I> 2 4 6 F1 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 1V1 V2 3 4 5 6 1W1 5 6 W2 Q11 2 K1 2 1U1 2W1 2V1 8 2U1 a 2 4 6 98 96 Q13 U V W 1 2 M 3 M1 When using F1 instead of Q1.49 x direct switching system =6 = 10 s = 30 Rating of switchgear Tightening torque Q1.6 x Ie = 0. use F2. Starting voltage Inrush current IA/Ie tA Ops/h 8-94 = 0.25 x Ie U2 97 95 .7 x Ue (typical value) = 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase current-automatic stator starters Three-phase automatic stator resistance starter ATAINL with mains contactor and starting transformer.49 x direct switching system = Ie = 0. 1-stage.

step contactor Q16. timing relay K1 and. and are maintained via K1/13-14. The motor cannot start up again unless previously switched off by actuation of pushbutton 0. overload relay F2 must always be set to manual reset. or in the event of an overload. normally closed contact K1/55–56 de-energizes star contactor Q13. the motor cannot start up again unless the manual reset is released. 8-95 . When K1 has elapsed. and – via normally open contact Q13/13–14 – Q16 de-energizes: The starting transformer is disconnected. by normally closed contact 95–96 of the overload relay F2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase current-automatic stator starters L1 F0 13 95 Two-wire control Always set overload relay to manual reset (automatic reset) F2 96 Q1 0 S11 I L1 (Q11/1) -F0 95 13 14 21 22 13 K1 14 14 -F2 96 67 55 -S12 67 55 K1 68 14 22 K1 56 22 -K1 Q13 Q16 N Q13 A1 21 A1 Q11 21 A1 68 -K1 96 13 A1 K1 A2 A2 Q11 A2 Q13 A2 Q16: Step contactor K1: Timing relay Q11: Mains contactor Q13: Star contactor Two-wire control -S12 F2 96 K1 55 Three-wire control I: ON 0: OFF -S11 F2 96 21 K1 13 0 22 21 I K1 14 8 13 13 A 14 B 14 22 Function Pressing pushbutton I simultaneously energizes star contactor Q13. With two-wire control. via normally open contact Q13/13–14. and the motor runs at the rated speed. If the motor has been switched off by F2.

rotor three phase L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 -F1 -Q1 I> I> I> 2 4 6 -Q11 1 2 3 5 4 6 -Q12 1 2 3 5 4 6 -Q13 1 3 5 6 2 4 -Q14 1 2 3 4 5 6 97 95 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 8 U V W PE M 3 -M1 K L M U3 V3 W3 -R3 U2 V2 W2 -R2 U1 V1 W2 -R1 When using F1 instead of Q1. use F2. 8-96 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase automatic rotor starters DAINL three-phase automatic rotor starters Three stage.

5 x Ie = 0.5 – 2.5 to pull-out torque = Ie = 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase automatic rotor starters 2-stage. Q11 Step contactors Final step contactors = 0. rotor 2-phase L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 13 14 -F1 -Q1 I> I> 2 4 I> 6 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 4 6 1 3 5 4 6 -Q11 2 -Q12 2 -Q14 2 97 95 96 -F2 2 4 6 98 8 U V W PE K -R2 U2 XY V2 V1 U1 -R1 M 3 -M1 L M When using F1 instead of Q1.58 x Irotor 8-97 .35 x Irotor = 0. use F2. Rating of switchgear Inrush current Tightening torque Q1.

page 8-51 21 13 14 13 A B 8-98 14 22 . rotor 3-phase L1 F0 13 14 21 95 96 Q1 F2 0 S11 I 22 13 14 14 Q11 Q11 44 43 13 32 14 15 14 13 Q13 31 Q13 13 15 18 A1 U3 Q12 18 K1 A1 A1 15 18 A1 Q14 K2 14 13 A1 K2 Q12 A1 A1 Q11 K1 A2 A2 Q14 A2 Q13 A2 A2 U3 A2 8 A2 N Q11: Mains contactor K1: Timing relay Q14: Step contactor K2: Timing relay Double actuator I: ON 0: OFF -S11 Q12: Step contactor Q13: Final step contactor K3: Timing relay F2 96 0 22 Q11 14 21 I Q11 13 For connection of further control circuit devices: a section "Control circuit devices for star-delta starting".Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase automatic rotor starters With mains contactor. style 3-stage.

timing relays and resistors have appropriate increasing designations. Q12 to Q12. Final step contactor Q13 short-circuits the rotor slip rings: the motor operates at the rated speed. Q11 or to Q13. K3/15–18 energizes final step contactor Q13. When the set starting time has elapsed. which short-circuits starting stage R1 and via Q14/14–13 energizes timing relay K2. When the set starting time has elapsed. The rotor is then connected to the resistance terminals U. V. Step contactors Q14 and Q12 as well as timing relays K1. or in the event of an overload. which short-circuits starting stage R2 and via Q12/14–13 energizes timing relay K3. K2 and K3 are de-energized via Q13. normally open contact K1/15–18 energizes step contactor Q14.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Three-phase automatic rotor starters Function Pushbutton I energizes mains contactor Q11: normally open contact Q11/14–13 transfers the voltage. R2 and timing relays K3. The references for step contactors and timing relays in the wiring diagrams are then changed from Q13. W1. Step contactor Q13 and Q12 with their resistors R3. V. When the set starting time has elapsed. K2 are omitted in single-stage or two-stage starting circuits. When there are more than three stages. The motor is connected to the supply with rotor resistors R1 + R2 + R3 in series. The motor is switched off either by pushbutton 0. Q11 as appropriate. Q11/44–43 energizes timing relay K1. which is maintained via Q13/14–13. 8 8-99 . by normally closed contact 95–96 of the overload relay F2 or normally open contact 13–14 of the motor-protective circuit-breaker or circuit-breaker. the additional step contactors. K2/15–18 energizes step contactor Q12. W2 or U.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Switching of capacitors Contactors for capacitors DIL Individual circuit without quick-discharge resistors L1 L2 L3 Individual circuit with quick-discharge resistors L1 L2 L3 -F1 -F1 1 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 -Q11 2 -Q11 2 21 31 -Q11 22 -Q11 32 8 -R1 -C1 -R1 -C1 -R1 -R1 -R1 R1 discharge resistors fitted in capacitorR1 discharge resistors fitted to contactor 8-100 .

which picks up and maintains itself via its own auxiliary contact 14-13 and pushbutton 0. check that this has sufficient power to actuate the contactor coil. L1 -S12 Q11 A1 8 8-101 . Interpose a contactor relay if necessary. Actuation of pushbutton 0 effects de-energization. Function Pushbutton I actuates contactor Q11. Normally closed contacts Q11/21–22 then switch discharge resistors R1 to capacitor C1. page 8-51 14 -Q11 13 A1 -Q11 A2 N Maintained contact sensors In the case of actuation by means of power factor correction relay.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Switching of capacitors L1 (Q11/1) -F0 21 L1 0 21 22 Q11 Q11 14 I 13 21 13 22 14 13 0 22 A 14 B -S11 13 I 14 Double actuator For connection of further control circuit devices: a section "Control circuit devices for star-delta starting". Capacitor C1 is thus energized. Discharge resistors R1 are not active when contactor Q11 is energized.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Switching of capacitors Capacitor contactor combination Capacitor contactor with pilot contactor and series resistors. Individual and parallel circuit with and without discharge resistors and with series resistors. L1 L2 L3 -F1 A1 21 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 43 A1 21 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 43 44 -Q14 A2 22 32 44 -Q11 A2 22 32 8 -R2 -R1 -R1 -C1 On the version without discharge resistors. resistors R1 and the connections to the auxiliary contacts 21–22 and 31–32 are omitted. 8-102 .

Normally closed contacts Q11/21–22 and 31–32 then switch discharge resistors R1 to capacitor C1. which switches capacitor C1 in with bridged series resistors R2. Function Actuation by two-way pushbutton S11. two-wire control S12 (power factor correction relay) and two-way pushbutton S11 Discharge resistors R1 are not operative when Q11 and Q14 are energized. Pushbutton 0 effects de-energization. Q14 is maintained via Q11/14-13 when Q11 has closed. Normally open contact Q14/14-13 energizes mains contactor Q11. 8-103 . Pushbutton I energizes pilot contactor Q14. Capacitor C1 is then switched in with bridged series resistors R2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Switching of capacitors L1 (Q11/1) -F0 21 L1 (Q11/1) -F0 T0 (3)-1-15431 1 0 2 1 2 3 4 0 22 -S11 13 21 14 I 14 0 -S12 22 -Q11 13 -S12 13 I 14 14 14 -Q14 -Q11 13 13 A1 A1 14 -Q11 A2 -Q14 A2 -Q14 13 A1 A1 N -Q11 A2 -Q14 A2 N 8 Q11: Mains contactor Q14: Pilot contactor Actuation by two-way pushbutton S11 Actuation by selector switch S13.

counterweight. pulleys and clamps b Storage tank c Inlet d Pressure pipe e Outlet 8-104 g h -M1 M 3 -M2 U V W M 3 f g h i j Centrifugal or reciprocating pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Suction pipe with filter Well .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Duplex pump control Fully automatic control with two pumps Starting sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can be selected by control switch S12 Control circuit wiring with two float switches for basic and peak loads (operation is also possible with two pressure switches) P1 Auto P2 Auto P1 + P2 = Pump 1 constant load. Pump 2 peak load = Pump 2 constant load. Pump 1 peak load = Direct operation independent of float switches (or pressure switches) L1 L2 L3 a a b c F7: 0 F7 F8 F7: I F8: 0 F8: I 0 F8 Q 0 -Q1 I>I> I> -F11 -F21 d F7 Q I -Q11 -F12 -Q12 -F22 8 e I U V W f f i j a Cable with float.

F7 switches pump 1 on or off (basic load). both pumps are in operation. When the water level rises again. F8 is deactivated. S12 has a further position: the sequence of operations is automatically reversed after each cycle. F8 starts pump 2 (peak load). The operating sequence of pumps 1 and 2 can be determined using operating mode selector switch S12: Position P1 auto or P2 auto. independent of the float switches (Caution! Tank may possibly overflow). On the version of duplex pump control with automatic load sharing (T0(3)-4-15915).F11 0 P 1 Auto P 2 Auto P 1. Q12: Pump 2 mains contactor In position P1 + P2. If the water level drops below 8-105 8 . Operating mode selector switch S12 in position P1 auto: The system operates as follows: When the water level in the storage tank falls or rises. Control is via float switches F7 and F8. Pump 2 continues running until F7 stops both pumps. P 2 L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 1 13 13 13 11 12 13 13 14 14 14 14 8 9 10 -S12 All about Motors Duplex pump control F0 95 95 -F12 -S11 1 96 -F22 -S21 -Q12 96 -F7 Q -F8 Q -Q11 A1 A1 EO -Q11 -Q12 N A2 A2 T0(3)-4-15833 Q11: Pump 1 mains contactor the range of F7 (discharge is greater than intake). Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Float switch F7 closes before F8 Function The duplex pump control is designed for operation of two pump motors M1 and M2.

B. PKZ) F7: Pressure switch MCSN. 3-pole M1:Pump motor a Air or pressure tank b Non-return valve c Pressure pipe d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump e Suction pipe with filter f Well P -F7 a b c d e f U V W M 3 -M1 8 8-106 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic pump control With pressure switch for air tank and domestic water supply without water failure (run dry) safety device L1 L2 L3 -F1 With 3-pole pressure switch MCSN (main circuit) -Q1 I> I> I> F1: Fuses (if required) Q1: Motor-protective switch. manual (z.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic pump control With single-pole pressure switch MCS (control circuit) L1 L2 L3 N -Q11 -F1 1 3 5 2 4 6 95 96 a b d P -F7 -F2 c e f U V W M 3 -M1 F1: Fuses Q11:Contactor or automatic star-delta starter F2: Overload relay with reclosing lockout F7: Pressure switch MCS. 1-pole M1:Pump motor a Air or pressure tank b Non-return valve c Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump d Pressure pipe e Suction pipe with filter f Well 8 8-107 .

PKZ) F7: Float switch 3-pole (circuit: pump full) M1:Pump motor 0 HW:Highest level NW:Lowest value a Cable with float. pulleys and clamps Q b Storage tank c Pressure pipe d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump I e Outlet f Suction pipe with filter g Well a HW b L1 L2 L3 c -F1 NW -Q1 -F7 I> I> I> e d f U V W M 3 -M1 g 8 8-108 . manual (z.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic pump control With 3-pole float switch SW (main circuit) F1: Fuses (if required) Q1: Motor-protective circuit-breakers. counterweight. B.

counterweight.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic pump control With 1-pole float switch SW (control circuit) F1: Fuses Q11:Contactor or automatic star-delta starter F2: Overload relay with reclosing lockout F8: Float switch 1-pole (circuit: pump full) S1: Changeover switch MANUAL-OFF-AUTO F9: Float switch 1-pole (circuit: pump full) M1:Pump motor a Cable with float. pulleys and clamps b Storage tank c Pressure pipe d Centrifugal (or reciprocating) pump e Outlet f Suction pipe with filter g Water-failure monitoring by means of a float switch h Well a HW b NW L1 L2 L3 N -F1 -Q11 1 3 5 2 4 6 95 0 -F8 S1 H 96 Q c -F2 0 A I e d f U V W M 3 I -M1 g-F9 h 0 Q 8 8-109 .

-Q1 -S3 -R1 -R2 51 52 I> I> I> U< 8 -Q2 I> I> I> -Q3 I> I> I> -Q4 I> I> I> 8-110 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Off position interlock of the loads Solution using NZM circuit-breakers Off position interlock for control switches (Hamburg circuit) with auxiliary contact VHI (S3) and undervoltage release. Cannot be used with motor operator.

a Emergency-Stop b Off position interlock contacts on the control or master switches -S1 I> I> I> 10 11 10 11 51 10 11 -Q1 V -S3 95 96 b b b a U< 52 8 8-111 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic reset Off position interlock for control or master switches by means of auxiliary contacts VHI (S3). Cannot be used with motor operator. NHI (S1) and undervoltage release.

which energizes and switches the mains supply on the load.1 I> I> I> 4 3 2 3 1 -F01 -Q11 -Q12 1 2 4 -F02 21 8 13 -K2 -Q12 14 22 11 11 R R S T -K2 -Q11 22 22 21 -K1 21 S 12 14 T 12 14 A1 -Q12 A1 A1 A2 -Q11 A2 -K2 A2 a Main supply b Auxiliary supply Function Main switch Q1 is closed first. Phase monitor K1 is energized via the main supply and immediately energizes contactor relay K2. Contactor Q12 (auxiliary c To load supply) and normally open contact K2/13-14 closes the circuit of contactor Q11.95 x Un Ub = 0.1 (auxiliary supply). followed by main switch Q1.1 L3.85 x Uan L1 L2 L3 N a b L1. Contactor Q12 is also interlocked against mains supply contactor Q11 via normally closed contact Q11/22-21. 8-112 .1 L2. Normally closed contact K2/21–22 blocks the circuit. the phase-monitor is set to: Pick-up voltage Drop-out voltage Uan = 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 All about Motors Fully automatic main transfer switch with automatic reset Changeover device to DIN VDE 0108 – Power systems and safety power supply in buildings for public gatherings: Automatic resetting.1 N c -Q1 I>I> I> 6 5 5 6 -Q1.

European – North America Circuit diagram examples to North American specifications North American classification for control switches Rated motor currents for North American motors Protection types for electrical equipment for North America North American cable cross-sections 9-2 9-4 9-6 9-10 9-12 9-21 9-33 9-36 9-38 9-39 9-41 9 9-1 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Page Approvals and certificates Fuses for circuits in North America Approval authorities Test authorities and approval stamps Marking of electrical equipment for North America Circuit symbols.

• At present. Approvals for switching and protective devices or for power distribution systems are national. • Approval by local inspectors (AHJ = Authority Having Jurisdiction). • Approvals often require mandatory marking on the approved products. Special characteristics for the export to North America (USA.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approvals and certificates Approved products on their own are not always enough for successful exporting. branch circuits). The following should be taken into account for exports to North America: • North American approvals. Further information is provided in the Main Catalogue for Industrial Switchgear. Canada) What has become well-established worldwide is not necessarily also acceptable in North America. • Some approvals require the modification of the permissible technical data of the approved products. • Special market practices. in the chapter “Approvals for the World Market”. • The flexibility of the manufacturer is restricted by the fact that each product modification has to be approved. • Restrictions according to network types. • Additional tests by independent and nationally approved test bodies are often required and some approvals require the regular production monitoring by the approval authority. regional or application-specific approvals for the use of these products. A good knowledge of the relevant standards and the special characteristics of the market for the application must be taken into account in addition to the approved products themselves. After a system is completed.jsp 9 9-2 . • Application-related differences in device selection.moeller. • North American product and installation standards. North American practices unknown in the IEC world: • Device types and main applications. www. • Product-specific differences in the scope of the approval. any special requirements that were not taken into account in the engineering stage may require a high level of cost and time for their implementation. A check list may help to clarify important questions and take them into account at the quotation stage. application restrictions apply to the approved products. • Different main circuits (feeder circuits.net/en/support/pdf_katalog.

www. 5-02 stipulate larger clearance and creepage distances than the IEC standards and the relevant harmonised European standards. 4 • Fuses UL 248.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approvals and certificates Device types in North America In North America a distinction is made between devices for energy distribution. 14 • • • • • • • Contactors Contactor relays Overload relays Rotary switches Control circuit devices.2 No.2 No. CSA-C22. CSA-C22.2 No. such as in compliance with UL 489 and industrial switchgear in compliance with UL 508.net/publications 9 9-3 . position switches Electronic devices/systems User-programmable controllers Examples of special device selection for North America • The type of load that a circuit has is important for selecting the correct switching and protective devices.2 No. CSA-C22. 248 Industrial control equipment UL 508 and CSA-C22. CSA-C22.moeller. for example.2 No. 5-02 • Switch-disconnectors UL 98. 5-02 • Disconnectors UL 489. 1) Example circuit a figure. Motor starters must only switch and protect motors. 4 • Fuse switch-disconnectors UL 98. This affects. page 9-34 Comprehensive information and tips on the export of low-voltage switchgear and systems to North America can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet. • Motor starters on busbar adapters in the feeder circuit only with large clearance and creepage distances1). which now has additional terminals on the incoming side to provide the required clearance and creepage distances.2 No. • Small clearance and creepage distances are sufficient for motor starters on busbar adapters in the branch circuit1). CSA-C22.2 No. Distribution Equipment • Circuit breakers UL 489. the European motorprotective circuit breaker. • Additional handles required for door coupling rotary handles used in North America. UL 489 and CSA-C22.

C22. "Code" Class CC Class G Canada Class H.2 248-12 10 kA.2 248-4 UL 248-5. K5 Class L Class R HRCI-R RK1. 480 VAC 100 kA. 300 VAC 200 kA.2 248-9 UL 248-10. 600 VAC 50 kA/100 kA/ 200 kA. C22. 600VAC 200 kA. C22. RK5 Class T 9 Class K K1. 600 VAC 0. RK5 Class T 50 kA/100 kA/ 200 kA.2 248-10 UL 248-12. The practice.5…30 21…60 0.2 248-8 UL 248-9. No. C22. 600 VAC 200 kA.5…20 1…600 Class J Class J HRCI-J Class K K1.2 248-6/7 UL 248-4. 250 VAC 10 kA. 600VAC 200 kA. C22. 600 VAC 0…600 fast slow fast slow fast slow fast slow fast slow fast slow 200 kA. Type or design in: USA Class H. 9-4 . CSA Fuse characte ristics fast SCCR Typical values in A UL 248-6/7. K5 Class L Class R RK1.2 248-15 fast 0…1200 The characteristics data and the assigned applications are a rough overview only. 59 "Code" Class CC Class G Standards UL.2 248-5 UL 248-8. it is always advisable to find out both this information and the required fusel type from the North American end customer. C22. C22.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Fuses for circuits in North America Selection and application of fuses suitable for circuits (feeder and branch circuits) in North America. 600 VAC 0…600 601…6000 0…600 UL 248-15. C22. 600 VAC 100 kA.

There is therefore a risk that they may be incorrectly used! See also note on K.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Fuses for circuits in North America Fields of application Notes Primarily domestic Types H. Extremely compact design! Current-limiting to UL/CSA! Compact design. slow: Protection from inductive and highly inductive loads. feeders and branches for mixed loads. 59 “Code” fit the same bases and are therefore interchangeable. Circuits for heating. 9 The NA fuse types are largely tested and suitable for DC circuits in accordance with UL and CSA. lighting etc. Circuits for motors. RK5 and HRCI-R fit the same bases. fast: Protection from resistive and inductive loads. Current-limiting to UL/CSA! All other fuse types do not fit into bases. Current-limiting to UL/CSA! Types RK1. lighting. K and No. Not current-limiting to UL/CSA! In the USA. 9-5 . Current-limiting to UL/CSA! All other fuse types do not fit into bases. Compact design. the K types are therefore being increasingly replaced by the RK types. _ Extremely compact design! Current-limiting to UL/CSA! All other fuse types do not fit into bases. transformers. RK1 fuses have lower let-through values than RK5. All other fuse types do not fit into these bases. Current-limiting to UL/CSA! All other fuse types do not fit into bases.

Belgian electro-technical product quality mark Canadian Electrical Code Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Italian standards organisation Commission Electrotechnique Internationale International electrotechnical commission Canadian Electrical Manufacturers’ Association Verband der Kanadischen Elektroindustrie Comité Européen de Normalisation European standards committee Comité Européen de coordination de Normalisation Électrotechnique. Spanish organisation for standards and certification Gesellschaft zur Prüfung und Zertifizierungvon NiederspannungsgerätenGerman test laboratories association American National Standards Institute Australian Standard American Standards Association American association for standards Association of Short-Circuit Testing Authorities Association of the testing authorities British Standard Bureau Veritas.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approval authorities Code ABS AEI AENOR ALPHA ANSI AS ASA ASTA BS Full title American Bureau of Shipping Ship classification association Assoziazione Elettrotechnica ed Elettronica Italiana Italian electrotechnical industry organisation Asociacion Española de Normalización y Certificación. European committee for electro-technical standards Country USA Italy Spain Germany USA Australia USA Great Britain Great Britain France Belgium Canada Italy Switzerland Canada Europe Europe 9 BV CEBEC CEC CEI CEI CEMA CEN CENELEC 9-6 . Ship´s classification association Comité Electrotechnique Belge.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approval authorities Code CSA DEMKO DIN DNA DNV EN ECQAC ELOT EOTC ETCI GL HD IEC IEEE IPQ ISO Full title Canadian Standards Association Canadian standards association.und Elektronik-Ingenieure Instituto Portoguês da Qualidade Portuguese quality institute International Organization for Standardization Internationale Organisation für Normung Country Canada Denmark Germany Germany Norway Europe Europe Greece Europe 9 Ireland Germany Europe – USA Portugal – 9-7 . Canadian standard Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol Danish material control for electrotechnical products Deutsches Institut für Normung German institute for standardisation Deutscher Normenausschuss German standards committee Det Norsk Veritas Ship classification association European standard Electronic Components Quality Assurance Committee Committee for components with a verified quality Hellenic Organization for Standardization Greek organization for standardization European Organization for Testing and Certification Europäische Organisation für Konformitätsbewertung Electrotechnical Council of Ireland Irish organization for standardization Germanischer Lloyd Ship classification association Harmonization document International Electrotechnical Commission International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Verein der Elektro.

Dutch standard National Fire Protection Association US-amerikanische Gesellschaft für Brandverhütung Nippon Kaiji Kyakai Japanese classification association Occupational Safety and Health Administration Österreichischer Verband für Elektrotechnik Austrian electrotechnical association Prüfstelle elektrischer Hochleistungsapparate der Gesellschaft für elektrische Hochleistungsprüfungen Electrical high-performance apparatus test laboratory of the association for electrical high-performance testing Country Japan USA Japan Netherlands – Great Britain Japan Belgium USA USA Norway Netherlands USA Japan USA Austria Germany 9 NEMKO NEN NFPA NKK OSHA ÖVE PEHLA 9-8 . Belgian standard National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association Electrical industry association Norges Elektrische Materiellkontroll Norwegian testing institute for electrotechnical products Nederlands Norm.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approval authorities Code JEM JIC JIS KEMA LOVAG LRS MITI NBN NEC NEMA Full title Japanese Electrical Manufacturers Association Electrical industry association Joint Industry Conference Gesamtverband der Industrie Japanese Industrial Standard Keuring van Elektrotechnische Materialen Testing institute for electrotechnical products Low Voltage Agreement Group Lloyd's Register of Shipping Ship classification association Ministry of International Trade and Industry Norme Belge.

y.und Elektronikindustrie Central association of the electrical and electronic industry Country Poland Germany Italy Australia South Africa Luxemburg SEMKO SEV SFS STRI SUVA TÜV UL UTE VDE Sweden Switzerland Finland Iceland Switzerland Germany USA France Germany 9 ZVEI Germany 9-9 . Vereinigte Versicherungslaboratorien Union Technique de l'Electricité Electrotechnical federation Verband der Elektrotechnik. testing and certification Svenska Elektriska Materielkontrollanstalten Swedish test institute for electrotechnical products Schweizerischer Elektrotechnischer Verein Swiss electrotechnical association Suomen Standardisoimisliitlo r.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Approval authorities Code PRS PTB RINA SAA SABS SEE Full title Polski Rejestr Statków Ship classification association Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt German physical/technical federal agency Registro Italiano Navale Italian ship classification association Standards Association of Australia South African Bureau of Standards Service de l'Energie de l'Etat Luxemburg authority for standardisation. Finnish standardisation association. Finnish standard The Icelandic Council for Standardization Isländische Normungsorganisation Schweizerische Unfallversicherungs-Anstalt Swiss accident insurance federal agency Technischer Überwachungsverein Technical inspection association Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. electronics and information technology Zentralverband Elektrotechnik. Elektronik. Informationstechnik (Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker)Association of electrical.

are in their basic design usable worldwide with the exception of USA and Canada. Additional marking with a national test mark is often required for device groups of miniature and residual current circuit-breakers.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Test authorities and approval stamps Test authorities and approval stamps in Europe and North America The standard versions of most Moeller devices are approved for use throughout the world. Since January 1997 all devices that conform to the European low-voltage guidelines and are for Country Test authority Comité Electrotechnique Belge Belgisch Elektrotechnisch Comité (CEBEC) Danmarks Elektriske Materielkontrol (DEMKO) Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (VDE) FIMKO Union Technique de l’Electricité (UTE) sale in the European Union must be marked with the CE mark. approval in the countries of the European Union is unnecessary. This marking duty allows unlimited use of this device within the European economic area. The CE mark shows that the marked device corresponds with all relevant requirements and standards. For export to North America devices are available with a special UL and CSA approval. The following table shows a selection of test marks. This does not apply to installation material. As devices provided with the CE mark comply with the harmonised standards. including the USA and Canada. Characters 9 Belgium Denmark Germany Finland France v 9-10 . In some cases special country specific installation and operating specifications. installation materials and types must be taken into account as well as special circumstances such as difficult climatic conditions. Some devices. such as circuit-breakers.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Test authorities and approval stamps Country Netherlands Norway Austria Russia Sweden Switzerland Test authority Naamloze Vennootschap tot Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialien (KEMA) Norges Elektriske Materiellkontrol (NEMKO) Österreichischer Verband für Elektrotechnik (ÖVE) Goststandart(GOST-)R Svenska Elektriska Materielkontrollanstalten (SEMKO) Schweizerischer Elektrotechnischer Verein (SEV) Characters USA Underwriters Laboratories Listing Recognition 9 Canada Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 9-11 .

3 figures and/or letters can be added to the marking.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Component marking in the USA and Canada to NEMA ICS 19. That means here: 1 = numerical specification J = jog function of the equipment CR = control relay (contactor relay) – type of equipment 9 9-12 . When using two or more of these markings. Example: The relay which introduces the first jog function is marked with “1 JCR”. the function marking is usually put first. ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315 A In order to differentiate between devices with similar functions.

capacitance Circuit-breaker Control relay Current transformer Demand meter Diode Disconnect switch Dynamic braking Field accelerating Field contactor Field decelerating Field-loss Forward Frequency meter Fuse Ground protective Hoist Jog Limit switch Lower Main contactor Master control relay Master switch 9 9-13 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Device or Function Code Letters to NEMA ICS 19-2002 Code letter A AM B C or CAP CB CR CT DM D DS or DISC DB FA FC FD FL F or FWD FM FU GP H J LS L M MCR MS Device or Function Accelerating Ammeter Braking Capacitor.

reactance 9 S SU TACH TB TR Q UV VM WHM WM X 9-14 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter OC OL P PFM PB PS REC R or RES REV RH SS SCR SV SC Device or Function Overcurrent Overload Plugging. board Time-delay relay Transistor Undervoltage Voltmeter Watthour meter Wattmeter Reactor. potentiometer Power factor meter Pushbutton Pressure switch Rectifier Resistor. resistance Reverse Rheostat Selector switch Silicon controlled rectifier Solenoid valve Squirrel cage Starting contactor Suppressor Tachometer generator Terminal block.

similar to those of IEC 61346-1 (1996-03). Squirrel Cage Induction Motor Synchro. The code letters used here are. Class designation code letter to ANSI Y32.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America As an alternative to device designation with code letter to NEMA ICS 19-2002 the designation to class designation is permissible.2/IEEE 315. in part. Class designation marking should simplify harmonization with international standards. 315 A Code letter A B Device or Function Separate Assembly Induction Machine. General • Control transformer • Control transmitter • Control Receiver • Differential Receiver • Differential Transmitter • Receiver • Torque Receiver • Torque Transmitter Synchronous Motor Wound-Rotor Induction Motor or Induction Frequency Convertor Battery Capacitor • Capacitor. General • Polarized Capacitor Shielded Capacitor Circuit-Breaker (all) 9 BT C CB 9-15 .

VR DS 9 E 9-16 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter D. CR Device or Function Diode • Bidirectional Breakdown Diode • Full Wave Bridge Rectifier • Metallic Rectifier • Semiconductor Photosensitive • Cell • Semiconductor Rectifier • Tunnel Diode • Unidirectional Breakdown Diode Zener Diode Annunciator Light Emitting Diode Lamp • Fluorescent Lamp • Incandescent Lamp • Indicating Lamp Armature (Commutor and Brushes) Lightning Arrester Contact • Electrical Contact • Fixed Contact • Momentary Contact Core • Magnetic Core Horn Gap Permanent Magnet Terminal Not Connected Conductor D.

Squirrel Cage Induction Generator Thermal Element Actuating Device Female Disconnecting Device Female Receptacle Contactor. Generator Induction Machine. Relay Coil • Blowout Coil • Brake Coil • Operating Coil Field • Commutating Field • Compensating Field • Generator or Motor Field • Separately Excited Field • Series Field • Shunt Field Inductor Saturable Core Reactor Winding. General Audible Signal Device • Bell • Buzzer • Horn Meter.C. Instrument HR J K L 9 LS M 9-17 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter F G Device or Function Fuse Rotary Amplifier (all) A.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter P Q Device or Function • Male Disconnecting Device • Male Receptable Thyristor • NPN-Transistor • PNP-Transistor Resistor • Adjustable Resistor • Heating Resistor • Tapped Resistor • Rheostat Shunt • Instrumental Shunt • Relay Shunt Contact • Time Closing Contact • Time Opening Contact • Time Sequence Contact • Transfer Contact • Basic Contact Assembly • Flasher R S 9 9-18 .

Rotary Switch • Selector Switch • Single-Throw Switch • Speed Switch Stepping Switch • Temperature-Actuated Switch • Time Delay Switch • Toggle Switch • Transfer Switch • Wobble Stick Switch Thermostat 9 9-19 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter S Device or Function Switch • Combination Locking and Nonlokking Switch • Disconnect Switch • Double Throw Switch • Drum Switch • Flow-Actuated Switch • Foot Operated Switch • Key-Type Switch • Knife Switch • Limit Switch • Liquid-Level Actuated Switch • Locking Switch • Master Switch • Mushroom Head • Operated Switch • Pressure or Vacuum • Operated Switch • Pushbutton Switch • Pushbutton Illuminated Switch.

General • Polyphase Transformer • Potential Transformer Terminal Board Thermocouple Inseparable Assembly Pentode. General Tube Socket TB TC U V W 9 X 9-20 . Vacuum Type Triode Tube. Single Unit. Equipotential Cathode Phototube.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Marking of electrical equipment for North America Code letter T Device or Function Transformer • Current Transformer • Transformer. Mercury Pool Conductor • Associated • Multiconductor • Shielded Conductor.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE/CSA The following comparison of circuit symbols is based upon the following international/national specifications: • IEC 60617 graphic symbol database (DIN EN 60617-2 to DIN EN 60617-12) • NEMA ICS 19-2002. connectors Junction of conductors 03-02-04 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE or 03-02-05 or Connection of conductors (node) 03-02-01 Terminal 03-02-02 Terminal strip/block 9 1 2 3 4 03-02-03 1 2 3 4 Conductors 03-01-01 9-21 . European – North America Circuit symbols to DIN EN. CSA Z99 Description Conductors. ANSI Y32.2/ IEEE 315/315 A.

European – North America Description Conductor (for later expansion) Line of application. closed 03-03-18 9-22 . optional. denoting small interval Separation between two fields Line of separation between functional units 02-01-06 IEC (DIN EN) 103-01-01 NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE 02-12-01 02-12-04 02-01-06 Shielding 02-01-07 Earth.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. lug. general symbol Line of application. general symbol GRD 02-15-01 9 Protective earth Protective ground 02-15-03 Connector with plug and socket 03-03-05 or 03-03-06 Isolating point. general symbol Ground.

general 04-03-01 or 04-03-02 Winding with fixed tapping 04-03-06 9 or 04-02-01 04-02-02 Capacitor.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. general symbol or Variable capacitor 104-02-01 9-23 . potentiometer 04-01-07 RES Winding. general symbol 04-01-02 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE or 04-01-02 or or RES RES Resistor with fixed tappings 04-01-09 Variable resistor. general 04-01-03 RES RES Adjustable resistor Resistor with sliding contact. European – North America Description Passive components Resistor. inductance.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. general symbol 08-10-01 or or *with colour stated Buzzers 08-10-11 or ABU 08-10-10 Horn. sensors 02-13-15 9-24 . European – North America Description Control circuit devices Visual indicator. general use 02-13-01 Operated by pushing 02-13-05 Operated by pulling 02-13-03 Operated by turning 02-13-04 Operated by key 02-13-13 Operated by rollers. claxon HN 08-10-05 9 Drives Manual operation. general symbol IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE *with colour stated Indicator light.

general symbol 02-13-20 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE Switch mechanism with mechanical release 102-05-04 Operated by motor M 02-13-26 MOT Emergency switch 02-13-08 Operated by electromagnetic overcurrent protection 02-13-24 Operated by thermal overcurrent protection 02-13-25 OL Electromagnetic operation 02-13-23 9 Control by fluid level 02-14-01 Electromechanical. general symbol Operating device with special features. page 9-13 9-25 . European – North America Description Stored energy mechanism. page 9-13 or or x device code letter a table. electromagnetic operating devices Electromechanical operating device. relay coil. general symbol or 07-15-01 or × × x device code letter a table.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. general symbol.

page 9-13 or Electromechanical device of a thermal relay 07-15-21 Contacts N/O contact or 07-02-01 07-02-02 or 9 N/C contact or 07-02-03 Changeover contact with interruption 07-02-04 or Early-make N/O contact of a contact assembly 07-04-01 TC or TDC Late-break N/C contact of a contact assembly 07-04-03 T0 or TD0 9-26 . page 9-13 or or Electromechanical device with On. page 9-13 or or Electromechanical device with Off-delay 07-15-07 x device code letter a table.and Off-delay 07-15-09 x device code letter a table.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. European – North America Description Electromechanical operating device with On-delay 07-15-08 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE or or × × × x device code letter a table.

European – North America Description N/O contact. push-button Spring-return switches with N/O and N/C contacts. delayed when reclosing 07-05-03 or T.g. N/C contact.C.g. delayed when closing 07-05-02 IEC (DIN EN) or 07-05-01 NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE T. mechanically operated. N/O contacts closed LS 9-27 . manually operated by striking (e. 07-05-04 Control devices Push-button (not stay-put) 07-07-02 PB Spring-return switches with N/C contact.C. mushroom button) Position switches (N/O contacts) Limit switches (N/O contacts) 07-08-01 PB PB PB 9 LS Position switches (N/C contacts) Limit switches (N/C contacts) 07-08-02 LS Spring-return switches with N/O contacts. manually operated by pushing Spring-return switches with latching position and one N/O contact.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. manually operated by pushing. manually operated by pushing Spring-return switches with latching position and one N/C contact. e.

N/O contacts Pressure switches. N/C contact P< 07-17-03 P or P> P or 9 Float switches. actuated by the proximity of iron Proximity switches. N/O contact Float switches. European – North America Description Spring-return switches with N/C contacts. N/O contacts Proximity switches.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. N/C contacts open Proximity switches (N/C contacts). inductive. N/C contact 9-28 . mechanically operated. block diagram 07-19-02 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE LS Fe 07-20-04 Fe Under-pressure relays.

current transformers Transformers with two windings 06-09-02 or 06-09-01 H1 X1 H2 X2 9-29 . three electromagnetic overcurrent releases. motorprotective circuit-breaker Fuse. general symbol x x x 9 l> l> l> 107-05-01 FU 07-21-01 Transformers. European – North America Description Switchgear Contactors (N/O contacts) 07-13-02 IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE x code letter Three-pole contactor with bimetal relay (3 thermal elements) OL x code letter Three-pole switch-disconnector 07-13-06 DISC Three-pole circuit-breaker 07-13-05 CB Three-pole breaker with switch mechanism with three thermoelectric overcurrent releases.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols.

general symbol M 06-04-01 M 06-04-01 or MOT DC motor. general symbol M 06-04-01 M 9 AC motor. European – North America Description Autotransformer 06-09-07 06-09-06 IEC (DIN EN) or NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE or Current transformer 06-09-11 or 06-09-10 or (X1) (H1) CT Machines Generator G 06-04-01 G or GEN Motor. general symbol 06-04-01 M ~ Three-phase asynchronous motor with squirrel-cage rotor or M 3~ 06-08-01 M Three-phase asynchronous motor with slip-ring rotor M 3~ 06-08-03 9-30 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols.

NAND 1 2 13 & A 12-28-01 OR with negated output. European – North America Description Semiconductor components Static input Static output IEC (DIN EN) NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE Static input with negation 12-07-01 Static output with negation 12-07-02 Dynamic input. general symbol & 12-27-02 9 A OR gate. change of status from 1 to 0 (H/L) 12-07-08 AND gate. general symbol 1 12-27-01 OR NOT gate.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. inverter 1 12-27-11 OR AND with negated output. change of status from 0 to 1 (L/H) 12-07-07 Dynamic input with negation. NOR 3 4 5 12-28-02 1 OR 9-31 .

in which the collector is connected to the enclosure (K) 05-05-02 (A) or (E) (B) (C) 9-32 . general symbol 05-04-04 (A) (A) 05-05-01 (K) (K) or (E) PNP transistor (C) (B) NPN transistor. variable with indication of delay values 1 12-44-02 SS TP Adj. diac 05-03-02 (T) 05-03-09 (T) Thyristor. general IEC (DIN EN) =1 12-27-09 NEMA ICS/ANSI/IEEE OE RS flip-flop S R 12-42-01 S FF 1 T C 0 Monostable gate. cannot be triggered during the output pulse.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit symbols. general symbol Bi-directional diode. m/ms 02-08-05 Semiconductor diode. general symbol Limiting diode Zener diode (A) 05-03-01 (K) 9 05-03-06 Light-emitting diode (LED). European – North America Description Exclusive OR gate. general symbol Delay.

fuseless with circuit-breakers Control circuit with fuse CB L1 L2 L3 H1 1FU 1 H3 2FU H2 4 L1 L2 L3 M T1 T2 T3 H4 M X1 1 PB STOP 11 12 X2 2 PB START X1 A1 W M X2 A2 13 13 M 14 14 Control circuit.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit diagram examples to North American specifications Direct motor starters. fuseless CB L1 L2 L3 H1 L1 L2 L3 H4 M 9 T1 T2 T3 M H1 1 H3 H2 4 H4 X1 X2 9-33 .

9 Motor starters to UL 1 M-110 L MTR1 9-34 1 DISC L1 L1 T1 L2 L2 T2 L3 L3 T3 1 FU-1 1 FU-2 1 FU-3 b 4 FU-1 1T 5 FU-1 1 PB-1 1 M-1 1 FS 1 M-2 1 SOL 2T 1 CR-1 1 M-1 1 M-1 5 FU-2 1 M-2 1 CR-1 1 PB-2 4 FU-2 e a f g 2 FU-1 3T 3 FU-2 2 PB-1 2 PB-2 2 PB-2 2 M-1 1 LS 2 M-1 2 M-120 L MTR2 Export to the world market and to North America Circuit diagram examples to North American specifications Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 d 2 FU-2 c g Class 2 Circuit a Feeder Circuit b Branch Circuit 1 c Branch Circuit 2 d Power Transformer e Control Circuit Transformer f Class 2 Transformer .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 9 9-35 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America North American classification for control switches Classification Designation At maximum rated voltage of Thermal uninterrupted current 150 V A150 – – – B150 – – – C150 – – – D150 – A 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 2.5 1 1 AC voltage Heavy Duty 600 V A600 A600 A600 A600 B600 B600 B600 B600 C600 C600 C600 C600 300 V A300 A300 – – B300 B300 – – C300 C300 – – D300 D300 Standard Duty 9 DC voltage Heavy Duty – – N600 N600 N600 P600 P600 P600 Q600 Q600 Q600 – – – N300 N300 – P300 P300 – Q300 Q300 – R300 R300 – N150 – – P150 – – Q150 – – R150 – – 10 10 10 5 5 5 2. CSA C 22.2-14 and NEMA ICS 5 9-36 .5 1.5 2.0 – Standard Duty to UL 508.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.

6 1.10 0.5 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.22 0.75 0.3 Make VA 7200 7200 7200 7200 3600 3600 3600 3600 1800 1800 1800 1800 432 432 Break VA 720 720 720 720 360 360 360 360 180 180 180 180 72 72 9 125 250 301 – 600 125 250 301 – 600 125 250 301 – 600 125 250 301 – 600 2.75 0.1 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.27 0.11 – 275 275 275 138 138 138 69 69 69 28 28 – 275 275 275 138 138 138 69 69 69 28 28 – 9-37 .375 0.3 0.4 1.75 3 3.55 0.2 0.55 0.2 1.11 – 2.10 0.5 3.8 Break A 6 3 1.22 0.4 1.5 6 15 7.1 0.5 1.5 0.2 3 1.55 0.27 0.55 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America North American classification for control switches Switching capacity Rated voltage V 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 Make A 60 30 15 12 30 15 7.

Table 430-250 = UL 508.7 2.0 6.3 1.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 575 V 600 V 0.6 2.6 230 V3) 240 V 2. 9-38 .2 6.9 6. For motor full-load currents of 208 V motors/200 V motors.4 4.8 7.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Rated motor currents for North American motors Motor rated currents for North American three-phase motors1) Motor rating HP 1/2 3/4 Motor rated operational current in amperes2) 115 V 120 V 4.1 1. For exact values consult the data stated by the manufacturer or the motor rating plates.7 3.4 12 13.8 9.2 3) The motor full-load current values given are approximate values.4 8.1 3.2 4.4 6.9 1.0 3.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472 1 11/2 2 3 5 71/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1) Source: 2) 9 1/2 – 200 HP 250 – 500 HP = NEC Code.6 15.4 2. increased by 10 – 15 %. Table 45.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 460 V 480 V 1.2 3. use the appropriate values for 230 V motors.

water-tight.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Protection types for electrical equipment for North America Protection types for electrical equipment for USA and Canada to IEC/EN 60529 (VDE 0470 part 1) The IP ratings quoted in the table represent a rough comparison only. resistant to hail and ice UL/CSA type 12 For use in industry.2 No. resistant to sleet and ice UL/CSA type 3 S Dust-tight. dust-tight UL/CSA type 13 dust-tight. Designation of the enclosure and the protection type to: – NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) – CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) – UL 50 – CSA-C22. resistant to sleet and ice UL/CSA type 4 dust-tight. rain-tight. oil-tight. resistant to sleet and ice UL/CSA type 3 R Rain-proof. A precise comparison is not possible since the degree of protection tests and the evaluation criteria differ. 94-M91 (2006) – NEMA 250 -20031) Comparable IP protection types to IEC/EN 60529 DIN 40050 UL/CSA type 1 General purpose IP20 UL/CSA type 4 X dust-tight. rain-tight 1) IP22 IP55 IP53 IP67 9 IP24 IP54 IP55 IP54 IP66 NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association 9-39 . rain-tight. rain-tight UL/CSA type 5 drip-tight. dust-tight UL/CSA type 6 rain-tight. immersible. watertight. driptight.corrosion-resistant. water-tight. driptight Comparable IP protection types to IEC/EN 60529 DIN 40050 IP66 UL/CSA type 2 Drip-tight UL/CSA type 3 Dust-tight.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America Protection types for electrical equipment for North America Terms German/English: General purpose: tropfdicht: staubdicht: regendicht: regensicher: wettersicher: wasserdicht: eintauchbar: eisbeständig: hagelbeständig: korrosionsbeständig: öldicht: general purpose drip-tight dust-tight rain-tight rain-proof weather-proof water-tight submersible ice resistant sleet resistant corrosion resistant oil-tight 9 9-40 .

519 0.367 13.01 107.324 0.2 95 50 70 35 4 6 10 16 25 mm2 (nearest standard size) 0.31 5.261 8.43 85.5 9 9-41 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America North American cable cross-sections Conversion of North American cable cross sections into mm2 USA/Canada AWG Europe mm2 (exact) 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 (0) 2/0 (00) 3/0 (000) 4/0 (0000) 0.67 33.15 26.49 67.08 3.41 53.30 21.5 0.62 42.75 1.823 1.4 0.31 2.

cable sizes are often given in “MCM”: 250 000 circular mills = 250 MCM 9-42 .000 127 152 177 203 228 253 279 304 329 355 380 405 456 507 500 300 240 mm2 (nearest standard size) 120 150 185 9 In addition to “circular mills”.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Export to the world market and to North America North American cable cross-sections USA/Canada kcmil Europe mm2 (exact) 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 900 1.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 9 9-43 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 9 9-44 .

formulae.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Page Marking of electrical equipment Protective measures Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors Electrically critical equipment of machines Measures for risk reduction Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors Rated motor currents Conductors Formulea Standard international units 10-2 10-5 10-13 10-21 10-26 10-28 10-34 10-38 10-40 10-43 10-50 10-54 10 10-1 .

page 10-3. • Relays remain K and are numbered from 1 to n. e.: K91M becomes Q21.: timer relay K1T becomes K1. g. g. which deviate from the standard to some extent. To simplify maintenance. • Circuit-breakers with the main function of protection are still marked with Q. • The marking of connection terminals are not readable from the right. • A second code letter for the marking of the use of the equipment is not given. In contrast to the previously used designation. parts lists. 10 10-2 . • Contactors are newly marked with Q and numbered from 11 to nn. Moeller has introduced companyspecific stipulations for implementing the standard. The marking appears in a suitable position as close as possible to the circuit symbol. circuit diagrams. This provides a great deal of freedom in the choice of a device’s identifying letter. it is now the function of the electrical apparatus within the circuit that determines its identifying letter. Selected equipment with a comparison of the Moeller used code letters old – new a table. They are numbered from 1 to 10 from the top left. instructions). tables Marking of electrical equipment Marking according to DIN EN 61346-2:2000-12 (IEC 61346-2:2000) Moeller has decided to apply the above standard over a transitional period. e. formulae. Example for a resistor • Normal current limiter: R • Heater resistor: E • Measuring resistor: B In addition. The marking forms the link between the equipment in the installations and the various circuit documents (wiring diagrams.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. the marking can also be applied in full or in part on or near to the equipment.

inverting amplifier Meters Code letter new T C C V F B F T G Q G E P P K K Q Q K R M T P 10 10-3 . signal fuse ) Frequency inverters Generators Soft starters UPS Lamps Optical and acoustic indicators Signal lamps Auxiliary relays Relay Semiconductor contactors Contactor Timing relays Reactor coil Motor Buffer amplifier.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Marking of electrical equipment Code letter old B C D E F F F G G G G H H H K K K K K L M N P Example for electrical equipment Measuring transducer Capacitors Memory device Electro filter Bimetal release Pressure switches Fuses (fine. HH. formulae.

formulae.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Marking of electrical equipment Code letter old Q Q Q Q Q R R R S S S S T T Example for electrical equipment Switch-disconnector Circuit-breaker for protection Motor-protective circuit-breakers Star-delta switches Disconnectors Variable resistor Measurement resistor Heating resistor Control circuit devices Pushbutton actuators Position switches Switches Voltage transformers Current transformer Transformers Frequency converter Diodes Rectifier Transistors EMC filter Suppressors and arc quenching devices Code letter new Q Q Q Q Q R B E S S B S T T T T R T K K F 10 T U V V V Z Z 10-4 .

formulae. protection against indirect contact and protection against both direct and indirect contact. Protective measures Protection against direct as well as indirect contact Protection against direct contact Protection against indirect contact Protection by extra-low voltage: – SELV – PELV Protection by insulation of active parts Protection by covering or encapsulating Protection by automatic disconnection of the power supply Protective insulation (Total insulation) k 10 Protection by partitioning Protection by non-conductive spaces Protection by distancing Protection by non-earthed local equipotential bonding Protective separation Protection must be ensured by either a) the equipment itself or b) the use of protective measures when erecting the installation or c) a combination of a) and b). • Protection against direct contact These are all the measures for the protection of personnel and working animals from dangers which may arise from contact with live parts of electrical equipment. • Protection against indirect contact This is the protection of personnel and working animals from dangers which may arise from accidental contact with components or extraneous conductive parts. tables Protective measures Protection against electrical shock to IEC 364-4-41/VDE 0100 Part 410 A distinction is drawn here between protection against direct contact. 10-5 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Protective measures Protection against indirect contact by means of disconnection or indication The conditions for disconnection are determined by the type of system in use and the protective device selected. independent of the earthing of the power supply (system earth) 10 a PE IT network L1 L2 L3 c b PE I: All live parts isolated from earth or one point connected to earth via an impedance T: Chassis directly earthed. formulae. independent of the earthing of the power supply (system earth) a System earth b Chassis c Impedance 10-6 . Systems to IEC 364-3/VDE 0100 Part 310 Earth continuity type systems TN system L1 L2 L3 N PE b a Meaning of designation T: Direct earthing of a point (system earth) N:Chassis directly connected to the system earth TT system L1 L2 L3 N b T: Direct earthing of a point (system earth) T: Chassis directly earthed.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410 Type of distribution system Protection with Overcurrent protective device TN system

Circuit principle TN-S system separated neutral and earth conductors throughout the system
L1 L2 L3 N PE

Description so far

Condition for disconnection Zs X Ia F U0 Zs = Impedance of the fault circuit Ia = current, which causes disconnection in: • F5s • F 0.2 s in circuits up to 35 A with sockets and hand-held components which can be moved U0 = rated voltage against earthed conductor

Fuses Miniature circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers

TN-C system Neutral conductor and protection functions are combined throughout the system in a single PEN conductor.
L1 L2 L3 PEN

Protective multiple earthing

10

10-7

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410 Type of distribution system Protection with Overcurrent protective device TN system

Circuit principle TN-C-S system Neutral conductor and protection functions are in a part of the system combined in a single PEN conductor
L1 L2 L3 N PE(N)

Description so far

Condition for disconnection

Residual-current protective device

L1 L2 L3 N PE(N)

Residualcurrent protective circuit

10
Residual voltage protection device (in special case) Insulation monitoring device * a table, page 10-12

Zs X IDn F U0 IDn = Rated fault current U0 = Maximum permissible touch voltage*: (F 50 V AC, F 120 V DC)

10-8

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410 Type of distribution system Protection with Overcurrent protective device Fuses Miniature circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers TT system

Circuit principle
L1 L2 L3 N PE

Description so far

Conditions for indication/disconnection RA X Ia F UL RA = Earthing resistance of conductive parts of the chassis Ia = Current which causes automatic disconnection in F 5 s UL = Maximum permissible touch voltage*: (F 50 V AC, F 120 V DC) RA X IΔn F UL IΔn = Rated fault current

Protective earth
PE PE

Residual-current protective device

L1 L2 L3 N F1 F1 F1 L1 L2 L3 N

Residual-current protective circuit

10

PE

PE

PE

Residual-voltage protective device (for special cases)

FU PE

L1 L2 L3 N

Residualvoltage protective circuit

RA: max. 200 O

* a table, page 10-12

10-9

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410 Type of distribution system Protection with Insulation monitoring device Overcurrent protective device TT system

Circuit principle –

Description so far

Conditions for indication/disconnection

L1 L2 L3 PE

Feed back to protective multiple earthing

10

RA X Id F UL (1) ZS X Ia F Uo (2) RA = Earthing resistance of all conductive parts connected to an earth Id = Fault current in the event of the first fault with a negligible impedance between a phase conductor and the protective conductor or element connected to it UL = Maximum permissible touch voltage*: F 50 V AC, F 120 V DC

* a table, page 10-12

10-10

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
Protective devices and conditions for disconnection to IEC 364-4-1/VDE 0100 Part 410 Type of distribution system Protection with Residual current protective device
F1 F1

IT network

Circuit principle
L1 L2 L3

Description so far Residualcurrent protective circuit

Conditions for indication/disconnection RA X IΔn F UL IΔn = Rated fault current

PE

PE

Residual voltage protective device (for special cases)

L1 L2 L3 FU FU PE PE

Residualvoltage protective circuit

RA: max. 200 O

Insulation monitoring device
Z<

L1 L2 L3 PE

Protectiveconductor system

a additional potential equalisation * a table, page 10-12

R X Ia F UL R = Resistance between components and extraneous conductive parts which can be touched simultaneously

10

10-11

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Protective measures
The protective device must automatically disconnect the faulty part of the installation. At no part of the installation must there be a touch voltage or an effective duration greater than that specified in the table below. The internationally agreed limit voltage at a maximum disconnect time of 5 s is 50 V AC or 120 V DC.

Maximum permissible effective duration dependent on touch voltage to IEC 364-4-41 Anticipated touch voltage
t [s] 5.0

Max. permissible disconnection time [s]

2.0 1.0 0.5

AC eff [V] < 50 50 75

DC eff [V] < 120 120 140 160 175 200 250 310

·

5.0 1.0 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.03

0.2 0.1 0.05

90 110 150

10
0.02 50 100 200 300 400 U [V]

220 280

10-12

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Overcurrent protective devices must be used to protect cable and conductors against excessive Overload protection Overload protection means providing protective devices which will interrupt overload currents in the conductors of a circuit before they can cause temperature rises which may damage the conductor insulation, the terminals and connections or the area around the conductors. For the protection of conductors against overload the following conditions must be fulfilled (source: DIN VDE 0100-430) IB F In F IZ I2 F 1,45 IZ IB Anticipated operating current of the circuit IZ Current carrying capacity of conductor or cable In Rated current of protective device Note: For adjustable protective devices, In corresponds to the value set. I2 The current which causes tripping of the protective device under the conditions specified in the equipment regulations (high test current). warming, which may result both from operational overloading and from short-circuit.

Operational current

Charactistics of protective device

Arrangement of protection devices for overload protection Protection devices for overload protection must be fitted at the start of every circuit and at every point where the current-carrying capacity is reduced unless an upstream protection device can ensure protection.

yI z cit pa ca ing rry -ca s nt lue rre va I B Cu r ce en cto fer du Re con of

1.

45
z

I
A

10

te Ra

d-

or

t se

g tin

cu

In nt rre ing pp Tri

I

I2 nt rre cu

10-13

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Note: Reasons for the current-carrying capacity being reduced: Reduction of the conductor cross-section, a different installation method, different conductor insulation, a different number of conductors. Protective devices for overload protection must not be fitted if interruption of the circuit could Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection means providing protective devices which will interrupt shortcircuit currents in the conductors of a circuit before they can cause a temperature rise which may damage the conductor insulation, the terminals and connections, or the area around the cables and conductors. In general, the permissible disconnection time t for short circuits of up to 5 s duration can be specified approximately using the following equation: With very short permissible disconnection times (< 0,1 s) the product from the equation k2 x S2 must be greater than the I2 x t value of the current-limiting device stated by manufacturer. Note: This condition is met provided that there is a cable protective fuse up to 63 A rated current present and the smallest cable cross-section to be protected is at least 1.5 mm2 Cu. Arrangement of protective devices for protection in the event of a short-circuit. Protective devices for protection in the event of a short-circuit must be fitted at the start of every circuit and at every point at which the shortcircuit current-carrying capacity is reduced unless a protective device fitted upstream can ensure the necessary protection in the event of a short circuit. prove hazardous. The circuits must be laid out in such a way that no possibility of overload currents occurring need be considered. Examples: • • • • Energizing circuits for rotating machines Feeder circuits of solenoids Secondary circuits of current transformers Circuits for safety purposes

10

S 2 t = ⎛ kx - ⎞ or ⎝ T⎠

I2 x t = k2 x S2

The meaning of the symbols is as follows: t: Permissible disconnection time in the event of short-circuit in s S: Conductor cross-section in mm2 I: Current in the cast of short-circuit in A k: Constants with the values – 115 for PVC-insulated copper conductors – 74 for PVC-insulated aluminium conductors – 135 for rubber-insulated copper conductors – 87 for rubber-insulated aluminium conductors – 115 for soft-solder connections in copper conductors
10-14

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Note: Causes for the reduction in the short-circuit current-carrying capacity can be: Reduction of the conductor cross-section, other conductor insulation. Short-circuit protection must not be provided where an interruption of the circuit could prove hazardous.

Protection of the phase conductors and the neutral conductor
Protection of the phase conductors Overcurrent protection devices must be provided in every phase conductor: they must disconnect the conductor in which the overcurrent occurs, but not necessarily also disconnect the other live conductors. Note: Where the disconnection of an individual phase conductor could prove hazardous, as for example, with three-phase motors, suitable precautions must be taken. Motor-protective circuit-breakers and circuit-breakers disconnect in three poles as standard. Protection of the neutral conductor: 1. In installations with directly earthed neutral point (TN or TT systems) Where the cross-section of the neutral conductor is less than that of the phase conductors, an overcurrent monitoring device appropriate to its cross-section is to be provided in the neutral conductor; this overcurrent monitoring device must result in the disconnection of the phase conductors but not necessarily that of the neutral conductor. An overcurrent monitoring device is not necessary where: • the neutral conductor is protected in the event of a short circuit by the protective device for the phase conductors • the largest current which can flow through the neutral conductor is, in normal operation, considerably less than the current-carrying capacity of this conductor. Note: This second condition is met provided that the power transferred is divided as evenly as possible among the phase conductors, for example where the total power consumption of the load connected between phase and neutral conductors, lamps and sockets is much less than the total power transferred via the circuit. The cross-section of the neutral conductor must not be less than the values in the table on the next page. 2.In installations without a directly earthed neutral point (IT system) Where it is necessary for the neutral conductor to be included, an overcurrent monitoring device must be provided in the neutral conductor of each circuit, to cause disconnection of all live conductors in the relevant circuit (including the neutral conductor). The overcurrent monitoring device may however be omitted where the neutral conductor in question is protected against short circuit by an upstream protective device, such as in the incoming section of the installation. Disconnection of the neutral conductor Where disconnection of the neutral conductor is specified, the protective device used must be designed in such a way that the neutral conductor cannot under any circumstances be disconnected before the phase conductors and reconnected again after them. 4-pole NZM circuit-breakers always meet these conditions.

10

10-15

10

10-16 NYY, NYCWY, NYKY, NYM, NYMZ, NYMT, NYBUY, NHYRUZY E B1 B2 C On or under the wall surface, under plaster In electrical conduit or cable channel Multi-core cable Direct installation exposed Single-core cable

Current-carrying capacity and protection of cables and conductors with PVC insulation to DIN VDE 0298-4, at 25 °C ambient temperature

Type of cable or conductor

NYM, NYBUY, NHYRUZY, NYIF, H07V-U, H07V-R, H07V-K, NYIFY

Type of installation

A1

In heat-insulating walls, in conduit under the surface

d

d

0.3 d

0.3 d

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors

Multi-core cable under the surface

Single wires in conduit on the wall surface

Multi-core cable in conduit on the wall surface or on the floor

Multi-core cable Spur wiring in the wall or under plaster

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Number of cores

2 3 2 3 2 3 Ib F In F Iz (Ib: Operating current of the circuit). Circuit-breakers and switchdisconnectors fulfil this condition. For overcurrent protective devices with other tripping currents, only the following condition applies:

2 3 2 3 Current-carrying capacity Iz in A for 25 C ambient temperature and 70 C operating temperature. For the allocation of overcurrent protective devices apply the following conditions Ib F In F Iz and I2 F 1.45 Iz t. For overcurrent protection devices with a tripping current of I2 F In only apply the condition:

In F --------- ⋅ I n ; =

1,45 x

Iz In

Continue
B2 C E

Type of installatio n 3 2 3 2 3 2 3

A1

B1

Number of cores

2

3

2

Copper conductor crosssection in mm2 In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In Iz In 16 25 32 40 50 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 253 250 – – 219 200 – – – – 181 160 – – – 142 125 – – – – – – – 118 100 117 100 101 100 – – – – 94 80 95 80 82 80 119 146 72 63 72 63 65 63 90 53 50 53 50 50 50 67 63 80 100 125 – – – – 38 35 39 35 35 35 49 40 43 63 81 102 126 – – – – 30 25 30 25 28 25 37 35 35 22 20 22 20 20 20 28 25 25 25 35 40 63 80 100 125 – – – – 16.5 16 16.5 16 15 13 21 20 18.5 16 21 29 39 51 70 94 125 154 – – – – 20 25 35 50 63 80 125 125 – – – –

Iz

In

Iz

In

Iz

Iz

In

1.5

16.5

16

14

13

18.5

19.5 27 36 46 64 85 107 134 – – – –

16 25 35 40 63 80 100 125 – – – –

2.5

21

20

19

16

25

4

28

25

25

25

34

6

36

35

33

32

43

10

49

40

45

40

60

16

65

63

59

50

81

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors

25

85

80

77

63

107

35

105

100

94

80

133

50

126

125

114

100

160

70

160

160

144

125

204

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

95

193

160

174

160

246

120

223

200

199

160

285

For overcurrent protective devices whose rated current In does not conform to the values given in the table, select the next lower available rated current value.

10-17

10

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08

Standards, formulae, tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors
Minimum cross section for protective conductors to DIN VDE 0100-510 (1987-06, t), DIN VDE 0100-540 (1991-11) Protective conductor or PEN Phase conductors mm2 up to 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 400
1)

Protective conductor3) laid Protected Unprotected2)

Insulated power cables mm2 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 16 25 35 50 70 70 95 – – –

0,6/1-kV cable with 4 conductors mm2 – – – 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 16 25 35 50 70 70 95 120 150 185

mm2 Cu 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 16 25 35 50 70 70 95 120 150 185

Al 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 10 16 16 16 25 35 50 70 70 95 120 150 185

mm2 Cu 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 10 16 16 16 25 35 50 70 70 95 120 150 185

10

PEN conductor f 10 mm2 Cu or 18 mm2 Al. 2) It is not permissible to lay aluminium conductors without protection. 3) With phase conductors of f 95 mm2 or more, it is advisable to use non-insulted conductors

10-18

89 0.77 0.29 1.95 0.58 0.41 – – – 1.00 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.45 PVC 70 °C EPR 80 °C 10 1) Higher ambient temperatures in accordance with information given by the manufacturer 10-19 .91 0.87 0.94 0.55 0.00 0. to be used for the current-carrying capacity of wiring or cables in air to VDE 0298 Part 4.18 1.15 1.71 0.82 0.17 1. Insulation material1) Permissible operational temperature Ambient temperature °C 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 NR/SR 60 °C Conversion factors 1.71 0.71 0.79 0.50 – – 1.63 0.61 0.06 1.00 0.84 0. formulae.22 1.10 1.05 1.12 1. tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors Conversion factors When the ambient temperature is not 30 °C.08 1.14 1.22 1.

75 9 0.41 – – 20 0.00 0.80 0.70 0.97 0.80 0.50 0.38 – – 1.70 0.70 12 0.79 0.81 0.57 0.80 – – – 10 10-20 .40 0.72 0.64 0.40 0.83 0.45 – – 15 16 0.87 0.77 0.00 0.75 0.85 0.65 0.75 6 0.65 0.68 0.00 – – – 1.73 0.81 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.80 0.70 0.00 1.80 4 0.95 2 0.79 0.80 0.85 0.78 0.70 0. formulae.61 0.60 0.90 3 0.80 0.84 0.55 0.80 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.72 0. tables Overcurrent protection of cables and conductors Converstion factors to VDE 0298 part 4 Grouping of several circuits Arrangement Number of circuits 1 1 Embedded or enclosed 2 Fixed to walls or floors 3 Fixed to ceilings 4 Fixed to cable trays arranged horizontally or vertically 5 Fixed to cable trays or consoles 1.

as well as tests to ensure faultless function and the effectiveness of protective measures. therefore there is no restriction on their use as mains isolating devices. The degree of possible danger is to estimated by risk assessment (EN 1050). Only circuit-breakers may be used as remotely-operated switches. Safety requirements regarding the protection of personnel. formulae. They must be provided with an additional handle and be lockable in the Off position. Its Off position must be lockable and must not be indicated until the specified clearances and creepage distances between all contacts have been achieved. It is permissible for an interlock to be removable by an electrician using a tool. Where an interlock has been removed.g. Such personnel is not obliged to disable the mains isolating device before opening the enclosure. in order to search for a fault. e. Live parts must be protected against direct contact in accordance with IEC 50274 or VDE 0660 part 514. Mutual interlocking must be provided where a hazard may result from only one mains isolating device being switched off. Where there are several incomers. it must still be possible to switch off the mains isolating device. Mains isolating device (main switches) Every machine must be equipped with a manually-operated main switch. The tripped position of circuit-breakers is not regarded as a switch position. henceforth referred to as a mains isolating device. machines and material according to the European Machinery Directive are stressed under the heading “Safety of machines”. each one must have a mains isolating device. the restrictions mentioned in the previous paragraph cease to apply because the door can only be opened when the mains isolating device is switched off. tables Electrically critical equipment of machines Extract from IEC/EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Teil 1) This world wide binding standard is used for the electrical equipment of machines. The following paragraphs are an extract from the Standard. Where the mains isolating device is interlocked with the door. Stardelta. reversing and multi-speed switches are not permissible for use as mains isolating devices. 10 10-21 . must be sufficient to simultaneously disconnect the stalled current of the largest motor in the machine and the total current drawn by all the other loads in normal operation. provided that for the type of machine to be equipped there is no product standard (Type C). It must be possible to isolate the entire electrical equipment of the machine from the mains using the mains isolating device.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. The breaking capacity Protection against electric shock The following measures must be taken to protect personnel against electric shock: Protection against direct contact This is understood as meaning protection by means of an enclosure which can only be opened by qualified personnel using a key or special tool. engineering and construction. The Standard also includes requirements for equipment. It must have only one On and one Off position with associated stops.

an additional contactor relay with three-wire control in the supply to the control circuit can carry out this function. Overcurrent protection is provided by the protective device at the head of the incoming supply. tables Electrically critical equipment of machines Where it is possible for an enclosure to be opened without using a key and without disconnection of the mains isolating device. Motors which are frequently starting and braking are difficult to protect and often require a special protective device. the fitting of overload relays is always recommended. rapid operational readiness and prevention of singlephasing. An additional measure is the use of protective insulation (protection class II) to IEC/EN 60439-1 or VDE 0660 Part 500. Built-in thermal sensors are particularly suitable for motors with restricted cooling. With contactor controls this requirement can easily be met via self-maintaining circuits. all live parts must at the very least comply with IP 2X or IP XXB degree of protection in accordance with IEC/EN 60529. This difficulty can be avoided by using circuit-breakers. In addition. Overcurrent protection No overcurrent protective device is normally required for the mains supply cable. All other circuits must be protected by means of fuses or circuit-breakers. formulae. For circuits with two-wire control. Protection of equipment Protection in the event of power failure When the power returns following a failure in the supply. protective measures in accordance with IEC 60364 or VDE 0100 must be used. 10 10-22 . Overload protection is recommended for all other motors. with the added benefits of disconnection in all poles. Overload protection of motors Continously operating motors above 0. particularly as protection by stalled rotor.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. Protection against indirect contact This involves prevention of a dangerous touch voltage resulting from faulty insulation. The stipulation for fuses is that replacement must be freely obtainable in the country in which the fuses are used. machines or parts of machines must not start automatically where this would result in a dangerous situation or damage to property.5 kW must be protected against overload. To meet this requirement. Mains isolating devices and motorprotective circuit-breakers with undervoltage releases also reliably prevent automatic restarting on return of voltage.

contactor relays or the undervoltage release of the mains isolating device. Emergency-Stop device Every machine which could potentially cause danger must be equipped with an EmergencyStop device which. the standard EN ISO 13849-1 has been published: “Safety-related parts of control systems Part 1: General rules for design”. the following apply for both Emergency-Stop switch and Emergency control circuit device: • The handle must be red with a yellow background • Emergency-Stop devices must be quickly and easily accessible in the event of danger • The Emergency-Stop function must take precedence over all other functions and operations • It must be possible to determine functional capability by means of tests. it must be clearly discernible to which area an Emergency-Stop device applies Emergency operations The term Emergency-Stop is short and concise. For direct manual operation. formulae. and in a control circuit an Emergency-Stop control circuit device. with live parts in electrical operating areas. 2. and should continue to be used for general usage. Resetting alone must not allow restarting. Emergency-Stop This involves the possibility of stopping dangerous motions as quickly as possible. especially in severe environmental conditions. tables Electrically critical equipment of machines Control functions in the event of a fault A fault in the electrical equipment must not result in a dangerous situation or in damage. Furthermore. The use of risk assessment to EN 13849-1 is dealt with in the Moeller manual “Safety Specifications for Machines and Plant” (Order No. 10 10-23 . TB 0-009). To permit a better assessment of the magnitude of the risk in conjunction with the respective application.e. it must only be possible to restart the machine after local resetting. Suitable measures must be taken to prevent danger from arising. e. in a main circuit may be an Emergency-Stop switch. In order to be able to give a more precise definition here. Actuation of the Emergency-Stop device must result in all current loads which could directly result in danger. IEC/EN 60204-1 describes under the generic term “Emergency operations” two specific functions: 1. Once the Emergency-Stop control circuit device has been actuated. electromechanical devices such as contactors. The expense of using appropriate measures can be extremely high if applied generally.g. then an Emergency-Off device shall be provided. Emergency-Off Where there is a risk of an electric shock by direct contact. being disconnected by deenergization via another device or circuit.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. Emergency-Stop control circuit devices must have a mushroomhead push-button and positively opening contacts. i. It is not clear however from the term EmergencyStop which functions are carried out with this. • Where there is separation into several Emergency-Stop areas.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Electrically critical equipment of machines Colours of push-buttons and their meanings To IEC/EN 60073. formulae. IEC/EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1) Colour RED YELLOW Meaning Emergency Abnormal condition Typical application • Emergency-Stop • Fire fighting Intervention. VDE 0199. to suppress abnormal conditions or to avoid unwanted changes Start from safe conditon Resetting function • Start/ON (preferred) • Stop/OFF • Start/ON • Stop/OFF • Start/ON • Stop/Off (preferred) GREEN BLUE WHITE GREY BLACK Normal Enforced action No specific meaning assigned 10 10-24 .

VDE 0199. IEC/EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1) Colour RED Meaning Emergency Explanation Warning of potential danger or a situation which requires immediate action Typical application • Failure of pressure in the lubricating system • Temperature outside specified (safe) limits • Essential equipment stopped by action of a protective device • Temperature (or pressure) different from normal level • Overload.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. clear way Operator action essential Every meaning: may be used whenever doubt exists about the applicability of the colours RED. or as confirmation BLUE WHITE Enforced action No specific meaning assigned (neutral) 10 Colours of illuminated push-buttons and their meanings Both tables are valid for illuminated pushbuttons. tables Electrically critical equipment of machines Colours of indicator lights and their meanings To IEC/EN 60073. YELLOW or GREEN. formulae. Table 1 relating to the function of the actuators. 10-25 . which is permissible for a limited time • Reset • Cooling liquid circulating • Automatic tank control switched on • Machine ready to be started • Remove obstacle • Switch over to Advance • Motor running • Indication of operating modes YELLOW Abnormal condition Impending critical condition GREEN Normal Indication of safe operating conditions or authorization to proceed.

tables Measures for risk reduction Risk avoidance in a malfunction A fault in the electrical equipment must not result in a dangerous situation or in damage. The use of proven circuits and components L01 L1 L2 The IEC/EN 60204 1 specifies a range of measures which can be taken to reduce danger in the event of a fault.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. ⎧ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎧ ⎪ ⎨ ⎪ ⎩ 0 I K1 K1 10 L02 a All switching functions on the non-earthed side b Use of break devices with positively opening contacts (not to be confused with interlocked opposing contacts) c Shut-down by de-excitation (fail-safe in the event of wire breakage) d Circuit engineering measures which make undesirable operational states in the event of a fault unlikely (in this instance. . simultaneous interruption via contactor and position switch) e Switching of all live conductors to the device to be controlled 10-26 f Chassis earth connection of the control circuit for operational purposes (not used as a protective measure) Redundancy This means the existence of an additional device or system which takes over the function in the event of a fault. formulae. Suitable measures must be taken to prevent danger from arising.

c 21 e 13 14 a 22 K1 d K2 b K1 K2 10 a Functional diversity by combination of N/O and N/C contacts b Diversity of devices due to use of various types of device (here.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. various types of contactor relay) c Safety barrier open d Feedback circuit e Safety barrier closed Performance tests The correct functioning of the equipment can be tested either manually or automatically. formulae. 10-27 . tables Measures for risk reduction Diversity The construction of control circuits according to a range of function principles or using various types of device.

The probe. sphere 12.5 mm 10 2 10-28 . must have suffient distance from dangerous parts.5 mm diameter. The access probe. Protection against contact with live parts with back of hand. formulae. must not fully penetrate. sphere 12. Protection against contact with live parts with a finger. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Degrees of protection for electrical equipment by enclosures. No protection of the equipment against ingress of solid foreign bodies. the second numeral the degree of protection against the ingress of water. must not fully penetrate. must have enough distance from dangerous parts. 1 Protection against solid objects f 50 mm Protection against solid objects f 12. sphere 50 mm diameter.5 mm diameter. 12 mm diameter and 80 mm length. covers and similar to IEC/EN 60529 (VDE 0470 part 1) The designation to indicate degrees of enclosure protection consists of the characteristic letters IP (Ingress Protection) followed by two characteristic numerals. Protection against contact and foreign bodies First numeral 0 Degree of protection Description Not protected Explanation No special protection of persons against accidental contact with live or moving parts. The articulated test finger.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. The first numeral indicates the degree of protection of persons against contact with live parts and of equipment against ingress of solid foreign bodies and dust. The probe.

must not penetrate. 4 5 6 Protection against the ingress of dust Dust-tight 10 Example for stating degree of protection: Characteristic letter First numeral Second numeral IP 4 4 10-29 . The entry probe. 1. 1. must not penetrate. Protection against contact with live parts with a wire. The entry probe. Protection against contact with live parts with a wire. The probe.0 mm diameter. The entry probe. must not penetrate. formulae. Protection against contact with live parts with a wire.0 mm diameter.5 mm Protection against solid objects f 1 mm Protection against accumulation of dust Explanation Protection against contact with live parts with a tool. The probe. must not penetrate.0 mm diameter. 2. The entry probe. must not penetrate. but dust does not enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of the equipment or with safety. must not penetrate. 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. 1. The ingress of dust is not totally prevented.0 mm diameter. 1. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Protection against contact and foreign bodies First nume ral 3 Degree of protection Description Protection against solid objects f 2.5 mm diameter. No entry of dust.0 mm diameter.

2 3 Water falling as a spray at any angle up to 60° from the vertical shall have no harmful effect. Dripping water shall have no harmful effect when the enclosure is tilted at any angle up to 15? from the vertical. Water projected in powerful jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful effect. Ingress of water in harmful quantities shall not be possible when the enclosure is immersed in water under defined conditions of pressure and time. formulae. Water splashed against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful effect. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Protection against water Second numeral 0 1 Degree of protection Description Not protected Protected against vertically dripping water Protected against dripping water when enclosure tilted up to 15? Protected against sprayed water Protected against splashing water Protected against water jets Protected against powerful water jets Protected against the effects of occasional submersion Explanation No special protection Dripping water (vertically falling drops) shall have no harmful effect.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. Water projected by a nozzle against the equipment from any direction shall have no harmful effect. 4 10 5 6 7 10-30 .

Water pressure of 100 bar Water temperature of 80 °C 9K* Protected during cleaning using high-pressure/steam jets * This characteristic numeral originates from DIN 40050 9.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. formulae. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Second numeral 8 Degree of protection Description Protected against the effects of submersion Explanation Ingress of water in harmful quantities must not be possible when the equipment is continuously submerged in water under conditions which are subject to agreement between manufacturer and user. Water which is directed against the enclosure under extremely high pressure from any direction must not have any harmful effects. These conditions must be more stringent than those for characteristic numeral 7. 10 10-31 .

Ue = Rated operational voltage Ur = Recovery voltage. Ic = Switch-off current. t0. 72 VA) Control of electromagnetic loads (above 72 VA) Switch on I Ie U Ue 1 2 6 10 I Ie 1 1 1 1 U Ue 1 1 1 10 Direct current DC-12 DC-13 DC-14 Control of resistive and solid state loads as in optocoupler input circuits Control of electromagnets Control of electromagnetic loads with economy resistors in the circuit 1 1 10 to IEC 60947-5-1. formulae. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Type of current Utilisation catorgory Typical applications: Normal conditions of use I = Switch-on current. Ie = Rated operational current.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. until 95 % of the steady-state current has been reached. EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0600 part 200) 10-32 . U = Voltage. P = Ue x Ie = Rated power in Watts Alternating current AC-12 AC-13 AC-14 AC-15 Control of resistive and solid state loads as in optocoupler input circuits Control of solid state loads with transformer isolation Control of small electromagnetic loads (max.95 = Time in ms.

95 – 10 6 10 I Ie – 1. irrespective of the power consumption.1 1. tables Degrees of protection for electrical equipment Abnormal conditions of use Switch off c I Ie U Ue c Switch on I Ie U Ue c Switch off I Ie U Ue c 0.95 1 ms 6 x P1) 15 ms 1 1 1 1 ms 6 x P1) 15 ms – 1.1 1. Therefore.65 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. 10-33 .1 10 – 6 x P1) 15 ms – 1.1 1.1 U Ue – 1.1 – 0.1 U Ue – 1.1 1.e.3 T0. 6 [ms]/[W] = 300 [ms].3 0.3 T0.3 t0.3 T0.9 0.3 0.95 – 1.1 10 – 6 x P1) 15 ms 10 1) The value “6 x P” results from an empirical relationship that represents most DC magnetic loads to an upper limit of P = 50 W.9 0.1 1.1 1. i. Loads having a power consumption greater than 50 W are assumed to consist of smaller loads in parallel. formulae.65 0.65 0.95 1 1 1 1 I Ie 1 1 1 1 U Ue 1 1 1 0.7 0.1 6 10 I Ie – 1.7 0. 300 ms is to be an upper limit.65 0.1 – 0.

inching Switching of electric discharge lamp controls Switching of incandescent lamps Switching of transformers Switching of capacitor banks Slightly inductive loads in household appliances and similar applications Motor load for household appliances Switching of hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor motors with manual reset of overload releases5) Switching of hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor motors with automatic reset of overload releases5) Switching of squirrel-cage motor with semi-conductor contactors Data as supplied by the manufacturer Verification of electrical lifespan Switch on Ie A All values All values I Ie 1 2. resistance furnaces Slip-ring motors: starting. U = voltage. tables Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters Type of current Utilisation catorgory Typical applications: I = Switch-on current.5 U Ue 1 1 1 1 1 1 Alternating current AC-1 AC-2 AC-3 AC-4 AC-5A AC-5B AC-6A3) Ie F 17 6 Ie > 17 6 Ie F 17 6 Ie > 17 6 10 AC-6B3) AC-7A AC-7B AC-8A AC-8B AC-53a 10-34 . switch-off.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. switch-off during running4) Sqirrel-cage motors: starting. Ic = Switch-off current. switch-off Squirrel-cage motors: stating. plugging. formulae. Ie = Rated operational current. reversing. Ue = Rated operational voltage Ur = Recovery voltage Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads.

45 2) c Ic Ie 1.35 8.95 0.5 1 1 6 6 Ur Ue 1 1 0.35 0.5 1.17 1 1 0.5 1.65 0.52) Ur Ue 1.0 6.95 0.52) Switch off U Ue 1.65 0.05 0.05 1.8 0.65 0.65 0.05 1.65 0.0 1.05 c 0.8 10 8.8 1.0 1.05 1.65 0.35 0.35 1 2.35 0.05 1.05 1) 6.05 1.35 c Switch on Ie A All values All values Ie F 100 Ie > 100 Ie F 100 Ie > 100 I Ie 1.05 1.05 1) 8.05 1.17 0.8 0.05 0.05 1.0 1.35 0.0 1.35 0.05 1.45 2) 1.0 1.45 0.35 0.05 0.65 0.05 1.05 1) 1) 6.05 1.05 1.05 1.45 0.0 6.0 1.0 1.05 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.05 0.5 4 8 8 10 10 3. formulae. tables Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters Verification of switching capacity Switch off c Ic Ie 0.05 0.35 10-35 .05 1) 1) 8.5 4 8 8 10 10 3.45 0.05 1.05 1.45 0.0 1.8 0.

dynamic braking Switching of incandescent lamps Verification of electrical endurance Switch on Ie A All values All values All values I Ie 1 2. Ue = Rated operational voltage. reversing. Ic = Switch-off current.35 for Ie > 100 A. plugging. Ie = Rated operational current. inching. Ur = Recovery voltage Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. Here.5 U Ue 1 1 1 Direct current DC-1 DC-3 DC-5 DC-6 To IEC/EN 947 4-1-60947.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. resistance furnaces Shunt motors: starting. plugging. Tests must be carried out with an incandescent lamp load connected. 10 10-36 . inching. VDE 0660 Part 102 1) 2) 3) c = 0. IEC/EN 60 947-4-1. dynamic braking Series motors: starting. reversing.45 for Ie F 100 A. formulae. tables Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters Type of current Utilization category Typical applications: I = Switch-on current. the test data are to be derived from the AC-3 or AC-4 test values in accordance with TableVIIb. U = voltage.5 2. c = 0.

formulae.5 4 4 1.5 15 2) Switch off Ic Ie 1. tables Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters Verification of switching capacity Switch off L/R ms 1 2 7. Hermetically enclosed refrigerant compressor motor means a combination of a compressor and a motor both of which are housed in the same enclosure with no external shaft or shaft seals. 10 10-37 .05 1.5 2.05 L/R ms 1 2.52) Ur Ue 1.05 1.05 1.5 Ic Ie 1 2.52) U Ue 1.05 1.5 Ur Ue 1 1 1 L/R ms 1 2 7.05 L/R ms 1 2.05 1. the motor running in the refrigerant.5 15 2) 4) 5) Devices for utilization category AC-3 may be used for occasional inching or plugging during a limited period such as for setting up a machine. during this limited time period.5 4 4 1. the number of operations must not exceed a total of five per minute or more than ten in a ten minute period.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.05 1.5 Switch on Ie A All values All values All values I Ie 1.

For load-break switches. U = voltage. tables Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors Type of current Utilization category Typical applications: I = switch-on current. Switch-disconnectors that are suitable for switching motors are also tested according to the criteria stated in a section "Utilisation categories for contactors and motor starters".g. 10-38 . switch-disconnectors and switch-fuse units to IEC/EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660 part 107). formulae. shunt motors) Switching highly inductive loads (e. Ic = Switch-off current. including low overloads (e.g. Ur = Recovery voltage Making and breaking without load Switching resistive loads including low overloads Switching mixed resistive and inductive loads including low overloads Switching motors and other highly inductive loads Alternating current AC-20 A(B)1) AC-21 A(B)1) AC-22 A(B)1) AC-23 A(B)1) Direct current DC-20 A(B)1) DC-21 A(B)1) DC-22 A(B)1) Making and breaking without load Switching resistive loads including low overloads Switching mixed resistive and inductive loads. page 10-34. series motors) 10 1) DC-23 A(B)1) A: Frequent operation. Ue = Rated operational voltage. Ie = Rated operational current.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. B: Occassional operation.

95 0.65 0.35 L/R ms 1) 1.05 1.5 4 4 1.05 1.45 0.05 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.05 1 2. formulae.5 15 1.05 1.05 1.5 4 4 1.05 1.05 1.35 L/R ms 1) 1.05 U Ue 1) 0.05 1.05 Ur Ue 1) 0.05 1.05 1 2.5 15 10 10-39 . tables Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors Verification of switching capacity Switch on Ie A I Ie U Ue c Switch off Ic Ie Ur Ue c All values All values All values Ie F100 Ie > 100 Ie A All values All values All values All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1.05 1.5 3 10 10 I Ie 1) 1.45 0.95 0.5 3 8 8 Ic Ie 1) 1.65 0.

m. fuses are to be selected according to their current rating. D. fuses (NH type) with aM characteristics. larger fuses will be required.O. motors with normal inner and outer surface cooling.b.L.58 x rated current. The rated motor currents are for standard 1500 r. tables Rated motor currents Rated motor currents of three-phase motors (guideline values for cage motors) Smallest possible short-circuit protection for three-phase motor The maximum value is determined by the switchgear or overload relay. Rated fuse currents for y/d starting also apply to three-phase motors with slip-ring rotors.c. For higher rated currents. Table applies for time-lag and gL fuses (VDE 0636). In the case of low-voltage h.p. Motor overload relay in phase current: set to 0. Maximum starting current: 2 x rated current Maximum starting time: 15 sec. y/d starting: 10 10-40 . formulae. starting: Maximum starting current: 6 x rated current Maximum starting time: 5 sec.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. starting currents and/or longer starting times.

37 0.81 0.87 0.84 0.54 0.3 36 41 55 68 81 99 134 161 196 231 279 349 437 544 683 769 – – – Fuse Direct starting A 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 6 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 315 400 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 – – – y/d A – – 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 10 16 16 25 32 40 63 80 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 630 – – – – – – – y/d A – – – – 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 10 16 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 800 – – – 10-41 10 .7 11.7 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.5 7.5 1.6 6.6 26.4 38 51 63 71 96 117 141 173 233 279 342 401 486 607 – – – – – – – Fuse Direct starting A 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 10 10 16 20 25 32 32 50 80 100 125 125 200 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 630 800 – – – – – – – 400 V Rated motor current A 0.87 0.88 0.82 0.1 1.86 0.3 8.7 0. formulae.88 0.86 0.88 0.87 0.84 0.5 2.82 0.25 0.88 h [%] 58 60 60 62 62 66 69 74 74 74 78 80 83 86 87 87 88 88 92 92 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 A 0.82 0.5 14.87 0.85 0.87 0.86 0.7 0.2 4.31 0.7 3.75 0.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 400 450 500 560 630 cos v 0.7 0.88 0.86 0.84 0.6 5 6.4 2 2.6 0.2 21.9 2.55 0.6 8.72 1.09 0.8 19.75 1.21 0.7 0.86 0.7 29.12 0.5 11.18 0.37 0.1 1.8 1.86 0.72 0.82 0.81 0.41 0.84 0.04 1.06 0.3 15.79 0.81 0.6 3. tables Rated motor currents Motor rating 230 V Rated motor current kW 0.5 11 15 18.2 3 4 5.

9 6.8 12.88 0.86 0.3 6.17 0.87 0.5 2.9 3.5 7.1 17.4 28.85 0.84 0.6 17 20.5 11 15 18.7 0.1 1.1 1.81 0.79 0.86 0.55 0.8 4.81 0.12 0.82 0.9 1.4 23.5 2.2 1.12 0.9 4 5.25 0.7 0.84 0.7 0.18 0. formulae.86 0.8 32 39 47 58 78 93 114 134 162 202 253 316 396 446 491 550 618 Fuse Direct starting A 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 10 16 16 20 25 32 32 50 63 80 80 100 160 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 630 630 800 800 y/d A – – – – – – 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 10 16 20 25 25 32 50 63 63 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 400 630 630 630 630 10 .7 0.87 0.2 3 4 5.87 0.33 0. tables Rated motor currents Motor rating 500 V Rated motor current kW 0.88 0.84 0.5 8.84 0.9 1.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 400 450 500 560 630 10-42 cos v 0.87 0.9 33 44 54 65 79 107 129 157 184 224 279 349 436 547 615 – – – Fuse Direct starting A 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 10 16 16 20 25 32 50 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800 800 – – – 690 V y/d A – – – – – 2 2 2 4 4 4 6 10 16 16 20 25 32 32 50 63 80 80 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 630 – – – Rated motor current A 0.7 0.7 0.5 0.88 h [%] 58 60 60 62 62 66 69 74 74 74 78 80 83 86 87 87 88 88 92 92 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 A 0.81 0.82 0.86 0.9 23.86 0.88 0.24 0.82 0.1 2.25 0.09 0.18 0.75 1.82 0.35 0.7 0.86 0.1 2.48 0.8 9 12.06 0.88 0.5 2.87 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.37 0.75 0.72 0.

10 10-43 .5 32. 4-core mm2 H03VV-F3 x 0.5 Cable grommets For direct and quick cable entry into an enclosure and as a plug.5 25.75 NYM 4x 10 H03VV-F3 x 0. with integrated pushthrough diaphragm • PE and thermoplasti c elastomer. Membrane grommets metric Cable entry Hole diamter mm M16 M20 M25 M32 16.75 NYM 4 x 16/5 x 10 KT-M16 KT-M20 KT-M25 KT-M32 Cable grommet • IP66.5 H03VV-F3 x 0.75 NYM 5 x 1.5/5 x 2.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. halogen free Detailed information on material properties a table. Cable external diameter mm 1–9 1 – 13 1 – 18 1 – 25 For use with NYM/NYY cables.5 20. formulae.75 NYM 1 x 16/3 x 1.5 H03VV-F3 x 0. page 10-45. tables Conductors Wiring and cable entries with grommets Cable entry into closed devices is considerably simplified and improved by using cable grommets.

5 H05VV-F3 x 1.5/5 x 4 NYM 5 x 2. halogen-free M25 M32 M32 M40 12. page 10-45. 14 or 15 mm long thread. 12. 10.75 NYM 1 x 2.5 20.5 32. Detailed information on material properties a table.5 16.5/5 x 2. formulae.5 50.5 – 10 6 – 13 9 – 17 13 – 21 18 – 25 16 – 28 21 – 35 34 – 48 For use with NYM/NYY cables.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.5 32.5 mm2 H03VV-F3 x 0.5 63.5/3 x 4 NYM 5 x 1. tables Conductors Wiring and cable entries with cable glands Metric cable glands to EN 50262 with 9.5 NYM 1 x 16/3 x 1.5 40. 10-44 . 4-core Cableglands Type mm M12 M16 M20 • With lock nut and built-in strain relief • IP68 up to 5 bar. Cable glands Cable entry Hole diamter Cable external diameter mm 3 –7 4.5/5 x 6 NYM 5 x 10 NYM 5 x 16 NYM 5 x 16 NYM 4 x 35/5 x 25 NYM 4 x 35 V-M12 V-M16 V-M20 V-M25 V-M32 V-M32G1) V-M40 V-M50 V-M63 10 M50 M63 1) Does not correspond to EN 50262.5 H05VV-F4 x 2.5 25.5 H05VV-F5 x 2. polyamide.

• Petrol. • water V-M… Polyamide. RAL 7035 up to IP66 Resistant to: • Alcohol. • Diesel oil. 120 °C Glow wire test 750 °C according to EN 60695-2-11 V2 Danger of stress fracture Heat resistance Flame retardant Flammability to UL94 Relative high –40 °C…80 °C. • Weak alkalis. 100 °C – – 10 10-45 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. short-time up to approx. • Weak acids. • Oils. • paraffin. tables Conductors Material characteristics KT-M… Material Colour Protection type Chemical resistant Polyethylene and thermoplastic elastomer Grey. • Greases. RAL 7035 IP68 up to 5 bar (30 min) Resistant to: • Acetone. formulae. halogen free Grey. • Solvents for paints and lacquers low –20 °C…100 °C. short-time up to approx. • Animal and plant-based oils.

tables Conductors External diameter of conductors and cables Number of conductors Cross-section mm2 2 x 1. max.5 4 x 2.5 24 x 1.5 3 x 1.5 2 x 2.5 5 x 2.5 4 x 4 4 x 6 4 x 10 4 x 16 4 x 25 4 x 35 4 x 50 4 x 70 4 x 95 4 x 120 4 x 150 4 x 185 4 x 240 5 x 1. 10 11 9 10 11 13 13 11 10 12 10 10 11 13 11 12 13 17 – 14 15 18 – 16 18 20 – 23 20 22 – 25 11 13 9 11 12 14 11 13 14 16 – 15 16 17 – 17 18 19 – 23 22 23 – 27 27 27 – 32 30 28 – 36 – 30 – 42 – 34 – 47 – 39 – 53 – 42 – – – 47 – – – 55 – – – 62 – – 11 14 12 14 13 15 14 17 15 17 – 19 17 19 – 21 20 21 – 26 25 23 – 30 – 15 – – – 18 – – – 20 – – – 25 – – NYCY NYCWY mm 12 14 13 14 15 16 18 22 13 15 16 18 21 24 30 31 34 38 43 46 52 60 70 15 17 18 20 – – – – – – 10 NYM: sheathed conductor NYY: plastic-sheathed cable H05RR-F: light rubber-sheathed flexible cable (NLH + NSH) NYCY: cable with concentric conductor and plastic sheath NYCWY: cable with concentric wave-form conductor and plastic sheath 10-46 .5 Approximate external diameter (average of various makes) NYM NYY H05 H07 RR-F RN-F mm mm mm mm max. formulae.5 3 x 2.5 16 x 1. max.5 5 x 4 5 x 6 5 x 10 5 x 16 8 x 1.5 10 x 1.5 3 x 4 3 x 6 3 x 10 3 x 16 4 x 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.

X G .5 mm2 without green/yellow protective conductor A07RN-F3 x 2..75 black H A 03 05 07 V R S V R N J T H H2 10 -U -R -K -F -H -Y .. formulae. non-separable conductor Type of conductor Solid Stranded Flexible with cables for fixed installation Flexible with flexible cables Highly flexible with flexible cables Tinsel cord Number of cores Protective conductor Without protective conductors With protective conductors Rated conductor cross-section Examples for complete cable designation PVC-sheathed wire.75 mm2 flexible. tables Conductors Cables and wiring.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. 2. H05V-K 0. 0. separable conductor Flat.. type abbreviation Identification of specification Harmonized specification Recognized national type Rated operational voltage UO/U 300/300V 300/500V 450/750V Insulating material PVC Natural and/or synthetic rubber Silicon rubber Sheathing material PVC Natural and/or synthetic rubber Polychloroprene rubber Fibre-glass braid Textile braid Special construction feature Flat.5 10-47 . Heavy rubber-sheathed cable. 3-core..

tables Conductors Rated operational currents and short-circuit currents for standard transformers Rated voltage 400/230 V Un Short-circuit voltage UK Rating Rated current In kVA 50 63 100 125 160 200 A 72 91 144 180 231 289 361 455 577 722 909 1155 1443 1804 2309 2887 3608 4% Short-circuit current IK ’’ A 1967 2478 3933 4916 6293 7866 9833 12390 15733 19666 24779 – – – – – – A – 1652 2622 3278 4195 5244 6555 8260 10489 13111 16519 20977 26221 32777 41954 52443 65553 6% Rated current In A 55 69 110 137 176 220 275 346 440 550 693 880 1100 1375 1760 2199 2749 525 V 10 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 10-48 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. formulae.

tables Conductors 690/400 V 4% Short-circuit current IK’’ A 1498 1888 2997 3746 4795 5993 7492 9440 11987 14984 18879 – – – – – – 6% Rated current In A – 1259 1998 2497 3197 3996 4995 6293 7991 9989 12586 15983 19978 24973 31965 39956 49945 A 42 53 84 105 134 167 209 264 335 418 527 669 837 1046 1339 1673 2092 4% Short-circuit current IK ’’ A 1140 1436 2280 2850 3648 4560 5700 7182 9120 11401 14365 – – – – – – 6% A – 958 1520 1900 2432 3040 3800 4788 6080 7600 9576 12161 15201 19001 24321 30402 38002 10 10-49 . formulae.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.

+ .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.1. tables Formulea Ohm's Law U = I × R [V] U I = -..[ Ω ] R1 + R2 f = Frequency [Hz] v = Phase angle With 3 parallel resistances: R1 × R2 × R3 R g = -------------------------------------------------------------.[ A ] R U R = -.+ ---. [ 1 ⁄ Ω ] R R1 R2 R3 1 1.+ ---.1.11 -.= ---.+ .+ ---..= ---.[ Ω ] I Resistance of a piece of wire l R = -----------.= ---...[ Ω ] cosv 10 L = Inductance [H] C = Capacitance [F] XL = Inductive impedance [O] XC = Capacitive impedance [O] Parallel connection of resistances With 2 parallel resistances: R1 × R2 R g = ---------------. [ 1 ⁄ Ω ] Z Z1 Z2 Z3 10-50 .5 -------------2 Ωmm l = Length of conductor [m] z = Conductivity [m/Omm2] A = Conductor cross section [mm2] Resistors Transformer Capacitors Impedance XL = 2 × π × f × L [ Ω ] 1 X C = ----------------------------.+ ---.[ Ω ] R1 × R2 + R2 × R3 + R1 × R3 General calculation of resistances: 1.[ Ω ] 2×π×f×C Z = R + ( XL – XC ) 2 2 RZ = ---------.1-..+ . formulae..[ Ω ] χ×A Copper: Aluminium: Iron: Zinc: m χ = 57 -------------2 Ωmm m χ = 33 -------------2 Ωmm m χ = 8.+ ---.3 -------------2 Ωmm m χ = 15. [ 1 ⁄ Ω ] X1 X2 X3 X 1 1 1 1 -.+ ---.

[ A ] U × cosϕ P = P I = --------------------------------. tables Formulea Electric power Power Direct current Single-phase AC Alternating current P = U × I [W] P = U × I × cosϕ [ W ] 3 × U × I × cosϕ [ W ] Current consumption P I = -.865 × F 2 [ N ] 10 10-51 .865 × F 2 [ N ] F 3 = 0.[ A ] 3 × U × cosϕ Mechanical force between 2 parallel conductors 2 conductors with currents I1 and I2 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.2 × I 1 × I 2 × s F 2 = ---------------------------------.808 × F 2 [ N ] F 3 = 0.[ N ] a I1 I2 s a s = Support spacing clearance [cm] a = Support spacing clearance [cm] Mechanical force between 3 parallel conductors 3 conductors with current I F 3 = 0.[ A ] U P I = -------------------. formulae.

[ mm ] z × Δu × U l×P 2 A = ------------------------.× cos ϕ [ V ] z×A ΔU = l×l 3 × -----------.[ mm ] z × Δu × U Single-phase AC Alternating current Known current 2 × l ×l 2 A = ----------------. iron: z = 8.[ W ] z×A×U×U Single-phase AC 2×l×P×P P Verl = ------------------------------------------------------------------.3 --------------2 ) Omm Du = Voltage drop 10-52 .Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Formulea Voltage drop Known power Direct current Single-phase AC Alternating current 2 × l × PΔU = --------------------. aluminium: z = 33. A = Conductor cross section [mm2].× cosϕ [ mm ] z × Δu A = l×l2 3 × --------------. formulae.[ mm ] z × Δu 2 × l ×l 2 A = ----------------.× cos ϕ [ V ] z×A Calculation of cross-section from voltage drop Direct current Known power 2×l×P2 A = ------------------------.[ W ] z × A × U × U × cosv × cosv Alternating current l×P×P P Verl = ------------------------------------------------------------------.[ V ] z×A×U Known current 2×l×l ΔU = ----------------.[ V ] z×A 2×l×l ΔU = ----------------. m z = Conductivity (copper: z = 57.[ V ] z×A×U 2 × l × PΔU = --------------------.[ W ] z × A × U × U × cosv × cosv l = Single length of conductor [m].[ V ] z×A×U l×P ΔU = --------------------.[ mm ] z × Δu × U 2× l×P2 A = ------------------------.× cos ϕ [ mm ] z × Δu 10 Power loss Direct current P Verl 2 × l × P × P= ------------------------------.

[ W ] h Number of poles 2 4 6 8 10 Synchronous speed 3000 1500 Full-load speed 2800 – 2950 1400 – 1470 900 – 985 690 – 735 550 – 585 1000 750 600 10 Synchronous speed = approx.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.× (100 %) P2 P1 P 2 = ---.73) × U × cosv × h P1 = Rated mechanical power at the motor shaft P2 = Electrical power consumption Efficiency P1 h = ---.73) × U × l × cosv × h [ W ] Current consumption P1 l = -----------. no-load speed 10-53 .[ A ] U×h P1 l = -----------------------------.[ A ] U × cosv × h P1 l = ------------------------------------------------. formulae. tables Formulea Power of electric motors Output Direct current Singlephase AC Alternating current P1 = U × l × h [ W ] P 1 = U × l × cosv × h [ W ] P 1 = (1.[ A ] (1.

mA.80665 Nm 0.1 mbar 10 Pa N10 --------2 mm 10 Force Momentum of force Pressure Tension Energy 1 mkp 1 kcal 1 erg 9.33 bar 0. g.0980665 bar 0. mg. ms. mcd Factors for conversion of old units into SI units Conversion factors Size Old unit 1 kp 1 dyn 1 mkp 1 at 1 Atm = 760 Torr 1 Torr 1 mWS 1 mmWS 1 mmWS kp 1 --------2 mm SI unit exact 9.01 bar 1. ms. mmol Mcd.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.80665 N 1·10-5 N 9. mm. pA – Gmol. nA. pm Mg. ns kA. cm. dm.80665 J 4. mA.1868 kJ 1·10-7 J 10 J 4.3332 mbar 0. mg ks. mmol.01325 bar 1. kcd.980665 bar 1. mm.1 bar 0.2 kJ 1·10-7 J 10-54 .0980665 mbar 9.80665 --------2 mm Approximate 10 N 1·10-5 N 10 Nm 1 bar 1. nm. formulae. kmol. tables Standard international units International Unit System (SI) Basic parameters Physical parameters Length Mass Time Electrical current Thermo-dynamic temperature Amount of substance Light intensity Symbol SI basic unit Further related SI units l m t I T n Iv m (Metre) kg (Kilogram) s (Second) A (Ampere) K (Kelvin) mole (Mol) cd (Candela) km.80665 Pa N9. Mmol.

5 ⋅ 10 rad 15. 7 ⋅ 10 pla –3 –3 –3 1 rad 1 rad 10-55 .2 --h 1.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.662 gon Ns 0. formulae.74 kW kJ 4. 980665 ⋅ 10 Ns 0.16 W 0.1 ----2 m Pa ⋅ s 1 ⋅ 10 –4 –5 1.1 Kinetic viscosity Angle (flat) 1 Stokes 1 1 gon 1 1 gon 57.rad 200 2.16 --------2 m K Ns ----2 m – 5 Ns 1 ⋅ 10 ----2 m 1 PS Heat transfer coefficient kcal 1 -------------2 m h°C kcal 1 -------------2 m h°C dynamic viscosity 1 ⋅ 10 –6 1 Poise 1 Poise 0.pla 360 1------.163 W 0. 5 ⋅ 10 pla 17.pla 400 π ------.163 --------2 m K kps ------2 m 0.1868 -----------2 m hK W 1.1 ----2 m m ----s 2 1 ⋅ 10 –4 m ----s –3 2 10 1------. tables Standard international units Conversion factors Size Power Old unit kcal 1 -------h kcal 1 -------h SI unit exact kJ 4.1868 --h Approximate kJ 4. 78 ⋅ 10 pla 2.rad 180 π------.2 ----------2 m hK W 1.73549 kW kJ 4.296 63.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards. tables Standard international units Conversion of SI units.= 1 ----------s s N 2 N 1 --------. heat Power Tension Joule Watt Symbol N Nm bar Pa J W Basic unit kg ⋅ m 1 ⋅ ------------2 s kg ⋅ m 1 ⋅ --------------2 s 5 kg 10 -----------2 m⋅s 2 Conversion of SI units 5 5 N 1 bar = 10 Pa = 10 ----2 m kg 1 ⋅ -----------2 m⋅s kg ⋅ m1 ⋅ --------------2 s kg ⋅ m1 ⋅ --------------3 s 6 kg 10 -----------2 m⋅s 2 1 Pa = 10 bar –5 1 J = 1 Ws = 1 Nm J N⋅m W = 1 .= 10 ------2 2 cm mm 2 N --------2 mm 10 Angle (flat) Degree Gon Radian Full circle Volt Ohm Siemens Coulomb 1 gon rad pla V O S C 360° = 1 pla = 2p rad 400 gon = 360° m 1 --m 1 pla = 2p rad = 360° kg ⋅ m 1 ⋅ --------------3 s ⋅A 2 Voltage Resistor Conductivity Electric charge W 1 V = 1 ⋅ --A V W 1 Ω = 1 ⋅ -. formulae.= 1 ⋅ ---W V 2 kg ⋅ m1 ⋅ --------------3 2 s ⋅A 3 2 2 s ⋅A 1 ⋅ --------------2 kg ⋅ m 1· A · s 10-56 . coherences Conversion of SI units and coherences Size Force Force momentum Pressure SI units name Newton Newtonmetre Bar Pascal Energy.= 1 ⋅ ---2 A A A A1 S = 1 ⋅ -.

= 1 ⋅ --------.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.= 1 ⋅ ----------V W V W 1 --.= 1 ⋅ ---------2 A A A 2 Wb T H Decimal powers (parts and multiples of units) Power 10–18 10–15 10–12 10–9 10–6 10–3 10–2 Prefix Atto Femto Pico Nano Micro Milli Centi Symbol a f p n m m c Power 10–1 10 102 103 106 109 1012 Prefix Deci Deca Hecto Kilo Mega Giga Tera Symbol d da h k M G T 10 10-57 . formulae.= 1 ⋅ ---------2 2 2 m m A m Wb V⋅s W⋅s 1 H = -----. tables Standard international units Conversion of SI units and coherences Size Capacity Field strength Flux Flux density Inductance Weber Tesla Henry SI units name Farad Symbol F V --m Basic unit s ⋅A 1 ⋅ --------------2 kg ⋅ m kg ⋅ m 1 ⋅ ------------3 s ⋅A kg ⋅ m 1 ⋅ --------------2 s ⋅A kg 1 ⋅ ----------2 s ⋅A kg ⋅ m1 ⋅ --------------2 2 s ⋅A 2 2 4 Conversion of SI units C s⋅A 1 F = 1 ⋅ -.= 1 ⋅ --------.= 1 ⋅ ----------m A⋅m W⋅s 1 W b = 1 ⋅ V ⋅ s = 1 ⋅ ---------A Wb V⋅s W⋅s 1 T = -----.

81 kg m/s2 = 10–5 kg m/s2 = 105 dyn = 105 dyn = 105 dyn = 0.981 106 dyn = 1.102 kp = 0.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.102 kp = 0.02 10–5 kp = 1 J/m = 9. tables Standard international units Physical units Obsolete units Mechanical force SI unit: Previous unit: 1N 1 J/m 1 kg m/s2 1 kp 1 dyn Pressure SI unit: Previous unit: 1 Pa 1 Pa 1 bar 1 at 1 atm 1 Torr = 1 N/m2 = = 10–5 105 bar Pa (Pascal) bar (Bar) at = kp/cm2 = 10 m Ws Torr = mm Hg atm = 10–5 bar = 10.987 at = 0.3 Pa 10-58 .981 bar = 1.033 at = 1.102 kp = 9.2 · 10–6 at = 1.316 · 10–3 atm = 1 J/m =1N =1N = 9.359 · 10–3 at = 7.5 · 10–3 Torr = 750 Torr = 736 Torr = 760 Torr = 1.81 N = 10–5 N N (Newton) J/m (Joule/m) kp (kilopond) dyn (Dyn) = 1 kg m/s2 = 1 kg m/s2 = 0.333 · 10–3 bar = 9.1 · 103 Pa = 101. formulae.968 at = 1.013 bar = 1.81 J/m = 10–5 J/m 10 Pa = 98.3 · 103 Pa = 133.87 · 10–6 at = 0.02 at = 0.

19 W = 1 Nm/s = 0.102 kpm = 367 · 106 kpm = 0.102 kpm/s = 102 kpm/s = 9.81 Ws = 4.) = cal/h · 106 kpm/s (Kilopondmetre/Sec.427 kpm/s = 860 cal/h = 860 ·103 cal/h = 8.) PS (metric horsepower) 1W 1W 1 kW 1 kpm/s 1 PS 1 kcal/h 1 cal/s = 1 J/s = 10–3 kW = 103 W = 9.) = cal/s · 103 kcal/h (Kilocalorie/hour.19 · 103 J = 0.16 W = 4.16 · 10–3 kW = 4.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.81 W = 736 W = 1.8 · 10–3 cal/s = 3.239 cal = 2.16 · 10–3 kWh J (Joule) Nm (Newtonmeter) Ws (Wattsecond) kWh (Kilowatthour) kcal (Kilocalorie) = cal · 10–3 107 erg =1J = 3.6 kcal/h 10 10-59 .239 cal/s = 239 cal/s = 2.19 · 103 Ws Power SI unit: SI unit: (as before) Previous unit: Nm/s (Newtonmetre/s) J/s (Joule/s) W (Watt) kW (Kilowatt) kcal/s (Kilocalorie/sec.81 J = 4.19 · 103 Nm = 0.736 kW = 1.69 · 10–3 PS = 0.6 · 106 J =1J = 1 Nm = 9. tables Standard international units Work SI unit: SI unit: (as before) Previous unit: 1 Ws 1 Ws 1 kWh 1 Nm 1J 1 kpm 1 kcal =1J = 278 · 10–9 kWh = 1 Nm = 1 Nm = 3.36 ·10–3 PS = 1.36 PS = 13.81 · 10–3 kW = 0. formulae.34 cal = 427 kpm = 3.34 cal/s = 176 cal/s = 277.43 ·103 cal/h = 632 · 103 cal/h = 1.19 · 10–3 kW = 1.239 cal = 860 kcal = 0.102 kpm = 9.58 ·10–3 PS = 5.81 Nm = 4.6 · 106 Ws = 1 Ws = 1 Ws = 9.6 · 106 Nm = 278 · 10–9 kWh = 278 · 10–9 kWh = 272 · 10–6 kWh = 1.102 kpm = 0.239 cal = 0.3 ·10–3 PS = 75 kpm/s = 119 · 10–3 kpm/s = 0.

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.01 mWb Wb (Weber) mWb (Microweber) M = Maxwell 10 1M = 10–8 Wb Magnetic flux density SI unit: Previous unit: 1T 1T 1 mT 1G = 1 Wb/m2 = 103 mT = 10–3 T = 0. 0796 ----m 1 Oe Magnetic field strength SI unit Previous unit: 1 Wb 1 Wb 1 mWb = 1 Tm2 = 106 mWb = 10–6 Wb = 108 M = 100 M = 0.56 Oe kA = 0. 6 --m A --m Ampere ---------------Meter Oe = (Oerstedt) = 0.1–3 T = 104 G = 10 G = 0.1 mT T (Tesla) mT (Millitesla) G = Gauss 10-60 . formulae. tables Standard international units Magnetic field strength SI unit: Previous unit: A 1 --m kA 1 ----m kA = 0.01256 Oe = 12. 001 ----m A = 1000 --m A = 79.

80 1 sq.897 ·103 ft 1 -s 0.80 ·10–6 m --s Pressure bar Energy.1383 ft 1 ------min 5.9144 1 cwt (UK) long cwt 50.5144 1 --------.852 · 103 1 ounce 28.yd 0.35 ·10–3 1 sq.609 ·103 1 ton (US) short ton 907.ft 92.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.6452 · 10–3 1 cu.448 mile 1 -------h 0.90 · 10–3 1 cu.ft 28.86 · 10-3 1 BTU 1.8361 1 cu.047 · 103 1 gal (US) 3.684 ·106 lb sq. formulae.2 1 acre 4.32 · 10–3 1 ton (UK) long ton 9.89 · 10-3 1 PCU 1.in 16.3048 1 mile Land mile 1.mile 2.in 0.055 · 103 1 ft H2O 29.yd 0.90 · 103 1 in H2O 2.447 1 ft 0.546 · 10–3 1 grain 64.7646 1 ton (US) short ton 8.491 · 10-3 10 10-61 .785 · 10–3 1 pdl (poundal) 0.964 ·103 1 knot 1 yd 0. tables Standard international units Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units Length m Weight kg Area m2 Volume m3 Force N Speed 1 in 25.39 · 10–6 1 lb 4.95 · 10-3 1 HPh 2.590 · 103 1 gal (UK) 4.in 1 in Hg 33.080 ·10–3 1 mile Sea mile 1.4 · 10 –3 1 lb 0.1 psi 65. Work J 0.4536 1 sq.3048 1 ton (UK) long ton 1016 1 sq.

196 sq.6214 mile (land mile) 1t 0.2248 lb Speed 1 m/s 3.2808 ft 1 kg 35.3861 sq.3725 · 10–6 HPh 1m 3.50 psi Energy.1003 · (UK) 1 m/s 196.in Force 1N 0.27 ounce 1 m2 10.3937 in Weight 1g 15.2046 lb.9842 long ton 1 m2 0.97 gal (UK) 1N 7.308 cu.53 in Hg 1J 0. tables Standard international units Conversion of Imperial/American units into SI units Length 1 cm 0. Work 1J 0.43 grain Area 1cm2 0.7639 sq.yd 1 m3 1.155 sq.944 knots 1 bar 33.237 mph 1 bar 401.44 in H2O 1J 0.45 ft H2O 1m 1.5399 mile (sea mile) 1t 1. 1 m2 1.2808 ft/s Pressure 1 bar 14.mile 1 m3 219.1023 short ton 1 km2 0.ft 1N 0.08 ft/min 1 bar 29.in Volume 1cm3 0.2 gal (US) 1 km 0.ft 1l 0.5263 · 10–3 PCU short 1 km 0.2306 pdl (poundal) 10 10-62 .0936 yd 1 kg 2. formulae.Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Standards.06102 cu.1123 · ton (US) 10–3 1 m/s 2.03531 cu.2471 · 10–3 acre 1 m3 264.yd 1N 0.9478 · 10–3 BTU 10–3 long ton 1 m/s 1.

................ 5-35 PKZM0.... 8-94 Auxiliary contact module .................................................................................................. 6-4 Overload relay ............................................... 7-6 Trip-indicating .......................................... 7-7 PKZM01.............................. 3-10 Rotary switches...... 5-39 Overload relays ........... 8-14 Example resistors ................. trip-indicating ........................... star ........................................... PKZM4 ... 7-20 Accessories contactors .................................. 6-7 Standard.......................................................................................................................................................................... easy ................................................. 2-84 Break-Down Service ......1-54…1-59 Bimetal Motor protection .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6 AS-Interface® data bus ....................................... 2-89 Asynchronous motor ........................................................................... 8-91 Example starting transformer . easy .......................................................... 8-59 Braking resistance ............................... switch-disconnectors ................ 1-31 Approval authorities worldwide .............. 7-3 Analog inputs................... 5-35 Braking oversynchronous ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6 B Basic circuits Delta............................................... 5-2 Auxiliary switch PKZ2 ....... 5-30 Air circuit-breakers ..........1-23…1-26 Analog output. 2-2 ATEX approval ........................... 4-17 Thermistor relay for machine protection EMT6 .......................................................................................................................................... 8-13 Motor-protective circuit-breakers ................................................................ 2-4 easy ............. 6-4 RMQ-Titan . 5-45 Automatic stator starters Engineering starting resistor ............................ 6-17 Auxiliary switches Early make .......................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index A AC/DC sensitive .................................. PKZM0............................. 8-14 Engineering starting transformer .............. PKZM4 ............ 8-12 Motor protection system ZEV ........................................................ 3-10 EMT6 ............ 0-9 11 11-1 .................................................................................................

........................................7-2 11-2 11 ...................................................................0-22 C Cables .............................7-15 Transformer switches ..........8-26 Busbar system .....................................................2-17 Coil functions .................................................................................... 2-pole ...8-16 Capacitor group compensation ........................................................10-43 Cage Clamp ............................7-11 Classification types of soft starters ....................... use of reactors ..................8-19 Circuit examples Bridging during starting ......................................................8-25 Circuit for overload relay 1-pole....................................................................1-52 Coils ......................................................................................8-17 Single.................................4-13 Changeover switch Ammeter .......................................5-6 Circuit diagram Internal circuit diagrams Circuit-breaker ............................8-5 Circuit-breaker Internal circuit diagrams .............................................................4-12 Voltmeter ..............................................................................................7-17 Remote operation with motor operator .......................................................................................................4-12 Changeover switches ..............................................................................................7-19 Circuit-breaker remote switching .................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Bridging during starting Heavy starting duty ...............................8-17 Cascade control ....................................................................................................................8-26 Contactors DIL .................................................................................................................8-9 Overload relays ...........................................................1-56 Changeover contact Wattmeter .......................................................................7-8 Circuit documents general ...1-47 Compact circuit-breakers ............... group compensation .........................7-8 Meshed network circuit-breakers ..................7-18 Residual current device ..................................................................... 1-39…1-41 Capacitor Central compensation.............................................................................................................7-20 Switch position .........................................................8-18 Circuit documents wiring diagram ...............2-52 Changeover circuit ..............................................................................1-50 COM-LINK connection ................8-10 Motor contactor ................5-31 CANopen ..........4-5 Circuit diagram auxiliary protection ..

............................................................................................2-82…2-87 Connection RA-MO to AS-Interface® ........................ 2-95 Contact module PKZ2 .......................................................................... marking ..................................................................... 1-68 Compensated motor ........... 8-102 Contactor relays circuit diagrams ...................................................................................................................... 1-6 Current transformer-operated overload relays ZW7 .................... 5-3 Contactor................... DV51 .............................................................. 5-32 DILM .....................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Compact PLC............................................................................. PKZM4 .............................................................................................................. 5-46 Contactor for capacitor .................................................. 8-8 11 11-3 .................................. 8-8 Core-balance transformer ............................................2-37…2-39 DV6 .... 5-31 Overview .......................... 6-5 Current limiter PKZ2 .................... 3-2 Control circuit supply motor ................................... 8-24 Contactors DC operated ........................2-80…2-81 DM4 ............................ 1-12 Co-ordination type motor protection .. 1-12 Control relays a easyRelays ............ 5-6 Contactor relays reference letters . 6-5 Current monitoring relays .................................................................................................................................................... 1-50 Control circuit devices For direct-on-line start ............................... 6-28 a Current limiters PKZM0......................................2-74…2-79 DF6 . 2-92 Connection RA-SP to AS-Interface® .............................................................................2-56…2-69 DS4 ........................................................8-69…8-73 For star-delta ............................................................................................................................................ PKZM4 ............. 5-10 Contacts ........5-24…5-25 SmartWire ........................................................................... 6-28 Current limiter PKZM0................................................................... 2-55 DS6 .................................................................................................. 6-13 Contact protection relay .................................. 5-38 Current Limiter a Current limiter PKZ2 ............................ PS4 ............................................. 8-51 RMQ ....................................................................... 1-54 Overview ................... 8-37 For multi-speed contactors ...................... 8-11 Connecting examples DF51................................................... 8-23 Control relays Basic circuits ..........................................................................................

.......................................................................8-5 Degrees of protection for electrical equipment ...1-49 easy outputs ...........2-4 Digital inputs............................2-78 Delta connection ...................................................................... 1-34…1-38 easyRelay ....1-12 easy expansion .................................................................10-28 Delta circuit.......1-20 easy printer connection ......................................................................................................6-4 11-4 11 ......................5-35 PKZM0..................5-31 Drives engineering basics .................1-48 easy remote expansion .........................1-42 easy inputs .................. MFD Analog ...................................................6-3 Disconnect Control Unit ............................ 1-28…1-31 easy power supply .......................................................................................................2-5 With bypass .............................................................................................1-12 EEx e motors Overload relays ....1-21 DC devices ...... motor ............................................1-23 easy local expansion ......................7-22 easy .....................................................................................................2-91 DOL starters Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. PKZM4 ....................................................1-32 easy modem operation ......................... 1-12…1-19 easyControl ....................................... easy AC devices .........1-16 easyHMI ....................................2-7 E Early-make auxiliary switches ..................................................................7-7 Earth-leakage circuit-breaker ............................ 1-21…1-27 easy inputs.................................................................2-30 Double-frame terminal .......................................................................................................1-14 easyNet ..5-12 Three-phase asynchronous motors ..... 0-11…0-13 DC motors ...............1-32 easy system overview ................................1-22 Direct-on-line starter Motor-protective circuit-breakers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-10 SmartWire .................................... 1-32…1-43 easy expansion units for networking ............................................................................................................................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index D Darwin .........................................................................................

................................... 2-21 EMC measures frequency inverters ................................................................ 6-4 Electrical isolation ................ XC200 ....................... 1-18 Fuseless................. 1-6 Encoder ..................................................................................................................... 2-22 Emergency-Stop function ............................... 1-75 Switching of capacitors ................. 0-8 Electronic safety relays ....... 2-70 FU a Frequency inverter ...................................................................................................... 8-16 Three-phase automatic starters ... 8-29 G German Trade Association ...... off position interlock ..... LE4 ................ 1-27 Frequency inverters........................................................................................................................................................... 1-46 Explosive atmospheres ....... 5-4 Frequency generators ............. features .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2 Electronic Catalogue . 5-38 Fault indication......... 1-79 Ethernet module .................................................................. 2-84 Engineering easy ........................................................ 0-21 Free-wheel diode suppressor ...........................................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Electrical connector ................... 1-10 Electronic timing relays .............................. 2-89 Floor-standing enclosure ..... 1-2 EMC compliant connection ............ 6-10 Flat band conductor ....................................................................................... 1-10 11-5 11 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-50 Functions easy ... 1-78 Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17 F Fault current ............................. 8-14 XC100.......................... 3-22 Graphic operator panel ........... 8-16 Group protection Motor-protective circuit-breakers .. 7-12 EMR4 measuring and monitoring relays .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6 H Hamburg circuit........................ Reversing contactor DIUL .............. differential ............................................. 1-72 Group compensation ..................... 8-110 Hazard reduction ...........1-20…1-49 EM4..................................... 2-7 Function blocks ..................8-14…8-17 PS4 ......................

........................................1-70 11 11-6 ..........................................................................................................................4-14 Heavy starting duty Bridging during starting .8-111 Maintenance switches..........5-32 Mesh network circuit-breaker ....6-18 High-speed counter ......................................................2-91 Level monitoring relay ......................................................................8-24 Master switch................................................................. off position interlock .................................8-16 In-line circuit .1-57 Incremental encoders .................4-4 Markings.................................................................................................................................................................................7-12 Main transfer switch ......................................5-34 Modular PLC ...1-27 HMI systems .............................................................................1-72 Housing ...................................................................................................... 0-18........................................................................4-11 IZM terminal assignment ...8-111 Mechanical interlock ........................................................................2-35 Insulation monitoring relays ........................................................................................................ rotary switches ..................4-4 Low-voltage switchgear systems ......................................8-27 Motor protection .................................1-7 Load-shedding contact ..................................................................... 0-21 I Impulse relays ...7-15 Individual compensation .........8-8 High-capacity compact starters ................................................... XC100/XC200 RS .......................................7-17 MFD-Titan .......................................7-26 L Labeleditor ..........................................3-9 Let-through energy .........................................................................................................................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Heater switches ............................................1-12 Mirror contact ..........................................................................................................................8-10 Example ..... rotary switches ...... contactor ......................0-14 M Main switches ......................................................................................1-8 Interface assignment........................................1-80 Interlock circuits.....................................1-27 In-delta circuit ............................2-35 Indication of tripping circuit-breaker ............

....................... 8-37 Control circuit supply ....................................... 1-6 Motor Circuit documents ................................................................................................................... 6-9….......................................... 10-40 Motor operator circuit-breaker ........................... 6-1 11-7 11 .......... 8-100…8-103 Switching on three-phase motors .........................8-53…8-55 Power supply ............................ 2-92 Motor feeder ................................... 8-53 Motor connection . 0-8 Field Service ......... 0-14 Support Portal ................... 8-20 Motor protection ............. 8-59 Pole-changing ........................ 0-4 Electronic Catalogue .........................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Moeller ................................... 8-23 Engineering ................................................................ 5-31 Motor windings .............8-14…8-17 Mains changeover ............................8-25…8-32 Tapped winding .............................................. 8-18 Control circuit devices for direct-on-line start ......................................................................................................................................................................................8-3…8-13 Motor protection system ZEV ............................. 6-5 Operating principle schematics PKZ2 ............................................ 8-56 Motor-protective circuit-breaker Operating principle schematics PKZM01.......... PKZM0..... PKZM4 6-9 Motor-protective circuit-breakers For starter combinations .... 7-18 Motor overload relay.......................6-18…6-29 Operating principle schematics PKZM01......8-38…8-47 Star-delta with PKZ2 ............................................... PKZM0...................... 8-20 Separate windings ......................................................................................... 8-53 Star-delta of three-phase motors ...................... 2-2 Motor full-load current ............. motor protection ............................................................................................................................... 0-4 Monitoring relays .......................................................... 8-111 Motor windings .............................. 6-11 Motor-protective circuit-breakers.. 5-35 Motor power supply ..........5-38…5-44 Motor rating ................................................................................................................... 8-89 Multi-speed contactors ............................ overview ................................... 2-95 Motor Control Unit ............ 0-9 Low-voltage switchgear systems ......................... 8-56 Multi speed switch PKZ2 ............................................................................................8-48…8-50 Starting with PKZ2 .........................8-33…8-36 Switching of capacitors ..... PKZM4 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........1-74 Networking easy .........................................8-25 Overload protection..............................................................................................2-90 Overload relay Tripping ......8-24 N Negation .10-50 Operands ...............................................................8-89 Multi-speed switches Rotary switches .......................... 6-18…6-29 Operating principle schematics PKZM01..........8-74 Multi-speed switch Bridging during starting ....1-50 Operating frequency .............................................8-59 Control circuit devices .............8-10 Multi-speed switch for three-phase motors Star-delta ....................8-4 Overload relay a Motor protection overload relay ............................................................................................5-35 11-8 11 ..............4-7 Multi-speed switching............................................................................. PKZM4 6-9… 6-11 Overload motor ..............1-12 Multi-function display a easyHMI ..........................................6-4 SmartWire ................. Rapid Link ..........................................1-14 Multi-speed contactors ..................... 8-69…8-73 Star-delta ............. 1-32…1-43 Networking PS40 and XC series ...........................................................................8-111 Ohm's Law ...................................................................................... 8-61…8-68 Multi-speed switch with PKZ2 ................1-73 O Off-delayed undervoltage release ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-4 Operating principle schematic PKZ2 ...............................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Motor-starter combination MSC ......8-110 Off-postion interlock Hamburg circuit ......5-38 Overload motor-protective circuit-breaker ..............6-2 Overload protection contactor .............................................. marking .....................................................7-5 Off-position interlock Loads .......................................................................8-110 Master switch ........1-54 Networking display and operating devices ................................................................................................................................................. 8-74…8-88 Multi-speed switch of three-phase motors ... PKZM0.................5-10 Multi-function display Overview ..................................

...... 10-5 Proximity switches ............................................................................... 5-39 Programming easy ............ 8-106 Two pumps ................................................................... 8-100 11 11-9 ............ 8-59 Overvoltage ................................... 2-57 In delta circuit ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-47 Pole-changing motors ....................... 8-6 Overload relays ................ 8-39 In motor circuit..................................................................................................................... 2-7 Process protection ................................. 8-12 Pump control .................. 6-12 Overload relay function PKZ2 ........................................................................................... motor protection . 8-108 Pressure switches ............................. 1-55 Permanent contact ............................. 1-7 Phase-failure sensitivity ........................ 8-38 Oversynchronous braking ... Thermistor machine protection relay .................................. 5-38 Phase imbalance relay ............................................................................... 2-89 Power electronics .. 1-7 Phase monitoring relays .............................. 2-50 Float switches ............... 2-57 P Parallel circuit .................................................................................................................... 3-21 Phase failure ............................... 1-57 Personnel protection Enhanced ........................................................ 8-69 Push-through sensor ZEV ......................................... in mains line ..................................... 6-29 Overload relay time-delayed .............................................................. 1-6 Phase sequence relays ..................... 5-39 Q Quick-discharge resistor ..............................................................................................3-27…3-31 Pt100/Ni1000 inputs........1-50…1-66 Protective measures ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... easy ..............................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Overload relay function .......................................................... 8-104 Pushbutton control circuit devices ......................................... 1-26 PTC Thermistor......... 5-35 Point-to-point connection ......................................................... 3-17 LS ...................................... 5-45 PTC-Thermistor......... 3-16 LSR ......................8-53…8-55 Power bus ............................................ 3-19 Programmable contacts ......................................................

.....................7-18 Remote operator PKZ2 ........................................2-65 Rotary switches ATEX approval ......2-45 Reversing star-delta 2 directions of rotation ...................5-12 Soft starters .................6-25 Remote switch off PKZM01.........................................................................................4-14 Interlock circuits ..................................................4-15 Use...................... reflected-light beam .....................................4-6 Step switches ................................................................................................................5-3 Reflected-light barrier...................................................................... 1-10........................................................................................5-44 Root -3 circuit ....4-12 Multi speed switches ................................................... PKZM4 ......................................................................................4-6 Reversing starter Motor-protective circuit-breakers ...............................................6-14 Remote switch off PKZ2 ..................................................................8-29 Reversing contactor ..........................................................................................8-29 Reversing soft starter .................................................................4-11 Main switch.......8-46 Rotary switches .................. reversing switches ............................. reversing star-delta ........................................ 10-26 Rogowski principle .....4-5 Risk reduction .................8-4 Reference letter contactor relays .....7-20 Residual-current protection relays ....................4-5 Heater switches ...1-28 Remote display .................... easy ..............................................................................................................................................2-88 RC suppressor ..............................8-45 Direction change ..............................................................7-22 Residual-current release circuit-breaker .............................................................................................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index R Rapid Link ...........4-7 Speed switching ............2-30 Reversing switches ...........6-11 Residual-current protection .....4-3 Meter selector switches ..................................................................................5-38 Rogowski sensor . mounting forms ......................................7-20 Reversing combination a Reversing contactor .....................1-44 Remote operator circuit-breaker .........................5-4 Reclosing lockout .................................................................................................................................... maintenance switch ......................................................................4-2 11-10 11 ......................................4-18 Changeover switches......8-59 Star-delta.....................3-29 Relay outputs............................ PKZM0.........................................................................................................6-3 SmartWire ............................................

.................................................................................................................. 0-22 Screening measures ........................................................... 8-53 Separation galvanic ...............2-23…2-25 Sealing power .......................................... 7-4 Circuit-breakers .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-96 11 11-11 ............................................... PKZM4 ...................................................................................................................................... 8-14 Properties of slipring rotor ............. 8-5 Single-phasing sensitive .................................................................................. 1-55 Shift register ..8-65…8-68 Speeds ...................................................... RA-MO .............. maximum .... 5-19 Safety of machines ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2 Series circuit ...................... 8-15 Slipring rotor ............................................. 7-16 Self-latching .................................................................... 1-10 Safety position switches ...................................................................................... 5-43 Short-circuit protection .............................................................................. 2-7 Sensor belt ZEV ........................ 8-12 S Safety category .................................................................................................................................. 8-96 Rotor-critical motors .. 6-4 Shunt releases Circuit-breaker remote tripping ......................... 6-4 SL signal towers .............. 1-56 Semiconductor contactors .. PKZM0.. 6-16 Remote switch-off ........................................ 3-15 Safety relays ........................... 8-7 Short-circuit releases ............................................ 1-63 Short-circuit current....................... 2-91 Short-circuit monitoring ................................. 3-11 Slipring rotor a Rotor automatic starter ................................. 2-90 Short-circuit rating ..................... 6-8 Remote switch off PKZ2 .............. 6-25 PKZM01............................................................... 8-25 Short-circuit protection................................................ 1-10 Safety technology ............................................. 7-11 Single phase motors ............................................................................................ 7-19 Operating principle schematics PKZ2 .....................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Rotor automatic starter Engineering starting resistor ............................... 5-31 Selectivity a time selectivity ............................................................................ 1-10 SASY60 ............................................................................... 5-39 Separate windings Multi speed switch ........

..............2-13 Features ...........................................................5-4 Suppressor circuit integrated................. with overload relays ................8-15 Support Portal ..............................................................................2-17 DM4 ................................................................... 5-8…5-23 Soft starters .... mounting forms ..................... DS6 ...................................5-31 Stairwell lighting ......5-10 System ...............................8-53 Spring-loaded terminal .....7-15 Standard auxiliary switch ............................................................... pluggable ...2-5 Three-phase motors ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-15 Switch-disconnectors Use....2-12 Soft starting a Soft starters ..6-17 Star connection ........................................................2-7 Special purpose relays ......................................2-95 Speeds......................................................... 8-40…8-44 Three-phase asynchronous motors .....................................................................2-29 Examples .8-38 Starting with PKZ2 .......................................................................................... 8-48…8-50 Star-delta starters.................................. 8-38…8-47 With PKZ2 ........................................................... 8-33…8-36 Stator automatic starters Properties of squirrel cage rotor ............................................7-6 PKZ2 .............................................................................................1-43 Gateway PROFIBUS-DP ..............................................4-6 SDAINL ..........................................................................8-9 easy ...................................2-79 Star-delta Bridging during starting .........0-5 Suppressor circuit ...................................................................................................................................................2-4 Star connection.....8-24 Motor start ...........................................2-33 DS4.........................................................................................................2-7 Classification types ....................................................................................................................................................5-9 Modules ...............................................1-60 Standard auxiliary contact.....................2-11 Multi-speed contactors ........................................................4-4 Switch position indication circuit-breaker ............. ON-OFF indication .........................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index SmartWire Gateway easyNet/CANopen .....4-18 11-12 11 ................................................4-2 Switch-disconnectors with ATEX approval ................................................................................................1-2 Speed Control Unit ......................................................5-31 Switch position indication .................8-74 Rotary switches ............. separate windings ..............1-58 Marking ............................................................................................................. motor ......

.... 6-4 Temperature monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-54 Temperature compensated ... 5-45 Thermistor protection ....................................................... 8-55 Marking . on-delayed .................................................. 6-17 Trip-indicating auxiliary contacts PKZM01.................................8-91…8-95 Three-phase current-automatic stator starters ........................... 8-12 Test authorities and approval stamps . 1-72 Thermal overload relays .......... 8-31 Four speeds ..................................... 7-16 Timing relay...... 1-57 Timing relays...Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index Switching of capacitors ..........................8-25…8-32 System Range xEnergy ............................................... 1-65 Text operator panel .......... 5-40 Tripping characteristics Overload relays ................................. 8-24 Multi speed switch ........... 5-35 Thermistor .........................................................................................................8-96…8-99 Three-phase automatic starters .................... 0-14 System-protective circuit-breakers ......... 6-7 Tripping characteristics motor protection system .......... 8-12 Thermistor motor protection .... 8-10 Feed drive ................................... 7-6 Trip-indicating auxiliary contact PKZ2 ........ PKZM4 ........ 8-53 Rotary switches .................... 6-5 Trip-indicating auxiliary contact circuit-breaker ............................ 6-2 T Tapped winding ..............................8-61…8-68 Three-phase motors star-delta Multi speed switch ....................... 9-10 Text display................................. functions ........................................................................................8-61…8-64 Multi speed switch star-delta ......................... 2-2 Three-phase automatic rotor starters .............................................. 1-2 Transformer switch circuit-breaker ................8-74…8-88 Time selectivity circuit-breaker ................................................................. PKZM0..................... easy .............................. 8-14 Three-phase automatic stator starters ......... 5-36 Tripping CLASS .................................. 7-19 Transformer-protective circuit-breaker .............................................................................................................. 8-100…8-103 Switching on three-phase motors ........................................................... 5-38 11-13 11 .......................................................................................8-74…8-88 Pole-changing motors ........................................................... 5-42 Thermistor overload relay for machine protection EMT6 ...................4-7…4-10 Three speeds .................................................................................................................. 5-42 Three-phase asynchronous motor ........................... 8-91 Three-phase motors Multi speed switch .......................................................................................................

............................7-19 Interlocking of multiple switches ..............................6-16 PKZM01.......................................................... motor starters ..0-14 XSoft ...................................................7-13 Use or reactor capacitor ....................... 1-75…1-77 X xEnergy .................. PKZM4 ......................0-18 Wiring examples for PS4 ................................................7-14 Off-delayed ................................................................................................7-11 Shunt releases .....................................6-8 Remote switch-off ......................7-11 Starting interlock ...................1-71 Z ZEV motor protection system .....................................................................7-13 Switch-off ............................................................................................Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Index U U/f inverters a Frequency inverters ..................................................................................10-34 Utilisation categories for switch-disconnectors ..................7-5 PKZ2 ...............................................................................7-5 PKZ2 ..................................................................... PKZM4 ...............................7-4 Starting interlock Undervoltage releases .................7-5 W Wall-mounting distribution system .....................6-8 Remote switch-off ..................... 5-38…5-44 11 11-14 ............................................................................................ PKZM0..... easyHMI ....................................................2-70 Visualisation.........................0-21 Wall-mounting enclosure ..............................................................................5-4 Vector control ...............8-17 Utilisation categories contactors......................5-38 Undervoltage release Circuit-breakers ...1-66 Voltage releases Interlock with undervoltage releases .......7-13 Undervoltage releases .................................................................................................... PKZM0.....................................................2-7 Unbalanced current consumtion ................................................................................................................7-14 Off-delayed undervoltage release .........10-38 V Varistor suppressor ..................................................6-16 PKZM01..........

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 11 11-15 .

Moeller Wiring Manual 02/08 Notes 11 11-16 .

Moeller addresses worldwide: www.moeller.eaton. en) Tel.net Internet: www.: 119816 Eaton’s electrical business is a global leader in electrical control.net Internet: www.moeller. provide customer-driven PowerChain Management® solutions to serve the power system needs of the industrial. MEM®. +49(0)228 602-3640 Fax +49(0)228 602-61400 E-Mail: fieldservice@moeller. Santak and Moeller. institutional. Hotline +49(0)180 5 228322 (de. commercial. including Cutler-Hammer®. government.net/fieldservice .net/address E-mail: info@moeller. uninterruptible power supply and industrial automation products and services. Germany Subject to alterations FB0200-004EN_(02/08) ip/Ins/CPI Printed in Germany (11/08) Article No.com Issued by Moeller GmbH Hein-Moeller-Str. IT.com For service issues please contact your Moeller representative or the Moeller Field Service. Powerware®. mission critical and OEM markets worldwide. Holec®. utility. power distribution. 7-11 D-53115 Bonn © 2008 by Moeller GmbH. MGE Office Protection Systems™.net www. www.moeller. Eaton’s global electrical brands. residential.eaton.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful